Full text of "The Canadian field-naturalist"

See other formats

HARVARD UNIVERSITY

LIBRARY

OF THE

Museum of Comparative Zoology

/- ^

The CANADIAN
FIELD'NATURALIST

Volume 78
1964

f . ( '-

THE OTTAWA FIELD-NATURALISTS' CLUB
Ottawa Ontario

MUS. COMP. ZOOL
LIBRARY

im 2 6 1964

HARVARD
UNIVERSITY,

The CANADIAN
FIELD-NATURALIST

PubUshed by THE OTTAWA FIELD-NATURALISTS' CLUB, Ottawa, Ontario

Articles

Bird and Mammal Observations at Hazen Camp, Northern EUesmere Island, in 1962

D. B. O. Savile and D. R. Oliver 1

Pseudofossils near Old Chelsea, Quebec Donald D. Hogarth 8

Birds of Kleena Kleene, Chilcotin District, B.C., 1959-1962 W. Adrian B. Paul 13

Territoriality among Wintering Snowy Owls Lloyd B. KLeith 17
Spring and Summer Phenology at Baker Lake, Keewatin, N.W.T., during 1959-62

Charles J. Krebs 25
A Distributional Summary and some Behavioral Notes for Smith's Longspur,

Calcarius pictus Emerson Kemsies and Worth RA>nDLE 28
Flower Variation of Epilobium angustifolium L. growing over Uranium Deposits

Hansford T. Shacklette 32

An Extension in the Breeding Range of Brewer's Blackbird in Ontario O. E. Devitt 42

Report of Council 47

Statement of Financial Standing 51

Reviews 52

Never Cry Wolf — Wildlife's Ten-Year Cycle — The Birds — Principles in Mammalogy — The
Monarch of Mularchy Mountain — A Sharing of Joy

Notes

Common Egrets Nesting near Amherstburg, Ontario Winnifred Smith 59

A Breeding Record for the Bobolink in Prince Edward Island Stanley E. Vass 60

A Spadefoot Toad from Manitoba Franos R. Co6k and David R. M. Hatch 60

A Weevil in the Ear of a Child at London, Ontario William W. Jxtod 61

Mass Mortality of Gulls at Rondeau Park, Lake Erie Douglas D. Dow and M. Anne Daw 62

Three New Bird Records for Prince Edward Island Willett J. Mills 62

An Eastern Spiny Soft-shelled Turde from Quebec Province Joseph Lovrity and Norris Denman 63
Breeding Record for the Bufflehead West of the Coast Range in British Columbia

David A. Hancock 64
A Northern Range Extension for Bufo americanus with Notes on B. americanus and Rana sylvatica

Franos R. Cook 6S

Can. Field Nat.

Vol. 78

No. 1

p. 1^6

Ottawa, January-March 1964

THE OTTAWA FIELD-NATURALISTS' CLUB

Founded in 1879

— Patrons —
Their Excellencies The Governor General and Madame Vanier

The objects of the club are to foster an acquaintance with and a love of nature, to
encourage investigation and to publish the results of original research and observations
in all branches of natural history.

The club is a corporate member of the Federation of Ontario Naturalists and is
affiliated vi^ith the American Association for the Advancement of Science.

MEMBERS OF COUNCIL

President: George H. McGee, 2052 Woodcrest Road, Ottawa 8, Ontario

First Vice-President: W. Winston Mair

Second Vice-President: G. R. Hanes

Secretary: A. W. Rathwell, Canadian Wildlife Service, Norlite Building,

150 Wellington St., Ottawa 4, Ontario
Treasurer: Miss Anne Banning, Box 4099, Postal Station E, Ottawa, Ontario
Additional Members of Council: Mrs. F. R. Cook, Miss L. Kingston, Mrs. D. A. Smith,
Miss M. Stuart; Messrs. W. K. W. Baldwin, A. W. F. Banfield, D. R. Beckett, E. L.
Bousfield, C. G. Champ, A. H. Clarke, Jr., W. J. Cody, F. R. Cook, R. Frith, J. M.
Gillett, H. Groh, J. W. Groves, D. D. Hogarth, P. H. Jones, E. L. Leese, H. Lloyd,
H. N. Mackenzie, A. E. Porsild, F. H. Schultz, K. R. Scobie, D. A. Smith, V. E. F.
SoLMAN and G. Tessier.
Auditors: J. M. Gillett and R. J. Moore

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

Editor: Francis R. Cook Bumess Manager: W. J. Cody

National Museum of Canada, Ottawa, Ontario Central Experimental Farm, Ottawa, Ont.

Associate Editors: F. J. Alcock (Geology), John W. Arnold (Entomology), W. A. Bell
(Paleontology), J. Sherman Bleakney (Herpetology), Arthur H. Clarke, Jr.
(Malacology), William G. Dore (Botany), J. R. Dymond (Ichthyology), W. Earl
Godfrey (Ornithology), A. G. Huntsman (Marine Biology), Phillip M. Youngman
(Mammalogy).

The Canadian Field-Naturalist is published quarterly by the Ottawa Field-Naturalists'
Club with assistance of the affiUated societies listed on the inside back cover. Manuscripts
representing personal observations or the results of original research in any branch of na-
tural history are invited. In the preparation of papers authors should consult the most
recent issue and the information for contributors on the inside back cover. Advertising
rates and prices of back numbers of this journal and its predecessors, TRANSACTIONS
OF THE OTTAWA FIELD-NATURALISTS' CLUB, 1879-1886, and the OTTAWA
NATURALIST, 1887-1919, are obtainable from the business manager.

MEMBERSHIP AND SUBSCRIPTION

The annual membership fee of |5 covers subscription to the journal. Institutions,
however may subscribe at the same rate as that for membership. Single current numbers
of regular issues are $1.50. A money order should be made payable to the Ottawa Field-
Naturalists' Club and sent to the treasurer. Notice of change of address should also be
sent to the treasurer.

Autiborized as second-class mail by the Post Office Department at Ottawa, Ontario

The Canadian Field'Naturalist

Volume 78 JANUARY-MARCH 1964 Number 1

BIRD AND MAMMAL OBSERVATIONS AT HAZEN CAMP,
NORTHERN ELLESMERE ISLAND, IN 1962*

D. B. O. Savile and D. R. Oliver

Plant Research Institute and Entomology Research Institute, Research Branch,

Canada Department of Agriculture, Ottawa, Ontario.

Introduction
In 1962 THE Entomology Research Institute, Canada Department of Agricul-
ture, initiated a biological study project at Hazen Camp, a station established
by the Defence Research Board on the northwest shore of Lake Hazen at
8i° 49' N, 71° 18' W. This project, largely concerned with the ecology of
arctic insects, is expected to continue for several years. Oliver reached Hazen
Camp on June 6 and Savile on June 16. We both left on August 23. In the
course of making botanical analyses of most actual or potential study sites
within several miles of camp and doing other botanical and mycological work,
Savile traversed most of this area at frequent intervals and thus was able to
assess the breeding bird population in some detail.

The main purpose of this paper is to present this quantitative information,
which is of potential significance in the general ecological picture. Some
observations were made at distances up to eight miles or more from camp, but
an area of 8.6 square miles, which was covered in adequate detail, was used for
the breeding census. This area, stretching from Blister Creek to Snow Goose
River and from the lake shore to the steep talus of Mt. McGill, was pre-
dominantly dry ground, but included several marshes and many small ponds.
Some observations were made by Oliver in 1961, but he did not arrive until
July 7, and other work made detailed observations of vertebrates impossible.
He did, however, secure enough hatching dates in each year to allow a com-
parison of the two seasons.

Behavior notes are excluded from this report, but data on several species,
notably the Ruddy Turnstone and Knot, are on file in our notes.

Lake Hazen has a dry, sunny summer, with temperatures higher than at
many stations 8-10° further south. This benign summer climate, which is due
to the dynamic warming of winds coming over the adjacent high mountains,
results in an unusually varied flora and insect fauna. Actual population
densities of many organisms are, however, limited by the generally negligible
summer rainfall. Mesic habitats are scarce except on springy mountain slopes.
In the lowlands one passes almost at a step from marsh to semi-desert. The
proportion of arid land is high, but is difficult to assess accurately, partly because
of variations in the level and course of water on the extensive deltas of the
glacial streams. The summer of 1962 was unusually warm, with a July mean

**An investigation associated with the program Studies on Arctic Insects, Entomology Research In-
stitute, Canada Department of Agriculture (Paper No. 4).

Mailing date of this number: March 20, 1964
1

The Canadian Field-Naturalist

Vol. 78

of 46.7°F; whereas 1961 was quite cool at Hazen, as elsewhere in the high arctic,
with a July mean of 42.4°F. In 1958 the July mean was 43.8°F, which may be
close to an average figure. The available data do not make it clear whether
the summer temperature affected nesting success; but the late, cool season of
1961 certainly delayed nesting, as comparable figures for several species show.

For conformity with future publications, ponds are denoted by numbers
allotted to them in connection with entomological studies.

Birds

Gavia stellata Red-throated Loon

One pair nested at pond 34 ("Skeleton
Lake"), which was clear of ice on July 2.
The young hatched on late 20 or early 21
July; both were approaching full size by
August 13, although stiU partly downy and
with short bills. A pair nested at this pond
in 1961, when it became ice-free on July 16,
and both young hatched on July 29 or 30.
A second pair nested in 1962 much later at
pond 30, two miles northeast of the first pair,
the young hatching between August 5 and
10, probably about August 8 to judge from
their size on August 10. This pond is about
500 feet above pond 34; it is long and nar-
row, and shallow at the ends. It is doubtful
whether the chicks could have been fledged
before it became ice-covered.

Chen hyperborea atlantica Snow Goose

One to four adults were seen occasionally
near camp from June 18 onward. A pair
nested at pond 10, a mile north of camp,
hatching five young slightly before July 17.
Four young, nearly fuU grown, survived at
the last sighting on August 20. In 1961 seen
only in mid-August; definitely not breeding
in study area. Tener (MS) saw young in
1958 only at the west end of Lake Hazen.

Clangula hiejnalis Oldsquaw

One or more, male and female, frequently
visited pond 1, at camp, early in the summer.
Two females nested in the census area, at
ponds 10 and 30 (one and two miles north
of camp), with broods of eight and six.
Hatching dates were about July 16 for the
former and probably slightly earlier for the
latter. An unmated female attended the
former brood until they left the home pond
on August 6. In 1961 adults were occasionally
at ponds 1, 10 and 34, but no young were
seen. Tener (MS) noted two pairs at Hazen
Camp, but no sign of nesting.

Somateria spectabilis King Eider

A pair were seen across the lake near
Ruggles River on June 18. A pair appeared
at pond 1 ("Camp Pond") on June 23. The
female nested on the edge of an adjacent
small pool (No. 38), hatching a brood of
five on July 18. The brood was moved from
pond to pond over an area of several square
miles. The half-grown young often swam
near the edges of ponds in shallow water
with heads below the surface, apparently
feeding largely on the abundant Lepidurus
arcticus. All five young were seen on August
12, but one was lost shortly afterwards. The
female and surviving four nearly grown
young were seen near camp on our last day,
August 23. Adults were seen at ponds in the
study area in 1961, but no young were fovmd.
Tener (MS) noted the species at several
places in the Lake Hazen region, but saw
no evidence of breeding.

Lagopus mutus rupestris Rock Ptarmigan ■
Two pairs nested in the study area, hatch-
ing broods of eight and ten chicks before
July 15. Ten fully grown young were seen
as late as August 20, which may have been
the residue of the two broods, for both
broods seemed to have lost some members
by early August. None were seen in the
area in 1961. Tener (MS) saw only four birds
in 1958.

Grus c. canadensis Sandhill Crane

Although none were seen, on June 24 the
distinctive tracks of a crane (with large,
straight and widely divergent toes and no
mark of the hind toe) were seen in delta
mud two miles southwest of camp, mixed
with goose tracks. The clearest print was
photographed and measured. The lateral
toes were 7 and 8 cm long and the center
one 10 cm long (all measurements to the mid
point of the back of the impression). Mr.

1964

Savile and Oliver: Observations at Hazan Camp

W. Earl Godfrey finds the length of the
center toe to be 10.0 and 10.7 cm in two
mounted birds at the National Museum of
Canada. The species breeds on Devon Island,
so that strays may be expected in EUesmere,
although they do not seem to have been
reported.

Arenaria i. inter pres Ruddy Turnstone

This was apparently the most abundant
breeding species; but only three nests were
seen, and the birds often flew about in small
groups rather than staying within, and de-
claring, their territories. One bird, surprised
on the nest, gave a brief injury display, but
usually there was no clear reaction to one's
approach to nest or young. The number of
breeding pairs in the census area Avas esti-
mated to be thirty on the basis of the birds
being about fifty per cent more abundant
than the Knot. The numbers of young seen
after mid-July suggested that this estimate
was fairly reliable. Almost all broods seemed
to have hatched by July 8. By August 3 al-
most all adults had left. A migrating flock
of juveniles flew east past the camp on
August 10, the voices still somewhat higher
pitched than those of the adults. A few were
seen at camp until August 18. Two nests
were seen in 1961, both clutches hatching
between July 9 and 12. Tener (MS) in 1958
first noted flying young on August 3. In
1962 a few young were just flying (and
giving a high-pitched fwit-twit-twit call) on
July 20, and by July 25 most young were
flying easily.

Capella gallinago Common Snipe

The surprise of the season occurred on
July 31 when a snipe was flushed at close
range from the marshy edge of pond 34.
The bill and back pattern were clearly seen,
and the bird called repeatedly, eliminating
any possible doubt of its identity. The site
was visited daily by one or both of us in the
hope of collecting the bird, but it was not
seen again. Although it is probable that this
bird belonged to the North American race,
delicata, it is to be noted that the A.O.U.
Checklist (1957) reports both gallinago and
faeroensis as casual in East Greenland. The
bird was presumably a wind-blown stray,
possibly brought in on the gale of July 23.
This occurrence makes somewhat more
plausible the record from Repulse Bay,
which Snyder (1957) treated with under-
standable misgiving.

Calidris c. canutus Knot

In June and early July the birds spent
much time circling and calling at up to more
than 1000 feet, singly or in small groups,
making the location of territories difficult.
After about July 5, as the eggs were be-
ginning to hatch, territories were readily
marked by the birds giving continuous alarm
notes at one's approach. Within a few days,
as the young began to move about freely,
"rodent run" distraction displays were per-
formed long before the young could be seen,
greatly helping in the counting of broods.
Twenty pairs estimated to have bred in the
census area. By August 1 most young were
independent, although an adult was found
guarding a single late chick, still partly
downy, on August 11. Most birds had left
by August 6. A flock of more than seventy-
five passed northeast over the camp on
August 5, suggesting that this population
flies north of the Greenland ice-cap to north-
western Europe. Young were first seen in
1961 on July 9.

Erolia bairdii Baird's Sandpiper

Single birds were seen on June 18 and 19.
A few were seen with other waders at a
pond behind a barrier beach on June 24; and
two were seen at the same place on June 28.
None bred in the study area, however,
despite suitable marshes; and the species was
next recorded on August 6 when two flew
overhead, calling. Three were seen at Blister
Creek delta on August 9, and eight on August
11. Tener (1961) records an adult with a
chick a mile north of Hazen Camp.

Crocethia alba Sanderling

First definitely seen on June 21. First in-
dication of breeding was obtained w^hen a
pair gave "rodent run" displays on June 25
at the Snow Goose River delta li miles
northeast of camp. Four scattered pairs
nested in the study area on sandy or gravelly
sites near the lake shore. Young barely flying
were seen near camp on August 3. Last seen
on August 11, but work at camp prevented
later observations at favored sites. Tener
(MS) noted an adult with four small yotmg
on July 30, 1958 at Blister Creek, where one
of the 1962 pairs nested.

Stercorarius longicaudus Long-tailed Jaeger

Six pairs nested in the census area. Eggs

hatched between July 9 and ca 12. Both eggs

hatched in each nest, the second often a

The Canadian Field-Naturalist

Vol. 78

full day after the first. With lemmings very
scarce, the adults took appreciable numbers
of young Knots and Ruddy Turnstones. In
most pairs of young marked size differences
were soon apparent, the smaller one evi-
dently failing to survive more than two
weeks. Presumably, with food scarce, the
stronger chick obtained most of what the
parents brought in. This behavior may be
adaptive, for equal division of the food
might have left both chicks undernourished
and incapable of flying before cold weather
set in. One half -grown chick walked out on
brash ice at the lake edge in search of in-
sects, slipped through and drowned. The
most advanced young started to fly about
August 3. Most flew strongly by August 11,
although the parents were still moderately
attentive. Several birds were still about the
camp on August 23. In 1961 no nests or
young were seen and Oliver was subjected
to no attacks, which suggested absence of
breeding in the camp area. It is not clear
whether the relatively late spring or the
almost complete lack of lemmings was
responsible for this breeding failure. Al-
though the summer was a cool one, it was
still much warmer than that at Isachsen in
1960 where the species nested successfully
when lemmings were plentiful. However,
delayed snow-melting in spring might make
nesting impossible until the birds were past
breeding condition. Lemmings were still
scarce in 1962, but evidently more abundant
than in 1961. Tener (MS) noted some nest-
ing in 1958, despite a scarcity of lemmings.

Larus hyperboreus Glaucous Gull

Single adults were seen on June 19, June
24 and July 13. No good nest sites occur
close to Hazen Camp. Oliver saw no birds
after his arrival in July 1961, but other mem-
bers of the party reported several in June.
Tener (MS) saw several in 1958 but had no
evidence of breeding.

Sterna paradisaea Arctic Tern

First seen on June 16. One pair nested on a
sandy point near camp and a second on a
similar site two miles southwest. Both eggs
of one nest hatched between July 13 and 16.
The first &^^ in the second nest hatched on
July 17 and the second a day or so later. All
four young were raised successfully, starting
to fly about August 8. Last seen by P. S.
Corbet on August 19. In 1961 there was a
nest on the sandy point near camp, in which

the eggs hatched on July 30. In 1958 Tener
(MS) saw flying young on August 1, which
indicates an early nesting.

Nyctea scandiaca Snowy Owl

Not seen in 1962. In 1961 one was seen on
August 15, flying south near Hazen Camp.
Tener (MS) saw widely scattered individuals
in 1958, but no evidence of breeding.

Acmithis h. horneiiianni Hoary Redpoll

Date of arrival uncertain but evidently
early. Flying young were seen on June 27,
still attended by parents. Young and adults
were seen up to over 2500 feet on Mt. Mc-
Gill on June 29. On July 5 a flock of about
fifteen seemingly independent young was
seen at the foot of Mt. McGill talus. An
adult seen closely on July 17 was evidently
molting into winter plumage. Most had left
by July 31, but one was seen on August 4.
One pair nested in a hummocky Dryas-
covered gully near camp. All other nests
were apparently in crevices of the talus slope
of Mt. McGill. Parmelee and MacDonald
(1960) found the species nesting in this
habitat in the Eureka Sound area. Twelve
breeding pairs were estimated for the census
area.

Calcarius I. lapponicus Lapland Longspur

A single male was seen briefly in a gully
near camp on July 20. It gave a two-noted
call several times, but did not sing. De-
finitely did not breed in or near the study
area in 1962, but Tener (1961) records a
female feeding a single flightless juvenile
three miles northeast of camp in 1958. In
1961 a single male was seen a few miles west
of camp, up Blister Creek, on August 5.

Plectrophenax n. nivalis Snow Bunting

Evidently arrived early but did not nest
as promptly as the Hoary Redpoll. Crevices
in the talus slope were the preferred nest
sites; but a scattering of nests occurred in
mud cracks and other cavities in the alluvial
lowlands. One nest near camp was in the
slightly enlarged entrance of a lemming bur-
row. The eggs in this nest hatched on July 2.
Within a few days adults were seen carrying
food into several cavities, indicating that this
was a representative hatching date. The
young from the lemming burrow nest flew on
July 13. By late July flocks of juveniles oc-
curred increasingly around the camp, seem-
ingly attracted as much by cover as by food.
By August 15 some young were nearly into

1964 Savile and Oliver: Observations at Hazan Camp 5

winter plumage, but others were still very on July 16. In 1958 Tener (MS) noted

gray. A few were seen as late as August 18. migrating flocks passing through camp from

A nest found on July 13, 1961 contained five August 15 to 20. In 1962 it was estimated that

nearly fledged young; and young were flying twenty-five pairs nested in the census area.

Breeding Bird Density

It was estimated that in 1962 there were, in all, 107 breeding pairs of birds
in the study area of 8.6 square miles. This figure yields a density of 12.5
pairs per square mile, 1.94 pairs per 100 acres, or 0.39 individuals per 10 acres.
This is about 2.5 times the density found for a colder and much more sparsely
vegetated area at Isachsen (Savile, 1961); but it is about 1/10 to 1/20 of various
estimates published for low-arctic tundra (Hickey, 1943; Savile, 1951). It is
also appreciably lower than rough estimates (Savile, 1959, p. 961) for all but
the most sterile parts of Somerset Island, which has a lower summer temperature
and a somewhat smaller flora than Lake Hazen. It appears that the extreme
aridity of many sites at Hazen Camp must markedly Umit the breeding popula-
tion, by restricting plant growth and, consequently, insect abundance.

It is perhaps significant that the Turnstones, Knots, Sanderlings and Snow
Buntings fed extensively in July and August on chironomid midges, which
were washed ashore and on to the melting ice of Lake Hazen. The lake is
perhaps an important source of food in this arid region. It is possible that far
from the lake the breeding density would have been substantially lower.

Mammals

Alopex lagopus Arctic Fox fresh remnants of a lemming deep in a bur-

An adult was seen on July 3 being chivied row. Typical, fresh and reasonably clear

by a pair of jaegers near Blister Creek. On tracks were seen m dry sand near camp on

July 8 a den was found, four miles from August 10. Tener (MS) found the species

camp, with two well-grown cubs. By July scarce in the region m 1958.
30 the cubs had left the den, but one was

seen a few hundred yards away. The den Lepiis arcticus Arctic Hare
is evidently very old, with twenty^iwo open- One to three adults were seen periodically

ings in an area 24 x 18 feet. on the slopes and gullies of Blister Hill near

the camp. P. S. Corbet saw two adults, pre-

Canis lupus Wolf sumably different animals, two-thirds up the

One, or at most two, were seen near camp northeast slope of Mt. McGill. On August

periodically in June and early July; and fresh 20 Corbet saw three playing on a ridge near

tracks were often seen, once right through camp that may have been young, but no

camp. One was evidently attracted, like the definite proof of breeding was obtained. In

jaegers, by food scraps. In 1961 wolves were summer the hares tend to feed on the tops

much commoner locally, as many as six often of tall grasses and other herbs in the gullies,

being seen around camp. On August 19, 1961 They spend enough time in some favored

two dead wolves were found between camp spots to cause local nitrification and lush

and the Snow Goose delta. Both had died growth in gullies where moisture is not a

recently and had clearly been gored by limiting factor. In one such spot Poa hartzii,

musk-oxen. Tener (MS) saw eleven near which usually has the aspect of a typical

camp in May 1958, but saw few in the re- desert bunch-grass with glaucous and in-

gion during the rest of the summer. volute leaves, had flat, green leaves and a

lax habit, and somewhat resembled P. arctica.
Mustek erminea Ermine In 1958 Tener (MS) found hares widespread
Apparently very scarce. None was actually but not numerous and saw no sign of breed-
seen, but on August 4 R. B. Madge found ing.

6 The Canadian Field-Naturalist Vol. 78

Dicrostonx groenlandicus Collared quite weathered. The species does occur in

Lemming the Lake Hazen valley, however, for Tener

None were seen in 196L Recovery from (^S) saw one at the camp and one eight

the crash had evidently started in 1962. J. A. ^1^^ north, and reports that R. L. Christie

Downes saw two in early July, and R. B. ^aw four about thirty miles east of the lake.

Madge saw one taken by a jaeger on July 9. Q^ihos moschatus Musk-ox

W. H. Forrest caught a iuvenile in late July. „ • n u n • j- n

,,. J J • -T u r J One or occasionally two bulls periodically

We saw a dead luvenile at the rox den on , j • u u

T , ,^ ^T •" , 1, • •, appeared near camp during the summer, but

July 30. Oliver caught a small luvenile on f^ j i ii ■ j

■'. ■' ,- J c -1 u T-u n the cows and calves generally remained some

August 12 and bavile saw another, ihus all -i rr i • i u n

, ° , , . .,.,.. miles oil on the mountain slopes, where small

those seen closely were luveniles, indicating . ,, ^

u J- T- /A^c\'j-^ groups were occasionally seen. In imd-

active breeding. Tener (Mb) indicates a ° ^ • j u

1 • ,r,r-7 u • u J- • August, as snow cover increased on the

peak in 1957, a crash in the succeeding win- ° '. . , j • u

^ J . . i„;.o mountains, more ammals appeared in the

ter, and great scarcity in 1958. , , , Vu \,- \, I u^ • j

' ° ^ lowlands. The highest count was obtained

on August 20 when fourteen adults and six
Rangifer tarmidus Caribou calves were seen within a mile of camp.

None were seen near the camp in 1961 or Tener (MS) recorded a total of eighty-six
1962 and all shed antlers examined were animals in the lake region in 1958.

Predation

The scarcity of lemmings in 1962 unquestionably diverted predation
against some species of birds to an appreciable extent. The Long-tailed Jaegers
certainly took substantial numbers of young Knots and Ruddy Turnstones
(perhaps nearly tvventy-five per cent of the total) and at least one adult Knot.
The effects of foxes, wolves and ermine were much less apparent, but were
probably appreciable. None of these mammals were abundant enough to exert
an overwhelming effect; and there was no such disastrous nesting failure as
MacDonald (1961) reported for Ellef Ringnes Island when lemmings were
scarce. A possible reduction of young ptarmigan in the census area from
eighteen to ten in a month was, if actual, the most severe loss of predation.
One young out of five was lost by both the Greater Snow Geese and King
Eiders. Loss, if any, by the Oldsquavvs was light despite several long marches
from pond to pond. The substantial loss of Long-tailed Jaeger chicks seems
to have been due more to starvation and accident than to predation. The wolf
seemed little disturbed by the attacks of the jaegers and terns, and was a
potentially successful predator against these species although all tern chicks in
our area were fledged successfully. The fox seen was so terrified by the attacks
of the jaegers that it was probably ineffective against the young of this species
or the terns. The foxes may have raided some nests of Knots and Ruddy
Turnstones. Most nests of Hoary Redpolls and Snow Buntings were safe from
any predator but an ermine.

With both greater diversity of species ( 1.5: 1) and a greater density (2.5: 1)
of breeding birds at Hazen Camp than at Isachsen (Savile, 1961), it is possible
that predation does not fluctuate as violently; but many more observations are
needed before any positive conclusions can be drawn.

It seems remarkable that the carnivores were able to survive the winter
at Lake Hazen with lemmings so scarce. The foxes certainly take a few hares
(one hare foot was seen at the den). The wolves pull down an occasional
isolated musk-ox, with some casualties to themselves. The foxes scavenge the

1964 Savile and Oliver: Observations at Hazan Camp 7

musk-ox carcases, for bones of various ages are to be seen at the den. Whether
the ermine also scavenge the carcases is not known.

Acknowledgments
Our thanks are due to the Defence Research Board for their faciUties and
co-operation; to Dr. J. S. Tener, Canadian Wildlife Service, for the use of his
manuscript notes on observations made in 1958 when Hazen Camp was in
operation as an I.G.Y. station; to A4r. W. Earl Godfrey for information on the
Sandhill Crane; and to Dr. P. S. Corbet and Mr. J. A. Downes for various
observations and suggestions.

References

American Ornithologists' Union. 1957. Savile, D. B. O. 1951. Bird observations at

Check-list of North American birds. 5th Chesterfield Inlet, Keewatin, in 1950.

ed. American Ornithologists' Union, Balti- Canadian Field-Naturalist 65: 145-157.

more. . 1959. The botany of Somerset

HicKEY, J. J. 1943. A guide to bird watch- Island, District of Franklin. Canadian Jour-

ing. Oxford University Press, London, nal of Botany 37: 959-1002.

New York and Toronto. . 1961. Bird and mammal observa-

MacDonald, S. D. 1961. Report on bio- tions on EUef Ringnes Island in 1960.

logical investigations at Isachsen, EUef National Museum of Canada, Natural

Ringnes Island, N.WT. National Museum History Papers 9: 1-6.

of Canada Bulletin 172: 90-97. Snyder, L. L. 1957. Arctic birds of Canada.

Parmelee, D. F. and S. D. MacDonald. University of Toronto Press, Toronto.

1960. The birds of west-central EUesmere Tener, J. S. 1961. Breeding range exten-

Island and adjacent areas. National Mu- sions of two EUesmere Island birds.

seum of Canada BuUetin 169: 1-103. Canadian Field-Naturalist 75: 51.

Received for publication 20 March 1963

PSEUDOFOSSILS NEAR OLD CHELSEA, QUEBEC

Donald D. Hogarth

Department of Geology, University of Ottawa, Ottawa, Ontario

The problem of evidence of life in rocks of Precambrian age has long been of
interest to geologists. In Quebec the subject was introduced when J. W.
Dawson (1865) described Eozoon canadense from a locality thirty-five miles
northeast of Ottawa. Vigorous discussions ensued for a number of years on
the status of this structure but today few geologists believe that Eozoon is of
organic origin.

Recently structures superficially resembling the larvae of monarch butter-
flies and others resembling crinoid stems were discovered during geological
mapping. These structures are composed of fine-grained quartz (jasper or
chalcedony) at two localities (Figure 1 ) : a single occurrence on the Gatineau
Parkway about li miles southwest of Old Chelsea and a group of occurrences
centred about one mile north northeast of Old Chelsea

Jasper and chalcedony occur in a variety of rocks (Figure 1). The
most common types are feldspathic quartzite, biotite gneiss, marble and calc-
siHcate rocks derived from marble. The calc-silicate rocks include the well-
known metamorphic pyroxenite of the Ottawa Valley, quartz-tremolite,
quartz-dopside and calcite-pyroxene varieties. Jasper also is found in peg-
matite on the Gatineau Parkway near the Dunlop Road and in talc-rich quart-
zite on the Chelsea Brook a mile south of Chelsea. It may be significant that,
only those occurrences with chalcedony or jasper in marble or calc-silicate
rocks disclosed organic-like textures.

Parkway Occurrence

During the construction of the Gatineau Parkway a chalk-white mineral
was revealed in a rock-cut about 2300 feet south of the Kingsmere road. The
exposure is now covered with earth. The mineral occurred in a mica vein and
was shown by X-ray diffraction to be fine-grained quartz (chalcedony). An-
other mica vein, about a mile northeast, held a mineral of similar appearance
but which, on examination, proved to be feldspar (microcline).

Masses of chalcedony were found in veins which cut metamorphic pyrox-
enite. The pyroxene has been largely altered to coarse-grained actinolite.
The chalcedony occurred principally in two places about fifteen feet apart and
in masses two feet across. It is found with relatively coarse-grained quartz
and plums of pink barite. Orange jasper was occasionally seen as small iso-
lated flecks in chalcedony.

Under the microscope the chalcedony was observed as concentric bands
and whisps. It was white in reflected light but brown to transmitted light.
Coarse quartz occurred in interstices but sometimes within the chalcedony
masses. The unusual crinoidal or worm-like shapes were often seen in this

1964

Hogarth: Pseudofossils near Old Chelsea

Figure 1. Map of the Old Chelsea district showing generalized geology and occurrences
of jasper and chalcedony.

10 The Canadian Field-Naturalist Vol. 78

rock. Associated minerals were phlogopite, sphene, apatite, pyrite, hematite,
tourmaline, calcite, chalcopyrite and molybdenite.

Various stages of replacement of mica (phlogopite) by quartz have been
observed. Initially chalcedony entered between sheets of phlogopite causing
exfoliation (Figure 2a). This was apparently accomplished without loss of
birefringence in the mica and therefore without vermiculitization. Then com-
paratively coarse quartz replaced phlogopite. Some partially replaced sheets
have been seen. At a more advanced stage phlogopite may have been com-
pletely replaced producing the segmented shapes illustrated in Figure 2b.
Finally barite and a little calcite filled the open spaces and replaced some of
the worm-like structures leaving only traces of the original forms.

Occurrence North of Old Chelsea

Jasper has long been known at the Scott Mine just west of the Tenaga
road (Figure 1). Textures and mineralogy have been described by Hannah
(1952), Tanton (1953) and Hogarth (1962). Recent work by the writer has
shown that the jasper occurrences are distributed throughout an area at least
1400 feet wide and 3500 feet long.

Spheroidal structures similar to those described by Hannah and Tanton
were seen at most occurrences. These were often composed of radiating in-
dividuals occasionally showing concentric zones rich in dusty hematite. Some-
times jasper has been fractured and a later generation of quartz or chalcedony
was deposited in voids (Figure 2c). This late quartz seems to be free of
hematite. Other late vein-forming minerals are calcite, barite, fluorite and
sphalerite.

Segmented worm-like shapes were found in most deposits in marble or
calc-silicate rock (Figure 1). A complete series of stages of development was
observed identical to that described from the Parkway occurrence. Well-
formed quartz pseudomorphs after phlogopite were observed in "worms" at
occurrence No. 4.

Morphology of pseudofossils
The size of these forms varies considerably. The largest is 4 inches long
and 0.7 inches wide (occurrence No. 2). Most are less than i inch long. An
average length-to-width ratio of 8 well-formed specimens is 6.4:1.

Figure 2a. Photomicrograph in polarized light of mica (light grey in centre of photograph)
exfoUated and filled with chalcedony (dark grey). Locality No. 1.

b. Photomicrograph in ordinary light of a worm-like structure composed of chalcedony
and quartz (dark grey). A later generation of quartz (light grey) veins and surrounds
the structure. Locality No. 1.

c. Photomicrograph in polarized light of a typical veinlet of late chalcedony. Locality No. 3.

d. Coiled and segmented structures of chalcedony. Black patches are cavities partially
filled with barite. Photograph of a freshly broken surface from locality No. L

e. Ribbed "crinoidal" growths of chalcedony in cavities. Locality No. L

f. Pairs of replaced mica "books" enclosing a layer of white chalcedony which simulates the
digestive tract of an organism. Photograph of a freshly-broken surface from locality
No. L

1964

Hogarth: Pseudofossils near Old Chelsea

12 The Canadian Field-Naturalist Vol. 78

In outline the structures show certain regularities. Most specimens taper
at both ends although a few are abruptly terminated. Some are distinctly
coiled (Figure 2d). This is especially true of larger individuals which, in rare
instances, turn through a complete circle. They do not appear to be branched
or intertwined.

External forms are often well-developed on individuals in cavities (Figure
2e). Sharply-divided segments of the type described above are common. In
addition individuals may be roughly hexagonal in cross section but distinctly
ribbed along their length. This ribbing is presumably due to groups of parallel
crystals continuous along the prism axis. Similar composite crystals may be
seen in unaltered phlogopite in many places in the Old Chelsea district.

Pairs of parallel, replaced mica books may only be separated by a narrow
layer of chalcedony simulating a digestive tract in long section (Figure 2f).
In cross section the "worms" are structureless.

Summary of Origin

Worm-like forms at both the southern and northern localities appear to
have originated in the following manner.

1. Siliceous dolomites were metamorphosed to calc-silicate rocks composed
of pyroxene, phlogopite and calcite. Rocks were intensely deformed at a
temperature of about 1100°F and a pressure of 100,000 pounds per square
inch. It is unlikely that any fossils could have survived these conditions.

2. Chalcedony or jasper penetrated between sheets of mica causing exfolia-
tion. Textures suggest that this silica was deposited as a gel at low tem-
perature (Hannah, 1952).

3. A4ica was replacd by quartz containing only small amounts of iron oxide.
The resulting structure simulated a segmented organism. A later gener-
ation of chalcedony may have been added at this stage.

4. Jasper was cut by calcite-barite veins locally carrying quartz, fluorite,
chalcopyrite and sphalerite.

One may theorize on the date of the jasper and calcite-barite mineraliza-
tion. Calcite and barite are known to be late in the geological sequence in
this region. Veins of barite cut all Precambrian formations. They even fill
breccias in Paleozoic limestones just south of Fairy Lake and 1000 yards south-
east of the intersection of the Notch and Mountain Roads. In the localities
considered the calcite has not reacted with quartz and therefore may postdate
the regional metamorphism. It is thus possible that calcite-barite and the
associated jasper are not older than Ordovician.

Acknowledgments

The pseudofossils were discovered in 1961 during geological mapping
sponsored by a grant from the Geological Society of America. Professor D.
M. Baird of the University of Ottawa and Dr. D. J. McLaren of the Geological
Survey of Canada kindly read the manuscript and made helpful suggestions.

1964

Hogarth: Pseudofossils near Old Chelsea

References

Dawson, J. W. 1865. On the structure of
certain organic remains in the Laurentian
limestones of Canada. Part 2. Quarterly
Journal of the Geological Society of Lon-
don 21: 51-59.

Hannah, G. J. R. 1952. The origin of the
metasomatic iron formation at Old Chel-
sea, P.Q. M.Sc. Thesis, Laval. Abstract in
Canadian Mining Journal, 1957, 126.

Hogarth, D. D. 1962. A guide to the ge-
ology of the Gatineau-Lievre district.
Canadian Field-Naturalist 76: 1-55.

Tanton, T. L. 1953. Orbicular jaspillite,
Hull township, Quebec. Proceedings of
the Geological Association of Canada 6
(pt. 1): 75-79.

Received for publication 13 May 1963

BIRDS OF KLEENA KLEENE, CHILCOTIN DISTRICT, B.C.,

1959-1962

W. Adrian B. Paul

Kleena Kleene, British Columbia

The following list supplements the paper published previously by the writer
(Paul, 1959). It adds 38 species to the list and gives additional information
on 35 others.

Aythya valisineria Canvasback. Breeds.
May 6, 1962, eight males and some females;
May 20, 1962, three pairs; June 7, 1962, one
female; July 27, 1960, downy young near
Nimpo Lake.

Fhalacrocorax auritus Double-crested
Cormorant. May 17, 1960, one reported,
twice seen on float on One Eye Lake.

Anas carolinensis Green-winged Teal.
Breeds. July 27, 1960, six young two weeks
old near Nimpo Lake. August 8, 1962, six
young three-quarters grown.

Anas discors Blue-winged Teal. Proba-
bly breeds. May 6 1962, one pair; May 13,
1962, three pairs; May 25, 1961, six pairs in a
flock; June 7, 1962, one pair; June 13, 1962,
one pair; June 17, 1961, four males and three
females.

Anas cyanoptera Cinnamon Teal. Pro-
bably breeds. May 16, 1962, two pair; June
8, 1961, one pair; June 20, 1962, one pair.

Spatula clypeata Shoveler. Probably
breeds. May 15, 1961, one pair; May 30, 1962,
one pair and one male; June 8, 1961, two male
and one female; August 28, 1961, three seen.

Melanitta deglandi White-winged Scoter.
M. perspicellata Surf Scoter. These are
migrants and may be seen from time to time
in spring and early fall on Clearwater Lake,
in flocks up to about thirty. The two species
are sometimes difficult to distinguish at a
distance. April 29, 1961 and May 16, 1962,
one pair of Surf Scoters. October 25, 1960,
three White-winged.

Oxyura jamaicensis Ruddy Duck. Breeds.
May 6, 1962, four males and some females
June 17, 1961, four males and one female
June 13, 1962, six males and two females
July 7, 1962, one pair; July 27, 1960, seven
downy young near Nimpo Lake.

Accipiter gentilis Goshawk. Breeds. July
5, 1959, three fledghngs; May 7, 1960, one

The Canadian Field-Naturalist

Vol. 78

seen; September 10, 1960, September 12, and
October 10, 1962, one immature.

Accipker striatus Sharp-shinned Hawk.
Noticed only in the fall. August 27, 1961;
October 12, 1962; and October 26, 1960, one
mature seen; September 15, 1962, one im-
mature.

Accipker cooperii Cooper's Hawk. July
31, 1962, and August 4, 1962, one mature
seen; August 17, 1962, one immature.

Buteo jamaicensis Red-tailed Hawk. Aii-
grant. May 14, 1960; May 18, 1962, and May
28, 1961, one seen; August 4, 1962, one
sitting on a haycock.

Buteo swainsoni Swainson's Haavk. Be-
lieved seen on May 17, June 24 and Septem-
ber 26, 1961.

Falco peregriniis Peregrine Falcon. Mi-
grant. May 2, 1962; May 3, 1961; May 5,
1960; September 6 and October 10, 1962, one

Falco columbarius Pigeon Hawk. No-
ticed several times in spring of 1961. April
29, one pair, observed to mate; May 4, one
seen; May 27, one pair.

Forzana Carolina Sora. May 13, 1962, one
seen, confirming information by long-time
residents that this species seen or heard oc-
casionally.

Charadrius vociferus Killdeer. Regular
summer residents. Eggs laid in early June.
June 8, 1959, four eggs near Tatla Lake.

Capella gallinago Common Snipe. Arrive
in April. Mating displays through May and
June. July 10, 1959, a flock of eight in a
barnyard; July 18, 1962, three flying in a
flock.

Actkis macularia Spotted Sandpiper. Com-
mon summer resident. Eggs hatch in early
July. July 14, 1961, one-third grown.

Erolia minutilla Least Sandpiper. August
6, 1962, six feeding in a flock; August 29,
1962, one seen.

Ereunetes mauri Western Sandpiper.
August 15, 1962, twenty-five feeding in a
flock; August 22, 1962, twelve feeding in a
flock; August 29, 1962, six seen.

Steganopus tricolor Wilson's Phalarope.
Present from late May to October. Breeds.
June 17, 1961, three males and three females.
Distraction displays June 17, 1961; July 19,
1961; July 11, 18 and 25, 1962. August 4,

1961, three seen in a flock. August 22, 1962
and October 14, 1961, one seen.

Lams calif ornicus California Gull. July
19, 1962, one mature and one second year
seen.

Cblidonias niger Black Tern. Estimated
numbers of pairs nesting at Brink Ranch at
Kleena Kleene, twenty-five pairs in 1961,
fourteen pairs in 1962. First young seen in
flight in 1961 on July 19, in 1962 on July 18.
On three occasions, late July and early
August, seen carrying fish.

"Zenaidura inacroura Mourning Dove.
May breed at Dowling Ranch; June 4, 1961,
two seen; September 13, 1961, one mature
and two immature (short tails) .

Bubo virginianus Great Horned Owi,.
Breeds. Seen or heard in every month of the
year. June 4, 1962, two fledglings.

Glaucidium gnotna Pygmy Owl. June 13,

1962, one found dead, completely dehy-
drated, confirming local information to ef-
fect that they are present (both summer and
winter), and sometimes die of starvation.

Asio otus Long-eared Owl. May 18, 1961
and September 14, 1961, one seen.

Selasphorus riijiis Rufous Hummingbirb.
Present May through August. Males last seen
June 22, 1961; females last seen September
1, 1960; August 24, 1961, one female with one
immature.

Stellula calliope Calliope Hummingbird.
Males observed at three locations between
May 30 and June 20, 1961; and at two loca-
tions between June 6 and 19, 1962. Un-
doubtedly nesting.

Sayorms saya Say's Phoebe. April 29,
1961, one seen.

Empidonax trailii Traill's Flycatcher.
Breeds. Sings during June and July. Last seen
September 2, 1962.

Empidonax rmnimus Least Flycatcher.
Believe one seen May 20, 1961.

1964

Paul: Birds of Kleena Kleene

Empidonax havmiondii Hammond's Fly-
catcher. Breeds. Heard and seen during
June and July. Young left a nest on July 22,
1962.

Empidonax dificilis Western Flycatcher.
Are usually represented locally and appear
to breed but were noticably absent in 1962.
May 20, 1961, one seen. September 9, 1961,
one seen.

Contopus sordidulus Western Wood
Pewee. Arrives about mid-May. Breeds.

Nuttallornis borealis Olive-sided Fly-
catcher. May breed. June 12 and 18, 1962,
one seen; August 6 and 11, 1962, one seen;
August 19, 1962, two seen.

Eremophila alpestris Horned Lark. Usu-
ally a flock of about two hundred present in
early May. The flock breaks up and all in-
dividuals disappear before the end of the
month. Never noted in the fall by this ob-
server.

Tachycineta thalassina Violet-green Saval-
Low. Begin to arrive about mid-April and
stay about three and a half months. Egg
laying dates vary. A few hatch around June
1, while others are still feeding nestlings up
to the last week of July. All disappear in
early August.

Iridoprocne bicolor Tree Swallo'w. Ar-
rive in second half of April, usually hatch
about mid-June. During August they move
about in flocks and are usually last seen in
early September. September 30, 1962, three

Riparia rip aria Bank Swallow. Arrive
in late April and some start to lay a month
later. Nesting is usually completed about end
of July, after which they are seen no more.

Stelgidopteryx ruficollis Rough-winged
Sw^ALLO^v. Arrival and nesting dates are the
same as for Bank Swallows. They are less
plentiful than any local species except the
Bam Swallow.

Hirundo rustica Barn Swallow. Arrive
in early May and stay about four months;
may often be seen about September 1 in
company with Tree Swallows. June 23, 1960,
a nest with one egg; August 29, 1962, fledg-
lings being fed by parents; September 12,
1962, two seen.

Fetrochelidon pyrrhonota Cliff Swallow.
Arrive about the same time as Barn Swallows.
Mostly they build under the roofs of bams
or other buildings but small colonies may be
noted on cliff^s. If all goes well they hatch
about the end of June but where nests col-
lapse there may be hatches late in July. All
go south in August.

Troglodytes troglodytes Winter Wren.
Present in April and September but observed
at no other time.

Hylocichla guttata Hermit Thrush. June
12, 1962, one seen.

Hylocichla ustulata Swainson's Thrush.
May breed. Seen June 1, 1962; June 18, 1962
a pair; June 30, 1961 a pair; July 17, 1962.

Hylocichla fuscescens Veery. Breeds.
Singing from mid-May until end of June.
July 16, 1962 a fledgling seen that was being
fed by a parent.

Anthus spinoletta Water Pipit. Flocks up
to fifty present at 3000 feet throughout May
and often seen in September. August 1, 1962
a few seen including immatures.

Lanius excubitor Northern Shrike. Single
birds observed in April and October only.
October birds sometimes immature plumage.

Sturmis vulgaris Starling. Locally little
increase during past few years. June 20, 1962
young left nest in woodpecker cavity. Octo-
ber 3, 1962, forty in a flock.

Vireo olivaceus Red-eyed Vireo. Migrant.
Noted for first time in 1962. June 16, one
singing; and June 17 in same location two,
both singing about fifty feet apart; June 21,
one singing about eight miles from above.

Vireo philadelphicus Philadelphia Vireo.
May 31, 1962, one of this species believed
seen and heard.

Vireo gilvus Warbling Vireo. Sings
throughout June. July 2, 1959, a nest with
young; July 27, 1960, seen carrying food.
August 25, 1962 one seen.

Vermivora celata Orange-crowned War-
bler. Are here singing at end of April and
may be seen feeding amongst aspen catkins

The Canadian Field-Naturalist

Vol. 78

in early May, in association with kinglets
and/or chicadees. Singing continues until
early July. Soudibound migration apparently
starts in mid-August. Last seen August 11,
1959; September 6, 1958.

Dendroica petechia Yui.i.ow Warbler. Ar-
rive in mid-May and sing during May and
June; their numbers vary considerably from
year to year. Very seldom seen later than
July. September 2, 1962, one seen.

De7idroica iiJai!,volia Magnolia Warbler.
Observed only once. Seen and heard singing
June 25, 1959. BeUeve heard once in 1960.

Dendroica audnboni Audubon's Warbler.
Arrive in second half of April. Singing is
heard intermittently until July. Flocks up
to twenty may be noted throughout Septem-
ber.

Dendroica townsendi Townsend's War-
bler. Migrant. Single birds noticed June 3,
1962; June 16, 1962; August 18, 1961; August
20, 1961. September 8, 1959, six seen.

Sieurus ?iovehorace/isis Norihern Water-
thrush. Arrive the last week of May and
continue to sing tlirougli June. August 18,
1962, one singing.

Oporornis tolmiei Maccu.uvrav's War-
bler. Arrive last of May and sing until mid-
July, remaining in vicinity until mid-August.

Geotblypis trichas Yeelqw-throat. Ar-
rive about May 25 and sing well into July.
July 21, 1957, a fledghng just left nest. Not
plentiful.

Wilsonla pttsilla Wilson's Warbler. Usu-
ally arrive early May and sing until about
June 1. After end of June arc not seen until
fall migration in mid-August.

Setophaga ruticilla American Redstart.
Arrive at end of May and sing for about
three weeks, remaining in vicinity until end
of August.

Xantbocephalus xanthocephalus Yellow-
headed Blackbird. Estimated thirty pairs
nesting at Brink Ranch in 1961 and 1962.
First fledglings observed June 17, 1961 and
June 27, 1962.

Molotbriis ater Brown-headed Cowbird.
Immature birds often seen with livestock in
July and August; July 25, 1960 a fledghng;
July 4, 1961 a fledgling about a week from
nest.

Hesperiphono vespermia Evening Gros-
beak. Rarely seen. April, 1960, twelve re-
ported; October 13, 1959, six seen.

Carpodacus mexicamis House Finch.
Single pairs present and singing on at least
two occasions during first half of June 1961.
None seen in 1962.

Spimis pifius Pine Siskin. Small flocks
noted throughout the summer; indications of
nesting very slight. September 12, 1962, sixty
seen. October 13, 1962, ten seen.

Vasscrc'uhis savdwicbensis Savannah Spar-
row. Breeds. May 6, 1961, eight seen; May
25, 1961, forty seen; October 10, 1962, thirty
seen.

Zonotricbia leucopbrys White-crowned
Sparrow. Breeds. Sings from arrival in late
April until July, sometimes August. A flock
of twenty-five immature plumage seen at
Tatla Lake Septmeber 28, 1960.

Passerella iliaca Fox Sparrow. September
23, 1961, one found dead.

Reference

Paul, W. Adrian B. 1959. The Birds of
Klcena Kleene, Chilcotin District, British
Columbia, 1947-1958. Canadian Field-Na-
turalist 73(2):83-93.

Received for publication 22 October 1962

TERRITORIALITY AMONG WINTERING SNOWY OWLS

Lloyd B. Keith
Department of Wildlife Management, University of Wisconsin

This paper is primarily concerned with territorial behaviour of some Snowy
Owls, Nyctea scandiaca, which spent the winter of 1960-61 at Horicon Marsh,
Wisconsin. My observations began on November 18 when the first bird was
seen; and field work was terminated on April 15 when a thorough coverage
of the Marsh by boat confirmed that the owls had departed. The Horicon
data will be augmented to a limited extent by observations made elsewhere in
southern Wisconsin during the same period.

I should like to acknowledge the invaluable assistance of Frederick and
Frances Hamerstrom, D. D, Berger, and H. C. Mueller who introduced me to
the art of owl trapping, and who initially caught three of the six birds that
were later kept under close scrutiny. 1 am grateful also to H. A. Mathiak
and others who contributed sight records of marked owls. R. A. AlcCabe
and J. T. Emlen read the manuscript and made helpful suggestions and
comments.

Methods

Through the fortunate combination of an early freeze-up and little snow,
all parts of the 30,000 acre Horicon Marsh were accessible by truck from the
third week of December until the last week in February. During January-
February, at least one full day each week was spent on the Marsh trapping and
observing Snowy Owls. Owls were live trapped with a bal-chatri (Berger and
Mueller, 1959; Berger and Hamerstrom, 1962), using starlings, Stumus vulgaris,
and pigeons, Columba livia, as bait (Figure 1). A quick-drying aerosol paint
(Blair "Spray-Hue") was utilized for colour marking; it proved convenient
and effective.

Territorial Behaviour

The early works of Manniche (1910) and Pleske (1928), and the more
recent studies of Pitelka et al. (1955), Sutton and Parmelee (1956), Watson
(1957) and Hagen (1960) have provided a wealth of data on the breeding
biology and nesting behaviour of the Snowy Owl. However, information
concerning wintering populations of this species in southern Canada and the
northern United States is largely confined to (1) the periodicity of major
invasions, (2) estimates of numbers and distribution of individuals involved,
and (3) food habits (see Deane, 1902, 1907; Gross, 1927, 1931, 1944, 1947;
Snyder, 1943, 1947, 1949; and others). Relatively little is known about the
sex and age structure, movements, and behaviour of such populations.

Perhaps one of the earliest comments about wintering Snowy Owls restrict-
ing themselves to a specific area was made by Hicks (1932) who stated: "In

18 The Canadian Field-Naturalist Vol. 78

1930-31 a large number of the records listed were of birds reported to have
been present in some particular locality for from t\vo to nine weeks. . . ."
Meade (1948) likewise declared: "There is evidence . . . that once incursive
birds have reached a certain locality they tend to remain there for extended
periods." His correspondents had noted two owls remaining for forty-one
days, two others for approximately seventy-five and ninety days, and a fifth
which was shot after ninety-eight days. Referring to two Snowy Owls that
had wintered on an Ontario farm, iUitchell (1947) wrote: "All winter they
have had quite well defined territories about half a mile apart. . . ." Keith
(1960), working in Manitoba, maintained: "Soon after Snowy Owl observa-
tions began at Delta, it became apparent that some birds had settled in the
district and were restricting their daily movements to rather limited areas which
I have interpreted as hunting ranges."

The first account of territorial behaviour (in the sense of defending an
area) among wintering Snowy Owls seems to be that given by Gillese (1960)
in a popular article describing the work and observations of A. Oeming of
Edmonton, Alberta: "A Snowy Owl doesn't even like another Snowy invading
its territory. Four times, from a ringside seat in the snowdrifts, Al has seen
two birds do battle — swooping low, then suddenly rising high, bodies crashing
in mid-air, . . ."

Ten owls were caught and colour-marked at Horicon Marsh during the
present study. Four of these, along with two untrapped but easily recognized
individuals, were repeatedly noted on the Marsh and provided most of the
information on territoriality. The unmarked birds were a large darkly barred
female, and a small very white male. All but three of the ten colour-marked
owls were reobserved at least once.

The distribution of sight records of six Snowy Owls (Figure 2) strongly
implies that mutually exclusive territories had been established. That these
were indeed defended areas is indicated by the following witnessed conflicts —
seemingly provoked by the presence of our baited traps:

(1) January 14: At 4 p.m. a trap was set out on the Main Ditch between,
and in full view of two birds. All Blue and Dark Unmarked. They were
about three-quarters of a mile apart at the time. Within a few minutes.
Dark Unmarked flew northward and alighted beside the trap. All blue
then immediately flew south towards Dark Un?mrked, uttering a high
piercing cry. All Blue alighted on the ditch about 200 yards from Dark
Unmarked, who responded by flying towards All Blue and alighting about
thirty yards from her. All Blue immediately flew back northward to her
initial perch, and Dark Unmarked returned to the trapsite.

(2) January 21: A trap was placed near Light Un?narked at 5 p.m. After
approximately half an hour, he flew over and landed beside the trap.
About a minute later Light Unmarked suddenly flew rapidly away; another
(unidentified) Snowy Owl appeared before he had gone more than forty

1964

Keith: Territoriality Among Snowy Owls

Figure 1. Extricating the feet of a large female Snowy Owl from the nylon nooses of a
bal-chatri.

yards, and both clashed heavily about fifty feet above the ice. It was
almost dark by this time, aiid neither bird was seen again that day. The
second owl seemed to have been the aggressor.

(3) February 11: A trap was set near Dark Umnarked just at dusk. She
flew to it almost immediately, but shortly afterwards rose quickly to meet
another Snowy Owl which approached from the direction of All Blue's
territory (it was too dark to identify colour markings). About five
minutes of aerial gymnastics ensued, during which these two birds clashed
again and again in mid-air. One of the owls then returned to the trap.

(4) February 11: At about 9 a.m. Light Unfnarked and Orange Right Wing
(both males) were noted sitting on the ice approximately 250 yards apart,
but hidden from each other's view by emergent vegetation. As we were
watching, a cottontail rabbit, Sylvilagus florid anus, suddenly appeared and
was seen by Light Untnarked, which flew after it. Orange Right Wing
apparently saw Light Unmarked and commenced to chase him for about
two minutes. Both owls then settled down in roughly their initial positions.
(Unbeknown to us the rabbit had just been released by H. A. Mathiak
when we and the owls saw it.)

20 The Canadian Field-Naturalist Vol. 78

The response of the marked owls to a captive individual was also tested.
On the breeding grounds, Watson (1957) had been unable to evoke any reaction
to a flat life-sized model. I employed a live male Snowy Owl, acquired from
the Wisconsin Conservation Department. Four of the Horicon owls were
confronted with this captive bird, and reacted as follows:

(1) February 11: The captive owl was jessed and set on the ice about 150
yards from All Blue, within what I believed was the latter's territory. Our
truck had scarcely pulled away before All Blue viciously attacked the jessed
bird; there was much physical contact involving chiefly the wings and
feet. All Blue was seemingly oblivious to us during the fight, as we
watched from a distance of not more than thirty yards. We terminated
the experiment after several minutes because of the beating the captive
was taking.

(2) February 20: In mid-afternoon a trap was placed about 200 yards from
Light Unmarked who was sitting on the ice near some cattails. During
the next hour, he moved in several short flights to within five yards of the
trap, but would approach no closer. The captive owl was then set out in
a wire cage within seventy-five yards of the trap; Light Unmarked still
did not move. From the beginning. All Orange, a large female, had been
perched in a tree 0.7 miles distant. Approximately ten minutes after the
caged owl was put out. All Orange flew directly to it; as All Orange
approached. Light Ufimarked flew off. All Orange landed near the caged
owl, walked around it, and during the next ten minutes struck at the captive
bird several times. She then flew over to the trap and was immediately
caught.

(3) February 20: In late-afternoon. Dark Umnarked made one pass at the
caged owl set out near a baited trap. As a result of our numerous unsuccess-
ful attempts to catch this bird, she was becoming very trap-shy, and this
may have explained her apparent lack of interest in both the trap and the
captive owl.

What was evidently a natural clash between Green Right Wing and All
Orange was mentioned to H. A. Mathiak by a muskrat trapper. This conflict
occurred in mid-January.

The approximate areas of five territories, as measured by sight records
(Figure 2), were between 0.2 and 1.0 square miles, while their greatest lengths
ranged from 1.0 to 1.6 miles (Table 1). Orange Right Wifig was not included
here because he was seen only four times. Territory sizes on the breeding
grounds have been variously estimated at about one mile in diameter (Sutton
and Parmelee, 1956), and one to four square miles depending on prey abundance
(Watson, 1957). Pitelka et al. (1955) found nesting pairs spaced one to four
miles apart, and Hagen (1960) reported that distances between nests ranged
from 0.8 to 2.3 miles, with 1.3 miles being the mean. Thus, as best I can judge
at present, the size of winter and breeding territories is comparable.

Keith: Territoriality Among Snowy Owls

Figure 2. A portion of the south end of Horicon Marsh, Wisconsin, showing observed
positions of six Snowy Owls during January-February, 1961.

22 The Canadian Field-Naturalist Vol. 78

Our knowledge of how and when winter territories are established and
later abandoned is still very scanty. The observations of others, as well as my
own, suggest that the owls tend often to arrive from the North in groups, and
many have been seen together at such times (Stoner, 1943; Gross, 1947). Yet,
even during this same period some overt antagonism may be displayed, as
Keniston's (1927) remarks attest: "Snowy Owls are interesting to watch on
account of their fights over food. . . . They would sit by the hour side by side,
and seemed very loving except at meal time. In the evening and at meal-time
they uttered a shrill squeal, evidently a fighting-note." According to Oeming
(as reported by Gillese, 1960), "[Snowy Owls] arrive from the north in groups,
as early as the first week of September. Oddly, they are lethargic and sluggish
at first, uninterested in food, spending their days dozing in the late fall sun.
They disperse, and then set up their 'territory,' defending it jealously against
intruders." On November 26 and December 2, before the freeze-up, two
snowy o^vls were observed together on farmland bordering Horicon Marsh.
Plumage differences indicated that they were a male and a female. These birds
were frequently within a few yards of one another, and when flushed several
times during photographing, they alighted on adjacent fence posts. No
antagonism was witnessed during the period of observation.

February 25 was the last day that I saw colour-marked owls at Horicon.
My next visit was on March 11, at which time I snowshoed the area shown in
Figure 2; there were numerous open leads in the Marsh, and many waterfowl,
but no owls could be found. Whether the birds had gone North, or had simply
moved to higher ground, I cannot say. The former would appear more
probable, since the Marsh was still largely covered with ice and snow, and
food was more abundant than ever with the return of the ducks. Keith (1960)
quoted H. A. Hochbaum as saying that at Delta, Manitoba, Snowy Owls shifted
their roosts during the spring thaw to the vicinity of remnant snow patches.
Mitchell's (1947) description of the behaviour of tu'o Snowy Owls suggests that
the onset of the reproductive urge may be involved in breaking down winter
territories and prompting the return flight north. She stated that after main-
taining separate territories all winter, the male and female were found together
one evening towards the middle of March. They rose in the air together,
engaging in what Mitchell implies may have been courtship "fighting", then
flew off northward side by side.

Other Behavioural Traits

While the pattern of territoriality exhibited by Snowy Owls at Horicon
iMarsh seems clear, I do not wish to intimate that wintering owls behaved only
in this manner. In all likelihood, those birds which settled in open farmland
did; for instance, one that I caught and marked on the Arlington Prairie, north
of Aiadison, was routinely spotted on the same square-mile area for at least a
month. Keith's (1960) observations on the Portage Plains near Delta, Manitoba,
implied similar behaviour.

What appeared to be a significant deviation from this pattern was displayed
by that portion of the wintering population which frequented many of the
larger lakes and lake shores. These birds could be seen on pressure ridges

1964

Keith: Territoriality Among Snowy Owls

Table 1. — Summary of data on size of Snowy Owl territories at Horicon Marsh, Wisconsin,

January-February, 1961

Description and Sex
of Owls

Period Owls Under
Observation (Days)

Maximum Distance

(Miles) Between

Observations

Approximate Area

(Sq. Mi.) Outlined

By Observations

All Orange (female)
All Blue (female)
Green Ring Wing (male)
Light Unmarked (male)
Dark Unmarked (female)

57
50
49
36

1.6
1.6
1.1
1.1
1.0

1.0
0.8
0.5
0.3
0.2

during the day, often a mile or more from shore; they probably hunted over
adjacent uplands at dawn and dusk. H. C. Mueller (pers. conmi.) noted such
movements on several occasions. This was probably the same type of behaviour
reported to me by H. A. Hochbaum (Keith, 1960). The stomach of a male
Snowy Owl that was accidentally killed after being trapped on Lake Mendota
contained the remains of five mice, which could hardly have been taken on
the lake ice.

During the weekly traverses of Horicon Marsh, it was noticed that owls
tended suddenly to become conspicuous about an hour before sunset. This
trait had earlier been mentioned to me by F. N. Hamerstrom. Their increased
conspicuousness at this time was due to the utilization of trees as hunting
perches or observation posts. During mid-day, most owds roosted on the ice
or upon muskrat houses. The above behavioural pattern was most pronounced
on clear sunny days. I spent too little time on the Marsh in the early morning
to say for sure that high perches were used then also, but I suspect they were.

The only vocalization that I heard from Snowy Owls was a cry reminiscent
of a Red-tailed Hawk, Buteo jamdcensiis; only higher in pitch and not so loud.
One bird that I attempted to trap on a building in Madison made numerous
strikes at the trap without getting caught, and on landing nearby uttered a
shrill "kreee" over and over again.

Rough-legged Hawks, Buteo lagopus, were very common at Horicon during
the winter of 1960-61, and frequently attacked Snowy Owls. The hawk was
the aggressor in all conflicts witnessed by me. Such attacks were neither
persistent nor intensive like those reported on the breeding grounds (Sutton
and Parmelee, 1956), amounting usually to no more than one or two dives at a
perched owl. Both species, of course, tend to invade southern regions in large
numbers during the same winters (Speirs, 1939).

Reference is often made to the shyness of Snowy Owls and the difficulty
with which they are generally approached (outside the nesting season), both
in the North and during their southern invasions. My own experience tends
mainly to support this contention, thus the behaviour of the owl previously
referred to as All Blue may be of interest. This individual's chief perches
were situated along the Main Ditch (Figure 2) near a favourite ice-fishing area
in the Federal Refuge. Within a week after fishing began. All Blue seemed
completely conditioned to the presence of human beings. She would sit for
hours not more than thirty to forty feet above the fishermen. On one occasion

The Canadian Field-Naturalist

Vol. 78

three of us were looking for pellets beneath a tree that she was perched in.
After watching us intently for several minutes, she flew to another tree about
one hundred yards away, but shortly thereafter returned and perched only
twenty feet above us.

Summary

1 . Territorial behaviour of Snowy Owls at Horicon Marsh, Wisconsin, during
the winter of 1960-61 is described.

2. Territories were defended against other snowy owls wintering in the area,
and a captive owl that was placed within three different territories was
attacked.

3. The observed size of five territories ranged from 0.2 to 1.0 square miles;
their maximum lengths were 1.0 to 1.6 miles.

4. Other aspects of behaviour displayed by wintering Snowy Owls are dis-
cussed.

References
Berger, D. D. and F. Hamerstrom. 1962. Manniche, A. L. V. 1910. The terrestrial

Protecting a trapping station from raptor
predation. Journal of Wildlife Manage-
ment 26(2): 203-206.

Berger, D. D. and H. C. Mueller. 1959.
The bal-chatri: a trap for the birds of
prey. Bird-Banding 30(1): 18-26.

Deane, R. 1902. Unusual abundance of the
snowy owl (Nyctea nyctea) in New
England and Canada. Auk 19(3) :271-283.

. 1907. The snowy owl (Nyctea

nyctea) not generally abundant in the
winter of 1906-07. Auk 24(2) :217-219.

Gillese, J. P. 1960. White raider from the
North. Weekend Magazine 10(3) :9, 27.

Gross, A. O. 1927. The snowy owl migra-
tion of 1926-27. Auk 44(4) : 479-493.

. 1931. Snowy owl migration —

1930-1931. Auk 48(4) :501-511.

1944. Food of the snowy owl.

Auk 61(1): 1-18.

. 1947. Cyclic invasions of the

snowy owl and the migration of 1945-1946.
Auk 64(4): 584-601.

Hagen, Y. 1960. The snowy owl on Har-
dangervidda in the summer of 1959. Papers
of the Norwegian State Game Research,
2nd Series, No. 7. 25 pp.

Hicks, L. E. 1932. The snowy owl inva-
sion of Ohio in 1930-31. Wilson Bulletin
44(4):221-226.

Keith, L. B. 1960. Observations on snowy
owls at Delta, Manitoba. Canadian Field-
Naturalist 74(2): 106-112.

Keniston, a. 1927. Trapping and banding
owls during their migration. Bulletin of
the Northeastern Bird-Banding Associa-
tion 3 (2): 39-42.

mammals and birds of north-east Green-
land. In Denmark-Ekspeditionen til Gr0n-
lands Nord0stkyst 1906-1908. Meddelelser
om Gr0nland 45:1-200.

Meade, G. M. 1948. The 1945-46 snowy
owl incursion in New York State. Bird-
Banding 19(2):51-59.

Mitchell, M. H. 1947. Snowy owls in
Peel Co., Ontario. Canadian Field-Natura-
list 61 (2): 68-69.

Pitelka, F. a., p. Q. Tomich and G. W.
Treichel. 1955. Breeding behavior of
jaegers and owls near Barrow, Alaska.
Condor 57(1): 3-18.

Pleske, T. 1928. Birds of the Eurasian
tundra. Memoirs of the Boston Society of
Natural History 6(3) :lll-485.

Snyder, L. L. 1943. The snowy owl migra-
tion of 1941-42. Wilson Bulletin 55(1):
8-10.

. 1947. The snowy owl migration

of 1945-46. Wilson Bulletin 59(2):74-78.

. 1949. The snowy owl migration

of 1946-47. Wilson Bulletin 61(2) :99-102.

Speirs, J. M. 1939. Fluctuations in num-
bers of birds in the Toronto region. Auk
56(4):411-419.

Stoner, D. 1943. The 1941-42 snowy owl
incursion in New York State. Bird-Banding
14(4):116-127.

Sutton, G. M. and D. F. Parmelee. 1956.
Breeding of the snowy owl in southeastern
Baffin Island. Condor 58(4) :273-282.

Watson, A. 1957. The behaviour, breed-
ing, and food-ecology of the snowy owl
Nyctea scatzdiaca. Ibis 99(3) :419-462.
Received for publication 18 March 1963

SPRING AND SUMMER PHENOLOGY AT
BAKER LAKE, KEEWATIN, N.W.T., DURING 1959-62

Charles J. Krebs
Department of Zoology, University of British Columbia, Vancouver.*

There are very few phenological records for the Canadian arctic taken at the
same place over a series of years. The following observations were made at
Baker Lake (64° 19' N, 96° 02' W) in central Keewatin during a four-year
study of lemming populations sponsored by the Arctic Institute of North
America.

Weather

Table 1 summarizes the temperature and rainfall data for 1959-62 as
gathered by the Baker Lake Meteorological Station. There was considerable
variation between these four summers. In temperature they ranked: 1960
(warmest) > 1961 > 1962 > 1959 (coldest), and in rainfall 1959 (wettest)
> 1962 > 1960= 1961 (driest).

Table 1. — Temperature and rainfall data during the summers of 1959-62
at Baker Lake, and the mean values for 1950-60.

June

July

August

Mean Monthly Temperature (°F)

1959

1960

1961

1962

Mean 1950-60

Total Rainfall (in.)

1959

0.89

1.78

2.71

1960

0.14

1.28

1.11

1961

0.37

0.24

1.98

1962

1.24

1.49

1.73

Mean 1950-60

0.73

1.55

1.72

Phenology

Figure 1 presents data on eleven physical and biological events of the spring
and summer phenology in the Baker Lake area. Most of these events are self
explanatory. Pedicularis lanata is usually the first flower of the season and
Epilobium ladfoliwn is usually the last plant to bloom (excluding grasses, sedges
and willows). Plants in unusual situations were disregarded in determining the
dates when blooming began.

"Present address: Museum of Vertebrate Zoology, University of California, Berkeley.

The Canadian Field-Naturalist

Vol. 78

Comparison of Growing Seasons

Information on the amount of standing forage in sedge marsh habitats at
the end of each summer's growing season was gathered on paired enclosed and
open quadrats in order to measure the effect of lemmings on their forage.
These data, reported in detail elsewhere (Krebs, 1963), show a steady increase
in forage produced from 1959 to 1962 in both the open and enclosed quadrats:

1959 1960 1961 1962

Enclosed 100% 139% 168% 175%

Open 100% 124% 150°% 192%

The reasons for this steady increase in production remain unknown. The
yields are poorly correlated with temperature and rainfall, cannot be attributed
to the grazing effects of lemmings (which peaked in 1960), and are not due to
changes in techniques.

Discussion

Bruggemann and Calder (1953) have pointed out that spring phenology
appears to be later as one moves north to about Baker Lake and Chesterfield
Inlet, but in the high arctic above this latitude spring comes slightly earlier.
Savile (1959) has supported this observation, and the data presented here also
seem to fall into this pattern.

Table 2 summarizes the reported dates of first flowering for two species
which occur at many of the localities studied, and shows that the high arctic
stations have as early or earlier springs as Baker Lake.

There is some difficulty in comparing dates of first flowering for all these
different areas because it is not always clear whether this refers to the earliest
date the species was found in flower in the most favorable situations (e.g. on
the south side of a large rock in dark soil) or the earliest date the species was
found in flower in a normal, open tundra situation. I have used the latter
meaning. For the species from Baker Lake discussed here these two dates
would differ only sHghtly; in other situations these dates could differ by as much
as two weeks.

Table 2. — Phenological comparison of eastern arctic stations.

Date of first flowering

Saxifraga oppositifoUa

Dryas integrifoUa

Alerts 1951

8 June

1 July

IsachsenS 1954

20 June

1960

18 June

—

Chesterfield InletS 1950

22 June

6 July

Frobisher BavS 1948

—

22 June

Baker Lake, 1959

6 July

10 July

1960

14 June

16 June

1961

24 June

27 June

1962

30 June

4 July

^Bruggemann and Calder, 1953.
^Savile, 1961.

1964

Krebs: Phenology at Baker Lake

FIRST GEESE SEEN

MAJOR THAW BEGINS

MAJOR BIRD MIGRATION

RUNNING WATER ON TUNDRA —

LONGSPURS BEGIN LAYING

SEDGE GROWTH BEGINS

PEDICULARIS LAN ATA IN BLOOM —

LOWER THELON RIVER BREAKUP —

LONGSPUR HATCHING BEGINS —

MOSQUITOES OUT IN FORCE —

EPILOBIUM LATIFOLIUM IN BLOOM —

MAY JUNE JULY

Figure 1. Spring and summer phenology at Baker Lake, Keewatin, 1959-62.

Summary

L Four years' data on eleven physical and biological events of the spring and
summer phenology at Baker Lake, N.W.T., show wide variation between
years.

2. There is also great variation in the amount of standing forage produced in
wet habitats, and this does not seem to correlate well with temperature,
rainfall, or with the season's phenology.

3. The evidence presented seems to support the observation of Bruggemann
and Calder (1953) that high arctic stations have earlier springs than do low
arctic stations like Baker Lake.

References

Bruggemann, P. F. and J. A. Calder. 1953. of Arctic Institute of North America,
Botanical investigations in northeast Elles- February, 1963.

mere Island, 1951. Canadian Field-Na- Savile, D. B. O. 1959. The botany of

turalist 67:157-174.

Krebs, C. J. 1963. The lemming cycle at
Baker Lake, N.W.T., during 1959-62. Sub-
mitted for publication in Technical Papers

Somerset Island, District of Franklin.
Canadian Journal of Botany 37:959-1002.

1961. The botany of the north-

western Queen Elizabeth Islands. Canadian
Journal of Botany 39:909-942.

Received for publication 8 April 1963

A DISTRIBUTIONAL SUMMARY AND SOME
BEHAVIORAL NOTES FOR SMITH'S LONGSPUR,

Calcarius pictus.

Emerson Kemsies and Worth Randle
University of Cincinnati, Cincinnati, Ohio

Since publication of the Fifth Edition of the A.O.U. Checklist of iSiorth
American Birds the winter distribution of Smith's Longspur has been more
accurately defined by an increase in pubHshed observations. These observa-
tions have appeared in such journals as the Auk, Wilson'' s Bulletin, the Migrant
(Tennessee), the Texas Ornithological Society Newsletter, and Mid-South Bird
Notes. Other records, the authors have garnered from direct correspondence
with such well-known ornithologists as Ben Coffey in Tennessee and Tom
Imhof in Alabama. A brief summary of records, other than for Ohio which is
summarized separately, will indicate the present distributional status. Begin-
ning in 1951, Smith's Longspurs began to turn up at Lonoke, Arkansas, where
fifteen were identified on December 24. Since that time Ben Coffey, et al,
working nine airports and a few pastures, have compiled a number of records
ranging from the latter part of November to early March. As many as 155
were seen at Ft. Smith Airport on November 26, 1955, and 110 the next day at
Hot Springs Airport, but totals dropped considerably thereafter until Aiarch
11. He has recorded varying numbers up to 1960. Coffey and his colleagues
working in nearby Mississippi, located eleven Smith's Longspurs at Sanders
Field on November 29, 1953, the first record for the state. Subsequently, and
up to 1960, this species was discovered at four other airports throughout the
entire winter; they were in small flocks of not more than fifteen birds. In
Tennessee on November 22, 1953, Ben Coffey found the first state record for
the species at the Memphis Penal Farm; on November 28 he counted a flock of
twenty-seven Smith's. In two other places in Tennessee Coffey reported this
Longspur in small numbers intermittently through 1959, extending from the
latter part of November through mid-March. Meanwhile, Horace H. Jeeter,
working in Louisiana, discovered the first state record of this longspur on an air-
port north of Shreveport, on December 13, 1952. On January 25, following,
Jeeter counted 46 individuals in the same place. He noticed that these birds
always occurred in the same patch of a characteristic grass which was later iden-
tified as of the genus Aristida. (In two birds collected by Coffey, one in
Tennessee and one in Aiississippi, seeds of this same grass were found.) As in
the other Southern States, Jeter's records show a numerical dechne during
February; while 100 were still present on March 1, none were found on March 8.
In Alabama, Tom Imhof found the first Smith's Longspur for that state on an
abandoned Birmingham airport on December 5, 1955. One was still there on
January 17. Another was found on pastureland near Marion in December of
1957 and two more near Montgomery feeding on waste grains of wheat in
December of 1958.

1964 Kemsies and Randle: Smith's Longspur 29

Although Ridgway (1901) Hsts northwestern Indiana and Illinois in his
distributional summary for pictiis at the turn of the century and the authors
have made several recent observations and collected two specimens from Jasper
County, Indiana, in April of 1955, the first conclusive record of Smith's Long-
spur for Ohio was not established until April 18, 1949, at the Miama University
Airport, near Oxford in Butler County, when four specimens were collected,
all males in advanced molt (Kemsies, 1950). Since that date, the species has
been found there regularly each spring and once in the fall. There is an old
record of two specimens of C. pictus reportedly taken by Clark P. Streator
at Ravenna in northeastern Ohio on January 29, 1888 (Jones, 1904). In the
original note, no mention was made of the disposition of the specimens. Exten-
sive search by Kemsies has failed to locate them. Streator's date of late January
is amazing in light of Ohio observations in the past twelve years, inasmuch as
this species has not been seen at Oxford before March 15 in spring and only
once in fall, on November 15. These birds have usually appeared during the
last week of March and have departed by late April. At least one specimen
has been taken during each of the first ten years of observation; these are in the
University of Cincinnati Collection.

Elsewhere in Ohio, records may be summarized quickly: Arthur B. Wil-
liams (1950) lists two possible sight records for May 8 and 24, 1924; Irving
Kassoy and Donald Smith found an estimated flock of 250 in Walnut Town-
ship on April 15, 1956 (Pickaway County); Milton B. Trautman saw three on
April 16 in the same general area, 150 on April 19, fifty on April 22, thirty on
April 23 (he collected one on this date), and two on May 1 (in the company
of Edward S. Thomas of the OSU Museum). On April 3, 1954, Trautman and
Kemsies collected one in Auglaize County at the State Fish Hatchery. From
April 15 to 29, 1956, Neil Henderson recorded a flock of about twenty-
five Smith's Longspurs at the Cuyahoga County Airport; he saw one or two
here in March and April of 1957 and April of 1959, also.

The regular occurrence of this species at Oxford Ohio Airport every year
in rather large numbers poses many interesting questions concerning its distri-
bution and migration. Although as many as 250 individuals have been noted
at one time at the airfield, it is not known how many birds pass through the
area nor the length of time individuals remain. A summary of banding records
emphasizes a general paucity of information concerning this species. Previous
to 1958 only five Smith's Longspurs had been banded — all juvenals at Churchill,
/Manitoba. A. V. Harper banded three on July 15, 1933, and G. B. Happ banded
two on July 17, 1941. After several unsuccessful attempts due to strong sea-
sonal winds, Ronald Austing and Edward Johnstone trapped and banded the
first adults, two males and a female at the Oxford Airport on April 14, 1958.
Using mist nets set at places preferred by the longspurs, the three birds were
"herded" with considerable difficulty to within twenty feet of the nets and
then quickly flushed into them. The following year, 200 pounds of cracked
corn were used as bait, and the birds were quick to find it. From March 28
to April 23, thirty-nine Smith's Longspurs were caught and banded. Five were
retraps — two of the birds banded on April 4 M^ere retaken on April 10, six
days later; another banded on x\pril 4 was retaken on April 23, nineteen days

30 The Canadian Field-Naturalist Vol. 78

later; one banded on April 10 was recaptured on April 18, eight days later; and
another banded on April 10 was retaken on April 23, thirteen days later. In
1960, cracked corn was tried again, but the birds showed no interest in it.
Additional bait — seeds of clover, orchard grass, and lespedeza — was tried
without success. Six birds were eventually banded at a nearby puddle of water
where seventy to eighty came regularly just before noon to drink and bathe.
Again unfavorable winds prevented the capture of more longspurs. Thus, a
total of forty-eight were banded during the three-year effort.

On November 15, 1958, Jay M. Sheppard (1959) collected two Smith's
Longspurs from a flock of thirteen birds seen at the Oxford Airport. These
specimens are in the University of Cincinnatti Collection and mark the only
fall date for Ohio. Professor W. D. Klimstra of Southern Illinois University
examined the crops of both specimens. He writes, "We have examined the
crops of the two Smith's Longspurs. In the case of both there were two species
of plants represented: Sporobolus vaginiflorus and Digitaria ischaeimim. In
both cases Sporobolus represents over ninty-nine per cent of the seeds. I
would not stake my life on the species identification; however, I am reasonably
sure that it is correct." It is interesting to note that no seeds of the genus
Aristida were discovered in the crops of these two birds although Aristida grass
occurred in the field where they were collected.

Detailed information about this species' general habits and behavior is
meager. Birds at the airport are often very unwary and may be approached to
within fifteen or twenty feet. When first flushed they are likely to fly close
to the ground for a distance of only twenty or thirty yards. Repeated flushing
usually results in the birds spiraling high, occasionally out of sight, and remain-
ing aloft for several minutes. The rattling call notes are commonly given as
the birds take wing, but are also heard on the ground. These notes are similar
to those of the Lapland Longspur, but some observers believe that they can
detect a difference in quaUty between the two species. A group of birds calling
overhead may induce others on the ground to join them in flight, or vice versa.

In August, 1958, Kemsies had the opportunity to visit Churchill, Manitoba,
to see the species on its breeding ground. Through the kindness of A4rs. H.
L. Smith, he was able to visit four areas where the Smith's Longspur occurs.
At one location a male flew up from the tundra and perched in a black spruce,
about eight feet from the ground, giving the alarm rattle steadily. A few
minutes later two nearly full grown young and a female flew up from the
ground near the base of the spruce. The elevated perch of the male astonished
Kemsies, who had previously seen the species only on the ground.

According to our observations at the airport and in northwestern Indiana
fields. Smith's Longspurs do not associate with the Laplands, Calcarhis lap-
ponicus, unless they are forced into close proximity by such circumstances as
a general disturbance of migratory concentration or by crowding during the
peak of the massive migration of lapponicus. Mrs. Smith mentioned that she has
recorded lapponicus at her feeding station in spring, when both lappojiicus and
pictus are present in the area, but that she has never seen pictus anywhere in
town. She also indicated that, usually, most of the Smith's departed before the

1964 Kemsies and Randle: Smith's Longspur 31

end of August. In the spring, both birds are found around Churchill for a
short period, but they apparently never associate.

In 1959 and 1960, Kemsies undertook a taxonomic study of the species to
determine whether there might be subspeciation as with lapponicus. From an
examination of 240 specimens, the species pictus was subdivided into three races
—an Ontario race breeding along the Hudson Bay coast, a Churchill race breed-
ing north and west from that place, and a Central Alaskan race (Kemsies, 1961).
So far it would appear that birds migrating as far east as Ohio come from
both Alaska and Churchill. There is only one migratory record of the Ontario
race and this is from Kansas.

The authors hope that with increasing observation of the Smith's Long-
spur more data may be compiled to present a more detailed map of the distribu-
tion of the species and its races and to gain further knowledge of its behavior.

References

Coffey, Ben B., Jr. 1954. Smith's Long- . 1961. Subspeciation in the

spur in the Mid-South. The Migrant 25(3) Smith's Longspur, Calcarius pictus. The

46. Canadian Field-Naturalist 75(3): 143-149.

- ^^ ^^ o • 1 , T RiDGWAY, Robert. 1901. Birds of North

Jeter, Horace H. 1953. Smith s Longspur: and Middle America, Part L The Fringil-

an addition to the Louisiana hst. The Wil- y,^^^ (Finches) Bulletin of the United

son Bulletin 65(3) :212. St^^^s National Museum 50(Pt. 1) 715 pp.

Jones, Lynds. 1904. An addition to the Sheppard, Jay M. 1959. Sprague's Pipit and

Birdsof Ohio. The Wilson Bulletin 16(3) Smith's Longspur in Ohio. The Auk

85_ 76(3): 362-363.

Williams, Arthur B. 1950. Birds of the

Kemsies, Emerson. 1950. Smith's Long- Cleveland Region. Cleveland Museum of

spur in Southwestern Ohio. The Wilson Natural History, Scientific Publication 10.

Bulletin 62(1) :37. 215 pp.

Received for publication 20 May, 1963

FLOWER VARIATION OF Epilobiwn angustifolium L.
GROWING OVER URANIUM DEPOSITS*

Hansford T. Shacklette
United States Geological Survey, Denver, Colorado

Flower color variation in fireweed, Epilobium migustifoliu?n L., is known
throughout the wide range of this common species. In its North American
range Anderson (1959, p. 350) describes the color as "petals . . . rose-purple
or occasionally white or pink." Fernald (1950, p. 1058) states, "petals
magenta or pink (rarely white)," and lists two color forms as being "occa-
sional" and "local." Hulten (1947, p. 1146) says, "The whiteflowered type
with white sepals, f. albi'jlormn (Dum.) Hausskn. is not rare, nor is f. spectahile
(Simmons) Fern, with white flowers and red sepals. Specimens with more
or less striate or darkveined petals also occur." These forms mentioned by
Hulten were discussed in more detail by Fernald (1918, p. 4). Gleason (1952,
p. 586) gives the flower color as "petals purple, varying to white" and adds,
"Numerous varieties and forms have been described, but the variants within
our range seem to be environmental rather than genetic."

The experience of the writer has been that the species, from a numerical
standpoint, shows a remarkable uniformity of color throughout a great variety
of habitats. The plant is so common in the north temperate to arctic regions
that it often forms a blanket of color over vast areas, particularly on disturbed
sites where logging, road building, or fires have produced an ecological dis-
turbance. Yet in all this abundance of flowering specimens, variations in color
from the usual magenta were seldom found. Certain ecological forms may
have somewhat more intense color in an adverse environment, such as in over-
drained, poor soil or at their altitudinal limit. Reduced sunlight tends to in-
hibit color development, thus paler forms are often found on shaded sites.

In Alaska this plant often assumes "aspect dominance" along the high-
ways during its flowering season, frequently growing on the road shoulders
through areas where it is unable to grow elsewhere. It is classified as a nitro-
philous species by Braun-Blanquet (1932, p. 239), its occurrence on disturbed
soil apparently being related to the more rapid nitrification in such soil.
Analysis of this plant as found growing under natural conditions in Alaska
reported by Sweetman and Bundage (1960, p. 4) show it to have an
unusually high protein content (average 19.4 percent of dry weight), which
indicates that it most probably has a high nitrogen requirement for optimum
development. If the hypothesis of Sutcliff^e (1962) is correct, viz., that the
protein molecule is the principal "carrier" of ions from the soil solution
across the cytoplasmic membrane and into the cytoplasm and central vacuole,
plants with a high rate of protein synthesis should be especially active in
absorption of salts from the substrate. Sutcliffe says (1962, p. 163), "Salts
diffuse across the cellulose cell wall ... to the surface of the cytoplasm where

^Publication authorized by the Director, United States Geological Survey.

1964 vShacklette: Flower Variation of E. cmgiistifolhmi 33

they become attached to protein molecules located in the surface membrane . .
. . As a result of protein synthesis, new sites are created to which salts may be
bound, and uptake from the medium continues as long as newly synthesized
protein is being exposed at the external surface." From this it appears that
plants having a high rate of protein synthesis and the accompanying increase
in salt absorption may be more affected by unusual substrate chemical com-
position than are those having a low rate.

The writer, in driving over the highways of Alaska, British Columbia, and
Yukon Territory, has scanned the roadsides for the occurrence of abnormally
colored flowers of this species. On the Haines Highway near Dezadeash Lake,
British Columbia a variant was found which was easily seen from a consider-
able distance. Closer examination showed the variation to be limited to a large,
many-stemmed clone, in which the sepals and petals were almost pure white
with only a touch of pale pink near their bases. In the summer of 1960 six clones
of light pink variants were observed, all in the vicinity of Circle Hot Springs,
interior Alaska. No other color variants were seen during three summers of
field work in many areas of Alaska having extremely diverse habitats.

Field studies of this species were made by the writer in 1948 while he was
a member of the Port Radium Expedition of the Botanical Gardens, University
of Michigan, for the Detection of Hereditary Mutations in Plants, an expedi-
tion supported by the Office of Naval Research, U.S. Navy. The principal
areas of study were in the vicinity of Port Radium, at Sawmill Bay, and at
Dease Arm, all on Great Bear Lake, Northwest Territories, Canada, although
observations were also made at Coppermine on Coronation Gulf, and at Great
Slave Lake. Fireweed was found in profusion in all these areas and was one
of the plants under close observation for variation in color or other character-
istics. No variation was seen until a study was made of this species growing
in the vicinity of uranium ore at Port Radium. Here immediately adjacent to
the "glory hole" (the site of the original uranium ore discovery and from which
ore had been removed by surface mining) and in the small drain leading there-
from to the bay was a colony of fireweed having great variation in color. The
variants occurred as individual clones, each having uniformity of color within
the clone. Eight of these were selected for study, and descriptions of flower
color were made before the specimens were dried in the plant press. A com-
parison of these clones is given in Tablue 1. It should be noted at this point
that quite near the site of these Epilohiinn variants were found the clones of
Vaccmhnfi iiliginosiifn L. which exhibited a remarkable diversity in fruit shapes
(Shacklette, 1962).

In regard to the six clones of fireweed having pale pink petals mentioned
earlier, it is noteworthy that in this part of Alaska there is greater-than-average
ground radiation associated with the localized intrusive granitic rocks. In dis-
cussing radioactive deposits in the Circle Hot Springs area Nelson, West, and
Matzko (1952, p. 15) conclude that there is httle hope of discovering commer-
cial concentrations of uranium in this area by the use of portable survey meters
because of the widespread cover of vegetation, soil, and disintegrated bedrock;
but they add "On the other hand, this area, particularly the watershed of Port-
age Creek, cannot be ruled as unfavorable for the occurrence of uranium in

34 The Canadian Field-Naturalist Vol. 78

lode deposits, because of the relatively high uranium content of water and the
presence of uranothoriate in concentrates from Portage Creek. Prospectors . .
. . will probably find that geochemical methods of prospecting, such as water,
soil, and vegetation sampling, would be the best techniques to use in the search
for uraniferous lodes in the area." A description of the color variant found
here (clone No. 9), as well as of a "typical" plant of this species from this
region (clone No. 10) is given in Table 1, and the two forms and their pollen
are illustrated in Figure 1, A, B, D, and E.

Mr. Robert M. Chapman, Geologist, U.S. Geological Survey, reports in
correspondence (College, Alaska, February 21, 1963) the occurrence of a
single group of white-flowered fireweed near the Richardson Highway in the
vicinity of Paxon, Alaska. He writes that although no anomalous areas of
radiation are known to occur near here, "There is some mineralization of gold,
copper, and some other metals, and the possibility that this particular fireweed
might have been subjected to more than normal radiation cannot be entirely
ruled out."

A specimen of white fireweed has been kindly sent the writer by Mrs.
Florence R. Weber, Geologist, U.S. Geological Survey, College, Alaska, who
collected it "east of Fairbanks International Airport, elevation 435 ft., side of
small road, open woods, on silty soil of the Tanana River floodplain, June 20,
1959." She states in correspondence that it "was the only white one amidst a
group of normal colored plants ... it is the only white fireweed I have ever
seen." The dried herbarium specimen (Figure 1, C), which is in full flower,
shows no trace of anthocvanin in any of its parts, the leaves are much narrower
and shorter (maximum, 4.7 cm long, 6 mm wide) than usual for the species, and
the entire plant has a slender aspect. The flower parts are smaller than those
of typical plants. The locality and substrate from which this specimen came do
not suggest any unusual environmental conditions.

While examining the field notebooks (lent me by Dr. Howard A. Crum,
National Museum of Canada) written by the late Dr. Louis H. Jordal during
his botanical explorations on the south side of the Brooks Range, Alaska, the
following entry was found: "Wiseman, Alaska, June 21, 1949 . . . The people
have been commenting on a peculiar Epilobiinn angnstijolhim which is said
to have arisen on some heaps of mine diggings at Nolan. It is reported to have
greenish flowers, not to spread, and never set seed. The kids brought over a
couple of clumps of these to my cabin, where I dug them in along the north
wall. Maybe they'll revive." A later entry (Wiseman, July 18, 1949) is as
follows: "2328, Epilobium angustifolmm i. albiflorum (Dum.) Hausskn. Albino.
Only local stand, around old cabin whereto once brought from dump of mine
tailings at Nolan where this variant is said to have occurred spontaneously only
once. Does not spread, and perhaps not produce viable seeds. Flowers pure
white." This specimen (No. 2328) presumably is from the clumps trans-
planted to his cabin as mentioned in his first entry, and is preserved in the
Herbarium, University of iMichigan. In addition to this specimen there is
another variant of this species, referrable to E. angustijolimn f. spectabile (Sim-
mons) Fern., in this same herbarium, and which is recorded in his field notebook
(Wiseman, July 18, 1949) as follows: "2326. Epilobhim angiistifalhnn L. In

Shacklette: Flower Variation of E. angustifoliu?n

0)
60

■3

60 £3
0) w

_o
3

13
E

E
i-,

■0

_o
3

3
E

c°8
.ill

E c

—

"3
a

ID (U

IT »-.

1) a

a)
XI

1-1

_0J

13
ft

<U 3

3
•a

.-a!

60 .^

.S '"

■^ OJ C13
OJ " c
rt) ^H c

£; >-

c
'a
01
13
ft

E
3

01
E
■-•5

0) 3

oSii

OJ
u

■V

^ 5

60 CS 3
C ft U

^Is

ca 0) 60

•a 1-
S '="x;

s5|

01 cdXl

bO
V 3

.t:

60
V 3

.ti

.tl
11

3
ft

•- 0)

SE
3.£f

^S2

XI
60
S 3

.ti

-TS^'Z 0)
1 ft cSXI

3 Sf cs
E^5

60
S 3

60
S =
X3 b

c
■3

01
3

oJ
3 0)

'S
>-•

3
OJ
OJ

'3
3

oj3

OJ
_3
XI
_o;
13

■ZJS

>. 60

■XI X5

"5
a
>.

3
•a

1!
>>

"ft
1-,
3
P.

P.
i-,

3
ft

_o;
ft

.£3

•a

"o!

-a
1

X!
Scot

0) L, 3

lis

1
E

ii3

S3
.-

> bo

C
»o;

a; rt
.ti 0)

^ 60

ftt;

2"3
35

-a
1

d 60

ft c

■3

0)
0>

_0)

a
U(
3
a

-3
-a
01

m 60

CO.

CS 0)

•a ft

13
01
ft

60-5
0) a!

>T3

•c
1

■a

01
1-1

_0)

C
0)
60

ca
E

■a

13
a,

a
01

—
■3
a

ftS
11

60 3

T3
0)

OJ S 3
u 3*"

>.^ s

01.:; ft
> ft c«

■ft"' 2 M

0) Mg-S

<" CO ^

60-5.3

Eg-g

U 0) 1*^
m 60 §,13

E E ftft

60
.. 3

So!*

0! 1- ■"

1) E E

OJ 3 £

ftci

■a
1

c
'ft
x:

V
bO
ta
E

6
a

0.
5«

6
c

■3

B
"0

ft
w

3
&;
E
'o

a
w

3
1

to
to
d

3
01

E
'0

0.
w

00
d

60-2

ft
w

dc"

uio'
ftO

in-*

.^ 01

.2: ta-"

E<3 OT

■3 . " 0)

0) >c ■c,'3
fto r oi

36 The Canadian Field-Naturalist Vol. 78

more or less dense stands, in drained open situations. Petals pale, sepals deep
purple. Wiseman."

From the evidence presented above it appears that the color variants of
iireweed, although generally rare, are frequently (but not invariably) associated
with the occurrence of substrates having unusual properties. This observation
prompts a closer examination of the nature of this variation, with a search for
causal relationships. First, a genetic evaluation of this plant will be suggested,
although Michaelis ( 1954, p. 294) says, "A complete genetic analysis in Epilo-
biinn is not yet possible . . ." Most research on inheritance in this genus has
been done with species other than E. angustifoliimi. Schwemmle (1924) states
that all Epilobimn species have the same number of chromosomes, that is, n =
18. However, abnormalities in the genome complement of pollen are known,
resulting in hypohaploid and hyperhaploid conditions. Michaelis (1954, p.
293) writes that the normal haploid pollen grain in the Onagraceae family has
three large germ pores, the hypohaploid pollen has only one or two germ
pores, and the hyperhaploid pollen has more than three germ pores. Air. John
R. Keith, Department of Botany, University of Michigan has kindly examined
pollen of my specimens No. 6405 (f. spectabile) and No. 6406 (f. "typicinn"),
both from Alaska, and the Alaskan specimen (f. albijlonim) of Mrs. Weber
(Figure 1). He reports (in correspondence): "Basically, all three forma have
the same type of pollen, as described in your iViichaelis reference; that is, the
pollen is essentially all haploid. The occurrence of the diploid grains in
'typicum' indicates no unusual irregularity, from the standpoint of percentage
of normal grains. For a more statistically valid account I made observations
of 387 grains of your ''typicinii' sample, of which only 2 were diploid. To
obtain a correlation for this figure, I counted 243 grains from a slide of E.
angustifoliimi from Isle Royal, iMichigan, in the University of Michigan refer-
ence collection, and obtained 43 diploid grains. I do not know why this re-
ference specimen should have a much higher percentage of diploid forms than
your 'ty picimf' —perhaps it is actually some sort of variant . . . Measurements of
these grains give the following sizes (across body only, pores not included):
albijlorum, 62 microns; spectabile, 60 microns; Hypiciim'' haploid, 59 microns;
'typicimf diploid, 61 microns."

From these studies it appears that color differences in these forms are not
related to different conditions of ploidy in the male gametophyte. It should
be added that dwarfing or heterosis, which are often associated with abnormal
ploidy, were not found by field observations at Great Bear Lake to distinguish
the color variants from the normal plants, although Mrs. Weber's pure white
form from Alsaka (Figure 1, C) was somewhat reduced in size of its parts. This
suggested genome stability may favor an increased rate of radiation mutations,
as concluded by Nilan ( 1956, p. 156) who reports, "Thus ... it has been gener-
ally accepted that polyploidy influences [reduces] the apparent frequency of all
mutations in a similar vein. Furthermore, it has been held that reduplication of
genes confers a buffering ability which enables the polyploid to tolerate greater
X-ray damage and to exhibit fewer mutations than the diploid."

Michaelis ( 1954) presents abundant evidence of cytoplasmic inheritance by
means of postulated "plasmons" in Epilobimn which act in concert with, or

1964

Shacklette: Flower Variation of E. cmgustijoliuni

Figure 1. Plants and pollen, Epilobium angustijoliwn forms. A, plant and D, haploid
pollen of f. ''typicu7n'\ B, plant and E, haploid pollen of f. spectabile. C, plant and F,
haploid pollen of f. albiflorum. G, diploid pollen of f. "typicu??!".

38 The Canadian Field-Naturalist Vol. 78

antagonistic to, certain genes in producing phenotypic expression of character-
istics. He says, in speaking of the plasmon of E. hirsutiim Strain Jena (1954,
p. 307) that a large number of Fi crosses and backcrosses show that the cyto-
plasms are not all alike, and that their differences can be transmitted over an
indefinite number of generations. These cytoplasmic differences, however,
cannot be associated with certain phenotypes. The observed phenotypes, ex-
pressed as distorted leaves, stunted or heterotic growth forms, abnormal occur-
rence of, or lack of, anthocyanin, and so forth are believed by Michaelis to be
due to disturbances of the gene-cytoplasm relations. He further holds that
these cytoplasmic factors (plasmons) can change in a manner at least analogous
to mutations, which he prefers to call "alterations." They are reported (1954,
p. 298) to "maintain their reaction norm even while subject to the influence
of a foreign nucleus for as long as 24 generations." Exposures of the plants to
radiation (lOOOr to a sublethal dose) and fertilizing the plants with radioactive
phosphorus and sulfur produced no unquestioned cytoplasmic alterations.
However, among the phenotypic effects produced were growth stimulation at
low doses, fine spotting of leaves, anthocyanin formation in the vegetative
zone but not in the inflorescence, and transformation of flower buds to vegeta-
tive buds (1954, p. 351-352).

An explanation of this cytoplasmic-nuclear interaction is offered by the
hypothesis of Ross (1948) that disharmonious interaction between gene and
cytoplasm may disturb the enzyme balance in varying degrees, and may be ex-
pressed, for example, by inactivation of oxidative enzymes thus making the
anthocyanins disappear. Treatment with heteroauxin, reduction of respiration
by low temperatures, cultivation under short-day conditions, and excess car-
bohydrate accumulation diminish these disturbances, whereas high temperatures
or long-day conditions tend to increase them (Michaelis, 1954, p. 307-308).
These reported differences in response may oft'er a partial explanation of the
changes in E. angustijolmm discussed in this paper, for the observed variations
were all in an environmental of long-day growing season, and at least in some
habitats occasional high temperatures during this season in the individual
microhabitats. Michaelis (1954, p. 309) states, ". . . [cytoplasmic] differences
were found even among strains that lived distances of only 0.5 to 3 km. apart.
The cytoplasm of strains that lived in the same geographical area, but in differ-
ent ecological niches— for example, in dry ground or moist ground, turned out
to be different."

A rather special type of "inheritance" in this genus, the transmission of
plastids through the pollen tube and their incorporation into the new zygote, is
reported by Michaelis (1954, p. 295) to result in paralbomaculate plants. In
his experimental plants it occurred only rarely, and could not be produced by
X-ray radiation (2000r to 9000r). However, this phenomenon may be the
explanation of the "more or less striate" petals mentioned by Hulten (1947).

Whether the variations reported in this paper are produced by cytoplasmic
or nuclear alterations, the variants described in Table 1 can be discussed in
traditional heredity terms. From this table it is apparent that the color of the
various flower parts is inherited separately (not linked). For example, the
clone (No. 4) with the palest petals has the reddest filament bases, whereas the

1964 Shacklette: Flower Variation of E. angustijoliuni 39

clone (No. 6) having the most intense magenta flowers had filaments that were
white throughout. The range of colors through the anthocyanin series seems
to indicate a cumulative color effect; in the absence of breeding experiments, it
is suggested that this range may be due to multiple genes existing as three or
more pairs of alleles. The color series shown by the anthers, i.e., both antho-
cyanin and xanthophyll, may indicate that this inheritance is determined by
multiple alleles, with either the gene for anthocyanin or the gene for xantho-
phyll production occurring in an individual clone. There could also exist at the
same time the condition of multiple genes, which would explain the anthocyanin
range of variation; variation in xanthophyll, however, was not observed.

These postulated multiple alleUc mutations are of a type that can be caused
by ionizing radiation mutagens (in the Port Radium location, alpha, beta, and
gamma radiations from the uranium ore). The low level of radiation provided
these plants in this natural habitat during the long period when plant occupancy
of this site was possible is believed to be sufficient to have caused the variations
that occurred. In this matter Sparrow and Pond (1956, p. 135-136) state that
exposure of flowering plants to low levels of chronic gamma radiation did result
in an increase in the number of somatic mutations, and conclude, "... muta-
tions are produced to a significant degree with low dose rates, a nonlinear re-
lationship has frequently been found to exist between the number of induced
mutations and the dose rate, and seasonal and biological variations affect the
degree and nature of the radiation effect."

Nilan (1956, p. 158), in discussing the effects of temperature on plant
radiosensitivity, says, "Less extreme temperatures have also been effective in
altering the radio-sensitivity of plant tissues. Generally speaking, tissues
irradiated in temperatures ranging from 0°C. to 20°C. are more sensitive than
when the radiation is conducted at temperatures slightly above or below this
level." It should be noted that in the regions considered in this paper a fair
estimate of ambient temperature range during the growing season is just that
mentioned by Nilan above.

Mutations of a single gene are expected to produce changes in one factor
in differing degrees, or less commonly, to affect different characters (Snyder
and David, 1957, p. 352). These authors (1957, p. 353) further point out, "Two
identical genes at corresponding loci mutate independently, just as different
genes do." The resulting heterozygosity in respect to these alleles normally
would segregate and recombine in succeeding generations, thus producing
genotypic variants which could reproduce indefinitely by vegetative means, and
which would result in clones of specific and uniform phenotype.

The variation of the flower parts considered together demonstrates the
fact that the cause of mutations, whatever it may be, is not a gross environmental
cause affecting all genes alike. It is suggested that here the long exposure of this
genetic stock of fireweeds to a radioactive substrate has provided sufficient time
for many such mutations to have occurred, and that these mutations have been
preserved in the offspring to be phenotypically expressed according to the well-
known principles of heredity.

From these observations it is apparent that the comment of Gleason (1952)
—that in the range of his study the variations are environmental, not genetic—

40 The Canadian Field-Naturalist Vol. 78

does not agree with the conclusions regarding variants in the area of this study.
Throughout this area examples of variation were rare, even in very diverse
habitats. The occurrence of occasional isolated variants as mentioned in the
literature cited and as observed by the writer could be caused by "normal"
mutagenic processes to which organisms everywhere are exposed. Their rare
and isolated appearance is the situation to be expected; it is not necessary to pos-
tulate an abnormal environment as the causative agent. Deposits of radioactive
minerals constitute "environment" in a very special dual sense. The effects of
radiation on the organism may in certain cases be only physiological, e.g.,
inhibition of normal growth and development or even favoring growth as
reported by Cannon (1957, p. 475, 481), Sparrow and Pond (1956, p. 132),
and others. This effect results in the production of transient forms that may be
equated with ordinary climate or edaphic variant forms which are not within
the scope of taxonomic consideration. On the other hand, the variants produced
by natural radiation mutagens resulting in genetic change are not in the same
category as the former, but could be considered for taxonomic recognition of
a low rank.

Isolated variants are expected to be the result of recessive mutant genes,
which in a population of normal dominant alleles would attain phenotypic ex-
pression only rarely until sufficient time had elapsed to permit the recessive
mutant gene to be widely distributed through the population. This is a slow
process, for even though the mutation does not reduce the competition potential
of an individual, the disparity in proportion of diaspores of normal versus mu-
tant forms increases greatly with the distance from the original mutant. Thus
the mutant form would tend to be "smothered" by the predominant normal
form by sheer force of numbers of new seedlings in the restricted areas avail-
able for invasion and ecesis that occur in an essentially "closed" community.
It can scarcely be imagined that the type of variation discussed in this study
could give a competitive advantage to those individuals having it.

The great variability within the limited area of the Port Radium uranium
deposits can be explained by the increased mutation rate due to more radiation
dosage than at other sites having only "background" dosages. The possibility
of identical gene mutations having occurred at different times is not remote, for
mutations occur more often in some directions than in others. It is known that
many genes mutate to a certain allele more frequently than to another. This
accumulation of numbers of mutant recessives greatly increases the chance of
large numbers of homozygous recessives appearing in the population and of
the mutant genes being rather quickly dispersed throughout this area of very
limited extent. These individuals may soon outnumber the normal dominant
homozygous types. A colony of clones could therefore be produced which
would show the areal intensity of variation observed in the Port Radium
colony, and be perpetuated indefinitely by clonal offshoots.

The concentration of variants found here definitely indicates the location
of the radioactive ore that is present. Geobotanical interpretation of variation
in a species must depend on the greater-than-average frequency of occurrence
in a localized area, and is thus analogous to geochemical evaluations which de-
pend on anomalous values based on an established background value. Therefore

1964 Shacklette: Flower Variation of E. angustifolium 41

the geobotanical prospector must have a conception of variation frequencies of
a certain species, even though it may not be possible to reduce it to quantitative
values because of the vast range of many species, and insufficient observations.
These variations, however, can be adequately expressed by rather subjective
terms such as "rare," "infrequent," "common," or "abundant." Where fre-
quency of occurrence of variants begins to become apparently greater than this
conception of normal frequency, environmental factors may be causative sus-
pects. Where frequency of occurrence is areally concentrated far in excess of
the conceptual norm, edaphic pecuHarities are strongly indicated. Where
variants of a definite character are produced experimentally by definite edaphic
modifications, the geobotanical relationship is proven. This latter procedure
was followed by Cannon (1957, p. 415) in "salting" soils with radioactive
agents. Naturally occurring variation in a species can be of use to geo-
botanical prospecting only if these relationships are properly evaluated.

Numbered specimens referred to in this paper were presented to the
Herbarium, University of Michigan, Ann Arbor. The writer wishes to ac-
knowledge the encouragement and helpful criticism of the late Professor H. H.
Bartlett, Department of Botany, University of Michigan, who was the director
of the Port Radium Expedition. He also wishes to express appreciation for the
advice and assistance of Dr. William C. Steere, the leader of the field party on
this Expedition. The support given by the Office of Naval Research, U.S.
Navy, is gratefully acknowledged. Appreciation is extended to the Director,
U.S. Geological Survey, for permission to use material acquired while the
writer was employed by this agency. Dr. William S. Benninghofi^, Department
of Botany, Dr. Rogers McVaugh, Curator of Phanerogams, and Mrs. Jennie V.
A. Dieterle, Herbarium Botanist, all at the University of Michigan, are also
thanked for their assistance in this study.

References

Anderson, J. P. 1959. Flora of Alaska and Hulten, Eric. 1947. Flora of Alaska and

adjacent parts of Canada. Iowa State Uni- Yukon. Lunds Universitets Arsskrift, new

versity Press, 543 pp. series, section 2, 43 (1): 1069-1200.

Braun-Blanquet, J. 1932. Plant sociology. iMicHAELis, P. 1954. Cytoplasmic inheri-

McGraw-Hill Book Company, New York. tance in Epilobiutn and its theoretical sig-

439 pp. nificance, ifi Advances in Genetics 6: 287-

Cannon, H. L. 1957. Description of indi- 401. Academic Press, New York. 488 pp.

cator plants and methods of botanical Nelson, A. E., W. S. West, and J. J. Matz-

prospecting for uranium deposits on the ko. 1952. Reconnaissance for radioactive

Colorado Plateau. United States Geologi- deposits in eastern Alaska. United States

cal Survey Bulletin 1030-A4, pp. 399-516. Geological Survey Circular 348. 21 pp.

Fernald, M. L. 1918. American variations Nilan, R. A. 1956. Factors governing plant

of Epilobium section Chamaenerion. Rho- radiosensitivity, in Radioactive Isotopes in

dora 20: 1-10. Agriculture, pp. 151-162. United States

. 1950. Gray's manual of botany, Atomic Energy Commission. Government

eighth edition. American Book Company, Printing Office, Washington. 416 pp.

New York. 1632 pp. Ross, H. 1948. Uber die Verscheidenhei-

Gleason, H. a. 1952. Illustrated flora of ten des dissimilatorischen Stoflfwechsels in
the northeastern United States and adja- reziproken Epilobium-Bastarden und die
cent Canada, 2: New York Botanical Gar- physiologisch-genetische Ursache der re-
den. New York. 655 pp. ziproken Unterscheide. V. Uber die Per-

The Canadian Field-Naturalist

Vol. 78

oxydaseaktivitat in gehemmten und enthe-
mmten Wuchsformen reziproker Epilo-
biu?n-BiiSta.rde mit der hirsutmn-Sippe
Jena. Zeitschrift fiir Vererbungslehre 82:
187-196.

ScHWEMMLE, J. 1924. Vcrgleichcnd zyto-
logische Untersuchungen an Onagraceen.
Deutsche botanische Gesellschaft, Berlin
Berichte 42: 238-243.

Shacklette, H. T. 1962. Fruit variation in
Vaccinhmi uligmosuni L. Canadian Field-
Naturalist 76 (3): 162-167.

Snyder, L. H. and P. R. David. 1957. The
principles of heredity, fifth edition. D. C.
Heath and Company, Boston. 507 pp.

SpARROVi^, A. H. and Virginia Pond. 1956.
Some cytogenetic and morphogenetic ef-
fects of ionizing radiation on plants, in
Radioactive Isotopes in Agriculture, Uni-
ted States Atomic Energy Commission,
pp. 125-139. Government Printing Office,
Washington. 416 pp.

SuTCUFFE, J. F. 1962. Adineral salts absorp-
tion in plants. Pergamon Press, New
York. 194 pp.

SwEETMAN, W. J. and A. L. Bundage. 1960.
Better forage for Alaska's dairy industry.
University of Alaska Agricultural Ex-
periment Station Bulletin 30. 9 pp.

Received for publication 30 June, 1963

AN EXTENSION IN THE BREEDING RANGE OF
BREWER'S BLACKBIRD IN ONTARIO

O. E. Devitt

83 Harding Blvd., Richmond Hill, Ontario

In Canada prior to 1943, Brewer's Blackbird (Euphagus cymiocephahis) was
considered a bird of the western provinces. Tavemer (1934) in Birds of Canada
gives its range as "from Manitoba west to the coast". In adjacent mid-western
American states a definite eastward movement by this species has been noted
since early in the present century (Lyon, 1930; Roberts, 1932; Schorger, 1934;
Mayfield, 1949). Bent (1958) says "the Brewer's Blackbird seems to have
extended its range eastward in recent years, and it has now been recorded as a
breeding species in Ontario, Eastern Minnesota, Wisconsin and Illinois".
Walkinshaw and Zimmerman (1961) state that during the twentieth century
it has "extended its breeding range eastward — to central, and possibly eastern,
lower Michigan".

The purpose of the present paper is to review the status of this species in
Ontario and to document an eastward extension in breeding range of 143 miles
in 1962 and a further eastward extension of seventy-eight miles in 1963, as well
as to record intermediate summer occurrences hitherto unreported.

A male collected for the Royal Ontario Museum of Zoology by Clifford E.
Hope at Lake Attawapiskat in northern Ontario on June 5, 1939 marked its
first reported occurrence in Ontario (Baillie, 1953). This remained the only
record until Dr. A. E. Allin observed a small male blackbird with straw-
coloured eyes at Port Arthur during the summer of 1943. On June 13, 1945,

1964

Devitt: Extension of Brewer's Blackbird

ftv

> —

Figure 1. Summer records of Brewer's Blackbird in Ontario. Large dots indicate locality
records; circled dots are where the species has been known to nest. Triangles designate
where specimens have been taken.

44 The Canadian Field-Naturalist Vol. 78

a colony of at least eight birds was found in the same locality, a cleared area,
eight acres in extent, by Allin and Dear (1947). A male was collected on June
14 and L. S. Dear found a nest containing four young to establish the first
breeding record for Ontario.

The twelve Brewer's Blackbirds recorded by Walkinshaw and Zimmerman
(1961), as having been seen by E. E. Kenaga on September 1, 1948 at Longlac,
were probably early fall migrants.

Allin and Dear located a second colony of Brewer's Blackbirds in Paipoonge
Township, Thunder Bay District, in 1952 but could find no nest (Baillie, 1953).
In 1955 a nest with five eggs was found there by Dr. MacLaren on June 5
(Allin and Denis, 1955). By 1955, the species was established in summer in five
areas around the Lakehead (Baillie, 1955).

Brewer's Blackbirds have nested in a willow-grown muskeg area at Fort
Frances, Rainy River District, since 1951 according to Leslie Patterson (Baillie,
1961). They remained until 1957 when the immediate area was burned over.
Mr. Patterson saw adults feeding newly-emerged young on several occasions.

Further evidence of an eastward movement in Ontario came to light when
Dean Amadon and Jeff Carleton, en route home after attending the Wilson
Ornithological Club meeting at Douglas Lake, Michigan, saw a pair near Garden
River, half way between Sault Ste. Marie and Echo Bay, June 17, 1953 (Baillie,
1953). By coincidence, the writer, his wife and D. S. Miller returning from
the same meeting two days later (June 19) also saw a pair of Brewer's Blackbirds
along No. 1 7 Highway near Echo Bay.

At Sault Ste. Marie, Dr. and Mrs. J. M. Speirs and William Morris found
a nest containing four young on June 6, 1954. Mrs. Speirs located two more
nests on June 11 (Speirs, 1954). A fourth nest with five eggs and a fifth nest
containing well-developed young was discovered a few days later by D. M.
Wood in the same colony, which was located at the eastern city limits of
Sault Ste. Marie in a quarter-mile stretch between the highway and the railway
(Wood, 1955). At Echo Bay, fourteen miles east of Sault Ste. Marie, two
more pairs were known to be resident, but breeding evidence was restricted
to adults carrying food to young and carrying away excretory pellets. A
careful search failed to reveal the young (Speirs, 1954). One bird seen seven
miles east of Thessalon on July 31, 1959 and another at Blind River on August
4 of the same year have been recorded by Speirs ( 1959).

On July 1, 1962, a small colony of five pairs of Brewer's Blackbirds was
discovered by the writer and his wife at the easterly outskirts of McKerrow,
in Baldwin Township, Sudbury District, 143 miles east of Sault Ste. Marie.
The birds were frequenting a narrow band of territor)" between the railway
and Highway No. 17. A search disclosed two young birds, out of the nest,
but as yet unable to fly. The young were easily captured, photographed and
released. A dead female that had been hit by an automobile on the highway
was recovered and sent to the Royal Ontario Museum. The writer had occasion
to travel the same highway on August 11, 1962 and noted Brewer's Blackbirds
at the following points: Echo Bay, 3; Blind River, 4; McKerrow, 16. The
following day a group numbering twenty-five was noticed at the westerly limits
of Copper Cliff to mark their most easterly observed occurrence for that year.

1964 Devitt: Extension of Brewer's Blackbird 45

While en. route to Sudbury on May 31, 1963 to check for possible nesting
sites of Brewer's Blackbirds, the writer and his wife were surprised to come
upon two pairs at Rutter, thirty-seven miles south of Sudbury, in Bigwood
Township, Sudbury District. After watching the actions of the birds for half
an hour, we decided that they must be nesting in a marsh alongside Highway
No. 69. After a short search we flushed a female from a nest of five eggs.
The well-built nest of grasses and rootlets was placed in the centre of a clump
of dried rushes, approximately fifteen inches above the water of the marsh.
The outside diameter of the nest measured six inches while the inside width was
four inches. The nest and eggs were collected and sent to the Royal Ontario
iVIuseum. With the exception of a small stand of narrow-leaf cattail (Typha
a?igustifolia) near the road and a few Spiraea sp. and red-osier dogwood {Cornus
stolonijera) bushes around its borders, the marsh occupied by these birds
consisted of almost pure Scirpus cyperinus (L.) Kunth. and covered approxi-
mately ten acres. A dense growth of alders {Alnus sp.) and willow {Salix
sp.) grew along the west and north sides of the marsh.

Besides the Brewer's Blackbirds other birds noted in the immediate vicinity
were the Short-billed Marsh Wren {Cistothorus platensis), Yellowthroat
(Geothlypis trichas) and Traill's Flycatcher (Empidofiax traillii).

Rutter is seventy-eight miles east of McKerrow, the previous most easterly
breeding locality for this species.

The Copper Cliff area was re-examined on June 1, 1963, and about one
half mile west of the town two pairs of Brewer's Blackbirds were found that
showed strong attachment to a small cattail marsh along the railway tracks.
One pair, in particular, protested our intrusion but no nest was located. The
behaviour of the birds indicated probable nesting.

About five miles farther west along Highway No. 17 and approximately
one mile west of the intersection of Highway No. 536 to Lively, we saw a male
Brewer's Blackbird gathering a beakful of insects.

At McKerrow, on the same day at least five pairs were again occupying
a quarter-mile stretch of territory adjacent to the highway. Three nests were
located, all built on the ground in low cover. The nests were made of fine
sticks and grasses and lined w^ith fine rootlets. In size they averaged six inches
outside width, with a cup four inches in diameter and a depth of two inches.
The first nest contained four newly-hatched young plus one e^^. It was half-
hidden beneath dead bracken (Pteridimn aquilinum) and a small Spiraea sp.
A second nest, which held five young about a week old, was located about one
hundred yards to the east of the first nest; a third nest contained five t^^s. Two
other pairs were definitely on territories and apparently nesting but the actual
nests were not located.

Vegetation surrounding the three nests was essentially the same and,
besides bracken and spiraea, consisted of wild strawberry {Fragaria sp.), wild
raspberry (Rubus sp.), blueberry (Vaccimiem sp.), Aster sp., goldenrod
(Solidago sp.), fringed polygala (Poly gala paiicifolia), false lily of the valley
{Maianthermnn canadense), ground pine (Lycopodium ohscuriim), willoM-
(Salix sp.), common yarrow (Achillea 7nillefolium) and sweet fern (Myrica
asplenifolia). Across the highway from the nesting colony was a large alder

The Canadian Field-Naturalist

Vol. 78

{Ahnis sp.) thicket which was used to some extent by the blackbirds as perching
sites, although the preferred lookout seemed to be the telephone wires.

An additional breeding locality was discovered by the writer on July 1,
1963 in A4acGregor Township, Thunder Bay District at the junction of High-
ways No. 17 and No. 587, near Pass Lake. At least four pairs were occupying
wet grassy fields bordering the highway. Two nests were located in low
vegetation on dry knolls. Both were sunken in depressions so that their tops
were flush with the ground. One contained three young about a week old,
plus one &Q,g\ the other had four small young and an unhatched tgg. This area
is twenty-three miles east of Port Arthur.

As an indication of the remarkable increase in numbers of this western
species in Ontario, the writer observed them in thirteen different localities
between Sault Ste. Marie and Sudbury along Highway No. 17 on July 6, 1963,
in groups of up to eight birds.

In view of a similar rapid eastward spread of Brewer's Blackbird in the
United States, especially in the Lower Peninsula of Michigan, it should be
looked for in the lowlands of the Lake St. Clair- Windsor region of Ontario.

References

Allin, a. E. and L. S. Dear. 1947. Brewers
Blackbird Breeding in Ontario. Wilson
Bulletin 59: 175-176.

Allin, A. E. and Keith Denis. 1955. Breed-
ing Records — 1955, News Letter of the
Thunder Bay Field Naturalists Club 9:33
(No. 5, Dec. 21).

Baillie, J. L. 1953. [Region reports] On-
tario-western New York Region, Audubon
Field Notes 7:13-15, 306-307.

. 1955. [Region reports] Ontario-
western New York Region. Audubon Field
Notes 9:377 (No. 5, Oct.).

. 1961. More New Ontario Breed-

ing Records. Ontario Field Biologist 15:1-9.
Bent, A. C. 1958. Life Histories of North

American Blackbirds, Orioles, Tanagers,

and AUies. U.S. National Museum Bulletin

211.
Lyon, W. L 1930. Brewer's Blackbird

Nesting in Illinois. Wilson Bulletin 42:214.
Mayfield, H. 1949. [Spring migration]

Middlewestern Prairie Region. Audubon

Field Notes 3:210-211.

Roberts, T. S. 1932. The Birds of Minne-
sota. Vol. 2, University of Minnesota Press,
Minneapolis.

ScHORGER, A. W. 1934. Notes on the Dis-
tribution of Some Wisconsin Birds. The
Auk 51:482-486.

Speirs, J. Murray. 1954. Brewer's Black-
bird Nesting at Sauk Ste. Marie, Ontario.
Bulletin of the Federation of Ontario Na-
turalists 65:29.

1959. Worth Noting. Bulletin of

the Federation of Ontario Naturalists 85:
23..

Taverner, p. a. 1934. Birds of Canada.
National Museum of Canada Bulletin 72.

Walkinshaw, Lawrence H. and Dale A.
Zimmerman. 1961. Range Expansion of
the Brewer Blackbird in Eastern North
America. Condor 63:162-177.

Wood, D. M. 1955. Nesting of Brewer's
Blackbird at Sault Ste. Marie, Ontario.
Ontario Field Biologist 9:23.

Received for publication 21 July 1963

REPORT OF COUNCIL

TO THE EIGHTY-FIFTH ANNUAL MEETING OF

THE OTTAWA FIELD-NATURALISTS' CLUB

December 3, 1963

During the past year, five meetings of Council were held at the National
Museum of Canada: December 12, 1962, February 28, May 23, October 8 and
November 12, 1963. The average attendance was seventeen members. The
Club's business was conducted in the usual orderly manner.

Appointments for 1963 were made as follows:
Editor, The Canadian Field-Naturalist — F. R. Cook
Business Manager, The Canadian Field-Naturalist — W. J. Cody
Chairman, Publications Committee — D. D. Hogarth
Chairman, Excursions and Lectures Committee — G. R. Hanes
Chairman, Reserve Fund Committee — H. Lloyd
Chairman, Membership Committee — F. H. Schultz
Chairman, Bird Census Committee — G. H. McGee
Chairman, Macoun Field Club Committee — F. R. Cook

succeeded by A. H. Clarke, Jr. in April, 1963
Chairman, F.O.N. Affairs Committee — R. Frith
Chairman, Public Relations Committee — E. L. Bousfield
Chairman, Preservation of Natural Historic Sites Committee —

W. K. W. Baldwin
Chairman, Mer Bleue Conservation Committee — D. A. Smith
O.F.N.C. Representative to A.A.A.S. Council — V. E. F. Solman

At its February meeting. Council elected Mr. Stuart Criddle, longtime
Prairie naturaUst now residing in Sidney, B.C., as an Honorary Member of the
Club. He joined the illustrious company of previously elected Honorary
Members, Dr. Alice Wilson, Mr. Herbert Groh, Dr. Harrison F. Lewis and
Dr. George H. Turner.

Report of the Publications Committee
Since the last report of Council, five numbers of The Canadian Field-
Naturalist have been published. These included the last two numbers of
Volume 76 which contained 112 pages, and the first three numbers of Volume
77 which contained 182 pages, or a total of 294 pages in all. Papers, notes and
reviews were distributed as follows:

Papers Notes Reviews

Botany 5 6 5

Entomology 2 2

Geology 1

Herpetology 3 6 2

Ichthyology 3 3

Malacology 1

Mammalogy 3 4 5

Ornithology 6 19 5

Miscellaneous 2 16

48 The Canadian Field-Naturalist Vol. 78

The editor has reported that Volume 77, No. 4 is in an advanced state of
preparation and should be published shortly. Some manuscripts are on hand
for the first two numbers of Volume 78, but he would welcome more good
contributions.

Expenditures for the year were as follows:

Volumes 76 (Nos. 3 and 4) and 77 (Nos. 1, 2 and 3) $4,469.12

Binding of official Club set of The Canadian Field-Naturalist 36.00

Reprints for volumes 76 (Nos. 2, 3 and 4) and 77 (No. 1) 676.21

Total $5,1 81.33

Report of the Excursions and Lectures Committee

The Excursions and Lectures Committee met three times and arranged:
four lectures (of which one was co-sponsored by the National Museum of
Canada), a film night, six daytime and two evening field trips, four morning
bird walks and the annual dinner. Six Newsletters were issued. The first of
a winter series of six bird identification lectures for beginners was recently
presented by Mr. George McGee and evoked considerable interest.

Approximately ninety people attended the annual dinner at the Experimen-
tal Farm, and heard a most interesting talk entitled "Birds and Men" given by
Dr. D. A. Munro.

The Newsletter now appears under a printed letterhead designed by
Mrs. G. R. Haynes. The Committee purchased a supply that should last about
three years.

Report of the Reserve Fund Committee

There has been no change in the Club's investments during the past year.

Report of the Membership Committee
The committee distributed information on Club activities and solicited
new memberships. Of forty-two new individual members, thirty-five were
active members and seven associate members. In addition twelve institutions
were added as subscribers to the Club journal. No expenses were incurred.

Report of the Bird Census Committee
The forty-fourth consecutive Annual Christmas Bird Census was held by
The O.F.N.C. on Sunday, December 23, 1962. Forty observers in thirteen
groups reported a total of 5,375 birds of forty-five species. While the count
was down slightly from the 6,310 birds of forty-eight species reported in the
1961 Census, two new birds. Common Loon and Loggerhead Shrike, were
added to our all-time list which now stands at eighty-nine species.

The details of the Census were published in the Christmas Census edition
of Audubon Field Notes and, in addition, were circulated to local members in
a Newsletter.

Report of the Macoun Field Club Committed
In terms of total membership, apparent interest of the members in club
activities and in other developments, the 1963 Macoun Field Club season has
been an outstanding success. Attendance at meetings has nearly doubled.

1954 Report of Council 49

innovations in club activities have met with enthusiasm, and the administrative
personnel of the club has been increased from one to three. In addition to
sponsorship by The Ottawa Field-Naturalists' Club, the Macoun Club has now
become an official administrative responsibility of the National Museum of
Canada and is therefore doubly assured of year to year stability.

Regular meetings of the club have been held throughout the year except
for the period from May to September. In April, a newspaper report on the
Macoun Club with coloured photographs was published nationally and much
additional interest was engendered. Attendance, which averaged forty-five
for all three sections in the spring, increased to an average of eighty-five in the
fall. Three field trips were held in May, to Hogs Back and Mer Bleue in Ottawa
and to Fitzroy Harbour Provincial Park in Fitzroy Harbour, Ontario.
A*"tendance on these trips averaged fifty-eight, with many new members
participating.

Speakers at the Macoun Club during 1963 were as follows: F. R. Cook,
D. J. Damas, A. D. DeBlois, H. B. Herrington, S. D. MacDonald, W. W. Mair,
W. R. M. Mason, J. R. McLintock, H. Monahan, V. E. F. Solman, and J. S.
Tener. In addition. Dr. Alice E. Wilson gave a fine series of lectures on the
geology of the Ottawa area.

Officers for 1963-1964 are as follows: Senior Group, President Robert
Bender, Secretary John G. Robertson, Attendance Paul Valentine, Observations
Clair Suddon; Intermediate Group, President David Smiley, Secretary Arthur
Clarke, Attendance Derek Munro, Observations Susan Young; Junior Group,
President Peter Teal, Secretary Chris Fyles, Attendance Colin Barnard, and
Observations Don Beckett.

In April, A. H. Clarke, Jr. replaced F. R. Cook as Macoun Club Chairman
and in the fall the National Museum assigned two staff members, Messrs. A. A.
Ellis and G. Tessier, as assistants. In addition, the club is continuing to benefit
from the dedicated assistance of Mr. Herbert Groh. Further assistance has
enabled additional services to be given such as renovation of the club's collection
of natural history objects, more assistance to members in conducting projects,
assistance with film projection equipment, etc.

Report of the F.O.N. Affairs Committee

The committee during November and December has supervised the usual
sale of Christmas Cards and stationery purchased from the Federation of Ontario
Naturalists and re -sold for the benefit of our Club.

There are no official joint activities of the two organizations to report.
Major Federation functions, usually held in Toronto or points west, had present
on most occasions a small number of members of the O.F.N.C.

Report of the Public Relations Committee

At the request of council members, the committee was active in developing
publicity for the Mer Bleue Project and forwarding news-worthy items to the
Ottawa press.

50 The Canadian Field-Naturalist Vol. 78

Report of the Preservation of Natural Historic Sites Committee

The Committee met once to discuss the preservation of the Mer Bleue
peatland. A report on this subject, with recommendations for action, was
presented to Council. The Committee co-operated with the Excursions and
Lectures Committee and the ad hoc Mer Bleue Conservation Committee to
present to Club members at the regular meeting in March a program of activities
designed to further this project. Later the Committee co-operated with the
Editor of The C.F.N, in planning a series of scientific papers to be written by
interested scientists on various aspects of the Natural History of the Mer Bleue.

No meeting of the Citizens' Committee for Preservation of Historic Sites
was held during 1963.

Report of the Mer Bleue Conservation Committee

This ad hoc committee was set up early in 1963 to co-ordinate a variety
of Club activities to be held under the auspices of other committees— all with
the aim of expressing the urgency for preserving the Mer Bleue Peat Bog and
taking steps to further its preservation. This Committee co-operated with
others in arranging and participating in the special Mer Bleue meeting in March
and a successful field trip to Mer Bleue in June. Moreover, it assisted in
stimulating the efforts of individuals, both within and outside the Club member-
ship, to begin synthesizing our present knowledge of the bog and its inhabitants
into a series of papers to be published in The Canadian Field-Naturalist.

Largely as a result of correspondence with the Club, a meeting of repre-
sentatives of organizations interested in the Mer Bleue was convened in April
by the National Capital Commission. At this exploratory meeting, a Technical
Committee of which our retiring President is Chairman, was set up to give
advice to the National Capital Commission on matters concerning multiple use
of the Mer Bleue in its natural state as part of the Green Belt. The whole
situation is currently under study and the committee is hopeful of a satisfactory
outcome of its actiivties.

Donald A. Smith, Secretary

STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL STANDING
The Ottawa Field-Naturalists' Club, November 27, 1963

CURRENT ACCOUNT

Assets
Balance in bank, Nov. 27, 1963.

Cash on hand

Bills receivable, separates

t, 911. 91

22.20

599.25

Liabilities

Cheques outstanding $ 343 .35

Balance 3,190.01

Receipts
Balance in bank, Nov. 29, 1962.

Fees:

Current $2,860.54

Arrears 139.00

Advance 273.40

Associate 78.00

1,533.36

,868.32

Separates and illustrations.

Sale of back numbers

Miscellaneous

3,350.94

1,994.13

280.89

137.26

!,631.54

$3,533.36

Expenditures

Can. Field Nat. 5 numbers. ... $4,505.12

Separates and illustrations 676.21

Editor's honorarium 200.00

Business Manager's honorarium 100.00

Newsletter 78 . 26

Excursions and Lectures Committee 52 . 25

Macoun Field Club 113.75

F.O.N, affiliation 45.40

Postage and Stationery 188.31

Bank discount 33.00

Miscellaneous 48.48

Bank balance Nov. 27, 1963

plus cash on hand less

cheques outstanding 2,590.76

$8,631.54

RESERVE FUND

Assets
$3 , 000 Ontario Hydro 3 % Bonds,

market value $2 , 737 . 50

20 shares Bell Telephone Stock,

market value 1 , 065 .00

Balance in bank Nov. 27, 1963 411 .43

$4,213.93

Receipts

Balance in Bank Nov. 29, 1962 .... $273 . 77

Bank Interest 8 . 66

Bond Interest 90.00

Bell Telephone Dividends 44.00

$416.43

Liabilities
NIL

Expenditures

Safety Deposit Box

Bank Balance Nov. 27, 1963.

I 5.00
411.43

$416.43

PUBLICATIONS FUND

Assets
$1,500 Ontario Hydro 3% Bonds,

market value

Balance in bank Nov. 27, 1963 . . .

Receipts
Balance in bank Nov. 29, 1962 . .

Bank Interest

Bond Interest

$1,353.75
292.97

$1,646.72

$240.72

7.25

45.00

Liabilities

NIL

Expenditures
Bank Balance Nov. 27, 1963.

$292.97

Audited and found correct (Signed)
R. J. Moore J. M. Gillett, Auditors

(Signed) Anne Banning, Treasurer

REVIEWS

Never Cry Wolf

By Farley Mow at. McClelland and Stewart,
Toronto. 247 pages. $4.95.

The reason I was asked to review this
book, I suspect, was that the editor knew*
I had worked closely with the author in
the North. Farley refers to me as a school
chum he had known in more carefree
days. A glance at the dust cover forces
the incredible admission that I knew him
as a beardless youth! During the period
dealt with in the book Farley was assist-
ing me on the preliminary caribou in-
vestigation conducted by the Canadian
WildHfe Service in 1948-9. But his career
with the Federal Government lasted only
about six months. As the reader is well
able to confirm, Farley wasn't cut out to
be a civil servant. Since his retirement he
has gone on to greater heights and writ-
ten three semi-fiction books based upon
his experiences with the caribou investi-
gation crew.

These books are a fascinating mixture
of fact and fancy with the central theme
of the ineffectual, bumbling civil servant
trying to cope with Mowat's raw north.
This theme finds ready acceptance among
his uninformed readers who cherish the
same point of view. Never Cry Wolf has
been heralded as hilariously funny— and
it is, especially to the few of us who were
involved in the episodes described by
"Squib" in the early chapters. With a fair
share of malice and considerable literary
licence with the facts, he caricatures us
and parodies the Canadian Wildlife Ser-
vice. Most of us are recognizable
through our thin disguises. Lance-Cor-
poral J. Smith is undoubtedly Dr. Dean
Fisher and his banishment to study
sticklebacks on Ellesmere Island is a re-
ference to his later leadership of the
Arctic Unit of the Fisheries Research
Board. I am not so sure of the "Chief",
who clacked ground-hog jaws at Squib.

Dr. Harrison Lewis was then Chief of
the Canadian Wildlife Service. Since he
is a distinguished ornithologist, I suggest
that a room full of pickled cormorant
stomachs would have been more appro-
priate. But, if it is I, as Chief Mammalo-
gist, who is caricatured, I must protest
that I have never given the dentition of
Marwota 7nonax more than a casual
glance. As for joining the federal service
in 1897,-1 suspect that we just looked
that much more mature to Squib.

One caricature I do deplore is that of
Gunnar Ingebritson, of Arctic Wings
Ltd., who flew him from Churchill to
Nueltin Lake. Gunnar was one of that
colourful band of bush pilots, which
served our Arctic frontier with verve.
He effected several exciting rescues, in-
cluding that of the crew of an American
Air Force plane forced down on the
shifting ice floes of Hudson Bay. He lost
his life tragically a few years later in an
Arctic crash. Gunnar's real life was far
more exciting than Farley's shallow cari-
cature.

On the lighter side, however, I found
Farley's comments on our post-war mili-
tary phase quite incisive. I wonder what
he would say about our latest phase of
wearing berets and ceintures flechees!
His description of us as Dantesque
bureaucrats doesn't seem appropriate: I
always pictured us as Caspar Milque-
toasts!

At the risk of being considered pedan-
tic and mundane, 1 would like to set the
record straight on those events so the
reader can appreciate the full measure of
Squib's humour. Farley was only one of
three biologists who assisted in the cari-
bou survey and as he has emphasized, he
was assigned the problem of assessing the
effect of wolf predation upon the caribou.
I prepared the field instructions which
are generously ridiculed in the book, or
else given sympathetically as his own
program. Mowat's suggestion that he was

1954

Revieavs

hired to produce incontrovertible proof
to damn the wolf is a woolly fabrication
of fact. I am sure his disclosure will
come as a shock to those few extremist
members of the hunting fraternity who
have been condemning the same Service
vehemently for years as apologists for
predators and wolf-lovers.

He reports that he was hired at the
munificent salary of |125 a month. Ac-
tually he was hired as a technical officer,
grade 1, at $175 a month, which was the
established scale for a second year Arts
student in May, 1948. He submitted a
very long list of equipment and supplies
which he required, and it was filled. This
included a folding boat, along with an
eighteen foot canoe, tents, outboard
motor, axes, alcohol, smoke generators,
etc. and etc. If he had any complaints
concerning the equipment and supplies—
they were largely due to his own choice.

Mowat's description of the start of his
field work is completely fanciful. He and
Andrew H. Lawrie flew from Ottawa to
Churchill in an R.C.A.F. Dakota. I met
them at the Churchill airport, since I had
been there six weeks carrying out an
aerial survey of the migrating caribou.
Arrangements had already been made to
rent Fred Schweder's cabin at Windy
Bay, Nueltin Lake, Keewatin District,
for $15 a month (not $10 for three
months) to serve as a base to store their
equipment (they planned to tent and
travel extensively by canoe). However,
as Farley states they occupied the cabin
much of the summer and an adjustment
was later made on the cabin rent. It
should be noted that Squib was never
"alone with the wolves". Andrew Lawrie,
a graduate biologist, was his constant
companion all summer and nominally in
charge of the party.

Prior to their arrival, Gunnar, Charlie
Weber (the engineer) and I had flown
to Nueltin Lake, taking much of their
heavy equipment such as canoe, outboard
motor and a cache of gasoline. Even then,
when they were finally flown in the load
taxed the carrying capacity of their
NorseTfian aircraft. (The last JU.52, tri-

motor to fly in Canada was scrapped in
1947). I might also point out that the
Moose Brand Beer served in Churchill
must have packed quite a punch in order
for Squib to rush out of the beer parlor
and catch hold of the wing of the aircraft
landing at the skiplane base five miles
away!

The character of Mike is based upon
Charlie Schweder. He met Farley in 1947,
when Farley first visited Nueltin Lake.
Any reticence on Charlie's part was pro-
bably based upon his experience with
Mowat the year before.

Of course Mowat's various messages in
italics and capitals are sheer bunk! He
was supplied with a Forestry-type radio
transmitter (with extra batteries). Farley
and I set up the radio and tested it at
Churchill before they departed. With it
they communicated with Churchill Sig-
nals until about mid-August when it
became unserviceable and was flown out
for repairs on one of the regular service
flights. The Department exchanged with
Mowat several radio messages and mailed
reports during the summer. It had no
reason to doubt his location unless it was
when Mowat flew out to Toronto and
gave a press interview. (The call letters
assigned to the transmitter by D.O.T.
were CF6E— rather prosaic compared to
"Daisy Mae").

As Farley states he submitted a report
upon his studies. However, there is
nothing in the style, spelling, or grammar
of this report to foretell that it would
some day form the basis of a "best seller".
I abstracted the report and published the
highlights in the preliminary barren-
ground caribou report of 1951, crediting
the observations to Mowat. He now bor-
rows several of my conclusions from
that report such as the importance of
human utilization of the caribou includ-
ing the annual human kill of 100,000 ani-
mals (which I reported in 1951, without
losing my C.S. "head").

During Mowat's "indoctrination"
period in Ottawa, he was given several
books to read including Adolph Murie's
The Wolves of Moujtt McKinley, 1944.

The Canadian Field-Naturalist

Vol. 78

Any resemblance between Never Cry
Wolf and that book is 7iot coincidental.
Much is familiar, including first names
for the wolves and the crawl into the
burrow. Squib disproved no scientific
concepts about wolves— only his own mis-
conceptions. Instead he sets up his own
straw men to bowl over. For instance,
an estimate of 36,000 wolves was pub-
lished by C. H. D. Clarke, in 1940, for the
total caribou range of 600,000 square
miles, not just of Keewatin District.
Wolf bounties have not been paid in the
N.W.T. for many years and were dis-
continued in the Prairie Provinces prior
to 1954. There is no "official" book
which says wolves do not bark.

Farley gives a hilarious description of
his struggle with the use of the Raunkiar's
Circle in range studies. It is evident that
he lacked the equipment and training to
do any nutritional analysis in the field
and was not asked to do it. He literally
interprets the word "throw" in spite of
the detailed instructions that the fre-
quency data were to be collected on
systematic transects at intervals of ten
paces. The situation is comparable to the
technician at a satellite launching pad,
tearing out the control panel when the
monitoring officer exclaims, "All systems
go!". A recent Civil Service pamphlet,
which outlines career opportunities for
biologists, includes a photograph of two
young biologists, on their hands and
knees, staring at a Point Sampler, while
conducting range studies in Wood Buf-
falo Park. It appears therefore that such
studies are still in style for biologists.
Farley was, therefore, well advised to
recognize his limitations in biological
research potential and to seek fame else-
where.

Mowat also curiously telescopes time
in his book. Considering the life ex-
pectancy of a wolf, it is extremely doubt-
ful that George, Angelina and Uncle
Albert would still be around in May,
1959, eleven years after his visit in 1948,

when they appeared to be in the prime of
life. In the meantime there were several
developments which influenced wildlife
management programs in northern
Canada. First of all there was the unpre-
cedented outbreak of rabies among
wolves, coyotes and foxes. Then there
was the continued decline of the caribou
herds. These natural catastrophes neces-
sitated immediate co-operative action as
outlined in my article in the Spring
issue, 1956, of The Beaver. A broad
caribou management program was in-
itiated which placed primary emphasis on
reducing the human kill by tightening
regulations (such as the prohibition of
sport hunting). A part of this program
was the introduction of limited wolf
control (not eradication) by trained
wolf hunters instead of the ineffective
bounty system. Wolf numbers were re-
duced: the rabies epizootic subsided: and
the crop of caribou fawns jumped dra-
matically. Since 1959 the wolf control
program has tapered off. This is the
background of Mowat's fanciful Epi-
logue. The facts are that two control
stations were established on Windy Lake,
27 and 30 miles southwest of "Wolf
House Bay" during the autumn of 1958.
On April 10, 1959, these sites were
visited, records of the wolves taken and
biological information were gathered and
the stations destroyed. No cyanide "wolf
getters" were employed in the District
of Keewatin.

Much of the book consist of a fascinat-
ing embelHshment of Mowat's observa-
tions on the home life of a wolf pack. It
is certain that not since Little Red Riding
Hood has a story been written that will
influence the attitude of so many towards
these animals. I hope that the readers of
Never Cry Wolf will realize that both
stories have about the same factual con-
tent.

A. W. F. Ban FIELD

National Museum of Canada
Ottawa, Ontario

1954

Reviews

Wildlife's Ten-Year Cycle

By Lloyd C. Keith. Madison, University of
Wisconsin Press, 1963. 16 + 201 pp. $6.00
(U.S.).

Dr. Keith's book is in the main a review
of Hterature bearing on the occurrence
and characteristics of the ten-year mam-
mal and bird cycle. The subject is one of
great interest in Canada, for many of its
most striking examples come from the
records of the fur trade in our boreal
forests. Furthermore, the cycle strongly
influences the lives of many Canadians,
from trappers to ammunition salesmen.
As well as providing a survey of data, the
book presents several interesting and
original contributions, and an extensive
bibliography.

The book was written in order to pro-
vide background material for cycle
studies and to point up promising re-
search topics. Available kinds of data are
evaluated, ranging in sophistication from
fur returns to the capture-recapture
census. A technique is demonstrated for
calculating fiducial limits around mean
intervals in serially correlated series of
random numbers, the series being of
various lengths. If the mean interval of a
series of census figures of comparable
length lies outside the confidence limits
given (98% and 95%), the series is con-
sidered non-random, or cyclic in the
strict sense. By means of this technique
evaluations are made of census figures on
the local, regional, and continental levels
in the New and Old Worlds.

The criterion of synchrony is adopted
as of great importance in the validation
of cycles; "strict regularity" is abandoned
as a criterion, and the term "ten-year
cycle" is retained as "a useful description
of the non-random long-term fluctua-
tions" of certain North American fur-
bearers and gallinaceous birds, and the
snowshoe hare. The latitudinal and other-
wise geographical progression of con-
tinental cycles is discussed, as is the
order of amplitude of well-studied ex-
amples. Other characteristics of cycles
and of cycling populations reviewed in-

clude reproduction, mortality, popula-
tion structure, pathology, and beha-
viour.

The last chapter is a review of the
various explanations that have been pro-
posed to account for the ten-year cycle.
The series of population estimates upon
which the generalization rests are not
equivalent to serially correlated random
number series, and the well-known hypo-
thesis of Palmgren and Cole must there-
fore be rejected. Postulated meteoro-
logical influences have the merit of ex-
plaining the synchrony so important in
the earlier review; when sought, how-
ever, they cannot be found, or, if found,
they cannot be related convincingly to
the species concerned. Various theories
including those implicating predator-
prey and relaxation oscillation are ex-
amined. In conclusion, Keith states that
he is "convinced, and assuredly many
others are as well, that none of the fore-
going hypotheses can adequately ac-
count for the ten-year cycle", and pro-
poses a long-term, comprehensive field
study by a diversified team of specialists.

Most students of cycles have been
convinced of their general validity by
certain very impressive series of popula-
tion indices, notably lynx pelt returns of
the Hudson's Bay Company. Field work,
however, has failed to establish a uni-
versal cause for the declines observed and
has even given indications that the con-
spicuous causes, pathological conditions,
for example, may be relatively unimpor-
tant. Cycles observed in laboratory
populations seem to have little direct
relevance to those studied in the field,
and Keith makes no attempt to fit the ten-
year cycle into the formal ecological
framework that has been constructed
around the laboratory data. There is no
discussion of the nature of an oscillatory
biological system. Hutchinson's observa-
tion, from a symposium (1954, Journal
of Wildlife Management 18) to which
reference is made, that a population
might "resonate" by virtue of its intrin-
sic characters such as life history chro-

The Canadian Field-Naturalist

Vol. 78

nology, to one or a combination of subtle
environmental frequencies, was perhaps
considered too general for inclusion.
Similarly the views of Dunbar (1960,
American Naturalist 94) on the insta-
bility of immature ecosystems were not
discussed. A hypothesis recently put
forward by Chitty (1960, Canadian
Journal of Zoology 38) relating the four-
year vole cycle to a postulated general
autoregulatory capacity of animal popu-
lations may have application to the ten-
year cycle and should pehaps have been
mentioned.

In my opinion a major short-coming
of Keith's approach is his apparent re-
jection of earUer contributions to the
problem of cycles. Surely each piece of
research on the ten-year cycle, and each
contribution to the conceptual side of
the problem, has left certain questions
unanswelred and certain hypotheses un-
tested. It would seem unfortunate to
abandon the patient, particulate unravel-
ling of the problems involved along the
lines already begun in favour of a totally
new start. Modern experimental methods
in ecology have perhaps barely had time
to prove themselves wanting in the
answering of the many questions remain-
ing.

The nature of the evidence for the
validity of the ten-year cycle is such that
a completely nonpartisan book might be
impossible to write: the phenomenon,
for example, seems confined to certain
species within a certain area, and it is
difficult not to introduce a bias when
selecting the reports to be evaluated. The
scepticism of the reader is nonetheless
occasionally aroused by such statements
as "when the effects of extensive habitat
restoration schemes and regulated trap-
ping ... are added to the profound in-
fluences of adverse water conditions,
snowfall, etc., ... it is, I think, surprising
that any semblance of regularity should
still prevail" (pp. 43-4), or, "There is
perhaps still a suggestion of a cycle in
the Ontario data" (p. 50). A reference
to a discussion by Lack of the adreno-
pituitary exhustion hypothesis is infelici-

tous: "only as long as such mortality does
not in the long run have survival value"
(p. 112), harking as it does to the no-
man's land of population selection.

In conclusion this book can only be
welcomed. It is attractively produced
and well written. It provides a concise
summary of cycle research and available
census series, and a very useful biblio-
graphy. North American cycle research
is once again, with the development of
modern techniques and concepts, an at-
tractive field of study, as it was when
Clarke and MacLulich made their
famous contributions. The orderly addi-
tion to our knowledge of population
regulation in wild species will un-
doubtedly in time make possible an un-
derstanding of what Rowan called
"Canada's premier problem of animal
conservation."

A. H. Macpherson

Canadian Wildlife Service
Ottawa, Ontario

The Birds

By Roger Tory Peterson and the Editors of
Life. Time Inc., New York. 1963. 192 pp.
Profusely illustrated (64 pp. in full color) .

$3.95.

This is the twelfth in Life's Nature
Library series. In this handsome book
lucid writing is combined with drawings
and colored photographs to give the
reader a clear and up-to-date account of
a great many aspects of birds.

Beginning with the origin, evolution,
and classification of birds it takes the
reader enjoyably through such subjects
as bird anatomy and particular avian
adaptations (especially for flight) the
mechanics of flight, food and feeding
adaptations, distribution, numbers, mi-
gration, navigation, communication, the
breeding cycle, man-bird relationships,
and many other subjects too numerous to
mention.

One noteworthy feature is an up-to-
date breakdown of the numbers of bird
species (1) known to occur or to have

1954

Reviews

occurred, and (2) known to breed, in
each of the countries of North America
and Europe. For the United States and
Canada figures are given for each state
and province. This is the first published
attempt to bring together these figures on
such a wide scope.

The numerous colored photographs are
outstanding, sometimes spectacular.
They, with many drawings and paintings,
illustrate and clarify the text. The latter
is extremely readable and authentic. The
book contains a useful bibliography and
closes with a five-page (four columns
each) index. It is an outstanding popular
treatment of the ways of birds.

W. Earl Godfrey

Principles in Mammalogy

By David E. Davis and Frank B. Golley.
Reinhold Publishing Corporation, New
York. 1963. 335 pp. $8.50.

This excellent textbook follows com-
petitively on the heels of Cockrum's
"Introduction to mammalogy" recently
reviewed by me (Canadian Field-
Naturalist, 77:54). However, the two
works approach mammalogy with dif-
ferent emphasis. Cockrum leans heavily
towards taxonomy while Davis and Gol-
ley are oriented towards ecology. The
authors say that "The material is selected
to provide an idea of how the mammal
lives, not only in its environment, but in
association with other mammals as well".

Chapter titles include "The Kinds of
Animals", "The Nature of Adaptation
and Evolution", "Adaptation", "The Evo-
lution of Mammals", "Zoogeography",
"Reproductive Processes", "Mammahan
Populations", "Metabolism of Popula-
tions" and "Activity and Behavior".

I find the book generally well written
and authoritative. The references are
numerous, although they largely ignore
work done outside of the United States
of America. The book is attractively

bound and well printed, although some
graphs and line drawings appear to have
been rushed to meet a deadline. There is
some lack of evenness between chapters,
probably reflecting the division of sub-
jects between the authors. Chapter seven
is in some places awkwardly written, for
instance (p. 165): "Of some importance
in understanding the lives of mammals is
a knowledge of the clitorus . . ." and (p.
168) "Whales keep the testes within the
abdomen at all times and the penis is held
in a sac . . .". The statement that "rodents
are entirely spontaneous ovulators . . ." is
incorrect. A serious omission is the failure
to include A. V. Nalbandov's "Reproduc-
tive Physiology" among the references
for this chapter.

A keener taxonomic eye would have
prevented the inclusion of a nonexistent
species of whale in a table on page 90.
However, the book is relatively free of
typographical errors.

A professional mammalogist will find
he has no choice but to own both Davis
and Golley's, "Principles in mammalogy"
and Cockrum's, "Introduction to mam-
malogy". The teacher of a course in
mammalogy will consider himself for-
tunate to be in a position to choose from
two texts.

Phillip M. Youngman

The Monarch of Mularchy Mountain

By Bruce S. Wright. Brunswick Press,
Fredericton, N.B. 1963. 149 pages, 40 illus-
trations. $3.95.

This book consists of a collection of
five stories concerning familiar Canadian
mammals: the white-tailed deer; eastern
panther, or mountain lion; black bear;
bobcat and moose. The chapters are not
disconnected however. The scene is the
same in each story— Mularchy Mountain
and the Burnt River Valley, N.B., and
the main actor of each chapter appears
briefly in the previous chapter in a minor
role. For each species, birth, death and

The Canadian Field-Naturalist

Vol. 78

the annual cycle of events concerned
with the four seasons are described.

The natural homeostatic processes in
wildlife populations which tend to main-
tain an integrated community are
stressed. The disruptive forces of human
activity are highlighted and the benefits
to be reaped by sportsmen and farmers
in a balanced biotic community are
pointed out. The game warden and the
wildlife biologist play important roles in
interpreting the wildlife community to
the local populace.

The excellent illustrations, gleaned
from the files of the U.S. Fish and Wild-
life Service, Canadian Wildlife Service,
N.B. Travel Bureau and Colorado Fish
and Game Department, have been clever-
ly worked into the text. The style is
straightforward, even facile in spots,
particularly the description of the stalk
of the white-tail buck— the Monarch of
Mularchy Mountain.

This book is a useful first reader in
animal ecology and wildlife management,
set in the Canadian scene, for students
from about grades seven to ten.

A. W. F. Banfield

National Museum of Canada
Ottawa, Ontario

A Sharing of Joy

By Martha Reben. Harcourt, Brace and
World Inc„ New York. 1963. 183 pp. $4.95.

The dust jacket of this volume proudly
announces its content as "T/^e true story
of amazing friendships in a mountain wil-
derness" (italics mine). If the potential
reader is worried that this might indicate
a somewhat anthropomorphic approach
by Miss Reben, a quick sample of chapter

headings — " Goose Ways", "Treetop
Tumblers", "Duck People", "Miss Prim-
sy's Last Flight" or names for individual
animals— "Goosie", "Philander", "Dump-
ling" or "Wee Willie Winkle" will serve
to assure him that the assumption is en-
tirely warranted. However, despite this,
the text is readable, sincere and entertain-
ing and is reasonably free from the
exaggerations which usually accompany
an approach of this type.

The mountain wilderness is the fast
shrinking forest of the Adirondack
Mountains of New York State, and the
amazing friendships include a variety of
animals, both domestic and wild, from
goat to bear to wasp, which at various
times lived near or with the author.

Miss Reben received her first oppor-
tunity to live out-of-doors after spending
three years in a sanatorium, bedridden
with tuberculosis. Her writing has the
genuine enthusiasm of one who suddenly
contacts a previously unappreciated por-
tion of life. The personalization of the
animals encountered arises from this en-
thusiasm and from the conviction that
each has its own individual qualities.

Her introduction mirrors both her en-
thusiasm and her approach: "I doubt that
one can really know a wild animal unless
it has full freedom in natural surround-
ings. ... I have tried not only to show
the extraordinary diversity of some of
the wild friends I have known, but also
to capture and thereby share a little of the
joy they have given me". Many readers,
especially those who have had the satis-
fying yet often exasperating experience
of sharing surroundings either in nature
or at home with an animal allowed its
freedom, will enjoy this volume.

Francis R. Cook

NOTES

Common Egrets Nesting near
Amherstburg, Ontario

After moving to Essex County, Ontario,
in 1956, 1 enjoyed seeing Common Egrets
(CasTnerodius albiis egretta) in the
marshes along the highways and feeding
in some secluded places. By the summer
of 1958, I was convinced that they were
nesting on the mainland but it was July
1959 before I located a heronry with
egret nests on the mainland between
Amherstburg and Harrow. A mixed
heronry, located on private property, has
had egrets nesting in it since 1954.

The first Common Egrets known to
nest in Canada were found in 1953 on
East Sister Island, Ontario (Langlois,
1953, Audubon Field Notes 7:306). The
following year egrets were found nesting
on islands in the Detroit River and Lake
St. Clair (1955, Jack Pine Warbler 33:8);
this is the first record of nests in Michi-
gan. With nests on islands on three sides
of the county it was difficult to know
where the egrets that came to feed in the
marshes were nesting.

About a mile from Lake Erie and
surrounded on three sides by marsh is the
mixed heronry of about one hundred
nests in a hardwood grove composed
of elm {Ulmus americana) , shagbark
hickory {Gary a ovata), and oaks of dif-
ferent species. The nests vary in size but
are used by Great Blue Herons (Ardea
herodias) and Common Egrets only.
Black-crowned Night Herons (Nycti-
corax nycticorax) and Green Herons
(Butorides vires c ens) have been seen fly-
ing around the heronry but do not nest
there.

Young Great Horned Owls (Bubo
virginianus) were often seen in the woods
in the spring of 1960 and a nest of Bald
Eagles (Haliaeetus leucocephalus) was
found about half a mile from the heronry.

In five years' observations, the Com-
mon Egrets arrive from a week to ten

days after the Great Blue Herons to feed
in the marshes. Feeding grounds surround
the heronry, but because of variations in
water levels, the egrets are forced to
move from season to season and some-
times, as in 1958, several times within one
season.

On July 25, 1959, I first visited the
heronry. There were several nests of
egrets and when the birds were disturbed,
the egrets flew off in groups of fours and
fives. The young herons were not as far
advanced and few were flying.

A second visit was made on August 4,
with Mr. R. D. Ussher, but by this time
the birds landed in the trees and not in
the nests. As the sun set, the egrets as-
sembled to roost in a row of trees near
the heronry and fifty-five were counted.

On April 23, 1960 one week after
arrival, a pair of egrets was seen flying in
and out of the nest. On May 17, Mr. J. L.
Baillie, of the Royal Ontario Museum,
visited the heronry and saw two pairs of
egrets flying in and out of the nesting
area. Eggshells were already on the
ground as the young herons were starting
to hatch.

The first nest was never actually lo-
cated because of the thick foliage. The
second nest was in a dying elm tree with
thirteen other nests, several of which
were occupied by Great Blue Herons.
This second nest raised one young bird,
which was able to fly off after the parents
when I visited the heronry on July 23.

There were more dead herons in the
heronry this year than last, and, on
August 18, a dying young egret was
picked up on the Lake Erie shore and
sent to the Southern Research Station at
Maple.

October 15, (I960), is the latest that I
have seen egrets in the Lake Erie area.
In the Lake St. Clair marshes, Mr. E.
Hueghlin has seen egrets as late as Octo-
ber 30, (1959). The flocks that fly over
these marshes and roost in the trees be-
come quite a spectacle in late summer.

The Canadian Field-Naturalist

Vol. 78

Unfortunately the Lake Erie heronry was
25 miles from my home and the nests
could only be observed on weekends. I
should like to acknowledge the help of
Mr. R. D. Ussher, Park Naturalist of
Rondeau Provincial Park, in this project.
WiNNiFRED Smith

304 Delhi St.
Guelph, Ontario
4 April 1961

A Breeding Record For
The Bobolink in
Prince Edward Island

The Bobolink, Dolichonyx oryzivorus
(L), is relatively common in suitable
areas of Nova Scotia (Tufts, 1961, The
Birds of Nova Scotia), including dyke-
lands and coastal meadows across
Northumberland Strait from Prince Ed-
ward Island. Despite the narrowness of
the strait, nine to about twenty-five miles,
the bird has been infrequently observed
in P.E.I. , most visitors appearing in the
area south of Charlottetown.

In mid-July, 1955, the author first heard
the Bobolink near Grand River, Prince
County, in the western third of the pro-
vince. On June 10, 1957, a male was seen
at Bideford, Prince County, but almost
daily visits there failed to elicit further
sightings. In 1961 several observations
were made at Ellerslie, Prince County:
May 25, 1 male; May 26, 2 males; May 27,

6 males; June 1, 1 male, 1 female. On July

7 four males were seen at Bideford. A
similar record was obtained in 1962 at
Ellerslie: May 19-21, 1 male; May 26, 4
males; June io, 3 males, 3 females; July
18, 1 male. Nests were not sought in the
latter two years but breeding probably
occurred.

Beginning May 20, 1963, five males be-
came established in a riverside meadow at
Ellerslie. On July 1, a ground nest of soft
grass was found containing six fledgelings
and one egg. The advanced young left the
nest during the observation, and the nest
was later abandoned by the family. The
parent birds were frequently observed

feeding their scattered brood during the
ensuing week, and from similar beha-
viour among other adult Bobolinks the
existence of four, possibly five more nests
in the meadow was deduced. The first
flying young was seen on July 4. Singing
and general activity were suppressed
from about July 15 to 21, except for one
pair tending a late-developing brood.
After July 31 no Bobolinks were observed
at Ellerslie until August 23, when six were
seen among a large flock of mixed black-
birds feeding in harvested grain fields.
Singing males were occasionally seen
elsewhere in central Prince County dur-
ing the summer, and several reports
which accurately described the bird were
received.

Considerable meadowland lays fallow
in Prince Edward Island, offering excel-
lent habitat for the Bobolink, and it is
surprising that the species has not long-
since become established. Also, Northum-
berland Strait would seem to present no
great difficulty to this long-range mi-
grant. The question arises then, whether
the Bobolink's current extension of its
range represents a true and continuing
migration path, or a temporary displace-
ment of the Nova Scotian coastal birds
arising from population pressure there.

Stanley E. Vass

Ellerslie, P.E.I.

17 September 1963

A Spadef oot Toad from Manitoba

The most recent published range map
of distribution of the Plains Spadefoot,
Scaphiopus bombifrovs, in Saskatchewan
(Cook, 1960, Copeia (4): 363-364) shows
the eastern limit as the area between
North Portal and Roche Percee, south-
east of Estevan. Incidentally noted in the
text was a single Manitoba locality,
Dauphin.

On July 22, 1963, the junior author
collected an adult Scaphiopus bombifrbns
on his parents' farm, approximately five
miles southwest of the town of Oak Lake,

1964

Notes

Manitoba. It was discovered while he
was hoeing raspberry plants in the gar-
den, about fifty yards from the house, and
appeared suddenly, hopping into the
open from under a raspberry bush. It was
probably disturbed, perhaps unearthed,
by the hoeing. The weather was bright
and sunny and the time about 3 p.m.
The specimen has the darkly pigmented
throat of a male in breeding condition.
It has been catalogued as NMC 7379 and
measures (after preservation) 55 mm
snout- vent length and 18 mm tibia. It
has been compared with Saskatchewan
material of the species and agrees in
colour and proportions.

The Dauphin collection, NMC 1863,
Dauphin, Manitoba, July 25, 1935, C. M.
Sternberg, has been re-examined. It con-
sists of three immature, probably re-
cently transformed, specimens which
measure 28, 24 and 23 mm snout- vent.
The senior author had previously doubted
the provenance of this collection due to
the lack of additional specimens from
Manitoba and because the locality lies in a
northern extension of the forest and
grassland region of Rowe (1959, Forest
Regions of Canada). All known localities
of the spadefoot in Alberta and Saskat-
chewan lie within the grassland region
of these provinces (Cook, unpublished
data). Communication with the collector,
C. M. Sternberg, has verified that he
was in the Dauphin area at the date of
collection, although he does not recall the
specimen nor the circumstances of cap-
ture. The later is of little significance
after a lapse of twenty-eight years.

The Oak Lake locality is also within
the forest and grassland region. This
region is a mixture of prairie and aspen
woodland in which the grassland areas
apparently supply habitat for Scaphiopus.
Bird (1961, Ecology of the Aspen Park-
land of Western Canada) has indicated
that the southern border of this region
fluctuates, and that since 1900 it has pro-
bably extended considerably southward
into the formerly pure grassland. It is
possible that these collections represent

relict populations of spadefoots from a
period of more northern extension of
the grassland region. However, the
species may be wide-spread within grass-
land areas throughout the grassland and
forest region and have evaded discovery
due to their nocturnal habits and sporadic
(only after heavy rains) breeding. Al-
though the senior author and R. A.
Henry spent July and August, 1960, col-
lecting reptiles and amphibians in south-
western and south-central Manitoba, in-
cluding brief periods in the Daphin and
Oak Lake regions, their failure to find
Scaphiopus must have been due to its
secretiveness.

Francis R. Cook
David R. M. Hatch

National Museum of Canada
Ottawa, Ontario, and
Oak Lake, Manitoba
11 October 1963

A Weevil in the Ear of Child
at London, Ontario

On May 5, 1963, at 4.00 p.m., a six year
old girl at London, Ontario, complained
of having "a butterfly in my ear". When
her right ear was examined the posterior
end of a beetle was seen moving about in
the external ear. When removed from the
ear the insect was alive and active and
proved to be a Sweet Clover Weevil,
Sitona cylindricollis Fahr., identified by
Mr. W. J. Brown, Entomology Research
Institute, Department of Agrciulture,
Ottaiwa. The specimen is preserved in the
collection of the Department of Zoology,
University of Western Ontario. After
the -weevil had been removed the child
reported no further discomfort. It had
evidently entered the ear when the child
was playing in the grass in a backyard.

Horsfall (1962. Medical Entomology.
Ronald Press, New York) records that
people have experienced pain as a result
of small beetles entering an ear and then
crawling over the ear drum. Specific
cases of such invasion by scarabeid

The Canadian Field-Naturalist

Vol. 78

beetles are reported by Hallock (1936.
Life history a72d control of the Asiatic
garden beetle. U.S. Department of Agri-
culture Circular 246) and Metcalfe, Flint
and Metcalfe (1951. Destructive a?id Use-
ful bisects. McGraw-Hill, New York).
Maddock and Fenn (1958. Hmnayi ear in-
vasions by adult scarabeid beetles. Jour-
nal of Economic Entomology, 51:546-
547) record invasions of the ears of 186
people at a scout jamboree in Pennsyl-
vania. The scarabeid beetles Cyclocephala
borealis and Autoserica castanea were in-
volved in these cases and caused pain
because the tibial spines of the beetles
pierced the skin of the ear canal.

William W. Judd

Department of Zoology
University of Western Ontario
London, Ontario
12 September 1963

Mass Mortality of Gulls at
Rondeau Park, Lake Erie

On August 22, 1963, the writers found a
large number of dead and dying gulls
along a beach at Ropdeau Provincial
Park, Ontario. This section of beach runs
west from the south end of Rondeau
Park Road; it is composed mainly of
sand, and is some 1.25 miles in length.

Along this beach, eighty dead and four
dying gulls were found. In addition,
several swam a few yards offshore and
refused to flush. Unlike most dead gulls
found along beaches, most of these birds
appeared intact and quite fresh. Four
Ring-billed Gulls, Larus delaivareJisis,
two adults and two immatures, crouched
low with their eyes open, and allowed
themselves to be picked up without
struggling. The dead consisted of sixty-
two Ring-billed Gulls, fourteen Herring
Gulls, Larus argentatus, and four Bona-
parte's Gulls, Larus Philadelphia. One
dead immature Ring-billed Gull carried
band No. 585-77425. No dead terns were
noted although both Common Tern,

Sterna hirundo, and Caspian Tern, Hy-
droprogne caspia, were abundant in the
area.

No signs of "oiling" were found on the
plumage of any of the birds. It is con-
ceivable that the mass mortality may
have been due to local water pollution.

Douglas D. Dow

M. Anne Dow

Department of Zoology
University of British Columbia
Vancouver 8, Canada
15 October 1963

Three New Bird Records for
Prince Edward Island

In W. Earl Godfrey's Birds of Prince
Edward Island (1954, National Museum
of Canada Bulletin 132) Mr. Godfrey
states, "It is hoped that the present re-
port will stimulate ornithological ob-
servation on the island and that observers
will publish such additional information
as comes to their attention". My bird-
watching activities there each summer
enable me to report the following three
new species for this Province.

Little Blue Heron Florida caerulea. On
August 20, 1958, I learned that a large
white bird had been shot by Wilfred
Saunders near one of the fish hatchery
breeding ponds at Tyne Valley, fifteen
miles northwest of Summerside. It had
been passed to a local storekeeper for
safekeeping in his freezer on August 10,
1958. I obtained it from him and sent it
by air express to the National Museum
of Canada, Ottawa, and received word
back that it was the first record of the
Little Blue Heron for Prince Edward
Island and that the specimen had been
prepared for the research collection of
the Museum.

Willet Catoptrophorus sermpalmatus.
Eric Holdway recorded the first Willets
observed in Prince Edward Island. Mas-
ter of the ferry Lord Selkirk which runs
between Caribou, Nova Scotia, and
Wood Islands, Prince Edward Island,

1964

Notes

Captain Holdway takes advantage of the
opportunity to keep complete records of
birds seen during the fourteen mile
crossings. On July 4, 1958, hearing birds
calling, he observed three feeding on the
mud flats 150 feet from his ship, docked
at Wood Islands. Identifying them as
Willets, he gave two quick blasts of the
ship's vi^histle, startling them so that he
was able to see plainly the flashy wing-
pattern. On August 10, 1958, I saw two
Willets at Covehead and one August 29,
1963, at Rustico Island, both areas being
in the National Park of the Province.
Since the breeding range of this species
is extending, observers should be on the
lookout for evidence of breeding in
Prince Edward Island.

Stilt Sandpiper Micropalama himanto-
pus. Near one end of the bridge at Cove-
head there is a sizeable brackish pond
between the road and the ocean beach.
On August 30, 1963, as I drove by, I
noted a Greater Yellowlegs and then a
much smaller bird wading up to its belly
and although I did not at once see its legs
it did not look like a Lesser Yellowlegs
but appeared to be something different.
Flushing it first from one side of the pond
and then from the other I knew I was
looking at my first Stilt Sandpiper, a bird
very uncommon on the Atlantic Coast.
At one time when the Greater Yellow-
legs and the Stilt Sandpiper were feeding
together the difference in their bills was
plainly noticeable, the latter bird's bill
showing a tapering and droop at the tip.
Later, when I was watching from my car,
it emerged from the water fifty feet
away and I was able to see its greenish
legs in a good light. After a thorough
preening it took off in a westerly direc-
tion and finally disappeared from view.
An examination of a study skin of this
species in Fall plumage in the Nova
Scotia Museum of Science further con-
firmed my identification.

WiLLETT J. Mills

5486 Spring Garden Road
Halifax, Nova Scotia
31 October 1963

An Eastern Spiny Soft-shelled
Turtle from Quebec Province

A HATCHING FEMALE Eastern Spiny Soft-
Shelled Turtle, Trionyx spinifer spinifer,
was captured (by J. L.) at lie Perrot,
Quebec, in late August 1962. He Perrot
is at the junction of the Ottawa and St.
Lawrence rivers.

The site of the capture is a small bay
downstream from Brussy Point, one-half
mile downstream from the bridges con-
necting the towns of He Perrot and Ste.-
Anne-de-Bellevue, at approximately 73°
57' W., 45° 22.8' N. (All names and
measurements from the "St. Lawrence-
Lake St. Louise" chart published by the
Hydrographic and Map Service, Ottawa,
1939).

The turtle was found about fifteen feet
from shore while crawling across a small
mudbank which was about two feet wide
and surrounded by water on all sides.
The bay is very shallow— one to two feet
deep— with a fine sand and mud bottom
and with dense subaquatic vegetation.
The shore is boulders and sand, reed
fringed, and backed with low shrubs
growing in swampy ground which is
flooded in spring. The head of a second
turtle of the same species was seen at the
same time. This second turtle was ob-
viously an adult since the head and neck
exposed above water was estimated to be
about two inches long.

There are no known collected speci-
mens of this turtle from Quebec Pro-
vince. Logier and Toner (1961. Checklist
of amphibians and reptiles of Canada a?2d
Alaska, The Royal Ontario Museum)
list it for Iberville, Quebec, on the
Richelieu River. According to Melancon
(1950. Inco7inu et niecoiinu. La Societe
Zoologique de Quebec) it is occasionally
captured in the Richelieu River. Clarke
(1908. The Ottawa Naturalist. 22:7-14)
reports it from L'Ange Gardien, and
Alexandre (1937. Les Tortiies du Que-
bec, Bibliotheque des Jeunes Naturalistes,
Societe Canadienne d'Histoire Naturelle,
Tract No. 39) from Lake Champlain and

The Canadian Field-Naturalist

Vol. 78

the Richelieu River. We also have a sight
record with a photograph from the Pike
River where it enters Mississquoi Bay of
Lake Champlain at approximately 73° 06'
W., 45° 04' N. (P.C: Hon. Mr. Justice
G. M. Montgomery).

The turtle is still alive and in captivity.
The carapace was estimated to be about
30 mm long at the time of capture; at the
time of writing (October 1963) it has
grown to 97 mm. During this time it has
been fed on earthworms and pieces of
raw fish and raw meat.

It will eventually be deposited in the
National Museum of Canada, Ottawa.

Joseph Lovrity
NoRRis Denman

34 Sixth Avenue
He Perrot, Quebec, and
350 WilUam Birks St.
St. Bruno, Quebec
2 October 1963

Breeding Record for the
Bufflehead West of the Coast
Range in British Columbia

The following note reviews the nesting
records for the Bufflehead Bucephala
albeola (L.) west of the coast range sum-
mit in Canada, and presents the first
record of Bufflehead breeding on Van-
couver Island, British Columbia. Brooks
(1917, Auk 34:34) reported a female
Bufflehead and three young on Sumas
Lake, B.C., and Tavemer (1919, Condor
21:80-86) reported a brood seen by
Spreadborough near Hazelton, B.C.
These appear to represent the only re-
corded nesting records for the Bufflehead
west of the coast range summit. Anthony
Erskine (pers. coimn.') of the Canadian
Wildlife Service considers these two
records as accidentals (here meaning a
breeding record in an area outside the
defined and accepted breeding range of
the species).

The following is a summary of inform-
ation I collected on two small ponds two
miles north of Middle Quinsam Lake

(lat. 49° ^y, long. 125° 29') Vancouver
Island. The data are supplemented by
notes supplied through correspondence
with William Munro, of the Canadian
Wildlife Service, and James Bendell and
Peter Elliott, of the University of
British Columbia.

1960. Pond Number 1.

May 29— female with four downy
young about 8-10 days old ("1 b" stage,
1954, Gallop and Marshall, Mississippi
Flyway Council and Technical Council.
A guide for aging duck broods in the
field) and a female with eight 4-6 days
old ("1 a" Stage) downy young. Two
males and a broodless female were also
present.

June 19— two adult females but no
young.

1961. Pond Number 1.

June 7— Elliott observed female buffle-
head leaving nesting hole.

June 9— female with nine downy young
(Elliott).

1961. Pond Number 2.

June, between the 13th and the 20th—
female and two downy young seen by
Munro.

1962. Pond Number 1.

No date— female and brood seen several
times (Elliott).

For a number of summers prior to 1960,
Buffleheads were reported in this area
though no positive evidence of breeding
was detected (Bendell pers. comm.).

These records clearly establish the
Bufflehead as a breeding bird of the
Quinsam area for the years 1960 through
1962.

It is interesting to speculate on some of
the reasons responsible for this recent
invasion. A comparison of the structure
of the vegetation in the Quinsam burn
area, with that of established bufflehead
breeding range, for example the Cariboo
district, suggests much similarity. The
following is a description of the vegeta-
tional structure of the Quinsam area.
Thirty-two thousand acres of logged and
mature timber were burned in 1951. The
present successional stage has much bare
ground, charred stumps, recently planted

1964

Notes

conifer seedlings, and open to dense
thickets of willow (Salix spp.) and alder
(Alnus oregona). Salal (Gaultheria shal-
lon), bracken (Pteridium aquilhim),
blackberry {Rubus vmcropetahis), and
hare's ear (Hypochaeris radicata) are the
shrubs and herbs in greatest abundance.
The ponds are ringed by dead and living
mature conifers which escaped both axe
and fire. The first pond, about four acres
in size, is mud bottomed and bordered by
a floating sphagnum mat. A few feet from
the water's edge this mat supports a thick
layer of sweet gale (Myrica gale) and
labrador tea {Ledum groenlandicum).
On the east and west sides of the pond
this gives way to the soils of the original
pond edge which supports salal and a
narrow ring of tall conifers, Douglas fir
{Fseudotsuga Tneiiziesii), western red
cedar (Thuja plicata), and western hem-
lock (Tsuga heterophylla). Beyond the
edge of the pond is the open burn. At
the north and south ends of the pond are
thickets of willow and hardback {Spiraea
dougiasii). The second pond, about five
and a half acres in size, lacks the sphag-
num mat and the living conifers, but has
an extensive stand of dead conifers, pri-
marily • cedars, surrounding it. Much
windfall makes the shoreline impene-
trable. The elevation of the ponds is
approximately 900 feet.

It is likely that extensively logged
and/or burned areas offer a habitat whose
structure fulfills the nesting require-
ments of the Bufflehead. Fires had oc-
curred in the area of Taverner's and
Brook's Bufflehead records. However,
British Columbia Forest Service records
of these areas are incomplete for these
early dates, and it is, therefore, impos-
sible to either fully substantiate or dis-
pute the view that similar conditions
prevailed in these areas at the time of
their records.

If, as suggested, the physiognomy of
large logged and burned areas meets the
breeding requirements of the Bufflehead,
it is difficult to account for the lack of
previous coastal nesting records in these
areas. These new breeding records may

represent "accidentals", but it appears
more likely to me that they are the result
of recent invasion into a newly created
breeding range. I suggest such a popula-
tion of birds be regarded as transient.
Population densities will rise and then
fall both spatially and temporally as the
habitat progresses from an open logged
or burned area to a forest. The few
records available are, I suggest, primarily
the result of the lack of data from these
regions. No final decision can be reached,
however, without further investigation.

I am grateful to the above contributors
for the use of their notes. Acknowledg-
ment and thanks are here given to Dr.
J. F. Bendefl, and to Dr. E. M. Hagmeier
of Victoria University, for their advice
and criticism in the preparation of this
note.

David A. Hancock

Department of Zoology
University of British Columbia
6 November 1963

A Northern Range Extension for
Bu^o americajius with Notes on
B. americamis and Rana sylvatica

During July, 1963, a National Museum
of Canada field party coUected along
the coast of James and Hudson Bays
from Moosonee, Ontario, to the Port
Harrison Gulf area, Quebec. The expedi-
tion consisted of A. H. Clarke, Jr., and
D. E. McAllister, leaders, and H. D.
Athearn.

Only two species of herptiles were seen
during the course of collecting which
was concentrated on fresh and salt water
moUusks and fish. Due to the paucity of
records from the area all herptile speci-
mens are reported here. Numbers pre-
fixed NMC are National Museum of
Canada catalogue numbers.

Bujo aTnericanus: Quebec: NMC 7383,
Eastmain, July 5 (1 specimen); NMC
7385, at RCAF Station, Great Whale
River, July 8 (1); NMC 7387, 2-3 miles
up from mouth of Deer River, Rich-

The Canadian Field-Naturalist

Vol. 78

mond Gulf, July 19 (1); Ontario: NMC
7389, Creek tributary to Moose River,
Moosonee, July 16 (1).

The Deer River specimen {S6° 17'N.,
76° 10' W.) represents an approximately
85 mile range extension from the pre-
viously known northern limit of this
species at Great Whale River (Logier
and Toner, 1961, Checklist of the Amphi-
bians and Reptiles of Ca?iada and Alaska).

The Moosonee specimen shows the
greatest resemblance to the disputed race
B. a. copei in having a strongly con-
trasted pattern, wide mid-dorsal stripe,
heavily spotted and reticulated venter,
and long, narrow parotoid glands. The
other specimens show a south to north
cline from the Moosonee to the Deer
River specimen which is more-or-less
typically B. a. americajius with only
partial ventral spotting.

The habitat for the Deer River speci-
men was a grassy area bordered by a low
muddy river bank on one side and clumps
of willow, reaching a height of four to
five feet, on the other. Richmond Gulf
is at the northern limit of the tree line on
the east coast of Hudson Bay. Spruce
grew on the opposite bank of the river
but not on the side where the collection
was made.

Specimens were 63, 70, 69 and 65 mm
respectively. The Deer River toad is a
male, probably in breeding condition,
with a dark throat vocal sac.

Two collections of toad tadpoles were
made. NMC 7393, Fort George River,
17 mi. E. of Fort George, Quebec, July
17, was taken in rock pools at the edge
of rapids. The nineteen specimens were
staged as follows: 29 (1), 32 (1), 33 (5),
35 (5), 36 (2). NMC 7610, stream, N.
central Burton Lake (S. of Great Whale
River), Quebec, July 24. Three tadpoles
staged at 35 (1), 43 (2). The stages fol-
low Gosner (1960, Herpetologica 16 (3):
183-190).

Rana sylvatica: Quebec: NMC 7382,
Eastmain River, 1 mi. E. of Eastmain,
July 3 (2); NMC 7384, Bank of Fort

George River, 8 mi. E. of Fort George,
July 3 (2); NMC 7386, Deer River 2-3
miles up from mouth, Richmond Gulf,
July 19 (6); Ontario: NMC 7388, Creek
tributary to Moose River, July 26 (1).

The Deer River specimens are imma-
tures, 28 to 25 mm snout- vent length, and
all lack a dorsal line. Specimens from the
other localities are 40-49 mm and all have
a dorsal line. Logier and Toner (1961)
give George River as the northern
locality on this coast. Bleakney (1954,
Canadian Field-Naturalist 68(4) : 165-171)
cites a collection from Richmond Gulf.

One collection of tadpoles was made,
NMC 7609, N. central Burton Lake, Que-
bec, July 24. Two tadpoles were staged
as above at 31 (l) and 32 (1).

Bleakney (1958, National Museum of
Canada, Bulletin 155, table 3, p. 67; map

5, p. 74) delineated herpetofauna zones
in eastern Canada. Zone 6 contains Bufo
americanus, Rajia sylvatica and Ra?7a
septentrionalis; zone 7 contains only the
latter two species. At the east coast of
Hudson Bay the northern limit of zone

6, which is based on the northern limit
of Bufo americaims, must now be moved
from Great Whale River to Richmond
Gulf, making it synonymous with the
northern limit of zone 7 at this point.
Future collecting will establish if Bufo
americanus ranges as far north as P^ana
sylvatica at all points, thus eliminating
zone 7, or if the Richmond Gulf situa-
tion is caused by some factor such as
a 'Warming effect at the coast while the
inland areas remain validly differentiated
into two zones.

No frogs were observed at Port Har-
rison, north of Richmond Gulf, nor on
any the coastal islands visited between
Great Whale River and Port Harrison.

I am indebted to the collectors for the
specimens, their field notes, and their
permission and encouragement to report
on these specimens.

Francis R. Cook

National Museum of Canada
Ottawa, Ontario
8 October 1963

AFFILIATED

Edmonton Bird Club

President, H. J. Montgomery; Vice-President,
Dr. V. E. Lewin; Secretary-Treasurer, Dr. W. G.
Evans, Department of Entomology, University of
Alberta, Edmonton, Alta.; Field Secretary, Dr,
R. W. Turner; Librarian, D. A. Boag; Audubon
Representative, B. Sparks.

Mcllwraitb Ornithological Club

President, W. R. Jarmain; Past President, Dr.
F. S. Cook; Vice-President, Dr. G. Cummings;
Recording Secretary, Mrs. G. A. MacDougall;
Corresponding Secretary, Mrs. A. M. Coote, 644
Base Line Rd., London, Ontario; Treasurer, Mrs.
H. J. Wheaton; Migration Secretary, J. W. Leach;
Migration Editor, W. G. GrauNG.

Natural Hi&tory Society of Manitoba

President, Miss J. M. Walker; Honorary Presi-
dent, A. H. Shortt; Honorary Vice-President, E.
Gilbert; Past President, G. S. Cotter; Vice-Presi-
dent, Dr. L. Smith; Treasurer, W. D. Kyle;
Assistant Treasurer, J. Jack; General Secretary,
Mrs. a. E. Axcell, 310 Linwood St., St. James,
Manitoba; Assistant Secretary, Miss R. McGregor;
Mailing Secretary, Miss L. M. Lovell; Executive
Secretary, Mrs. G. Keith.

Nova Scotia Bird Society

President, Dr. L. B. Macpherson; Vice-President,
Mrs. Vicior Cardoza; Secretary -Treasurer, Miss
Sylvia J. Fullerton, 1051 Lucknow St., Halifax,
N.S.; Editor, Mrs. J. W. Dobson.

SOCIETIES

Provancher Society of Natural History
of Canada

President, Ronald E. Blair; First Vice-President,
Benoit Pelletier. Second Vice-President, James P.
Coristine; Secretary-Treasurer, Georges A. L»-
CLERc, 628 Fraser St., Quebec, Que.

Province of Quebec Society for the
Protection of Birds

President, Mrs. G. H. Montgomery; Vice-
Presidents, Dr. Ian McLaren, Miss R. B. Blan-
chard; Honorary Treasurer, Miss G. E. Hibbabd;
Honorary Secretary, Miss R. S. ABBorr, 164 Sen-
neville Road, Senneville, P.Q.; Honorary Librari-
an, Mr. W. H. Rawlings.

Toronto Field Naturalists' Club

President, Dr. D. Hoeniger; Vice-President,
R. F. Norman; Secretary -Treasurer, Mrs. H. Rob-
son, 49 Craighurst Ave., Toronto 12, Ont.; As-
sistant Secretary, Miss Rtrra Marshall; Jimior
T.F.N.C., R. J. MacLellan, 416 St. Qements Ave.,
Toronto 12, Ont.

Vancouver Natural History Society

Honorary President, Dr. M. Y. Williams; Past
Presides, Dr. R. Stace-Smith; President Dr. J. E.
Armstrong; Vice-President, N. F. Pullen; Corres-
ponding Secretary, Mrs. D. J. Martin, 2038 Mac-
donald St., Vancouver, B.C.; Treasurer, Mrs. E. N.
Copping; Programme Secretaries, Miss R. Ross,
Mrs. H. Pinder-Moss; Editor of Bulletin, C. B. W.
Rogers; Recording Secretary, Miss K. Milroy.

ADVICE TO CONTRIBUTORS

Authon are asked to share the cost of pubKcation by paying for each
page of an article that is in excess of the limit of twelve journal pages,
the cost of illustrations and of setting small-sized type and tables.

Manuscripts

The Style Manual for Biological Journals is
recommended, in general, as a guide for authors.

Manuscripts should be typewritten on one side
of nontransparent paper measuring 8i by 11 inches.
Authors ore requested to use at least one given
name. All text matter, including quotations, foot-
notes, tables, literature references, and legends for
figures should be double-spaced. Only those words
meant to appear in italics should be underlined.
Every sheet of the manuscript should be number-
ed.

Webster's New International Dictionary is the
authority for spelling. However, in a case of
difference in the spelling of a common name, and
in the use of a variant name, a decision of a
learned society is preferred.

References are made by the author-date system.
They should be listed alphabetically and typed at
the end of the main body of text. All tides of
periodicals in reference matter should be written
in full, not abbreviated.

Tables should be titled and numbered consecu-
tively in arable numerals. Tables and legends for
the figures should be placed after the list of
references. Each table and all the legends should
be on separate pages.

Notes should bear the name of one author only
and references in notes should be incorporated
directly in die text.

Illustrations

All figures, including each figure of the plates,
should be numbered consecutively in arable
numerals. The author's name, title of the paper,
and figure number should be written in the lower
left comer of the sheet on which the illustration
appears. The legend should not be incorporated
in the figure.

Line drawings should be made with India ink
on white drawing paper, blue tracing linen, or
blue-lined co-ordinate paper. Co-ordanate lines
that are to appear in the reproduction should be
ruled in black ink. Descriptive matter should be
lettered, not typewritten, and all parts of the
drawing should permit easy legibility even if a
reduction is made.

Photographs should have a glossy finish and
show sharp contrasts. For reproduction as a com-
plete plate they should be mounted without space
between prints.

For large drawings and mounted photographs
the ratio of height to width should conform to
that of the journal page (H by 7i inches) but the
height should be adjusted to allow for the legend.

Reprints

Reprints, with or without covers may be bought.
The cost is given on the reprint order form whicb
is attached to the galley proofs.

^t6^t€uUe^

IS YOUR SET OF THE PUBLICATIONS OF THE

OTTAWA FIELD-NATURALISTS' CLUB

COMPLETE?

Almost complete sets dating back to 1879
are still available.

For further information and quotations write to:

W. J. Cody, Business Manager
The Canadian Field-Naturalist
Plant Research Institute
Central Experimental Farm
Ottawa, Ontario

bur Z 1364

The CANADIANS-
FIELD 'NATURALIST

Published by THE OTTAWA FIELD-NATURALISTS' CLUB, Ottawa, Ontario

Articles

Winter Mortality among Red-necked Grebes (Colymbus grisegena) in Ontario

Antoon de Vos and Albert E. Allin 67

A List of Vascular Plants from around Ogac Lake, South Coast of

Frobisher Bay, N.W.T. Ian A. McLaren 70

Preliminary Trials of a Camera Recording Device for the Study of Small Mammals

C. H. BUCKNER 77

Local Distribution of Two Voles: Evidence for Interspecific Interaction

Garrett C. Clough 80

New Bird Records from Cape Breton Island, Nova Scotia

Anthony J. Erskine 89

Potentilla stipularis L. and Draba sibirica (Pall.) Thell. New to North America

A. E. PoRSiLD 92

Vole Populations in Southwestern Ontario Robert H. Stinson 98

A Plant Collection from Southwest Newfoundland — John Bell, 1867

Isabel L. Bayly 107

Reviews 119

Birds of the Labrador Peninsula and Adjacent Areas — Birds of the Lake Athabasca Region,
Saskatchewan — Cacti and Other Succulents — Handbook of North American Birds,
Vol, L Loons through Flamingos — Minnesota's Rocks and Waters: A Geological Story
— Les Libellules du Quebec — Investigations in the Natural History of the Soviet Far East.

Notes

Changing Status of the Cowbird in Prince Edvs^ard Island Stanley E. Vass 125

Some Interesting Plants in the Baron Canyon in Algonquin Park Mary I. Moore 125

The Holotype of the Franklin Grouse (Canachites frankUnii) I. McT. Cov7An 127

Bushy-tailed Wood Rat in the Peace River District, Alberta A. W. F. Banfield 128

The Stonecat, Noturus flavus, Nevs^ly Recorded in Alberta J. R. Nursall and Victor Levi^in 128

Letter to the Editor Douglas E. Wade 130

Can. Field Nat.

VoL 78

No. 2

p. 67-130

Ottawa, April- June 1964

THE OTTAWA FIELD-NATURALISTS' CLUB

Founded en 1879

— Patrons —
Their Excellencies The Governor General and Madame Vanier

The club is a corporate member of the Federation of Ontario Naturalists and is
affiliated with the American Association for the Advancement of Science.

MEMBERS OF COUNCIL

President: George H. McGee, 2052 Woodcrest Road, Ottawa 8, Ontario

First Vice-President: W. Winston Mair

Second Vice-President: G. R. Hanes

Secretary: A. W. Rath well, Canadian Wildlife Service, Norlite Building,

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

Editor: Francis R. Cook Business Manager: W. J. Cody

National Museum of Canada, Ottawa, Ontario Central Experimental Farm, Ottawa, Ont.

The Canadian Field-Naturalist is published quarterly by the Ottawa Field-Naturalists'
Club with assistance of the affiliated societies listed on the inside back cover. Manuscripts
representing personal observations or the results of original research in any branch of na-
tural history are invited. In the preparation of papers authors should consult the most
recent issue and the information for contributors on the inside back cover. Advertising
rates and prices of back numbers of this journal and its predecessors, TRANSACTIONS
OF THE OTTAWA FIELD-NATURALISTS' CLUB, 1879-1886, and the OTTAWA
NATURALIST, 1887-1919, are obtainable from the business manager.

MEMBERSHIP AND SUBSCRIPTION

The annual membership fee of $5 covers subscription to the journal. Institutions,
however may subscribe at the same rate as that for membership. Single current numbers
of regular issues are $1.50. A money order should be made payable to the Ottawa Field-
Naturalists' Club and sent to the treasurer. Notice of change of address should also be
sent to the treasurer.

Authorized as second-class mail by the Post Office Department at Ottawa, Ontario

MUS. COMP. Z0<
LIBRARY

The Canadian Field-^Naturalist harvard

UNIVKFtaiTV:

Volume 78 APRIL-JUNE 1964 Number 2

WINTER MORTALITY AMONG RED-NECKED GREBES

{Colymbus grisegena) IN ONTARIO

Antoon de Vos and Albert E. Allin,

Department of Zoology, Federated Colleges, Guelph, Ontario

and Regional Laboratory, Ontario Department of Health, Fort William, Ontario

During late February and early March 1963, many reports came into the
offices of the Ontario Department of Lands and Forests and the Ontario
Humane Society stating that Red-necked Grebes, Colymbus grisegena, had
been found stranded, either dead or ahve, in unlikely places on land. Because
it was suspected that further information could be obtained, an inquiry was
launched, the results of which will be discussed.

The Red-necked Grebe was considered a bird of the Prairies, but during
recent decades it has shown a tendency to extend its summer range into the
Great Lakes area. It has been found nesting near Burlington at the western
end of Lake Ontario since 1943 (Speirs et ah, 1944), and in the Cochrane
District in northern Ontario since 1955 (Snyder, 1957).

This species has been found wintering on Lake Ontario near Toronto, near
Niagara Falls, on Lake Erie near Ashtabula, Ohio, and on Lake Michigan
(Bent, 1919). Snyder (1929) reported that a specimen was sent in to the
Royal Ontario Museum on January 16, 1929, which was picked up from a
local marsh near Kingston, Ontario. In another paper (Snyder, 1930) he
reported that on December 12, 1929, during a heavy sleet storm many grebes
had landed on Toronto streets. By mid-afternoon of the thirteenth, twenty-
seven live birds had been picked up. By December 15 a total of thirty-seven
had been reported for Toronto. One other specimen was reported to have
been captured at Brantford, Ontario. Not all birds passing through the
Toronto area were stranded, as indicated by several individuals observed
along the waterfront on December 14.

Forbush (1925) stated that the species is seldom seen in the interior
of southern New England, except when severe cold waves freeze up the Great
Lakes or other large lakes westward in which, in ordinary seasons, many of
the birds pass the winter. According to him, in trying to escape to open
water, many grebes become fatigued and fall or alight on the snow or ice in
New England, eastern New York and New Jersey.

Todd (1940) states on pages 35 and 36 "in the winter it prefers the sea
coast but sometimes remains on the Great Lakes'". He adds, "there are
February records for this grebe from Erie, Warren, Clinton, Armstrong and
Washington Counties. If not pertaining to birds that were actually wintering
where they were found, these records must indicate a considerable wandering

Mailing date of this number: 28 August, 1964
67

68 The Canadian Field-Naturalist Vol. 78

at certain times from a presumed winter habitat elsewhere, probably Lake
Erie. This explanation is suggested by the fact that Mr. Simpson has on
several occasions found this grebe at Warren early in February during bliz-
zards. Some were picked up in an exhausted condition, due apparently to
lack of food."

Janet C. Green obtained several reports of Red-necked Grebes wintering
at the extreme western end of Lake Superior near Duluth, Minnesota:
1 bird on Nov. 1, 1961 (The Flicker, 33(4): 114, 1961)
1 bird on Feb. 19, 1962 (The Flicker, 34(1): 22, 1962)
1 bird on Dec. 6, 1962 (The Flicker, 34(4): 114, 1962)
1 bird on Jan. 5, 1963 (The Flicker, 35(1): 15, 1963)
1 bird on Jan. 15, 1963 (The Flicker, 35(1): 15, 1963)
S. D. Robbins {in letter dated March 14, 1963) stated that there are no
winter records for Wisconsin, but that little winter work has been done along
the Lake Superior shore of Wisconsin. His latest date for the state is November
16, 1951 at Milwaukee. Probably the specimen seen on March 5, 1962 at
Madison (Audubon Field Notes 16(3): 331, 1962) was a very early arrival.
W. Nickell {in letter dated March 7, 1963) reported that there were no winter
records for Lake Michigan.

Records about observations of grebes in Ontario during the winter were
obtained from the Ontario Department of Lands and Forests (courtesy Mr. R.
E. Mason), the Ontario Humane Society (courtesy Mr. T. L Hughes), and
The Ontario Naturalist (1(2): 33, 1963 (Table 1). In addition to data con-
tained in Table 1, "numbers" were found in snow drifts in the Paisley-Wing-
ham area (Ontario NaturaHst, 1963).

An analysis of data covering winter 1962-63 suggests that the largest
number of grebes was displaced during the second half of the month of Feb-
ruary. It also suggests that the majority of these displaced birds were found
in a relatively restricted section of the peninsula of southern Ontario, namely
Bruce, Grey, Simcoe, Huron and Wellington Counties. It should be stated
here that personnel of the Ontario Department of Lands and Forests could
not obtain any records in reply to our questionnaire from area west and east
of those referred to in Table 1. As will be noticed, the majority of the grebes
were alive when found. The bird found in early March on the shore of
Inverhuron Park was perhaps netted. Most grebes were found on roads or
road shoulders. Perhaps roads bare of snow have a special attraction for
displaced grebes.

What may cause large numbers of grebes to become stranded on land
during the winter? The most obvious answer that comes to mind is certain
weather conditions.

The winter of 1962-63 was unusually severe, which resulted in all of the
Great Lakes, except Lake Ontario, becoming completely covered with ice
or nearly so. Data supplied by the Meteorological Branch, Department of
Transport, Canada, indicated that on February 1 5 Lake Erie had only relatively
small stretches of open water, while only very little open water could be
found at the south ends of Lakes Huron and St. Clair. On Lake Superior
there was almost no open water on February 12. These records were taken

1964

DE VOS AND AlLIN: MORTALITY AMONG GrEBES 69

Table 1. — Records obtained of stranded Red-necked Grebes

Date

Location

No.

Dead

Alive

Source

Dec. 13, 62

Blanchard Twp.

L&F

Jan. 6, 63

Cobourg

O.N.

Feb. 6, 63

W. Luther Twp., Wellington Co.

L&F

Feb. 14, 63

Fort William

A. E. Allin

Feb. 16, 63

Harriston

L&F

Feb. 20, 63

Howick Twp., Huron Co.

L&F

Feb. 20, 63

Guelph

O.H.S.

Feb. 21, 63

Barrie

O.H.S.

Feb. 22, 63

Southampton

L&F

Feb. 23, 63

Kincardine Twp., Bruce Co.

L&F

Feb. 23, 63

Huntsville

O.N.

Feb. 26, 63

Allendale

O.H.S.

Feb. 28, 63

Collingwood

O.H.S.

Feb. 28, 63

Stroud

O.H.S.

Feb. , 63

Glengarry Co., 14 mi. N of St. Lawrence

O.H.S.

Feb. , 63

Blanchard Twp.

L &F

Feb. , 63

Downie Twp.

L&F

Feb. , 63

Ellice Twp.

L&F

Mar. 2, 63

Port Elgin

L&F

Mar. 5, 63

Rostock, Ellice Twp.

L&F

Mar. (early)

On shore of Inverhuron Park

L&F

Mar. 18, 63

Guelph

O.H.S.

Mar. 23, 63

Huron Twp., Bruce Co.

L&F

Note: February 17-23: Twelve telephone calls were investigated by Conservation Officer
G. R. Harris about grebes along sides of roads in Bruce County. Several grebes were
also found in the Wingham area. Six more calls were investigated since then.
No reports were received from the Clinton, Meaford, Lions Head and Paris area..
L&F = Ontario Department of Lands & Forests records
O.H.S. = Ontario Humane Society records
O.N. = The Ontario Naturalist (1), 1963.

during the period when most casualties were observed among the grebes.
Nevertheless, there was some open water. Would it be plausible that the
grebes were displaced by drifting ice or were moving from one lake to the
next and unable to find open water? The problem is not adequately solved
by this report, but further documentation might clarify the situation.

References

Bent, A. C. 1919. Life histories of North
American diving birds. U.S. National
Museum Bulletin 107, p. 19.

FoRBUsH, E. H. 1925. Birds of Massachu-
setts and other New England States. Part
One — Water Birds, Marsh Birds and
Shore Birds. Massachusetts Department of
Agriculture.

Snyder, L. L. 1929. Holboell's Grebe near
Kingston, Ontario, in midwinter. Canadian
Field-Naturalist 43(7): 166.

. 1930. A flight of Holboell's

Grebes {Colymbus holboelli) at Toronto.

Auk 49(2): 240-241.

1957. Changes in the avifauna

of Ontario. In: Changes in the fauna of
Ontario. Contributions of the Royal
Ontario Museum, University of Toronto
Press. 75 pp.

Speirs, J. M., G. W. North, and John A.
Crosby. 1944. Holboell's Grebe nesting
in southern Ontario. The Wilson Bulletin
56(4): 206-208.

Todd, W. E. C. 1940. Birds of Western
Pennsylvania. University of Pittsburg
Press.

Received for publication 4 October, 1963

A LIST OF VASCULAR PLANTS FROM AROUND

OGAC LAKE,
SOUTH COAST OF FROBISHER BAY, N.W.T.

Ian a. McLaren

Fisheries Research Board of Canada, Arctic Unit, 505 Pine Ave. W., Montreal 18, Que.*

The plants listed here were collected by several people during three seasons
at Ogac Lake at 62° 52' N and 67° 21' W on the south side of Frobisher Bay.
In each season plants were collected incidentally to the main program, which
was the study of the hydrography and biology of the lake, which is in fact the
almost landlocked head of a fiord, with a depauperate marine biota, including
a rehct population of the Atlantic Cod Gadus morhua L. The general nature
and interest of the lake have been discussed briefly by Dunbar (1958, p.
198-199).

In 1952 R. S. McCall and A. D. Dawson, under the auspices of the Arctic
Institute of North America, made a preliminary survey of the lake between
July 16 and August 22, and collected sixty-three species of vascular plants.
In 1957 I stayed at the lake between June 1 and October 4, and my wife
Bemice, who was my sole companion and assistant, made a collection of seventy
species, including nine not taken in 1952. In 1962 I made further detailed
studies at the lake between June 1 and August 28. Armed with Porsild's
(1957) manual, my assistant Mr. T. E. Welch (who paid special attention to the
grasses and sedges) and I were able to increase the list of local plants to 124
species.

The area around the lake consists of metamorphic and igneous Precambrian
rock. The coast of Frobisher Bay here is rugged and indented with a series
of steep-sided inlets; Ogac Lake is at the head of one such inlet, Ney Harbour.
There is very little level ground around the lake, and since the lake is L-shaped,
its steep sides face in almost every direction. There are cold, barren faces
receiving very little sunlight during the day, and other slopes which are warm,
sheltered and lush with flowers. In general, the local climate is rather more
salubrious than that found even five miles away, on the coast of Frobisher Bay.
The high, steep hills, up to 2000 feet, inhibit winds from most directions and
trap heat. The snowfall along the south coast of Frobisher Bay is unusually
high, enough to sustain the most southerly glaciers in the Archipelago, about
forty miles southeast of Ogac Lake {see Mercer, 1956).

Most previous collections from southeast Baffin Island are listed by Polunin
(1940). Since that time, the only major published collections from the region
appear to be those of Calder (1951), who lists 149 species from the head of
Frobisher Bay, which is topographically, climatically, and botanically rather
different from the Ogac Lake region. The recently described flora of the
vicinity of Merewether Crater, Northern Labrador (Gillett, 1960), is in many
ways more comparable with that from Ogac Lake.

"Present address: Marine Sciences Centre, McGill University, Montreal, Quebec.

1964 McLaren: Plants from Ogac Lake 71

Of especial interest in southeast Baffin Island is the presence of amphi-
Atlantic and subarctic elements, otherwise found in Greenland and Labrador-
Ungava and points east or west. The three additions to the flora of the Can-
adian Arctic Archipelago given in this paper {Car ex cmguillata, Luzula multi-
flora ssp. frigida var. contracta, and Viscaria alpma) are all of this distribution,
and a few other species of comparable range have previously been collected
only once or twice from the Archipelago. A number of plants are found in
the Greenland flora which have not hitherto been recorded in North America
proper. It may be that the unnamed species of Erigeron discussed in this
paper will prove to be one of these. The southeast corner of Baffin Island may
be important in understanding a number of phytogeographic problems, and
deserves more collecting activity.

I wish to thank Messrs. A. D. Dawson, R. S. McCall, and T. E. Welch,
and my wife Bernice, who did much of the collecting. Dr. Paul Maycock,
Department of Botany, McGill University, gave me free access to the Her-
barium, and helped in other ways. Dr. Askell Love, Montreal Botanical
Garden, offered an opinion on the identity of the unnamed species of Erigeron.
Dr. A. E. Porsild, National Herbarium, examined and revised all the critical
material in the collections — the grasses, sedges, Luzula spp., willows, Draba
spp., and Antennaria spp. — and also read critically this manuscript. I am most
grateful for his help.

Annotated List of Species

In the following list, the nomenclature of Porsild (1957) is used throughout.
Specimens of all species listed are in the McGill University Herbarium, Mont-
real. Some of the more unusual material has been deposited in the National
Herbarium, Ottawa, as well. The listed specimen numbers consist in each
case of the year of collection (1952, 1957, or 1962) followed by the collecters'
field numbers.

Woodsia ilvensis (L.) R. Br.: Common on Lycopodium annotinum L.: Common only

crumbling cliffs near the lake outlet. 1962-27, among willows and on herbmats on the

103. south-facing slope of the inner basin of the

lake. 1962-109, 110.

Woodsia glabella R. Br.: One collection ,. ,, , t ^ i

from rock clefts. 1962-26. Lycopodium Selago L.: Common on hea-
thy areas. 1962-108.

Cy stopteris fragilh (L.) Bernh.: The com- / ,,..,. .^ \ n <, c -ru

monest fern. 1962-29, 30, 106. Large speci- Hterochloe alpina (Sw.) R. & S.: The re-

mens (1962-106) up to 35 cm were collected l^ted, recently described H. orthantha S0r.

from among dense shrubs of Salix cordi- did not occur m the four collections, al-

jolia on the south-facing slope of the inner though it might be expected in the region,

lake basin. 1952-74; 1957-7; 1962-95, 99.

Equisetum arvense L.: Common. Densest Agrostis borealis Hartm.: Common. 1952-

stand of plants noted on rather sterile sand ^^^ 1962-98.

at the bottom of a deep gorge one mile west Trisetiim spicatum (L.) Richt.: Common,

of the lake (1962-104), but also occurred on 1962-96, 97.

sunny, grassy slopes (1962-105). p^^ j^^.^^^^ ^^^^ ^indm.: Collected only

Equisetum variegatum Schleich.: Not com- by the 1952 expedition from damp, rich soil

mon, or overlooked. 1962-51. near the lake. 1952-68.

The Canadian Field-Naturalist

Vol. 78

Poa arc tic a R. Br.: Abundant. 1952-72, 82;
1962-120, 121.

Poa alpina L.: Scattered clumps every-
where around the lake, but nowhere very
common. 1962-118, 122, 123.

Poa glauca M. Vahl.: A few specimens
collected. 1957-4; 1962-119.

Festuca brachyphylla Schultes: Probably
the commonest grass around the lake. 1962-
92, 93, 94.

Eriophorum angustifolium Honck.: The
commonest cotton grass; found around the
numerous ponds near the lake. 1962-83,87.

Eriophorum Scheuchzeri Hoppe: A few
unexpanded specimens were taken near a
stream one mile west of camp on August 24
(1962-88). A single expanded specimen was
taken in 1957 (1957-1).

_ Eriophorum callitrix Cham.: This attrac-
tive species grew in some numbers on black
humic soil near Pinguicula vulgaris (see be-
low), and a few specimens were taken on a
like site near the outlet of the lake. 1962-
85, 86.

Eriophormn vaginatw7i L. ssp. spissu?n
(Fern.) Hult.: Collected only twice. 1952-
80; 1962-84.

Scirpus caespitosus L. ssp. austriacus (Pal-
las) Asch. & Graebn.: Common. 1962-53, 76.

Car ex nardina Fr. var. atriceps Kiik.: On
gravel beach of lake and on south-facing,
grassy slope. 1962-65, 68.

Carex scirpoidea Michx.
54, 62, 70.

Common. 1962-

Carex rupestris AIL: Only a single speci-
en collected. 1962-69.

men collected. 1962-69.

Carex Lachenalii Schk.: One collection
from near stream emptying into inner basin
of the lake, 1962-61.

Carex glareosa Wahlenb. var. amphigena
Fern.: Collected only by the 1952 expedition,
which found it common near the shores of
a small pond, less than one metre above the
level of Ogac Lake.

Carex Bigelowii Torr.: The commonest
sedge in a variety of habitats, and often the

commonest plant. 1952-67; 1962-62, 64, 73.
Specimens of C. anguillata [f. anguillata
(Drej.) Fern.] were collected from dry,
sandy soil between streamlets, and identified
from among the material by Dr. Porsild
(1962-60). This appears to be the first re-
cord of this form from the Archipelago.

Carex norvegica Retz.: Only a single
small specimen taken in 1962, although noted
as being common near the outlet of the lake
in 1952. 1952-68; 1962-93.

Carex holostoma Drej.: Collections from
black humic soil near Pinguicula vulgaris and
Eriophorum callitrix and on a similar site
near outlet of lake. 1962-52, 66.

Carex supina Wahlenb. ssp. spaniocarpa
(Steud.) Hult.: On the upper parts of a
sandy-gravel beach on the east side of the
lake. 1962-62.

Carex glacialis Mack.: Collected only by
the 1952 expedition, atop Knife Edge Moun-
tain (ca. 600 m). 1952-97.

Carex misandra R. Br.: This high-arctic
species was collected only from two slopes,
both south-facing in 1962. 1952-75; 1962-55,
71.

Carex capillaris L.: A single, over-ripe
specimen taken from wet ground on the
south-facing side of the inner lake basin on
August 18. 1962-72.

Carex membranacea Hook.: Locally com-
mon 1952-84; 1957-3; 1962-56, 67.

Juncus biglumus L.: Apparently scarce.
1952-91; 1962-89.

Juncus trifidus L.: Not common, but con-
spicuous on dry sunny slopes, and also at
the bottom of a deep gorge, one mile west
of the lake. 1962-74, 75, 90.

Luzula nivalis (Laest.) Beurl.: Taken only
once, on rather damp tundra. 1962-79.

Luzula spicata (L.) DC: 1962-80, 81, 92.

Luzula confusa Lindebl.: Everywhere
common. 1952-75; 1962-57, 58, 78, 91, 92.

Luzula ?nultiflora (Retz.) Lej. ssp. frigida
(Buch.) Krecz. var. contracta Sam.: This is
the first collection from the Archipelago,

1964

McLaren: Plants from Ogac Lake

where it was anticipated by Porsild (1957),
in view of its occurrence in Ungava and
Greenland. At Ogac Lake specimens were
taken from the lush, south-facing slope of
the inner basin. 1962-82.

Tofieldia pusilla (Michx.) Pers.: 1952-34;
1957-31; 1962-77.

Salix herbacea L.: 1952-12, 86; 1957-13.

Salix Uva-Ursi Pursh: 1957-8; 1962-101.

Salix reticulata L.: 1952-33, 61; 1962-100.

Salix cordifolia Pursh var. callicarpaea
(Trautv.) Fern.: 1952-94; 1962-115, 117.
Formed low thickets about 0.5 m high on
parts of the south-facing slope of the inner
lake basin (1962-115).

Salix arctophila Cockerell: The most com-
mon willow on the low ground around the
lake (1952-19, 62; 1957-12; 1962-116), al-
though two collections come from dry hill-
sides (1952-95; 1962-116).

Salix arctica Pall.: A few flowering speci-
mens in 1957 were the only ones taken, al-
though doubtless overlooked in 1962. 1957-9.

Oxyria digyna (L.) Hill: Abundant. Very
lush growth in alluvial gravel at the head
of the lake. 1952-71, 78.

Polygonum viviparuni L.: 1952-58, 59;
1957-35.

Stellaria longipes Goldie s. lat.: Specimens
of the race ?nonantha were common on dry
areas around the lake outlet, but good cili-
atosepala were collected from an old tent
ring. 1952-37; 1957-39; 1962-44, 45.

Stellaria humifusa Rottb.: Common on
more sterile beach gravel and sand near out-
let of lake. 1962-43.

Cerastium alpinum L.: Ubiquitous. 1952-
41, 64.

Cerastium cerastoides (L.) Britt.: Speci-
mens taken in 1952 were the first Archipelago
record (identified by Porsild and mapped in
his manual, 1957). In 1962 it was found to
be moderately common near the lake edge
on more humic, consolidated shores, and
was also noted on several wet, mossy sites
up to 150 m above sea-level. It was not in

flower until early-through mid-August, long
after Cerastium alpinum. 1952-13; 1962-41, 42.

Sagina intermedia Fenzl.: Uncommon,
Found only in damp crevices near the out-
let. 1962-25.

Arenaria peploides L. var. diffusa Hor-
nem.: Common on gravel shores of lake
near outlet. 1957-44.

Arenaria rubella R. Br.: Uncommon. 1962-
23, 24.

Arenaria sajanensis Willd.: Common in a
variety of settings, especially on rather dry
grassy slopes and herbmats. 1962-19, 20, 21,

22.

Silene acaulis L. var. excapa (All.) DC:
Common. 1952-22.

Melandrium apetalum (L.) Fenzl. ssp.
arcticum (Fr.) Hult.: Curiously rare, al-
though looked for. Collected only once in
a damp herbmat on an east-facing slope
about 300 m above the lake. 1962-35.

Melandrium affine (J. Vahl) Hartm.:
Common. 1952-44; 1957-16.

Viscaria alpina (L.) G. Don.: The beauti-
ful alpine campion has not hitherto been
recorded in the Archipelago, although anti-
cipated in Porsild's (1957) manual. Two
patches of several plants each were found
on August 15-18, 1962, along steep, unstable
slopes below weathering cliffs on the east
side of the lake. The flowers were past
prime when discovered. 1962-35. I also col-
lected this plant on August 5, 1951, near the
Grinnell Glacier, about 40 miles down the
southwest shore from Ogac Lake. These
specimens were given to a private collection
(Now in McGill Herbarium), and remained
unrecorded in the literature.

Ranunculus nivalis L.: This was the com-
mon buttercup at Ogac Lake. 1952-30, 77. I
looked carefully for R. sulphureus Sol.,
which apparently does not occur.

Ranunculus pygmaeus Wahlenb.: Locally
common. 1952-16; 1957-36.

Ranunculus Allenii Robins.: This rather
rare endemic of subarctic eastern North
America has apparently been taken only
once before from the Archipelago, again

The Canadian Field-Naturalist

Vol. 78

from the Frobisher Bay region (see Benson,
1948). It was taken only in two places at
Ogac Lake in 1962. A few plants were found
growing around the springy base of a huge
boulder on the south-facing slope of the
inner basin on August 20 (1962-36), and
three plants were picked from wet moss on
one of the few extensive horizontal "mea-
dows", at around 150 m on the west side of
the lake, two days later (1962-37).

Papaver radicatum Rottb.: 1952-40; 1957-

24.

Cochlearia officinalis L.: The prostrate
form, ssp. groenlandica (L.) Porsild, was
common on the shores of Ogac Lake, and
typically biennial (1957-21). A large, up-
right fruiting specimen was taken from
sandy clay of a barren scree slope about 100
m above the southeast side of the lake; it
had set seed the previous year (1962-46).

Cardamine bellidifolia L.: Local. 1952-15.

Cardamine pratensis L.: Tiny rosettes of
the peculiar leaf of this plant appeared com-
monly on black mud of drying pools around
the lake in early August, 1962. They achiev-
ed some vegetative growth, but no flowers
were noted. Also collected in the same state
in 1952. 1952-79.

Drab a crassifolia Grab.: Rare. Found only
on two sheltered snow-patch areas. 1962-13.

Draba nivalis Liljebl.: Collected only once,
on a dry ledge on the shaded side of the
inner lake basin. 1962-17.

Draba lactea Adams: Much the common-
est of the genus at Ogac Lake and, as usual,
quite variable. 1962-11, 12, 15, 18.

Draba glabella Pursh: The common large
draba. 1962-14.

Draba cinerea Adams: Taken only from
calcareous cliff rubble on the east side of
the lake. The siliques are, atypically, simple-
pubescent. 1962-16.

Arabis alpina L.: Common along streams
flowing into the lake. 1952-29, 47, 57; 1957-18.

Saxifraga aizoides L.: Common locally;
forming dense and extensive mats on steep
seepage areas and along rivulets. 1952-27, 63;
1957-43.

Saxifraga Aizoon Jacq. var. neogaea But-
ters: Regular on drier ledges and slopes,
but nowhere really common. 1952-53, 54j
1957-37.

Saxifraga caespitosa L.: Plants referable
to ssp. eucaespitosa. Nowhere very com-
mon. 1952-28, 81; 1957-38; 1962-50.

Saxifraga cernua L.: Conspicuous but scat-
tered. 1952-21; 1957-34.

Saxifraga foliosa R. Br.: Found only on
otherwise almost sterile, black mud on mar-
gins of drying streamlets and ponds in Aug-
ust. None had flowers. Almost all specimens
were less than 3-4 cm high, but one of 13
cm was collected. 1962-38.

Saxifraga nivalis L.: 1962-39. This and the
four following saxifrages were all well re-
presented at the lake.

Saxifraga oppositifolia L.: 1952-17; 1957-47.

Saxifraga rivularis L.: 1957-46.

Saxifraga tenuis Sm.: 1952-14; 1957-5; 1962-
39.

Saxifraga tricuspidata Rottb.: 1952-5; 26;
1957-41.

Potentilla Crantzii Beck: This species is
well known in Greenland and northern
Ungava-Labrador, but its presence on the
Archipelago has hitherto been based on a
specimen collected by Kumlien in Cumber-
land Sound in 1878. In 1962 it was found to
be regular around Ogac Lake in typical hab-
itats — in deep grass and among willow
shrubs between braided streams and on
damp, south-facing slopes. 1962-2, 3, 107.

Potentilla hyparctica Make: The com-
mon cinquefoil in a variety of habitats. 1952-
4; 1962-34.

Potentilla nivea L.: Less common than the
above, and usually in drier habitats. Plants
referable to the typical race. 1962-31, 32, 33.

Potentilla Vahliana Lehm.: A few speci-
mens of this high-arctic species were taken
from a south-facing slope on June 27, 1962.
These were the earliest blooms of the genus
noted, and the species was not found else-
where thereafter. 1962-1.

1964

McLaren: Plants from Ogac Lake

Sibbddia procumbens L.: This species
just enters the Archipelago in southeast Baf-
fin Island. It was found in 1962 to be fairly
common on the south-facing slope of the
inner lake basin and, once noted, was found
sparsely in a number of places — even on
gravel beaches well above the lake level.
1962-4.

Dryas integrifolia M. Vahl.: 1952-3, 39;
1957-48.

Empetrum nigrum L.: Common. 1952-no
field number.

Epilobium angustij olium L. var. inter-
medium (Wormskj.) Fern.: Found only in
a dry thicket of Salix cordifolia on the south
facing slope of the inner basin of the lake.
No evidence of flowering when collected
on August 15. 1962- 40.

Epilobium latifoliu?n L.: 1952-7, 32, 60;
1957-14, 49. A single specimen of the white-
flowered f. albiflorum Nathorst was noted
and collected by the expedition in 1952
(1952-32). Several white blooms occurred
among the typical form at the same site in
1957 (1957-14), but the white form had
apparently disappeared in 1962.

Pyrok grandiflora Rad.: 1952-23; 1957-33.

Ledum decumbens (Ait.) Lodd.: 1952-1,
87, 92. This and the following seven heaths
are well represented at the lake.

Loiseleuria procumbens (L.) Desv.: 1957-

26.

Cassiope hypnoides (L.) D. Don: 1952-10,
51; 1957-51.

Cassiope tetragona (L.) D. Don: 1952-9,
85; 1957-45.

Phyllodoce coerulea (L.) Bab.: 1952-18;
1957-50.

Rhododendron lapponicum (L.) Wahlenb.
1957-25.

Arctostaphylos alpina (L.) Spreng.: 1952-

89.

Vaccinium uliginosum L.: 1952-6, 88, 93.

Vaccinium Vitis-idaea L. var. minus
Lodd.: The only heath which can be said
to be rare. 1957-45.

Diapensia lapponica L.: Regular on gravel
between rocky ridges. 1952-96; 1957-40.

Armeria maritima (Mill.) Willd. ssp. lab-
radorica (Wallr.) Hult.: Rare. A few speci-
mens found on damp cliffs on the fiord
in mid-July, 1957, and a few clumps taken
from the gravelly brow of a south-facing
hill in 1962. 1957-22; 1962-102.

Mertensia ?naritima (L.) F. J. Gray: A
few growing on gravel beaches near the out-
let of the lake. 1952-35; 1957-42.

Veronica alpina L. var unalaschcensis C. &
S.: Formed dense stands on a few moist sites
on south-facing slopes, but elsewhere un-
common. 1952-57; 1957-32.

Euphrasia arctica Lge.: Quite common on
sunny slopes, but often almost hidden in
grassmats. 1952-55; 1957-29.

Bartsia alpina L.: Small local stands. 1952-
50; 1957-30.

Pedicularis lapponica L.: 1952-38; 1962-
126.

Pedicularis flammea L.: 1952-20; 1957-17.

Pedicularis hirsuta L.: The common louse-
wort at the lake. 1952-45; 1957-15. I searched
for P. lanata, but if it occurs it must be rare.

Pinguicula vulgaris L.: A few dozen plants
were discovered on August 19, 1962, grow-
ing on black soil of a seepage slope facing
southeast on the outer basin of the lake.
Most had finished flowering. The species
is rare on the Archipelago, and apparently
hitherto known only from a few specimens
collected by Polunin (1940) around Lake
Harbour. 1962-47.

Cafnpanula uniflora L.: Although perhaps
more widely distributed, this species did not
form local concentrations like the following.

1957-27.

Cafnpanula rotundifolia L.: Beautiful thick
stands of the species were found at several
places in cliff rubble along the east side of
the lake and elsewhere. 1952-56; 1957-28.

Erigeron eriocephalus J. Vahl: This high-
arctic form was found only once, on a
sandy-clay barren, about 400 m up the east
side of Knife Edge Mountain. 1962-112.

The Canadian Field-Naturalist

Vol. 78

Erigeron unalaschkensis (DC) Vierh.: The
common composite on a wide variety of
habitats around the lake. 1952-25; 1957-23;
1962-125.

-Erigeron sp.: On August 15, 1962, a stand
of several dozen finger o??, quite unlike the
above two species, was found below the
weathering cliffs on the east side of the
lake. Most were past flowering, and attract-
ed attention from a distance by their large
white pappus and general robustness. A few
late blooms resembled superficially those of
E. eriocephalus in their large, loose invol-
ucres, spreading phyllaries, and dense cov-
ering of pale hairs. However, the high-
arctic E. eriocephalus, which I have seen
in abundance on Ellesmere Island, is densely
grey-to-white villous, exactly as described
in Porsild's (1957) ma;nual, whereas the pre-
sent specimens are mauve-villous and much
more robust. Dr. Porsild {pers. cormn.) con-
curs in the opinion that they are not E.
eriocephalus. It is perhaps significant that
jE. eriocephalus at Ogac Lake (above) was
taken on one of the most barren alpine sites
examined, whereas the present specimens
grew on one of the most warm and shelter-
ed flower slopes, a stone's throw from the
first Archipelago record of the subarctic,
amphi-Atlantic Viscaria alpina. Along with
E. eriocephalus and E. humilis (= unalas-
chkensis), the two "low-arctic, oceanic-
montane" species E. uniflorus L. and E.
borealis (Vierh.) are maintained in the cur-
rent Greenland manual of Bocher et al.
(1957). Cronquist (1947) described E. alpini-
formis from Greenland material, but this is
considered to be E. uniflorus p.p. and E.
borealis p.p. by Bocher et al. (1957). Further
E. uniflorus and E. eriocephalus are consid-
ered only subspecifically distinct by some
authors, and are not separated at all by
others. In my opinion the material from

Ogac Lake is referable to E. uniflorus L.
(s. str.) as described in the recent manuals
for Greenland (Bocher et al., 1957) and Ice-
land (Love, 1945), and Dr. A. Love (pers.
cmitm.) concurs that it is E. uniflorus as he
knows it in Iceland. However, there are
systematic arid nomenclatural problems
which preclude any easy decision on such
limited material. It is perhaps sufficient to
suggest that there is an entity in the Eastern
Arctic flora distinct from E. unalaschkensis
and E. eriocephalus, somewhat resembling
the latter, but of decidedly subarctic rather
than high-arctic habitat. 1962-113.

Antennaria canescefis (Lge.) Make: Col-
lected on dry herbmats on the . south-facing
slope of the inner basin of the lake. 1962-7.

Antennaria angustata Greene: The com-
mon Antennaria at the lake. 1952-24; 1957-11-
1962-5, 10.

Antennaria Ek?naniana Porsild: This high-
arctic form was taken only on a gravelly
ledge on the steep, north-facing slope of the
inner basin of the lake. 1962-9,

Artemisia borealis Pall.: Small specimens
taken in 1957 from the exposed clifi^s of the
fiord. Luxuriant collections from river gra-
vel and from cliff rubble along the east side
of the lake in 1962. 1957-19; 1962-95.

Arnica alpina (L.) Olin ssp. angustifolia
(Vahl) Maguire: 1952-2, 48, 83; 1957-20.

Taraxacum lacerurn Greene: 1952-42-
1957-10; 1962-48. Both dandelions are com-
mon, this species perhaps more around the
shores, and the next on sunny slopes.

Taraxacum lapponicum Kihlm.
1962-49.

1952-49

References

Benson, L. 1948. A treatise on the North
American Ranunculi. American Midland
Naturalist 40: 1-261.

Bocher, T. W., K. Holmen, and K. Jakob-
sen. 1957. Gr0nlands flora. Copenhagen,
P. Haase & Sons.

Calder, J. a. 1951. Plants from the Frob-
isher Bay region, Baffin Island, N.W.T.,
Canada. Canadian Field-Naturalist 74: 8-27.

Cronquist, A. 1947. Revision of the North
American species of Erigeron north of
Mexico. Brittonia 6: 121-302.

Dunbar, M. J. 1958. Physical oceanogra-
phic results of the "Calanus" Expeditions
in Ungava Bay, Frobisher Bay, Cumber-
land Sound, Hudson Strait, and northern
Hudson Bay, 1949-1955. Journal of the
Fisheries Research Board of Canada. 15:
155-201.

GiLLETT, J. M. 1960. The flora of the
vicinity of the Merewether Crater, north-
ern Labrador. Canadian Field-Naturalist

74: 8-27.

1964 McLaren: Plants from Ogac Lake 77

Love, A. 1945. fslenzkar iurtir. Kaupman- Polunin, N. 1940. Botany of the Canadian

nahofn Eastern Arctic. Part I, Pteridophyta and

Spermatophyta. National Museum of Can-

Mercer, J. 1956. Geomorphology and gla- ada, Bulletin 92.

cial history of southernmost Baffin Island. Porsild, A. E. 1957. Illustrated flora of the

Geological Society of America, Bulletin. Canadian Arctic Archipelago. National

67: 553-570. Museum of Canada, Bulletin. 146.

Received for publication 21 July, 1963

PRELIMINARY TRIALS OF A CAMERA RECORDING
DEVICE EOR THE STUDY OF SMALL MAMMALS*

C. H. BUCKNER

Forest Entomology Laboratory, Box 6300, Winnipeg 1, Manitoba

Tests of a stop-lapse camera device for studying the habits of small mammals
in forest and bog habitats of southeastern Manitoba were made in 1961- The
•apparatus was similar to those employed by Pearson (1959), Dodge and Snyder
(1960), and Abbott and Dodge (1961). These have been described elsewhere,
and shown in photographs at the sites of operation. Examples were also
presented by these authors of the individual recordings made by the devices.
The apparatus I used was obtained through the joint assistance of the Engineer-
ing Research Institute and the Bio-Graphic Unit of the Canada Department of
Agriculture. P. W. Voisey, Instrumentation Engineer, Engineering Research
Service, Research Branch, Canada Department of Agriculture, Central Experi-
mental Farm, Ottawa, Canada, was responsible for basic construction and design
of electrical circuits.

The apparatus consisted of two units: one containing a 16 mm movie camera
with electronic photoflash, and a photoelectric cell and light source; the other
a small mirror, scale, clock, thermometer and relative humidity gauge. The
units were housed in glass-fronted weatherproof shelters. In operation, these
were positioned facing each other at a distance of two feet so that the red-light
source from the camera unit was reflected back to the photoelectric cell from
the mirror unit. Interruption of this beam fired the red light electronic flash
and exposed one frame of film. The flash and shutter could also be fired by
a treadle tripping device (Voisey and Kalbfleish, 1962) but preliminary tests
indicated that the photo cell has greater advantages. The device operated on
120 volt line current and differed from Pearson's model chiefly in the inclusion
of an isolation transformer to eliminate a shock hazard.

The apparatus was operated in a tamarack bog from August 2 to 23
inclusive. Preparations included a three-day mark-and.-release program one

^Contribution No. 971, Forest Entomology and Pathology Branch, Department of Forestry, Ottawa,
Canada.

78 The Canadian Field-Naturalist Vol. 78

week prior to the trial. Trapped animals were marked in the standard manner
by toe-clipping, and also by fur-clipping in various patterns for photo identifica-
tion. Animals marked in this way included two masked shrews, two meadow
voles, eleven red-backed voles, two deer mice, two meadow jumping mice, and
one red squirrel.

A total of 1,055 exposures were made, not including manual tests, of which
244 were discarded for the following reasons: subject not in camera field, 162
exposures; flash unit failure, 67 exposures; tripping by inanimate objects, 15
exposures. A garter snake and a white-throated sparrow each accounted for
one exposure and grey jays for 21. The remaining 788 photos were of
mammals, as follows: masked shrew, Sorex cmereus, 69 exposures of at least
2 individuals; short-tailed shrew, Blarina brevicmida, 4 exposures of at least 1
individual; meadow vole, Microtus pejmsylvanicus, 28 exposures of at least 2
individuals; red-backed vole, Clethrionomy s gapperi, 290 exposures of at least
8 individuals; deer mouse, Peromyscus mafiiculatus, 36 exposures of at least 2
individuals; meadow jumping mouse, Xapus hudsonius, 11 exposures of at least
2 individuals; red squirrel, Tamiasciurus hudsonicus, 181 exposures of at least 2
individuals; least chipmunk, Eutamias minimus, 3 exposures of at least 1
individual; snowishoe hare, Lepus americanus, 166 exposures of at least 1
individual.

Probably all marked animals were photographed, several of these many
times. Ease of identification varied with the position of the subject in relation
to the camera and indistinct images of the fur-clipped patches often made
identification difficult. Two animals were photographed carrying objects:
a red squirrel carrying a spruce cone and a meadow vole carrying a blade of
grass.

As an example of information obtained by the technique. Figure 1 shows
the relative daily activity of the three most frequently photographed species,
as determined by the number and timing of photographs.

The snowshoe hare was active almost exclusively during the periods of
darkness, whereas the red squirrel was active only during the daylight hours.
In contrast, the red-backed vole was active intermittently during both daylight
and darkness. Scanty records on the other species suggest that the masked
shrew, the deer mouse and the meadow jumping mouse behave similarly to the
red-backed vole. The meadow vole, and the four recordings of the short-
tailed shrew, were photographed only at night. The three photographs of the
least chipmunk were taken in dayhght.

Concomitant readings of temperature and relative humidity on each photo-
graph provide data for more critical analysis of the factors aftecting activity.
Present data are too limited to employ appropriate multiple regression techniques
but provide interesting preliminary indications of the conditions under which
the greatest activity occurred. For example, the snowshoe hare was recorded
at temperatures ranging from 45°-78° F and relative humidity from 20-68%.
The greatest activity occurred within a combination of ranges of 5 8° -66° F
and 37-47% RH and the largest number of individual readings was at 58° F
and 40-42% RH.

1964

Buckner: a Camera Recording Device

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 N 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 M

TIME (C.S.T.)

Figure 1. Number and time of photo-recordings of three species of mammals, in a tamarack
bog, August 2-23, 1961.

Encouraging results from the preliminary tests have warranted further
improvements to the equipment. Reliance on line power has been eliminated
by converting to battery operation. A re-designed model operates for about
a week on a standard 6-volt car battery before recharging and at temperatures
of 28° F or lower. Other improvements in the electronic and flash equipment
have reduced the incidence of premature and faulty exposures. Experiments
are planned to improve identification of marked animals.

The device promises to be of value in behaviour and population studies of
small mammals, particularly during the winter when trapping techniques are
less feasible. It may also prove useful as a supplementary means of obtaining
seasonal population estimates of small mammals on permanent study plots.

References

Abbott, Herschel G. and Wendell E.
Dodge. 1961. Photographic observations
of white pine seed destruction by birds
and mammals. Journal of Forestry ^9:
292-294.

Dodge, Wendell E. and Dana P. Snyder.
1960. An automatic camera device for re-
cording wildlife activity. Journal of Wild-
life Management 24: 340-342.

Pearson, O. P. 1959. A traffic survey of
Microtus-Reithrodontomy s runways. Jour-
nal of Mammalogy 40: 169-180.

VoisEY, Peter W. and W. Kalbfleisch.
1962. A mechanical treadle for the study
of small mammal traffic in the field or
laboratory. Journal of Mammalogy 43:
281.

Received for publication 14 July 1963

LOCAL DISTRIBUTION OF TWO VOLES:

EVIDENCE FOR INTERSPECIFIC INTERACTION

Garrett C. Clough*
Zoological Laboratory, Dalhousie University, Halifax, Nova Scotia

The local distribution of small mammals is often explained on the basis of
physiological limitations of the animal to physical factors of the environment.
Examples of studies supporting this assumption are works of Pruitt (1953) on
the short- tailed shrew, of Getz (1960 and 1961) on voles and shrews, of Bendell
(1961) on the deer mouse and of Pearson (1962) on red-backed voles.

Since a species usually does not occupy all of the space which apparently
suits its physiological requirements and limitations, other limiting factors must
be involved in some cases. Indirect evidence that presence or absence of other
species of small mammals may influence the local distribution of small mammals
is given by Wirtz and Pearson (1960), Findley (1954), Curry-Lindahl (1959)
and Ota and Jameson (1961). Interspecific interactions might be expected to
be most important in cases of predator-prey combinations or with species of
similar ecology.

The present study was undertaken to learn if two closely related species
of voles influenced each other in their local distribution in southern Nova
Scotia. The species studied were the meadow vole, Microtits pemisylvanicus
acadtciis and the red-backed vole, Clethrionomy s gapperi pallescens. Both
species are common in Nova Scotia. They are both widespread in North
America with Microtus extending slightly further north into Alaska and the
Northwest Territories and slightly further south into central United States
than Clethrionomy s (Hall and Kelson 1959).

This study was performed between October 1961 and November 1962.
Collecting efforts were aimed at areas containing more than one type of habitat.
A total of 2769 trap nights contributed to the results. Two introduction
experiments were conducted in which Clethrionomy s were added to isolated
areas of mixed habitat which had contained only Microtus.

The National Research Council of Canada supplied financial support with
Operating Grant No. A-1342. The National Museum of Canada, through the
courtesy of Mr. Phillip Youngman, kindly provided some of the traps.

Methods and Description of Areas
Field Collections: The collecting was done primarily in Halifax County.
Museum special snap traps, baited with peanut butter and rolled oats, were set
in lines through the areas. Since the aim of the collecting was to record the
presence or absence of the two voles the trapping method sometimes varied
from area to area. The trapping details are given below with the description
of each collecting site.

"Present address: The Norwegian State Game Research Institute, VoUebekk, Norway.

1964 Clough: Local Distribution of Two Voles 81

Habitat Types: The habitats found on the collecting sites were distinguished
on the basis of vegetation form and general condition of substrate. These fell
into six major types which were subdivided into fourteen habitat types.

I. BOG.

A. Open Bog. This was primarily a wet Sphagninn mat with sedges and
scattered low heaths.

B. Conifer Bog. On this habitat black spruce (Picea marlana) and larch
(Larix laricina) grew as low trees on the Sphagnmn and heath bog.

II. GRASSLAND.

C. Meadow Grass. This habitat included moist to mesic areas which had
dense covers of grass of various species without a shrub or tree layer.

D. Dry Grass. The grass on this habitat was sparse and the soil was dry
compared to the previous one. On the well-drained sandy soils of coastal
beaches the major grass was Avfrnophila.

III. CONIFEROUS V^OODS.

E. Wet Spruce Woods. This habitat contained an overstory of white
spruce (Picea glauca) with black spruce at the wetter edges. The ground and
herb layers supported many mosses and ferns. Sphagnum often grew in the
depressions.

F. Mature Spruce -Fir Woods. Balsam fir {Abies balsamifera) with either
white or red spruce (Picea rubra) formed the tree layer of this habitat. Tree
cover was usually dense. Withe-rod ( ViburJium cassinoides) and alder (Alnus)
were the most common shrubs in the forest openings. Ferns and various annual
herbs were common at some seasons.

G. Opeti Spruce Woods. This habitat was the remnant of the mature
spruce-fir woods a few years after logging operations had been completed.
Only a few trees were standing. The sapling layer was dense with young
poplar (Populus trermdoides), birch (Betida), spruce and fir. Viburnum, and
Alnus were common shrubs. Many brush heaps and fallen logs covered the
ground.

H. Dry Spruce Woods. Spruce which grew on the thin soil of rocky
uplands were thinly spaced with branches growing thickly to the ground.
Lichens and sparse shrubs grew on spots of exposed bed rock and areas of little
soil.

I. Virgin Hemlock Woods. In this stand of virgin hemlock (Tsuga
canade?isis) the dense, high canopy of trees allowed little vegetation to grow
on the ground below.

IV. MIXED WOODS.

J. Northern Mixed Woods. In this habitat the major tree species were
Abies balsamifera, Picea glaicca, Pinus strobus, Betida lute a, Acer rubrum and
Fagus grandifolia. Topography was varied with moist hollows and drier ridges.
The sapling, shrub and herb layers were well developed in places.

82 The Canadian Field-Naturalist Vol. 78

V. SHRUB.

K. Old-field Shrub. This habitat consisted of thick growths of plants at
the shrub layer and almost no herb layer. In one case these shrubs, dense
Spiraea and goldenrod (Solidago), prevented any grass from developing.

L. Heath Shrub. This habitat contained various low ericacous shrubs
such as blueberry (Vacciniznn), rhodera {Rhododendron canadense), sheep-
laurel (Kalmia ajigiistifolia), leather leaf {Chamadaphne calycidata) and ground
heaths such as foxberry (Vaccinium vitis-idaea) , cranberry (F. macrocarpon)
or the heath-like crowberry {Eupetrum nigrum). This habitat was on drier
ground than the Conifer Bog.

VI. ECOTONE,

M. Grass-Spruce Ecotone. The edge between Adeadow Grass or Dry
Grass and Mature Spruce-Fir Woods was often wide enough to contain several
trapping stations and therefore was classified as a distinct habitat. This was
characterized by spruce and fir trees of different heights widely spaced in
grassland.

N. Bog-Spruce Ecotone. The Open Bog and Conifer Bog often merged
gradually with A4ature Spruce-Fir Woods or with Wet Spruce Woods. These
areas were composed of a mixture of wet bog with sparsely growing conifer
trees of different sizes.

Collecting Sites: The collecting was done on fifteen different areas selected
to represent all the habitats containing at least one of the vole species under
study. The habitats and method of trapping on each collecting site are
described separately below. This material is summarized in Table 1.

1. On the first site a trap line extended from a Conifer Bog through a
Bog-Spruce Ecotone into a Wet Spruce Woods. Fifteen traps were placed
25 feet apart in a single hne for four nights from October 29 to November
1, 1961.

2. This site included Conifer Bog, Bog-Spruce Ecotone and Open Spruce
Woods habitats. Three parallel lines of 15 traps each were set with each line
completely within one habitat type only. The traps were spaced at 50-foot
intervals and the lines were 50 to 75 feet apart. The traps were set for five
nights from November 19 to 22, 1961.

3. This site was entirely within Northern Mixed Woods. Sixty traps
were set in groups of three at 20 stations about 10 yards apart in a single Hne
through the woods. The trapping was done for three nights from A4ay 7
to 10, 1962.

4. This site was in a large area of Dry Spruce Woods. Sixty traps were
set in groups of three at 20 stations about 10 yards apart. The traps were set
for three nights from May 7 to 10, 1962.

5. This trap line was placed in an extensive Mature Spruce-Fir Woods.
Fifty traps were set at approximately 10-yard intervals along a line for three
nights from May 14 to 17, 1962.

6. This site had two trap lines. One hne started in Meadow Grass and
passed abruptly into Mature Spruce-Fir Woods and the other line, which also

J 964

Clough: Local Distribution of Two Voles

>c3

o
m

J3
O

o
03

o
m

Xi
O

■ Jig

o 2^

M(2

Sot

J3
O

UotPh

(D (N CN

o
03

1) m
WIS

Uc^

_ D CO

(DJl^ CO

III

t*5

a,
d

D 3 O

§ffl

-* 00

Sci5

ooq
O

d
W

Sot

o.ti rt

o
o

1= s

.2 ?5

84 The Canadian Field-Naturalist Vol. 78

started in Meadow Grass, passed through Old-field Shrub and extended up to
Mature Spruce-Fir Woods. The lines were parallel and had 10 stations of three
traps per station. The stations were 25 feet apart and the lines 450 feet apart.
The traps were set for five nights from September 26 to 30, 1962.

7. At this site the trapping was done within a large field of Meadow Grass.
One hundred traps were set in a square grid pattern with 25-foot intervals
between traps and rows. Trapping was done for one day, September 14, 1962.

8. This site was part of a 110-acre peninsula connected to the mainland
by a long narrow spit of sand and pebbles. It contained Dry Grass habitat on
the seaward side and on the tops of a multiple series of old beach ridges. In
the hollows and flat sections between the ridges there were strips of Mature
Spruce-Fir Woods and Heath Shrub habitats. A portion of this area is shown
in Figure 1. Sixty traps were set at 20 stations for 3 nights from May 21 to 23,
1962. Half of these stations were in Dry Grass and the rest in the other
two habitats.

9. This area was similar to site 8 in its position on a small peninsula
separated from the mainland by a long narrow sand spit. It was a low glacial
drumlin about 15 acres large. Approximately one-third of the area was
Meadow Grass habitat and the rest covered by Heath Shrub, patches of Mature
Spruce-Fir Woods with Grass-Spruce Ecotone (Figure 2). Sixty traps were
set at 20 stations for three nights from May 21 to 23, 1962. Half of these
stations were set in Dry Grass and the rest distributed through the other three
habitats.

10. This site was situated along a section of high, rocky seacoast. The
trapping was done partly in a 35-foot wide strip of Meadow Grass on the open
knoll above the cliff, and partly in the Grass-Spruce Ecotone and Mature
Spruce Woods behind the grass. Three lines of five stations each extended
perpendicular to the shore line from the open grass in the woods. The
stations were 10 yards apart with three traps per station. The traps were
operated for four nights from December 1 to 4, 1961.

1 1 . This site was near a lake in a barren, rocky section of land a few miles
from the coast. The collecting was done partly in a low area of Open Bog
and partly on the hillside at the edge of the bog which was covered with Dry
Spruce Woods and Heath Shrub habitats. One line of 30 traps at 10 stations
placed at 10-yard intervals was set entirely within the bog and the other was
set in the same manner 50 yards away on the slope. The traps were set for
one night, October 17, 1962.

12. This site and the following two (13 and 14) were in the Tobeatic
Game Preserve in Queens County. The trapping on these three sites was done
for two days on October 7 and 8, 1962. This site (12) was entirely within an
extensive Mature Spruce-Fir Woods. Ten stations of three traps each were
set at 15 -yard intervals.

13. The collecting in this site was done in an Open Bog at the edge of a
lake. The last station in the hne was at the edge of Mature Spruce Woods.
Twelve stations with three traps per station were set at 10-yard intervals.

1964

Clough: Local Distribution of Two Voles

Figure 1. Collecting site 8. Dry Grass and Mature Spruce-Fir Woods are shown. Heath
Shrub is in the hollows in the background.

Figure 2. Collecting site 9. This view extends from Meadow Grass habitat through
Spruce-Grass Ecotone to Mature Spruce-Fir Woods.

86 The Canadian Field-Naturalist Vol. 78

14. This site was within a Virgin Hemlock Woods situated along the
bank of a river. Twenty stations of three traps each were set at 10-yard
intervals. The last two stations were on the river bank.

15. The last collecting site was on an island about six miles off the coast
of eastern Halifax County. Most of the island's 35 acres were covered with
Mature Spruce-Fir Woods. In a protected hollow there was one acre of
Grass-Spruce Ecotone. Along the island shore in some places there was a
strip of Heath Shrub 10 to 20 yards wide. Most of this was crowberry growing
in a thick green mat six to eight inches high. The trapping was done in the
ecotone and shrub habitats on May 23 and 24, 1962. Ten traps were set each
night.

Introduction Experiments: Collecting sites 8 and 9, the two peninsulas,
supported Microtus but no Clethrionomy s at the time the first collecting was
done. This fact, together with their relative isolation from the mainland and
their mixture of grassland, woodland and ecotone habitats, was utilized in the
performance of introduction experiments. On June 6, 1962, 12 Clethrionomy s
(4 adult females, 6 adult males and 2 immature animals) were released at four
points in the Spruce Woods of Site 8. On the same day 10 Clethrionomy s
(4 adult females and 6 adult males) were released at three points in the Spruce
Woods of site 9.

Four months later, from October 10 to 12, 1962, snap trapping was con-
ducted on site 8. Three lines of 15 stations, each with 3 traps, were set
through all habitat types. From October 27 to 31 trapping was done on site 9.
Three lines with a total of 33 stations, each with 3 traps, were set through all
habitat types. In both sites some stations were placed at the original points of
Clethrionomy s release.

Results

Field Collections: The small mammal catch for each collecting site is
presented in Table 1 according to habitat type. Seven other species besides
the two voles were found. Possibly interactions betw^een the two voles and
these other species of mammals are important in determining local distribution.
In this paper I am assuming that these other interactions, if they do exist,
would not change the influence of the two voles on each other.

On five collecting sites (2, 3, 4, 5 and 12) Clethrionomy s was found without
Microtus. On four sites (7, 8, 9 and 15) Microtus was found without Cleth-
rionomys. On the remaining six sites both species of voles were collected.
Close examination showed that on these latter sites the two species usually did
not occupy the same habitat type. The only instances of coexistence within
a single habitat at the same collecting site come in the Virgin Hemlock on site
14 and in the Grass-Spruce Ecotone on site 10. The first case involves only
one specimen of Microtus. This animal may have wandered into the forest
from the river bank where more ground vegetation grew. It was collected in
the fall when some small mammals tend to disperse from their home ranges into
unfamiliar areas. In the second case of coexistence the two species were not
captured at the same station in three nights.

1964 Clough: Local Distribution of Two Voles 87

The comparative distribution of the two voles by habitat type is shown
by the sum of the columns in Table 1. Four habitat types contained only
Microtus, six contained only Clethriojiomys and four habitat types (Heath
Shrub, Grass-Spruce Ecotone, Mature Spruce-Fir Woods and Virgin Hemlock
W^oods) had both species of voles. Clethrionomys and Microtus had some
exclusive habitats but they both occupied certain other habitats. However,
the two species usually did not coexist in those habitats which both of them
were able to occupy.

Introduction Experiments: Four months after the introduction of Clethri-
onomys to site 8 the trapping yielded ClethrionoTny s but no Microtus (Table 1).
Some of the Clethrio7iomy s collected were the marked animals of the introduc-
tion and others were unmarked juveniles. Presumably these were offspring
of the introduced animals. The animals were taken in Mature Spruce-Fir
Woods and Heath Shrub habitats.

On site 9 the post-introduction trapping results were quite different. Here
Microtus was taken but no Clethrionomys. The Microtus still occupied the
same habitats which they had previously: Meadow Grass, Mature Spruce-Fir
Woods, Heath Shrub and Grass-Spruce Ecotone.

The results of these experiments support the two conclusions drawn from
the field collections that, (1) both species of voles are able to live in certain
habitats and, (2) that they usually do not coexist in these habitats.

Discussion

Clethrionomys gapperi usually lives in woodlands and Microtus pennsyl-
vanicus in grasslands although they both have been found living together in
other habitats. Buckner (1957) trapped both species in tamarack bogs in
southeastern Manitoba, Connor (I960) found both in arbor vitae swamps in
New York and Smith and Foster (1957) found both in some woodland habitats
at Churchill, Manitoba. Beer, Lukens and Olson (1954) collected both species
on small wooded islands in Minnesota. In all these places the main distinction
between optimum habitats was preserved with Clethrionomy s most abundant
in conifer and mixed woods and Microtus most abundant in grasslands. The
overlap of local distribution was only partial.

Other field studies contrast to these records of partial compatibiHty of the
two species. The differences in local distribution of one vole in places where
the other is absent compared to the local distribution in places where both
species are present imply incompatibility. On Cape Breton Island, Nova Scotia,
C. gapperi was most abundant in woodlands while M. pennsylvcmicus was most
abundant in grassland (Cameron, 1958). However, on Newfoundland, where
Clethrionom:y s is absent, Cameron found that Microtus at high population
levels, expanded their habitats to include bogs, swamps and woodlands. A
similar situation occurred with members of these two genera in Japan. On the
island of Honshu C. andersonii inhabited coniferous woods and M. montebelli
inhabited grasslands. On Hokkadio Island, where M. montebelli is absent,
another species of Clethriono?nys, C. rufoccmus, occupies grasslands as well as
woodlands (Ota and Jameson, 1961). My study here gives additional circum-
stantial evidence of incompatibility between C. gapperi and M. pennsylva?iicus.

88 The Canadian Field-Naturalist Vol. 78

Thus, in some places and in some circumstances, these two voles seem
compatible while in others they may be incompatible. There is obviously an
overlap in physiological tolerances and needs in the two species. Behavioral
conflict may sometimes prevent them from coexisting in those places which
both are capable of occupying alone. Such aggressive conflict between species
of small mammals has been shown in the laboratory by King (1957) with Mus
and Feromysciis and by Getz (1962) with Microtus pennsylvaiiiciis and M.
ochrogaster. Both authors suggest that behavioral aggression may account for
the spatial separations of these species in the field.

We need much further study on the exact nature and mechanisms of inter-
specific interactions to learn why these two species of voles are apparently
mutually exclusive in some parts of their joint ranges and not in other parts.
There are two profitable lines to follow. One is to study wild populations by
following movements and survival of marked individuals in populations
manipulated by introductions and removals. Small islands with mixed vegeta-
tion oflFer ideal outdoor laboratories. The second line of study is to observe
the social behavior of the animals in captivity.

Summary
The local distribution of the meadow vole, Microtus penmylvanicics, and
the red-backed vole, Clethrionomys gapperi, was studied in southern Nova
Scotia. Collecting was done by snap trapping on 15 sites which contained 14
different habitat types. Two field experiments were conducted in which
Clethrionomys were introduced to peninsulas of mixed habitat occupied by
Microtus. In general, Clethrionomys occupied woods and Microtus occupied
grass and bogs but both species were found in heath shrub, grass-spruce ecotone
and mature spruce-fir woods. However, they almost never coexisted in these
habitats of ecological overlap. This suggests a partial behavioral incom-
patibility between the two species.

References

Beer, J. R., P. Lukens and D. Olson. 1954. Curry-Lindahl, K. 1959. Notes on the

Small mammal populations on the islands ecology and periodicity of some rodents

of Basswood Lake, Minnesota. Ecology and shrews in Sweden. Mammalia 23:

35:437-445. - 389-422.

Bendell, J.F. 1961. Some factors affecting Findley, J. S. 1954. Competition as a pos-

the habitat selection of the white-footed sible limitmg factor m the distribution of

mouse. Canadian Field-Naturalist 75:244- Microtus. Ecology 35:418-420

255 Getz, L. L. 1960. Factors influencing the

T. ^ rr ,r.r-, 1-, 1 • 1- local distribution of shrews. American

Buckner C. H. 957 Population studies Midland Naturalist 65:67-88.

on small mammals of southeastern Mam- ^^^^ Factors influencing the

toba. Journal of Mammalogy 38:87-97. ^^^^^ distribution of Microtus and Symp-

Cameron, a. W. 1958. Mammals of the toviys in southern Michigan. Ecology 42:

islands in the Gulf of St. Lawrence. Na- 110-119.

tional Museum of Canada Bulletin 154, . 1952. Aggressive behavior of

165 pp. the meadow and prairie voles. Journal of

Connor, P. F. 1960. The small mammals Mammalogy 43:351-358.

of Otsego and Schoharie Counties, New Hall, E. R. and K. R. Kelson. 1959. The

York. New York State Museum and Mammals of North America. 2 Volumes.

Science Service Bulletin 382:1-84. 1083 pp. Ronald Press, New York.

1964 Clough: Local Distribution of Two Voles 89

King, J. A. 1957. Intra- and interspecific Pruitt, W. O., Jr. 1953. An analysis of

conflict of Mus and Feromyscus. Ecology some physical factors affecting the local

,_ ,-- ,-_ distribution of the shorttail shrew (Blarina

brevicauda) in the northern part of the

Ota, K. and E. W. Jameson, Jr. 1961. lower peninsula of Michigan. Miscel-

Ecological relationships and economic im- laneous Publications, Museum of Zoology,

portance of Japanese microtines. Ecology University of Michigan 79:1-39.

42:184-186. Smith, D. A. and J. B. Foster. 1957. Notes

A ,, A • • on the small mammals of Churchill, Mani-

Pearson, A. M. 1962. Activity patterns, toba. Journal of Mammalogy 38: 98-115.

energy metabolism, and growth rate of the ^^^^ ^ q „ ^^^ p ^ p^^^^^^ ^^^

voles Clethnono?nys mfocanm and C. ^ preHminary analysis of habitat orienta-

gUreolus in Finland. Annales Zoological tjon in Microtus and Feromyscus. Ameri-

Societatis 'Vanamo'. Tom. 24:1-58. can Midland Naturalist 63:131-142.

Received for publication 1 November 1963

NEW BIRD RECORDS FROM CAPE BRETON ISLAND,

NOVA SCOTIA

Anthony J. Erskine

Canadian Wildlife Service, Sackville, New Brunswick

Godfrey (1958) published data on 189 species of birds reported in Cape Breton
Island, Nova Scotia, through 19.')4. Tufts (1962) and Cameron (1963)
reported Cape Breton records for four species not listed by Godfrey. This
paper presents sight records of twenty-five species of birds not reported in Cape
Breton by those authors, and breeding records of five species not previously
known to breed on that island. Additional records are also presented for three
species whose status in Cape Breton was considered hypothetical or doubtful
by previous authors.

Canadian Wildlife Service biologists, including the late George F. Boyer,
Brian C. Carter, Charles O. Bartlett, and the writer, have made surveys of
waterfowl in Cape Breton during the years 1949-63. Unpublished data from
our field notes have provided most of the new records. Other records were
obtained from J. E. V. Goodwill {MS), and from the Nova Scotia Bird Society
newsletters. All records not otherwise credited below are those of the writer.
No specimens were collected, but my own identifications were made carefully,
since I was aware of their significance.

The Canadian Field-Naturalist

Vol. 78

Gavia stellata Red-Throated Loon: Un-
common transient. One winter plumaged
bird at Mabou, Inverness Co., April 29, 1961;
one at the Strait of Canso, Inverness Co.,
November 8, 1962 (Goodwill, MS).

Biitorides viresce72s Green Heron: Casual.
One at Whycocomagh, Inverness Co., June
2, 1961.

Florida caerulea Little Blue Heron: Cas-
ual. One immature at Whycocomagh, Aug-
ust 15, 1961 (R. S. Gibbon and the writer).
Chen caerulescens Blue Goose: Casual. Two
at Little Judique Ponds, Inverness Co., Oct-
ober 7, 1961. My field notes state that one
bird had a dark body and the second had
a light-coloured belly. Tufts (1962) gave
only one record for the province of Nova
Scotia.

Anas platyrhynchos Mallard: Uncom-
mon in spring and summer. C. W. S. bio-
logists have at least nine records, all of
adult drakes except one eclipse-plumaged
bird, in most cases apparently paired with
Black Ducks Anas rubripes. Seasonally, the
earliest was April 21, 1961, at Inverness, and
the latest August 26, 1962, at Margaree Har-
bour, both in Inverness Co.

Anas acuta Pintail: Uncommon transient.
Seasonally, spring records extend from May
7, 1961, one drake at the Strait of Canso, to
May 21, 1961, a pair near Kenloch, Inverness
Co.; fall records ranged from September 24,

1960, 19 birds at River Denys, to October 7,

1961, one at Judique North, both locations
in Inverness Co.

Anas carolinensis Green-Winged Teal:
Not previously known to breed. C.W.S. bio-
logists have brood records from Kenloch,
Whycocomagh, Nyanza (Victoria Co.), and
North Sydney and Mullcuish Lake, in Cape
Breton Co.

Spatula clypeata Shoveler: Casual. A pair
near Margaree Forks, Inverness Co., June
7, 1963.

Aix sponsa Wood Duck: Uncommon.
Breeds. C.W.S. biologists have spring and
summer records, from April 24, 1961, one
drake at River Denys, to August 18, 1962,
two at McCormack, Inverness Co. Broods
have been seen at Nyanza — a female with

11 half -grown young, July 24, 1956 (Carter
and J. K. Lowther), and at River Denys —
a female with nine one-third grown young,
July 21, 1961.

Aythya marila Greater Scaup: Common
in fall and winter, uncommon in spring.
The earliest and latest seasonal records are
of 210 at Mullcuish Lake, October 6, 1961,
and two pairs at Scotsville, Inverness Co.,
May 26, 1956 (J. K. Lowther). 430 off Big
Pond, on the Bras D'Or Lakes, January 16,
1963, is the largest number reported.

Bucephala islandica Barrow's Goldeneye:
Casual. One drake and two females on the
Margaree River near Margaree Forks, April
20, 1961.

Bucephala albeola Bufflehead: Uncom-
mon in winter. Two drakes and one female
at Margaree Harbour, December 13, 1960; a
courting group of seven males and 11 fe-
males at Framboise Cove, Richmond Co.,
January 15, 1963.

Somateria spectabilis King Eider: Listed
by Godfrey (1958) as hypothetical. A speci-
men in the Nova Scotia Aluseum of Science
was collected at St. Paul Island in 1896,
by W. D. Farquhar.

Oxyura jamaicensis Ruddy Duck: Un-
common fall transient. One near East Mar-
garee, Inverness Co., November 5, 1957
(Carter) ; one at Little Judique Ponds, Oct-
ober 7, 1961.

Lophodytes cucullatus Hooded Mergan-
ser: Uncommon fall transient. Tufts (1962)
stated that James Bond's records, cited by
Godfrey, have since been withdrawn by
Bond. One female or sub-adult at Nyanza,
September 25, 1960; a group of three males
and one female at Whycocomagh, October
5, 1961.

Totanus melanoleucus Greater Yellow-
legs: Probably breeds. J. S. Erskine (letter,
July 28, 1956) wrote that he saw a small
downy young believed to be a Greater
Yellowlegs swim across a pond, while adults
screamed overhead, near Lake of Islands,
Victoria Co., on the Cape Breton plateau,
July 20, 1956. That record was incompletely
cited by Tufts (1962), who made no men-
tion of the young bird.

]964

Erskine: Bird Records from Cape Breton

[Erolia bairdii Bairu's Sandpiper: One at
Nyanza, September 12, 1956 (J. K. Lowther,
1956, unpublished mimeographed report,
Canadian Wildlife Service). This species is
rare anywhere in Nova Scotia (Tufts, 1962)
and is easily confused with other sand-
pipers. Without a specimen, its status in
Cape Breton is best treated as hypothetical.]

Erolia alpina Dunlin: Regular transient,
scarce in spring. One in breeding plumage at
Point Michaud Beach, Richmond Co., June
8, 1963; 42 at the same place October 4, 1961,
and 12 at Big Glace Lake, Cape Breton Co.,
October 6, 1961.

Ltjnosa haemastica Hudsonian Godwit:
Uncommon fall transient. Laidlaw Williams
(letter, October 13, 1963) saw this species
on four occasions at Port Morien, Cape
Breton Co., the earliest and latest dates be-
ing August 6, 1951, and September 5, 1950.
The greatest number was 24 on August
20, 1951. One at Big Glace Lake, August 5,
1963; three there, and two at Framboise
Cove, October 6, 1961; two at Little Judique
Ponds, October 7, 1961. John Lunn {jide A.
M. Bagg, letter, October 6, 1963) saw single
birds near Louisbourg, Cape Breton Co.,
September 2 and 29, 1963.

Larus glaucoides Iceland Gull: Winter
visitant. Eight at North Sydney, November
1. 1962, and up to 25 at the Strait of Canso,
November 3-8, 1962 (Goodwill, MS) : seven
at the latter place, January 18, 1963.

Hydroprogne caspia Caspian Tern:
Casual. One at East Lake AinsHe, Inverness
Co., September 24, 1960.

Columba livia P.ock Dove: Omitted, prob-
ably intentionally, by Godfrey (1958). Com-
mon in urban areas around Sydney, Cape
Breton Co., but uncommon and very local
elsewhere — noted only at Baddeck, Victoria
Co., and at Whycocomagh, Inverness, Port
Hastings, and Port Hawkesbury, in Inver-
ness Co. Strayed carrier pigeons seem to be
the only Rock Doves seen in rural areas.

Tyr annus verticalis Western Kingbird:
Casual. One at Big Intervale, Inverness Co.,
September 2, 1961 (J. B. Hardie, in N.S.
Bird Society newsletter). That species is
reported each autumn in Nova Scotia and is

not likely to be confused with other, more
common species.

Sayornis phoebe Eastern Phoebe: Listed
as hypothetical by Godfrey (1958). Casual.
One near Breton Cove, Victoria Co., July
28, 1958 (M.R. Bates, in Tufts, 1959). One
at Island Point, Victoria Co., and one at
Alba, Inverness Co., July 27, 1960 (T.F.T.
Morland). One at Portree, Inverness Co.,
May 19 and 20 and June 1, 1962; one at
Nyanza, May 28, 1963.

Dumetella carolinensis Catbird: Probably
breeds. Three birds, believed to be one adult
and two juveniles, on the basis of behaviour
and appearance, on August 14, 1962, at Glen-
dyer, Inverness Co., where adults had been
noted June 4 and July 21 in that year.

Boniby cilia garrulus Bohemian Waxwing:
Casual. One at a feeding station in Baddeck,
January 23-28, 1961 (Mrs. M. W. MacRae,
in N.S. Bird Society newsletter) . This spec-
ies, and the Towhee cited below, are quite
distinctive, although neither is more than
casual on the Nova Scotia mainland. Since
the birds were observed at close range for
several days, there seems to be no reason to
question these records.

Vireo philadelphicus Philadelphia Vireo:
Casual. One at Big Intervale Cape North,
Victoria Co., July 9, 1963. Tufts (1962)
gave only three records for the province
of Nova Scotia. The description I wrote on
the spot reads — "dark olive back, darker
cap, eye not red, dark line through eye
with lighter line above, yellowish throat,
belly whiter", and the song of the bird was
much harsher than those of other vireo
species in the area.

[Vireo gilvus Warbling Vireo: One near
Ingonish Beach, Victoria Co., July 27, 1958
(M.R. Bates, in Tufts, 1959). No specimen
exists for that easily confused species on
even the mainland of Nova Scotia. Without
further details, its status in Cape Breton
should be considered hypothetical.]

Spinus pinus Pine Siskin: Not previously
known to breed. A fledgling, bobtailed, and
unable to fly more than a few yards, at Big
Intervale Margaree, June 19, 1961. That
bird was captured, and released after ex-
amination.

92 The Canadian Field-Naturalist Vol. 78

Piplio erythrophthalmus Rufous -sided letter, October 6, 1963) saw an adult near

Towhee: Casual. One at a feeding station in Louisbourg, Cape Breton Co., September 2,

Baddeck, December 29, 1960, to January 2, 1963.

1961 (Mrs. M. W. MacRae, in N.S. Bird Calcarius lapponicus Lapland Longspur:

Society newsletter). See remarks above un- ^^ j^^. .j-ansient and winter visitant, along

der Bohemian Waxwing. ^j^^ ^^^^^ ^^^^^ ^^ ^^^^ ^^^^^^ Country.

Cbondestes granmiacus Lark Sparrow: Three at Big Glace Lake, and 35 at Port

Casual. Laidlaw Williams saw one at Plaster Morien, October 6, 1961; three at Big Glace

Mines, near Baddeck, Victoria Co., August Lake, January 15, 1963; two pairs in summer

30, 1961. John Lunn {fide Aaron M. Bagg, plumage at Louisbourg, April 25, 1961.

References

Cameron, Austin W. 1963. Baltimore Tufts, Robie W. 1959. List of Rare and

Oriole Recorded for Cape Breton Island. Unusual Birds Reported by Members of

Canadian Field-Naturalist 77(1) :66. the Nova Scotia Bird Society. Nova Scotia

Museum Newsletter 2(4):68-75.

Godfrey, W. Earl. 1958. Birds of Cape 1962. The Birds of Nova

Breton Island, Nova Scotia. Canadian Scotia. Nova Scotia Museum, Halifax.

Field-Naturalist 72(l):7-27. 481 pp.

Received for publication 1 October 1963

POTENTILLA STIPULARIS L. AND DRABA SIBIRICA
(PALL.) THELL. NEW TO NORTH AMERICA

A. E. PORSILD
National Museum of Canada, Ottawa, Ontario

In the eastern North American Arctic, high mountains or elevated plateaux
are notoriously unrewarding places for the botanist looking for new or rare
plants. The reason clearly is that most, if not all high mountains there, were
overridden by glaciers during the Pleistocene and that no large plant refugia
were available from which their floras could be replenished after the ice had
retreated. Thus, in Greenland, Labrador and Baffin Island, the number of
plant species decreases progressively from sea-level upwards; there is no very
apparent altitudinal zonation, and at or near the summit of high mountains,
the plant cover is sparse and depauperate, composed entirely of ubiquitous,
wide-ranging arctic-alpine species. Such plant refugia as may have existed
in the eastern North American Arctic during the Pleistocene, must have been
near sea-level rather than on the frigid and windblown summits of mountains
protruding above the ice caps. In western Ellesmere and Axel Heiberg Islands,
situated in the rain-shadow of the eastern coast ranges of Ellesmere Island, the
lowland vegetation is often sparse whereas a surprisingly rich and luxurious
plant cover may be found at elevations between 2,000 and 2,400 feet, even

1964 Porsild: P. stipularis and D. sibirica 93

though the site may show signs of comparative recent glaciation. The richer
alpine plant cover owes its existence there partly to the adequate moisture from
a more abundant precipitation, or to run-off from snow-fields, and partly to
temperature inversion commonly observed over large parts of the Arctic
Archipelago where, from June through August, a low-hanging cloud cover,
averaging 70-80 per cent (Rae, 1951), greatly reduces the amount of solar
radiation reaching the lowland (Porsild, 1955). The relatively rich plant cover
of some alpine plateaux of these northern islands is, however, composed very
largely of the species found also at sea-level.

By contrast, the unglaciated mountain plateaux of Alaska, Yukon, the
Mackenzie District and northern British Columbia, have for some time been
known to harbour floras richer and more varied than those of the intervening
valleys. Thus, in alpine herbmats of the Pelly Mountains in southeastern
Yukon, the writer counted 111 species of vascular plants within a radius of 100
feet, few of them found in the forested valley below.

During the Pleistocene, or at any rate during the last advance of the ice
in Wisconsin time, the upper limit of valley glaciation in Yukon roughly
coincided with the present timberline, or roughly with elevations between 4,500
and 5,600 feet above sea level (Porsild, 1951). The climate at this time must
have been sufficiently favourable for the plateaux above the ice to have served
as refugia for numerous arctic and alpine species for, otherwise, it would be
very difficult to explain how the endemic or Mddely disjunct species, for which
these plateaux are renowned, could have arrived in post-Pleistocene time.
When a more favourable climate caused the valley glaciers to retreat, arctic
and alpine tundra plants probably were the first to occupy the valleys; but they
were soon succeeded by the more aggressive and xerophytic forest- and-grass-
land species that today dominate the lowland and valley sites.

Due to greatly improved means of transportation and to more readily
available funds for field work, few places on the North American continent are
today inaccessible to plant collectors. Nevertheless, despite the considerable
amount of collecting of recent years, by professional and amateur botanists,
the mountain fastnesses of Alaska, Yukon, Mackenzie District and northern
British Columbia may still yield botanical surprises and unexpected rewards.
Two such wholly unexpected discoveries are reported in the following pages.

Dr. and Mrs. Raymond D. Wood of Salt Lake City, Utah, lately of Mount
Kisco, N.Y., for a number of years have made extended summer forays into
the North American Arctic for the purpose of photographing wild flowers in
colour. During four summers in the Canadian North and one in West Green-
land, the Woods succeeded in photographing 354 species of arctic phanerogams
and ferns, many of them never before photographed in colour. A complete
duplicate set of their colour transparencies, all in ly^ x 214'' format, now
numbering well over 750 slides, together with carefully collected herbarium
vouchers, being the original specimens photographed, have been presented to the
National Herbarium of Canada. Due to the technical skill and forethought with
which these transparencies were made, this unique collection of plant portraits

94 The Canadian Field-Naturalist Vol. 78

and photographs of plant habitats constitutes an invaluable research "tool" for
present and future botanists engaged in the study of arctic plants.

In 1961, Dr. and Mrs. Wood visited the north slope of the Brooks Range,
Alaska, vi^here, since the establishment of the Point Barrow Arctic Laboratory,
a number of botanists have been active. Plants were collected and photo-
graphed in the vicinity of Point Barrow, near Umiat on the middle Colville
River, at Meade River southwest of Barrow, and at Schrader Lake near the east
end of the Brooks Range, not far from the Canadian border. In 1962 the
Woods again visited Alaska when extended visits were made to the east shore
of Bering Strait near Cape Thompson and to Anaktuvuk Pass in the central
Brooks Range.

Among the highlights of the combined collections of 265 species of Alaskan
plants are excellent representations of several rare plants thus far known only
from a few stations in N.W. America and E. Asia, among them flowering and
fruiting Anemone jmdticeps, the E. Asiatic Androsace ochotensis and Koeleria
asiatica and a fine series of the Alaskan endemic, Oxytropis kuyukukensis, a
probably undescribed scapiform Papaver, a curious new Senecio and, perhaps
most interesting of all, a perfectly distinct Siberian cinquefoil new to North
America.

Flowering specimens and photographs of Potentilla stipidaris L. (Figure 1)
were obtained on June 30, 1961, one mile west of Umiat, where it grew on wet,
sandy loam (R. D. Wood, No. 403, CAN). The Umiat collection is a perfect
match for Lehmann's fine illustration (Lehmann, 1856, tab. 46) as well as for
representative Siberian specimens in the National Herbarium of Canada, from
the lower Lena River Valley near Jakutsk on the Lena River, and from the
northern Ural Mountains near Vorkuta. The range of P. stiptdaris given in
Fl. USSR, Vol. 10 p. 193 is as follows: Arctic Siberia east to Chukotsk; W.
Siberia, Ob; E. Siberia Yenisei, Lena-Kolyma east to Angara-Sajan.

Unknown to Dr. Wood, P. stipularis had been collected at Umiat already
in 1960 by Drs. Kjeld Holmen of the University of Copenhagen, Denmark,
and O. Martensson of the University of Uppsala, Sweden. Their discovery
is reported here by kind permission of Dr. Holmen.

As far as I know, the only previous reports of P. stipidaris from outside
the USSR is from the northeast coast of Greenland where it was collected first
on Clavering Island, in appr. latitude 74° N. (Th. S0rensen, in Gelting, 1934,
p. 112 and tab. 4, map fig. 12). The single specimen upon which the report is
based, is in prefloral state and by its robust growth and broad leaflets differs
so much from Siberian P. stipidaris that it has been described as a distinct taxon,
var. groefilandica Th. S0r. In 1958, Kjeld Holmen and Simon Laegaard added
another East Greenland station, in innermost reaches of Scoresby Sound,
approximately latitude 71° 02' and longitude 27° 45', where P. stipidaris grew
on a south-exposed slope with Cerastium alpinimi, Carex nipestris, Campanula
rotundifolia, Salix glauca, Saxifraga nivalis, Draba aurea, PotentiUa jiivea and
Euphrasia sp.

The occurrence at Umiat, of P. stipularis, although unexpected and
puzzling, is not unprecedented, however, inasmuch as a number of other

1964

Porsild: p. stipularis and D. sibirica

Figure 1. Potentilla stipularis L. 2/3 natural size (from Umiat, Alaska).

96 The Canadian Field-Naturalist Vol. 78

Siberian plants are known to occur in isolated and widely disjunct stations on
both sides of Bering Strait. In view of the inland remoteness of the Alaskan
station for P. stipularis, recent introduction into Alaska by human agencies or
by spontaneous natural dispersal, can almost certainly be ruled out.

Draba sibiricct (Pallas) Thellung, another Siberian plant new to the flora
of North America, was collected in 1963 in the Ogilvie Mountains 120 miles
northwest of Dawson, Yukon Territory, in rich alpine meadows, elev. 5540',
by P. M. Youngman and G. Tessier of the Zoology Section of the National
Museum.

The single specimen showing flowers and young fruits, is a perfect match
for specimens in the National Herbarium of Canada from northern Ural
Mountains and the Lake Baikal region of the USSR. On the flat calcareous
summit of unglaciated Ogilvie Mountains, Draba sibirica grew in rich alpine
meadows or herbmats, associated with Cardamine purpurea, Pedicularis lanata,
Parry a midicauUs and Aconitum delphinijolmm.

By its matted habit, long, creeping stolons terminating in leafy rosettes,
by its yellow flowers on naked peduncles and, above all, by its appressed,
bifurcate (malpighiaceous) hairs, attached by their middle (as in the genus
Erysimum), D. sibirica differs from all other arctic or boreal Drabae (Figure 2).

Strangely enough, Draba sibirica, in common with Poteiitilla stipularis,
outside the USSR, otherwise is known only from a single station in East Green-
land, in approximately latitude 7 1 ° N. where it is abundant locally at the head of
Hurry Inlet north of Scoresby Sound (Kruuse, 1905, p. 162). The range given
for D. sibirica in Fl. USSR is: Novaya Zemlya and arctic Siberia; boreal northern
European Russia; Caucasus and E. & W. Transcaucasus; east and west Siberia,
south in central Asia to the Mongolian border and east to the Sea of Okhotsk.

The Cordilleran Phyllodoce glandidiflora (Hook.) Cov., new to the flora
of Yukon Territory, but known from adjacent parts of the Mackenzie District
and British Columbia, was collected by Messrs. Youngman and Tessier on the
Little Hyland River, 125 miles north of Watson Lake, elevation 4,000 feet.

References

Gelting, Paul. 1934. Studies on the vascu- eastern Yukon adjacent to the Canol Road.

lar plants of East Greenland, etc. Med- National Museum of Canada Bulletin 121,

delelser om Gr0nland 101, 2 pp.-337. 400 pp., 34 pi.

Copenhagen. . 1955. The vascular flora of the

Kruuse, Chr. 1905. Meddelelser om Grcin- western Canadian Arctic Archipelago.

land 30:143-208. Copenhagen. National Museum of Canada Bulletin 135,

^ 66. 226, 24 pi.

Lehmann, Johann. 1856. Revisio Potentil- ^^^ ^ ^ ^^^^ qj^^^^^ ^f ^^e Canadian

latum iconibus illustrata. Bonn. ^^.^^j^ Archipelago. Canada Department

PoRSiLD, A. E. 1951. Botany of south- of Transport, Ottawa.

Received for publication 9 December 1963

1964

Porsild: p. stipularis and D. sibirica

Figure 2. Draba sibirica (Pall.) THeU. approximately 2 times natural size (from O.
Gelert, Bot. Tidsskr. vol. 21, 3, fig. 9, 1898).

VOLE POPULATIONS IN SOUTHWESTERN ONTARIO*

Robert H. Stinson
Department of Zoology, University of Western Ontario, London, Ontario

Voles of the genus Microtus have long been noted for their periodic outbreaks
in different parts of the world, often causing great damage to cultivated crops.
Elton (1942) and Chitty (1960) have summarized much of the literature and
speculated as to the causes of such fluctuations. In North America peak
populations have been studied by Hatt (1930), Hamilton (1937a) and, more
recently, Beck et al. (1959) who have described the spectacular increase which
occurred in Oregon in 1957-58. In Ontario the meadow vole, Microtus
pennsylvanicus pennsylvanicus Ord, has been a continual source of damage in
orchards and nurseries, girdling trees particularly where they have been planted
in heavy sod. In 1956-57 and 1957-58 high numbers of mice occurred in
scattered areas in southwestern Ontario and in 1958-59 at the eastern end of
Lake Ontario. As is usually the case, concentrations of animals were rarely
observed directly, but damage to trees and crops, evident after the snow had
gone, indicated their presence. The occurrence of such damage in tree planta-
tions of the Ontario Department of Lands and Forests led to studies in 1957 and
1958 of vole populations in these areas. The following paper is an account of
two studies, (1) a trapping survey of plantations, and (2) a description of the
characteristics of a high population.

Survey of Plantations
In 1958 an attempt was made to obtain an index of vole populations in the
tree plantations of the Lake Erie, Lake Huron and Lake Simcoe Districts of
the Department, in order to discover the frequency of occurrence of voles
and to determine whether any relationship existed between the population
index and subsequent damage in the area. The plantations were generally less
than eight years of age, and contained chiefly white pine (Pinus strobus), red
pine (P. resinosa), jack pine (F. bansksiana) , Scotch pine (P. sylvestris), white
spruce (Picea glaucct), w^hite cedar {Thuja occide?italis), and European larch
(Larix decidua).

In July and again in October single lines of 30 Victor snap traps, at 12 foot
intervals, baited with peanut butter and oatmeal, were set out in selected areas
of 76 plantations by personnel of the Department of Lands and Forests. A line
was examined once a day for three days and all small mammals taken were
preserved in 10 per cent formalin for later identification and measurement.

The distribution of the lines by counties is shown in Figure 1 with the
total number of voles taken on each line. In 95 per cent of the three-day
trapping period fewer than six voles were taken in any one period, but in July
single lines in Ontario, Perth and Elgin counties caught 13, 19 and 21 respec-
tively, and in October one line in Middlesex county caught 15 animals. Apart

'This study was supported by The Research Branch of the Ontario Department of Lands and Forests.

1964

Stinson: Vole Populations

3
O

o tc

- O Z X UJ UJ

S z o o a. Q.

w o z X _) oe —
2 z o o 0.

III

<n ? * 5 ? >- '^

III

<■

ffi

■D

-0

(£

c
O

100

The Canadian Field-Naturaijst

Vol. 78

NUMBER OF VOLES

Figure 2. Distribution of size and reproductive state of 320 voles trapped in southwestern
Ontario, July and October 1958.

1964 Stinson: Vole Populations 101

from these lines, which may represent "pockets" of high numbers, the average
population in the plantation areas was probably low judging from the popula-
tion index of Beer and MacLeod (1961). Although their trapline method
differed in some detail from that of the present study, they give a figure of 25
voles per 1000 trap-station-days as representing a "moderate level" of popula-
tion. Excluding the above four lines, the plantation survey produced 14 voles
per 1000 trap-station-days.

Voles were trapped in 49 of the 76 plantation areas and appeared in more
lines and in greatest average numbers per line in the Huron-Perth-Middlesex-
Elgin area. For example, when Middlesex with 10 and Simcoe county with
11 lines are compared, the former yielded 52 but the latter only eight animals.

The likelihood of higher populations in the south-central area in 1957-58
was also suggested from the results of a questionnaire sent out to District
Foresters and Agricultural Representatives across the area of Figure 1 asking
for reports of damage. Of the 44 reports received of damage to trees from
1956 to 1958, 32 came from the four counties mentioned above plus the adjacent
counties of Waterloo and Oxford. They described the girdling of trees in
plantations and orchards, particularly where they were growing in heavy sod
or with the addition of mulch. The Scotch pine was the tree most frequently
attacked in the plantations and the apple in the orchards. Two other observa-
tions of interest were made in these reports; damage occurred whether or not
a heavy snow cover was present, and the gnawing of trees began in September
and October at a time when there was an abundant supply of grass.

The possibility that the amount of damage in an area bore some relationship
to the trapline catch was examined in April and May 1959. As soon as the
snow had gone, a survey was made by personnel of the Department for signs
of recent attacks upon trees in the immediate neighbourhoods of 2 1 lines of the
Lake Erie District. Damage was found in 12 of the plantation areas but it was
evident that no correlation existed between the extent of such damage and the
number of voles taken in the previous year. Along one line in Kent county
on which three voles were caught in 1958, 2500 young Scotch pine seedlings
were destroyed in the following winter, whereas on a line in Middlesex county
no damage occurred although 15 voles had been taken in the three-day period
of the previous October. The lines, of course, trapped only a limited area and
gave no indication of damage which might occur in other parts of a plantation.
In fact, from the pattern of destruction in some plantations, there was evidence
that the voles had invaded the area during the winter from adjacent cover of
tall grass and swamp.

When received for examination the carcasses were hardened and somewhat
distorted by the preservative. In order to estimate the effect of this treatment
upon the measurement of body length, a number of voles taken on local
traplines were measured before and after a period of several weeks in 10 per
cent formalin. Slight shrinkage did occur, on an average four per cent of the
body length, so this amount was added to the measured body length in each
case. The preserved condition also made it difficult to determine the state of
the vaginal opening in the females and the presence of placental scars; hence

102 The Canadian Field-Naturalist Vol. 78

only obvious pregnancies were recognized. The reproductive state of the
male was judged by the size of the testis following the description of Hamilton
(1937b) that sperm were never found in the epididymis if the testis was less
than 8 mm in length. This size has been used as the criterion of reproductive
maturity but in 90 per cent of the males there was no difficulty in separating
the testes into two size groups, one of 3-4 mm and another of 12-16 mm.

Of the 320 voles examined, 242 came from the trapping survey and 78 from
five traplines set out in July in areas of thick grass within a one-mile radius
of the University of Western Ontario. In Figure 2 is shown the distribution
of size and reproductive condition of these animals. The size classes are the
same as those used by Beer and MacLeod (1961) who trapped voles at monthly
intervals through the year. Even with the use of preserved material, there is
considerable agreement with their data.

It is apparent that while females in the 90-94 mm range (24 days of age,
Beer and MacLeod, 1961) can become pregnant, the level of pregnancy rises
appreciably to 61 per cent in the 110-114 mm range, a length which Beer and
MacLeod state represents in either sex the adult animal. Embryo counts
increased particularly in the larger voles. The average count was 4.4 for
seven litters in the 90-109 mm classes, 4.9 for 43 litters in the 110-129 mm
langes and 7.0 for seven litters from the 130-149 mm size classes. The overall
average size was 5.1 (one to eight embryos per litter).

Judged by testis size, maturity was reached a little earlier (80 mm) in the
males than in the females and occurred in more than half the animals by the
110-114 mm size range. The position of the testis with respect to the scrotum
is considered to be unreliable as a criterion of maturity since the testis may be
withdrawn from the scrotum after the animal has been trapped.

In Table 1 the catches of July and October are compared. Diff'erences in
body lengths were not significant either between sexes or between months
although there was an increase in the number of small females in October.
Following Beer and MacLeod (1961) and taking 110 mm as adult size, the
frequency of adult females was 45 per cent in July but 37 per cent in October,
that of adult males 40 per cent in July and 38 per cent in October.

Characteristics of a High Population
In the third week of September 1957, a high population of voles was
discovered three miles south of the village of Bayfield, close to the shore of
Lake Huron, in Huron County. The area consisted of two small fields
separated by a gravel road and swampy ground for a distance of 30 yards.
Each was approximately three-quarters of an acre in size and covered with
a mat of dense grass (chiefly Poa pratensis L.), with golden rod (Soli da go spp.)
and aster (Aster spp.) scattered throughout. With the assistance of under-
graduate students of the Department of Zoology the fields were trapped simul-
taneously, one with snap and the other with live traps.

Snap-trap plot: This area was roughly rectangular with one boundary
the road, and the other three made up of short mown grass of a camp area, a
strip of mixed coniferous and hardwood bush along the lake, and a fence with
brush along it separating the plot from a farmyard.

1964

Stinson: Vole Populations 103

Table 1. — Comparison of voles caught in July and October.

Females

Males

No.

Avge. body
length, mm.

No. over
90 mm.

%
preg.

No.

Avge. body
length, mm.

No. over
80 mm.

%
mature

July
Oct.

117
49

105
100

101

48
24

101

102
100

91
50

56
14

Victor snap traps were placed in a rectangular grid of eight lines with 15
stations to a line and two traps to a station. Since all lines and stations were
five yards apart, the 240 traps covered an area of one-half acre, leaving a strip
of approximately five yards remaining between the outer lines and the field
boundaries. The traps were laid during an evening and examined at 8 a.m. and
8 p.m. for three days and one extra night. The bait used was a mixture of
peanut butter and oatmeal; no serious weather disturbance occurred during
the period.

The total catch is shown for each trapping period in Table 2. Along with
Microtus were caught short-tailed shrews, Blarina brevicauda, white-footed
mice, Feromyscus leucopus noveboracensis, and house mice, Mus^ musculus.
Voles were caught throughout the plot at 65 of the 120 stations. Six shrews
v/ere taken in outside lines, five white-footed mice in the outer lines adjacent
to the fence and strip of bush, one of the house mice in an outside line and the
other two a short distance inside the grid.

The size of the population was estimated from the catch of the first three
days to reduce the possible influence of migration into the plot. This did occur
in period N4 when one of the marked voles from the live-trap plot 30 yards
away was caught in a snap-trap. It is apparent from Table 2 that the catch
fell off rather sharply after the second night. This, together with the fact that
the small field was isolated to a certain extent by the nature of its boundaries,
suggests that the number of 110 voles captured in the three days represents a
large part of the population. If it is assumed then that the trap grid was
taking animals up to the boundaries of the field (three-quarters of an acre), the
population density would be around 140-150 voles per acre.

Table 2. — Total catch of small mammals with 240 snap traps. (N, D = Night, Day)

Total

Microtus

118

Blarina

Peromyscus

Mus

104

The Canadian Field-Naturalist

Vol. 78

Table 3. — Extent of damage by voles to trees in the live-trap plot.

Species

No. present

No. damaged

Red pine (Pinus resinosa)

Jack pine {Pinus hanksiana)

Silver maple {Acer saccharinum)

Carolina poplar {Populus canadensis)

Willow {Salix sp.)

White elm ( Ulmus americana)

38
32
37

6
10

Live-trap plot: This was also rectangular in shape, bounded by gravel
roads on two adjacent sides and short mown grass on the remaining two sides.
In addition to grass cover it contained a small plantation of trees about six years
old. Many of these had been attacked previously by voles, and judging from
the overgrowth around the scars this had occurred during the previous winter.
All of the trees were alive for none had been girdled completely. In Table 3
is shown the number of trees present and the extent of the previous winter's
damage. During the trapping period it was observed that several of the silver
maples showed signs of fresh gnawing.

The live traps were tunnels of galvanized tin, 2x2x7 inches, with a tilting
treadle supporting a spring-mounted door and the opposite end inserted into
a small can provided with cotton wool. Forty traps were placed out the first
evening, but this number was increased to 60 the next day when it was evident
that the vole population was high. They were placed in a rectangular grid
formation of six lines, 10 traps to a line, with lines and traps all 20 feet apart.
The bait used was a mixture of peanut butter and oatmeal. The traps were
laid in an evening and examined at 8 a.m. and 8 p.m. for the next four days.
The captured voles were marked with numbered fingerling tags punched
through either ear. After examination an animal was put down at least two
feet away from the trap and made to run off in a direction away from the trap
location.

In Table 4 appear some details of the daily catch. Temperature extremes
may have contributed to the number of deaths for it fell below 50°F. on three
nights and, except for partial cover in the heavy grass, the traps were not
shielded from the sun during the day. The population estimates are calculated
from the "Lincoln Index" method with the number of dead recaptures sub-
tracted in each case. The average estimate of the last four trapping periods,
Dg to N4, is 119, to which should be added the 19 dead for a total of 138 voles.
One Blarina and three Peromyscus leucopus were caught, all but one of the
latter in the outer traps.

The 62 recaptures of Table 4 involve 38 different animals and some idea
of the mobiUty of this group may be gained from Table 5. It is apparent that
15 of the animals returned to the same trap as many as five times. The one
captured six times alternated between two traps 28 feet apart; of the 12 caught
three or more times only two made use of three traps and these were in line
with one another. The calculation of the area over which an animal ranged

1964 Stinson: Vole Populations 105

Table 4. — Daily catch of voles with 60 live traps (N, D = Night, Day)

Ni*

Total

Total catch

168

Recaptures

No. dead

Population

estimate

230

207

115

107

139

114

*40 traps only on first night

is not possible then because of this trapping pattern, and the range can be
expressed only as the distance between the two farthest points of capture. In
this case for the 38 voles the average maximum distance was 29.3 feet. Accord-
ing to the trapping record, 15 moved feet; 17 moved between 20 and 50 feet;
four between 60 and 90 feet; and the remaining two, 120 and 135 feet. Four
of the six moving over 60 feet were males, but in the last night trapping period
one marked female from this plot was caught in the snap-trap plot 200 feet
distant.

The size of the home range of a single vole in normal populations has been
reported to be as high as one-half acre (Blair, 1940), an area actually larger
than the live-trap grid used here. However, if the recapture data are at all
indicative of movement, range was much more restricted in the present study.
In order to arrive at some estimation of density the effective area trapped was
taken to be the trap grid (100 x 180 feet) plus a boundary strip of a width equal
to half the average distance of movement. The effective area was then about 0.6
acres and the population density, using the average estimate of 138 voles on
the plot, about 230 voles per acre. However close this estimate is, there was
no doubt that the population was high. The ground was riddled with tunnels,
the voles were seen continually moving about and some were even chased
up trees.

During the trapping it appeared that the movements of the voles might be
influenced by the surface features of the plot. The trees had been planted in
furrows which had become filled with a dense mat of grass and riddled with
runways. In comparing the amount of movement across with the amount

Table S. —

-Frequency of capture and number of traps used by 38 voles.

No. of voles caught

Frequency of capture

No. of
traps
used

2
3

3
2
1

1
2

Total

106 The Canadian Field-Naturalist Vol. 78

along the furrows it was found that among the 23 animals using two or three
traps (Table 5) the difference was quite significant (P<.01) for 16 of them
moved at least twice as many trap intervals along as across the furrows.

Measurements of the voles: In the live-trap plot some difficulty was
experienced in sexing younger animals, but of 87 reliably identified, 34 were
males and 53 females. In the snap-trap plot 93 voles were examined of which
41 were males and 52 females.

Physical measurements were made only of those taken with the snap traps.
The body lengths of the females (70-140 mm) and the males (80-134 mm) fell
into a size distribution similar to that of Figure 2. There were fewer small
females under 90' mm, which raised the average body length to 107 mm, and

40 per cent of the females were adult (over 110 mm). The average body
length of the males was 102 mm with 33 per cent adult.

The reproductive condition, however, was quite different from that found
in the voles taken on the survey. Now in spite of similar or even larger average
body sizes, only one female (132 mm) was pregnant (4 embryos) and 38 of the

41 males possessed testes 4 mm or less in length. There is even greater contrast
here with the data of Beer and MacLeod (1961) who for 45 females taken in
September report an average body length of 100 mm, 25 per cent adult and 38
per cent pregnant, and for 67 males an average length of 102 mm, 28 per cent
adult but 54 per cent mature.

, Discussion

It is difficult to generalize as to the distribution and relative density of
Alicrotiis in southwestern Ontario from such a trapping scheme which operated
for only one year. For example, few mice were found in Simcoe county but
damage has occurred in this area in the past. But it is also not clear that high
numbers and damage always occur together. Judging from the survey, damage
in the trapline area could not be predicted on the basis of the previous catch,
and, while at Bayfield it was apparent that a high population was gnawing
trees, it is still possible for a few mice working along furrows under the snow
to do considerable harm.

The physical measurements of the voles agree with those given by Beer
and MacLeod (1961) and others who show that there is usually a high proportion
of young animals in these populations. But the reproductive characteristics
of the high population at Bayfield were not consistent with those reported by
the above authors who found up to half of their animals in breeding condition
through the fall months. Rather they resembled the description of Spencer
(1959) who states that late-season litters may not mature for four to six months;
Cowan and Arsenault (1954) and Barbehenn (1955) make similar statements
for species of Microtus. There is possibly a difference here between the
reproductive conditions of high and low populations. In any case it is not clear
why, when the voles continue to grow physically through the late summer, they
do not come into breeding condition.

1964 Stinson: Vole Populations 107

References

Barbehenn, K. R. 1955. A field study of Cowan, I. M., and M. G. Arsenault. 1954.

growth in Microtus pennsylvanicus. Jour- Reproduction and growth in the creeping

nal of Mammalogy 36:533-543. vole, Microtus oregoni serpens Merriam.

Beck, J. R., S. B. Osgood, and M. D. Smith. Canadian Journal of Zoology 32:198-208.

1959. The Oregon meadow mouse irrup- Elton, C. 1942. Voles, mice and lemmings.

tion of 1957-58. Federal Cooperative Ex- Oxford at the Clarendon Press, 496 pp.

tension Service, Oregon State College,

Corvallis, 88 pp. Hamilton, W. J., Jr. 1937a. The biology

„ TT^,^T-,.T of microtine cycles. Journal or Agricul-

Beer, J. R., and C. F. MacLeod. 1961. tural Research 54:779-790.

seasonal reproduction in the meadow vole.

Journal of Mammalogy 42:483-489. • 1937b. Growth and life span

Tj T^r T- irw^rv TT J of thc field mouse. American Naturalist

Blair, W. F. 1940. Home ranges and yi.^nn en?

populations of the meadow vole in

southern Michigan. Journal of Wildlife Hatt, R. T. 1930. The voles of New York.

Management 4:149-161. Roosevelt Wild Life Bulletin 5(4) :513-623.

Chitty, D. 1960. Population processes in Spencer, D. A. 1959. Biological and con-

the vole and their relevance to general trol aspects, hi: J. R. Beck et al. 1959.

theory. Canadian Journal of Zoology 38: The Oregon meadow mouse irruption of

99-113. 1957-58.

Received for publication 18 April 1963

A PLANT COLLECTION FROM SOUTHWEST
NEWFOUNDLAND - JOHN BELL, 1867

Isabel L. Bayly
Carleton University, Ottawa, Ontario

The narrative of John Bell in The Canadian Naturalist and Journal of Science
(Bell 1869, 1870) describes a schooner trip to the west coast of Newfoundland
in the summer of 1867. The narrative contains daily lists of the plants which
he saw or collected. Several authors referred to Bell's papers, particularly
Fernald (1911), and John Macoun (1883-1888) who made many references to
John Bell in his Catalogue of Canadian Plants, which included, whenever pos-
sible, Newfoundland distributions. Macoun (1883) stated in the preface to
his Catalogue, ". . . for our notices of Newfoundland plants ... we are indebted
to the late Dr. John Bell, who published a list of plants collected by him on the
west coast of that island in the summer of 1867". After leading a collecting
expedition to western Newfoundland in the summer of 1910, Fernald (1911)
expressed doubts about the identifications of some species in Bell's collection.
("Dr. John Bell noted some of the commonest plants, with a few which are
certainly rare or local on the island — Claytonia carolijiiana from a mountain side
south of the Great Cod Roy River; Dryopteris fragrafis from Cairn Mountain;

108 The Canadian Field-Naturalist Vol. 78

Epilobium latifoliinn from Flat Bay Brook and Grand Lake — and several
which were surely misidentified. Dr. Bell's Vallisneria spiralis which the waves
rolled in quantities on the beach of Bay St. George was certainly 'Lostera marina,
his Viburnwn Lentago must have been the common V. cassinoides, his Cirsium
piimihmt from "The Gravels" was undoubtedly a form of C. muticivm, his
Aspidiitm fnarginale from the Bay of Islands was unquestionably the there
common A. Filix-vms; and there is grave doubt of the occurrence in Newfound-
land of such plants as Aspletiium thelypteroides, Salix petiolaris, Betula lenta,
Thalictnnn dioicum, Lonicera oblongifoUa and Viburnum acerifotium.^'') Al-
though the papers have been quoted by these authors, apparently Bell's collec-
tions had not been seen by either of them, nor did any of his Newfoundland
specimens turn up in a recent search of herbaria.

In the summer of 1959 a pair of plant presses, ascribed to Robert Bell,
eminent Canadian geologist, and sometime director of the Geological Survey
of Canada, were presented to Carleton University by his daughter, Mrs. Olga
Bell Outram. They proved to be collections made by John Bell, brother of
Robert. One collection was from Newfoundland, the other from Manitoulin
Island, Canada West.

The presses are of the type now described as "Forest Ranger" — two strong
solid boards fastened with cross braces and bound with leather straps. The
papers enfolding the specimens are from editions of the Toro?ito Globe between
1864 and 1867.

The sparse collection data, consisting only of dates and collecting areas
written on slips of paper signed "John Bell, M.A., M.D." are less sophisticated
than those recorded nowadays. For instance, the inscription "Grand Cod Roy
River, July 13, 1867" indicates only a general area. The collecting area most
readily identified is "The Gravel", an area of high gravel cliffs about one mile
in length which is adjacent to the town of Port au Port, and which extends
along the shore connecting a large part of western Newfoundland with the
mainland.

The data slips with the actual collection indicate that Bell's plants came
from the following collecting areas: Great Cod Roy River; "The Gravel"
(St. Georges Bay) ; South Arm, Bay of Islands; Long Point, Port au Port Bay;
Flat Bay Brook, St. Georges Bay; West Bay in Port au Port; Port au Port Bay;
Deer Lake; Humber River; Fork, Humber River; Cod Roy Island; Flat Bay.
The locations of these geographical features are shown in Figure 1 .

In the fall of 1963 an extensive supplement to the John Bell Collection was
received by Carleton University under the terms of the will of Mrs. Olga Bell
Outram. It contained 38 mounted Newfoundland specimens from "The
Gravel", Cairn Mountain, Flat Bay Brook and the north fork of the Humber
River. Their order shows that John Bell had begun to mount up the more
worthy specimens of the Newfoundland collection for preservation in his
private herbarium. This activity was never completed, but the press contents,
together with the mounted sheets, seem to represent the complete collection.

Bell's method of collection, which involved very limited press space, did not
follow the practice of one species to a sheet, and ten or twelve species may be
present in a tangled mass. It was assumed that all specimens on one sheet were

1964

Bayly: Plant Collection from SW Newfoundland

109

Cape Roy

ATLANTIC

OCEAN

Figure 1. Map of southwestern Newfoundland, showing collecting sites of John BeU.
(Some rivers are slightly exaggerated in size.)

gathered from the same area on the same day. Owing to insect, fungus and
water damage, many of the plants are fragmentary. Some species are repre-
sented by a few leaves; some of the ferns lack sporangia and rhizomes. The
list contains more species than did Bell's papers, since he did not mention such
"trivia" as the Carices or the Gramineae, groups which he apparently considered
would be of little interest to the readers.

The nomenclature and order of the following list of vascular plants in the
John Bell Collection follows that found in Gleason (1958). Species not listed
therein are found in Polunin (1959). Dr. E. Rouleau has seen the collection

110

The Canadian Field-Naturalist

Vol. 78

and verified my identifications. The numbers which follow the locality are
not Bell's numbers, but have been arbitrarily assigned. They represent the
order in which the specimens appeared in the press. Omitted numbers repre-
sent lichens and mosses.

Annotated list of Species
*Indicates that a collecting label accompanied the specimen,
tion on the collecting label is quoted,
the papers of John Bell (1869, 1870).

Lycopodhini annoiinimi L. — St. Georges
Bay, 132; Lyco podium lucidulum Cairn
Mountain*. Macoun lists Bell's L. lucidu-
lum as the only Newfoundland collection.
There is no Lycopodium. lucidulum in the
Bell Collection.

The informa-
Other locality information is based on

Lycopodium sitchense Rupr. — South Arm,
Bay of Islands, 114; St. Georges Bay, 159A;
Lycopodiimi alpinum, Cairn Mountain*:
Bell lists L. alpimmi in his paper, so these
specimens are probably the species he has
mistaken for L. alpifrnm.

Lycopodium cojnplananmi L. — St. Georges
Bay, 159B.

Lycopodium tristachyum Pursh. — Near Cairn
Mountain*. This sheet is labeled '■'Lyco-
podium complanatuni'\

Equisetum sylvaticum L. — St. Georges Bay,
136. Bell mentions a "deciduous Equisetum
collected on an island of Deer Lake".

Atbyrium Filix-fe77iina (L.) Roth. — South-
west Newfoundland, 46. Bell mentions
Aspleniimi filix-j evrina, collected "12 miles
from the mouth of the Great Cod Roy
River, in rich damp woods", July 6, 1867.

Woodsia alpiiia (Bolton) S. F. Gray — St.
Georges Bay, 106. Bell lists Woodsia
ilvensis, collected on a rocky escarpment.
Flat Bay Brook, June 18.

Thelypteris novaboracensis (L.) Nieuwl. —
Great Cod Roy River, July 7, 1867, J. Bell,
73*. Bell lists this fern. The specimen in
the collection lacks sporangia and rhizome.

Dryopteris fragrans (L.) Schott. — Cairn
Mountain, 87*. Fernald mentioned that
this fern must be local or rare. Macoun did
not cite Bell's reference to Aspidium
jragrans.

Dryopteris Filix-mas (L.) Schott. — Mar-
ginale, South Arm, Bay of Islands, Nfld.
74*. This plant is listed as Aspidium mar-
ginale. Fernald suggested that it was pro-
bably "Male Fern". One of the mounted
sheets, labeled "South Arm, Bay of Islands,

Aspidium spinulosum var. Bootii" repre-
sents a second misidentification.
Folystichum Braunii (Spenner) Fee — "The

Gravel", St. Georges Bay, July 4, 71*;

Great Cod Roy River, July 8, 72*. Bell

listed this fern for "The Gravel" only,

where it grew above the cliffs.
Juniperus horizontalis Moench. — "The

Gravel" July 4, 165*.
Fotcmiogeton epihydrus Raf. — Great Cod

Roy River, Nfd., July 8, 225, 331*.
Fotcmiogeton Friesii Rupr. — Great Cod Roy

River, July 8, 287*.
Triglochin maritivia L. — Great Cod Roy

River, 171, 175.
Triglochin palustris L. — Southwest Nfld., 62.
Festuca rubra L. — Great Cod Roy River,

170; Flat Bay Brook, St. Georges Bay, 203;

"The Gravel", St. Georges Bay, 253;

Southwest Nfld., 28.
Glyceria canadensis (Michx.) Trin. — Great

Cod Roy River, Nfld., July 8, 327*.
Foa palustris L. — Southwest Nfld., 54.
Elymus virginicus L. — Southwest Nfld., 45.

Elymus mollis Trin. — Great Cod Roy River

Nfld., July 8, 321*.
Trisetimi spicatum (L.) Richter. — South-
west Nfld., July 8, 51, 53.
Agrostideae — St. Georges Bay, 162.
Calajnagrostis canadensis (Michx.) Beauv. —

Southwest Nfld., 10, 30.
Agrostis tenuis Sibth. — Great Cod Roy

River, 261; Southwest Nfld., 61.
Agrostis sp. — Great Cod Roy River, 269.
Milium effusum L. — Great Cod Roy River,

176.
Hierochloe odorata (L.) Beauv. — Flat Bay

Brook, St. Georges Bay, 190.
Eleocharis halophila Fern & Brackett — Great

Cod Roy River, 239.
Eleocharis parvula (R. & S.) Link. — Great

Cod Roy River, Newfoundland, July 6,

260*.

1964

Bayly: Plant Collection from SW Newfoundland

111

Eleocharis palustris (L.) R. & S. — Great Cod

Roy River, 272.
Scirpiis cespitosus L. — St. Georges Bay, 157;

Great Cod Roy River, 297.
Scirpus hudsonianus (Michx.) Fern. — Great

Cod Roy River, 345.
Scirpus validus Vahl. — St. Georges Bay, 195.

Bell lists 5. lacustris, a European species,

for Long Point. This is the only Scirpus

named in the papers.
Scirpus riifus (Huds.) Schrader. — Southwest

Nfld., 56, 63.
Scirpus atrovirens Willd. — Great Cod Roy

River, 262.
Eriophorimi opacmn (Bjornstr.) Fern. — St.

Georges Bay, 156; Flat Bay*.
Eriophorum viridi-carinatuni ( E n g e 1 m . )

Fern. — St. Georges Bay, June 27, 122*;

Flat Bay Brook*.
Eriophoru?n angustifolium Honckeny. — St.

Georges Bay, 135; Great Cod Roy River,

224.
Eriophorum vaginatum L. — ^Flat Bay Brook*.
Eriopbormn Chamissonis C. A. Mey. —

"'vaginatum'''' Flat Bay*.
Eriophorum tenellum Nutt. — Flat Bay*.
Carex sp. — Long Point, Port au Port Bay,

188.
Carex cephalantha (Bailey) Bickn. — Long

Point, Port au Port Bay, 233; Great Cod

Roy River, 241.
Carex stipata Muhl. — South Arm, Bay of

Islands, 105; "The Gravel", St. Georges

Bay, 258; Great Cod Roy River, 164.
Carex Mackenziei Krecz.— Southwest Nfld.,

19.
Carex interior Bailey. — Great Cod Roy

River, Nfld., July 7, 268*, 163, 169, 346;

Long Point, 187.
Carex leptonervia Fern. — Great Cod Roy

River, 320; "The Gravel", St. Georges Bay,

259.
Carex scoparia Schk. — Great Cod Roy River,

319.
Carex scirpoidea Michx. — Great Cod Roy

River, 288.
Carex aurea Nutt. — "The Gravel", St.

Georges Bay, 256. This is the only species

of Carex which Bell actually mentioned.
Carex arctata Boott. — South Arm, Bay of

Islands, 103.
Carex capillaris L. var. elongata Olney —

Great Cod Roy River, 302.
Carex flava L. — Great Cod Roy River, 172,

238.

Carex viridula Michx — Great Cod Roy

River, 161, 244, 263; Flat Bay Brook, St.

Georges Bay, 193.
Carex rariflora (Wahl.) Smith. — Southwest

Nfld., 16; Cod Roy Island, 276.
Carex salina Wahl. — South Arm, Bay of

Islands, 104; Long Point, Port au Port Bay,

234; Great Cod Roy River, 273.
Carex lenticularis Michx. — Great Cod Roy

River, 231, 245.
Carex paleacea Wahl. — Flat Bay Brook, St.

Georges Bay, 194.
Carex crinita Lam. — Great Cod Roy River,

344; Cod Roy Island, 324.
Carex lacustris Willd. — Great Cod Roy

River, 264.
Carex lasiocarpa Ehrh. — Great Cod Roy

River, 168.
Carex rostrata Stokes — Great Cod Roy River,

165.
Carex intumescens Rudge. — Great Cod Roy

River, 267.
Juncus balticus Willd. — Southwest Nfld., 48;

Flat Bay Brook, St. Georges Bay, 202;

South Arm, Bay of Islands, 80.
Juncus bufoniiis L. var. halophilus Fern. &

Buch.— Southwest Nfld., 22.
Juncus trifidus L. — Great Cod Roy River,

300. Note: Only one species, /. effusus,

listed for Long Point, is mentioned by Bell.
Luzula ca?npestris (L.) DC. — ^Great Cod Roy

River, 316; Cod Roy Island, 277; Long

Point, Port au Port Bay, 232.
Tofleldia glutinosa (Michx.) Pers. — Great

Cod Roy River, 237.
Smilacina stellata (L.) Desf.— Flat Bay

Brook, 250.
Smilacina trifolia (L.) Desf. — Flat Bay

Brook, 173.
Trillimn cernuwn L. — South Arm, Bay of

Islands, 78, 101. T. recurvatum is listed for

Flat Bay Brook.
Iris versicolor L. — ^Flat Bay Brook, St.

Georges Bay, 199.
Cypripedium Calceolus L. — Great Cod Roy

River, July 8, 214, 330*.
Habenaria hyperborea (L.) R. Br. — 255.
Habenaria viridis (L.) R. Br.^ — Great Cod

Roy River, 301.
Habenaria dilatata (Pursh) Hook. — Great

Cod Roy River, 303.
Habenaria obtusata (Pursh) Richards. —

South Arm, Bay of Islands, 76; Great Cod

Roy River (Ryan's), 332.

112

The Canadian Field-Naturalist

Vol. 78

Arethusa bulbosa L. — ^Near Cairn Mountain,

Flat Bay Brook*; Soudi Arm Bay of

Islands, 77.
Spiranthes Romanzoffiana Cham. — Southwest

Nfld., 60.
Corallorhiza trifida Chat.— Great Cod Roy

River, 304. Bell listed C. multiflora, found

in "rich damp woods, 12 miles from the

mouth" of the Great Cod Roy River.
Salix glaucophylloides Fern. — Great Cod

Roy River, 236.
Salix Uva-ursi Pursh. — Great Cod Roy River,

305, 306; alpine summits Cod Roy Moun-
tains*.
Salix pellita Anderss. — Humber River, 211;

St. Georges Bay, 139.
Salix Bebbiana X Candida ? — "The Gravel",

252. Bell has this specimen listed as Salix

humilis.
Betula lutea Michx. — St. Georges Bay, 158.

Bell lists B. excelsa for Flat Bay Brook.
Betida pimiila L. — St. Georges Bay, 131.
Betula glandidosa Michx. — sphagnum marsh

near Cairn Mt. Nfld.*
Betula Michauxii Spach. — St. Georges Bay

(Flat Bay Brook), 127, 140.
Alnus crispa (Ait.) Pursh. — St. Georges Bay,

130, 196.
{Castanea dentata (Marsh.) Borkh. — see dis-
cussion, 7.)
Urtica urens L. — South Arm, Bay of Islands,

75.
Comandra livida Richards. — Southwest Nfld.,

25, 33, 68.
Folygonwn viviparum L. — Flat Bay Brook,

St. Georges Bay, 204; Long Point, Port au

Port Bay, 185.
Polygonum lapathijolium L. — Southwest

Nfld., 58.
(Folygomnn virginianum L. — See discussion,

11.)

Chenopodium albuirr L. — Southwest Nfld.,
66.

{Phytolacca aiJiericana L. — See discussion,
3.)

Montia fontana L. — Southwest Nfld., 37. Bell
has listed Claytonia caroliniana and Fernald
has suggested that it must have been rare
or local in Newfoundland. The genus
Claytonia is not present in Bell's collec-
tion. Montia is represented by this single
collection.

Stellaria longipes Goldie. — Southwest Nfld.,
17; Great Cod Roy River, 318.

Stellaria calycantha (Ledeb.) Bongard —
Southwest Nfld., 43, 47.

Stellaria crassifolia Ehrh. — Southwest Nfld.,
44.

Arenaria lateriflora L. — Southwest Nfld., 64.

Sagina nodosa (L.) Fenzl. — South Arm, Bay
of Islands, 79; North shore*.

Honkenya peploides (L.) Ehrh. — Southwest
Nfld., 67; Flat Bay (in St. Georges Bay),
June 30, 285*; Port au Port Bay, July 24,
207*.

Nuphar advena Ait. — ^N. Fork, Humber R.,
Newfoundland*. Macoun lists J. Bell as
the first collection of this species on the
west coast of Newfoundland.

Thalictrum alpinum L. — South Arm, Bay of
Islands, 102. T. cornuti, and T. dioicum
are both listed by J. Bell. Fernald has ques-
tioned the presence of T. dioicinn. The
collection does not support Bell's paper.

Ranuncidus Cymbalaria Pursh. — Flat Bay
Brook, 191; Great Cod Roy River, 348.
Bell listed R. repens for a "boggy rill"
near Ryan's on the Great Cod Roy River.

Ranunculus pennsylvanicus L. — Great Cod
Roy River, 271. This has the same collect-
ing location as R. repens.

Cakile edentula (Bigel.) Hook. — ^Flat Bay,
286.

{Draba arabisans Michx. — See discussion, 1,
14.)

{Cochlearia tridactylites Banks. — See dis-
cussion, 4, 29.)

Cardajnine pennsylvanica Muhl. — Port au
Port Bay, 206. Bell listed C. birsuta for
Long Point, Port au Port Bay.

Drosera intermedia Hayne. — South Arm, Bay
of Islands, 119; St. Georges Bay, 133.

Sedum Rosea (L.) Scop. — Flat Bay Brook,
31.

Saxifraga aizoides L. — "The Gravel", St.
Georges Bay, 251.

Mitella nuda L. — Flat Bay Brook, 109.

Ribes hirtellum Michx. — St. Georges Bay,
123, 146; Flat Bay Brook, St. Georges Bay,
198.

Ribes lacustre (Pers.) Poir. — St. Georges Bay
(Ryan's), 143.

Ribes triste Pall. — Great Cod Roy Island, 326.

Ribes glandidosuT7i Grauer. — St. Georges
Bay, 115, 129.

{Liquidambar Styraciflua L. — See discussion,

{Potentilla palustris L. Scop. — See discussion,
13. P. fruticosa listed for Flat Bay Brook.)

Potentilla tridentata Soland. — Southwest
Nfld., 65; South Arm, Bay of Islands, 98;
Great Cod Roy Island, 278, 323.

1964

Bayly: Plant Collection from SW Newfoundland

113

Geum macrophyllum Willd. — Great Cod

Roy River, Nfld., July 8, 242*.
Rubus pubescens Raf. — ^Flat Bay Harbour,

178.
Rubus ChcnnaeTnorus L. — ^Long Point, Port

au Port Bay, 184; Great Cod Roy River,

274.
Sanguisorba canadensis L. — Southwest Nfld.,

34.
Rosa sp. — ^label reads Rosa blanda? Ait. —

N. shore*. Sheet has eglandular stipules

and fruit, coarsely toothed leaflets. Speci-
men lacks flowers.
Rosa virginiajia MiU. — Southwest Nfld., 41,

50.
Rosa nitida Willd. — St. Georges Bay, 126.
Pyrus floribunda Lindl. — South Arm, Bay

of Islands, 81, 94.
Pyrus decora (Sarg.) Hyland. — Flat Bay

Brook, 200.
Amelanchier Bartramiana (Tausch) . Roemer.

—St. Georges Bay, 141, 148.
Crataegus Bruneticma Sarg. — Fork, Humber

River, 212. Bell has listed C. coccinea in

his paper: Macoun has noted this in the

Catalogue (Vol. 1, p. 147).
{Trijolium agrarium L. — See discussion, 9.)
Hedysarum alpinmn L. — Great Cod Roy

River, 235, 240.
Vicia Cracca L. — Southwest Nfld., 23.
Lathyrus maritim.us (L.) Bigel. var. pellitus

(Fern.) GL— Cod Roy Island, Nfld., July

13, 281*. Bell has listed a "variety of beach

pea" for Cod Roy Island.
EmpetruTn nigrum L. — St. Georges Bay, 150;

Cod Roy Island, 279; Cairn Mountain,

Nfld.*.
Nemopantlms mucrofiatus (L.) Trel. — South

Arm, Bay of Islands, 107; St. Georges Bay,

153; Deer Lake 209.
Triadenum virgimcu?n (L.) Raf. — Great Cod

Roy River, 243. This species is represented

by leaf fragments only.
(Lythrum Salicaria L. — See discussion, 8, 12.)
Epilobium latifolium L. — Flat Bay Brook,

189; Great Cod Roy River (?) 249; shingle,

Flat Bay Brook*. Femald (1911) suggested

that E. latifoliujn must be very rare or

local.
Epilobium palustre L. — Great Cod Roy

River, 347.
Oenothera biennis L. — Southwest Nfld., 69.
Aralia hispida Vent. — ^Label reads only

"Aralia hispida Michx. — Bristly Sarsapar-

iUa".

Conioselinum chinense (L.) BSP — Great Cod

Roy River, 328.
Angelica atropurpurea L. — Great Cod Roy

River, July, 1867, 329*.
Comus canadensis L. — Great Cod Roy River,

309.
Comus suecica L. — Southwest Nfld., 18, 49;

Long Point, 183; Port au Port Bay*; Great

Cod Roy Isd., July 18, 322*.
Moneses uniflora (L.) Gray. — Great Cod

Roy River, 221.
Pyrola asarifolia Michx. — St. Georges Bay,

160. Bell has listed P. rotundifolia, Flat

Bay Brook area.
Pyrola elliptica Nutt. — Deer Lake, Nfld.,

July 17, 1867, 208*.
Pyrola secunda L. — Great Cod Roy River,

222.
Rhododendron canadense (L.) BSP. — St.

Georges Bay, 145, 147; Cairn Mountain*,

Flat Bay, Nfld.*.
Loiseleuria procumbens (L.) Desv. — ^Flat

Bay Brook, St. Georges Bay, 82, 93, 99,

111, 118, 120; Cairn Mountain, Nfld.*.
Kalmia polifolia Wang. — St. Georges Bay,

124.
Kal?nia angustifolia L. — St. Georges Bay, 152.
Andromeda glaucophylla Link. — St. Georges

Bay, 154; sphagnum bog near Flat Bay,

Nfld.*.
Chamaedaphne calyculata (L.) Moench — St.

Georges Bay, 155; heath, near Cairn

Mountain, Nfld.*.
Arctostaphylos alpina (L.) Spreng. — Great

Cod Roy River, 223, 230, 290, 307; Flat Bay,

Cairn Mountain*. Bell has listed A. Uva-

ursi for Cairn Mountain.
Vaccinium uliginosum L. — St. Georges Bay,

96, 119, 112, 113; Great Cod Roy River,

308; Cairn Mountain, Nfld.*.
Vaccinium Vitis-Idaea L. — Southwest Nfld.

(Flat Bay Shore), 40, 70; St. Georges Bay,

97; Cairn Mountain*.
Vaccinium angustifolium Ait. — St. Georges

Bay (Flat Bay Brook), 116, 128; Great Cod

Roy River, 311.
Vaccinium Oxycoccos L. — Southwest Nfld.,

21; St. Georges Bay, 90; Great Cod Roy

River, 166, 174.
Diapensia lapponica L. — Great Cod Roy

River, July 8, 1867, 289, 298, 337*; Flat Bay

Brook (Cairn Mountain)*.
Primula ?mstassinica Michx. — St. Georges

Bay, 108.
Prifnula laurentiana Fern. — Long Point, 179;

Flat Bay Brook, St. Georges Bay, 205*.

114

The Canadian Field-Naturalist

Vol. 78

Gentiana nesophila Holm — Long Point, Port
au Port Bay, 182, 186.

Menyanthes trifoliata L. — Southwest Nfld.,
32; St. Georges Bay, 134; ponds in sphag-
num bog or heath near Cairn Mountain*.

Mertensia 7}7arithna (L.) S. F. Gray — South-
west Nfld., 42; Flat Bay (in St. Georges
Bay) June 30, 283*.

Scutellaria galericulata L. — Great Cod Roy
River, 257, 270.

Euphrasia Randii Robins. — Long Point, Port
au Port Bay, 181.

Melampyrum lineare Desr. — Southwest Nfld.,
26.

Castilleja septentrionalis Lindl. — H umber
River, July 17, 210*.

(Ca7npsis radicans (L.) Seem. — See discus-
sion, 5.)

Orobanche uniflora L. — St. Georges Bay, 137;
woods near Cairn Mountain, Nfld.*.

Pinguicula vulgaris L. — St. Georges Bay, 100;
Flat Bay Brook, Nfld.*.

Plantago maritima L. — Long Point, Port au
Port Bay, July 12, 180*; St. Georges Bay,
254; Flat Bay (in St. Georges Bay), June
30, 284*.

Galium kainschaticum Steller. — Great Cod
Roy River, 226.

Galiufn asprellum Michx. — Great Cod Roy
River, July 7, 1867, 266*.

Galium palustre L. — Great Cod Roy River,
167.

{Galium labradoricimi (Wieg.) Wieg. — See
discussion, 2.)

Viburnum, cassinoides L. — St. Georges Bay,
151. Bell has identified this plant as V.
Lentago. Fernald has suggested a mis-
identification.

Viburnum opulus L. var. americanum Ait. —
Fork, Humber River, July 18, 1867, 213*;
Viburnum Opulus L. — island, N. Fork
Humber River*.

Viburnum edule (Michx.) Raf. — Southwest
Nfld., 24*. Viburnum paucijlorum — ^N.
shore*. The presence of a sheet identified
by Bell as. V. pauciflorum does little to
clear Fernald's contention that Bell could
not have seen V. acerifolium in Newfound-
land. Bell has listed both species. Neither
authors give authority names. Viburnmn
acerifolimn L. is not contained in the col-
lection. V. pauciflorum Pylaie and V.
acerifolium Bong, are both names which
are no longer in use for V. edule (Michx.)
Raf.

Lonicera villosa (Michx.) R. & S. — St.
Georges Bay, 125, 144, 149; Great Cod
Roy River, July 8, 1867, 177, 310*, 317*.
Bell has listed L. oblongifolia. Fernald
doubted the identification.

Solidago macrophylla Pursh. — Southwest
Nfld., 39.

Aster umbellatus Mill. — Southwest Nfld., 20,
55.

Achilea Millefolium L. — Southwest Nfld., 52.

Leontodon autumnalis L. — Cod Roy Island,
July 13, 1867, 275*, 280, 282.

Prenanthes racefnosa Michx. — Southwest
Nfld., 36.

Hieracium kalmii L. — Southwest Nfld., 35.

Discussion

Present status of John BelVs collecting localities

As far as possible the collecting sites were checked during the summer of
1960 and 1962. The flora of the area of Flat Bay Brook village is much the same,
as is that of Flat Bay Brook itself (Figure 2), which is now a scheduled salmon
river. A bush road described by Bell is there, but now is overgrown, and
the gravel beds in the stream where he collected Epilobiimt latifolium still
support that species. The Trans-Canada highway crosses Flat Bay Brook about
four miles above its mouth and there are some disturbances associated with
road building. A few white pines mentioned by Bell but not authenticated
by the collection still grow on the shores. "The Gravel", Bell's collecting area
at Port au Port, is readily identified. It has a sheltered harbour and a one mile
stretch of gravel beach and cUff. Unspoiled in Bell's time, the trees and ferns
on the top are now gone, through storms, farming, introduction of a road cut
and use of part of the area as a garbage dump. Despite this, Shepherdia,

1964

Bayly: Plant Collection from SW Newfoundland

115

Figure 2. Flat Bay Brook, Newfoundland. A licensed salmon river, little changed from

the time of John Bell. Water here is saline, shores support Mertensia marithna and

Cakile edentula. July, 1960.
Figure 3. "The Gravel", Port au Port. Expansion of town dump, and road building, have

changed the flora on top of the cliffs, but cliff itself still supports Skepherdia, Carex

aurea, dwarf juniper. July, 1960.
Figure 4. Boggy meadow, Long Point, Newfoundland, described by Bell. Unchanged

except for overgrazing on nearby hill. July, 1960.
Figure 5. Dwarfed spruce, Long Point, Newfoundland. Note heavy incidence of witches'

brooms. July, 1960.

116 The Canadian Field-Naturalist Vol. 78

Oenothera, Rhincmthtcs, Antennaria and Carex aurea still hold the crumbling
gravel together (Figure 3). The Grand Cod Roy River, a scheduled salmon
stream, has minimum farming and is roughly the same as when Bell travelled
there. A stream which has the name of Ryan's Brook indicates his collecting
location for the "profusion of garden flowers and weeds" which he mentioned.
From Cod Roy, Bell's schooner sailed up the coast to Long Point, a narrow
sliver of land which separates the Gulf of St. Lawrence from Port au Port Bay.
This area is heavily overgrazed, because local residents use the point as a
community sheep pasture. The boggy meadow mentioned by Bell was located
(Figure 4). It contains a quaking bog which supports Tojfieldia, Habenaria
and the typical members of the sphagnum bog community, although it is only
about 20 feet from the sea itself. The close cropping by the sheep on Long
Point has left little of the original flora except the dwarf spruces (Figure 5) and
the bogs. The region of the Humber Arm, or as Bell says, the south arm of
the Bay of Islands, has been used by a pulp and paper company as a flotation
basin for pulp logs and there has been extensive cutting of timber. Deer Lake
also fills with pulp logs, and farmlands occupy parts of the shore of Deer Lake.
At the mouth of the Humber River, which is described by Bell as choked with
eel grass, the water is now filled bank to bank with floating pulp logs. There
is a point of land just before the mouth of the river on which Bell camped and
collected. Along this strand, close to the town of Deer Lake, grow two species
of maple {spicatum and rubrum) as Bell said. These are old trees, many-
suckered from their parental root stocks. It is possible that these are
descendants of the originals which Bell mentioned (but did not collect). The
areas above Deer Lake visited by Bell are now timber limits, and cutting and
forest fires have changed the original collecting site.

Present status of the Neivfoundland collection of John Bell

When Dr. John Bell published his Newfoundland papers he assumed that
his readers would enjoy an account of the trip, and since he was an enthusiastic
member of the Canadian Botanical Society he included as many plants with
Latin nomenclature as possible. The insertion of such names w^as necessarily
limited. The nomenclature was only as accurate as Bell's experience allowed,
since nobody except perhaps Robert Bell ever saw the collection. That Macoun
and Fernald placed such empTiasis on his list of plants seems good reason for a
re-listing of this important, though obscure, collection.

The contents of the press, additional mounted sheets and John Bell's two
papers form the basis of this discussion. They help to answer the questions of
Fernald and Macoun concerning the doubtful presence of some species and
the misidentification of others. In turn, they present additional problems.
These are misidentifications which have gone unchallenged and presence of
anomalous species which appear at the front of the press.

Fernald has questioned the presence of the following plants: Asplenium
thelypteroides, Salix petiolaris, Betula lenta, Thalictrum dioiciim, Lojiicera
oblongifolia and Vibiirnimt acerifolium. None of these plants is represented
in the collection. The listing of Asplenium thelypteroides may have been a

1964 Bayly: Plant Collection from SW Newfoundland 117

sight misidentification of a young plant of Thelypteris noveboracensis (L.)
Nieuwl. Salix pellita Anderss. is the closest representative of that genus. The
Betula lenta listing by John Bell was a sight record made at the "bend of the
river" (Flat Bay Brook) below Cairn Mountain. The plant may have been
Betula lutea forma fdlax Fassett. The only Thalictrum in the collection is
T. alpinimt L. Lonicera villosa (Michx.) R. & S. holds the collecting label
"Great Cod Roy River, July 8, 1867", the collecting station for the plant Bell
identified as Lonicera oblongifolia. The problem of Viburnum acerifolium
is complicated by Fernald's omission of authority name. The collection does
not contain Viburnum acerifolimn L., but Viburnum edule (Michx.) Raf. which
in former times has been named Viburnum acerifolimn Bong, or V. pauciflontm
Pylaie is present. Macoun did not make use of Bell's listing of V. acerifolium
for Newfoundland, and said of such records "This species is reported from
Newfoundland . . . but, as it was formerly confounded with the next
( V. paucifloruTn Pylaie) I believe these references belong with the next."

In addition to the problem of the distribution of certain species, Fernald
also challenged parts of the Bell listing as misidentifications. These species
identifications were: Vallisneria spiralis which Fernald assumed was Zostera
marina; Viburnum Lentago which Fernald suggested was V. cassinoides;
Cirsium pumilum considered to be C. muticum; Aspidium marginale which
Fernald believed to be "the there common Aspidium Filix-mas''\ Neither
Vallisneria nor Zostera are among the plants in the collection. This sight
record "on the coastal shoreline at Flat Bay village" would certainly add support
to the view of Fernald that the plants that Bell saw were Zostera marina L.
Viburnum cassinoides L. is in the collection. There is no representative of the
genus Cirsium. A fern which recently turned up in the mounted specimens
bears the label ''marginale South Arm, Bay of Islands, Nfld." is, as Fernald
suggested, a specimen of "Male fern" (now Dryopteris Filix-mas (L.) Schott.).

Plants which Fernald considered rare or local in the Bell listing were:
Claytonia caroliniana, Aspidiimt fragrans and Epilobium latifoliufn. The
collection does not contain the genus Claytonia but does contain Montia
fontana L., a close relative. The specimen has flower buds and well-developed
leaves. Present in the collection is Dryopteris fragrans (L.) Schott (collecting
label "Cairn Mountain"). One of the sheets of Epilobium latifolium L. bears
the label "shingle. Flat Bay Brook".

Macoun made extensive use of the Bell plants in his Catalogue. Of 143
John Bell records cited, 15 are from the west coast of Newfoundland. One is
not listed in the papers, nor is it present in the collection (Ranunculus acris L.),
two are sight records (Acer saccharinum Wang., Myriophyllum spicatum L.),
one is listed but is not in the collection (Aralia nudicaidis L.), several are mis-
identified (Sagina procujnbens L., Crataegus coccinea L., Lycopodium lucidu-
lum Michx., Lycopodium obscurwn L.) and the remainder (including Nuphar
advena Ait., Sanguisorba canadensis L., Saxifraga aizoides L., Angelica atro-
pu^pureum L. and several species of Lycopodium) are present and correctly
identified.

A final problem arises from the presence in the plant press of a set of
plants (my numbers 1-15) which do not appear to be from Newfoundland.

118 The Canadian Field-Naturalist Vol. 78

The distribution of some (Castanea, Liqiudamhar, Campsis radiccms) is more
southerly. Others, like Draba arabisans Michx. and Trifolium procumbens L.
are of very wide distribution on the eastern coast of North America. All lack
collecting labels. At first, the only immediate explanation for these plants was
that they represented the cultivated flowers from the Ryan's Brook area or from
Flat Bay Brook village. Considering the wealth of detail which Dr. John Bell
wrote in his papers, it is unlikely that he would overlook such items as Castanea
or Ly thrum Salic aria. It seems doubtful that the first numbers in the press
are from the west coast of Newfoundland. The only other explanation is
that John Bell had inserted a small collection from some other source in the
top of the press. When he began to mount up the press contents, he would
first select from the press the more interesting items, leaving most of the
anomalous specimens still on the top of the press. The mounted sheets con-
tained labelled specimens from Newfoundland plus one Lygodium palmatum
(Bernh.) Sev. This fern lay on a herbarium sheet, but had not been affixed
to it. The collecting label reads "Miss Isabella Mcintosh, Northampton, Vt.
U.S.". It is possible that the other problem species may have the same source.

This collection, made by a young medical doctor in the year of Confedera-
tion, helped to increase the knowledge of the flora of Newfoundland. John
Bell was not the first to collect on the island, but his papers, so carefully written
and free from ambiguity, are useful to all who have an interest in the distribution
of vascular plants in Newfoundland. The extent of the collection, exclusive
of the Bryophytes, is embodied in this paper. The collection is now housed
in the Carleton University herbarium.

References

Bell, John. 1869. The Plants of the West Expedition to Newfoundland and southern

Coast of Newfoundland. The Canadian Labrador. Rhodora 13:109-162.

Naturalist and Journal of Science, Septem- Gleason, Henry A. 1958. The new Brit-

ber, 4:256-263. ton and Brown Illustrated Flora of the

loTfv T-u r>i r ^u WT .. Northeastern United States and adjacent

. 1870. The Plants of the West _ j -vt ^.t ^ t> • i /^ j

^ r -VT r ji J T-u r^ A- Canada. New York Botanical Crarden.

Coast of Newfoundland. Ihe Canadian ., , ,„„, ,„„„ r- ^ ^ c

Naturalist and Journal of Science 5-54-61 Macoun, John. 1883, 1888. Catalogue of

Naturalist and journal ot science 5.^^01. Canadian Plants. Vols. 1 & II. Dawson

Fernald, M. L. 1911. Contributions from Brothers, Montreal,

the Gray Herbarium of Harvard Univer- Polunin, Nicholas. 1959. Circumpolar
sity. New Series— No. XL. A botanical Arctic Flora. Oxford University Press.

Received for publication 3 January 1964

REVIEWS

Birds of the Labrador Peninsula and
Adjacent Areas

By W. E. Clyde Todd. 1963. University of
Toronto Press, Toronto. 819 pp. $18.00.

In size, scope, and content this is a big
book. Its subject is the bird Ufe of a vast
and ornithologically poorly-known part
of Canada that encompasses some 600,000
square miles of the Quebec-Labrador
peninsula, eastern Hudson and James
bays, and part of extreme northwestern
Ontario. Its author is one of this con-
tinent's most distinguished ornitholo-
gists.

It is a long-awaited book that really
had its beginning back in 1901 when the
author made his first expedition to the
wilds of Labrador to study the bird life
there. This initiated what was to become
a series of no less than 25 expeditions
conducted by the Carnegie Museum to
the 'north country'. The valuable results
of these expeditions, heretofore un-
published, are presented in this book. In
addition, related data from all other avail-
able sources, published and unpublished,
are meticulously brought together, docu-
mented, and competently appraised.

There are 72 pages of introductory
material, the bulk of which (pp. 13-57)
is devoted to the itineraries and interest-
ing narratives of the 25 Carnegie Museum
expeditions. The geography, physio-
graphy, general geology, climate, popula-
tion and resources, ecological conditions,
life zones, and geographic history are
dealt with briefly. A good history of
previous ornithological work in the area
is given.

The systematic list of birds (pp. 73-
723 ) makes up the main body of the book.
Each subspecies is treated as a separate
unit. Treatment of distributional data is
uniform and thorough. For each sub-
species there is a list of the literature
references arranged by the various names

used by the authors concerned. There is
usually a list of additional records and one
of skins and eggs examined by the author.
The details derived from these published
sources and the great mass of records and
observations gathered by the Carnegie
Museum expeditions are then presented
in an orderly and readable manner.

Emphasis is on bird distribution and
the data presented are well documented
and definite. In many cases locality re-
cords are plotted on maps. The signi-
ficance of climatic, ecological, and topo-
graphic features as factors affecting bird
distribution is often indicated. Migration
dates are cited when available.

Taxonomic studies of many of the
forms are an important aspect of the
book. While not everybody will agree
with all of the opinions expressed (for
example, the treatment of the Blue-Snow
goose complex) many have much merit.
For instance, the treatment of the eastern
races of Passerculus scmdiDtchensis is, in
this reviewer's opinion, by far the most
realistic one that has yet appeared in
print.

A feature of the text is the author's
frank, unbiased, and common-sense ap-
praisal of published data that for one
reason or another seem questionable. He
concludes, for instance, that in so far as
Labrador is concerned, too much respect
has been paid to J. J. Audubon as an au-
thority, and that many of Audubon's
published records must be expunged. To
this reviewer this view appears to be long
overdue.

In such a laborious undertaking, in-
volving overwhelming detail, a few
minor oversights are inevitable. For in-
stance, the author states that he is not
aware of the authority for the Bale Johan
Beetz record of the Dickcissel cited in
the A.O.U. Check-list (ed. 5, p. SSS).
This is based on a collected specimen and
was published in The Auk 71(3):317.
There is no reference in the book to the

119

120

The Canadian Field-Naturalist

Vol. 78

Ruff, Philomachus pugnax although there
is a generally overlooked record of a
"magnificent" male shot at Seven Islands,
Quebec, on May 27, 1933, in the collec-
tion of the late Dr. D. A. Dery (Pro-
vancher Society of Natural History of
Canada, Annual Report for 1933, p. 15).

A very few questionable assertions are
made such as (p. 373) that murres some-
times undertake a southward migration
from Hudson Bay to the Great Lakes, or
(p. 646) that the Evening Grosbeak is
still a casual summer resident in New
Brunswick (it is now one of the common
summer birds there). Such questionable
assertions are exceptional and the work
is characterized by meticulous accuracy
and astute observation and interpretation.

An extremely useful adjunct of the
book is a 32-page gazetteer of localities
which is skilfully prepared and anno-
tated. The 54-page (double columns)
bibliography, each item of which is ex-
pertly annotated, is another extremely
useful feature.

Eight colored plates by George M.
Sutton add beauty to the book and in a
number of species show rarely-pictured
and evanescent ju venal or the downy
plumages. A colored plate by C. L.
Ripper effectively portrays the natal
plumages of four grouse. A considerable
number of photographs showing habitats,
terrain, and other interesting aspects of
this rugged country are included.

This important work fully maintains
the very high standards that have long
characterized the author's publications
and will be indispensable, now and for a
long time to come, to anyone interested
in the bird life of the large part of the
country that it covers.

W. Earl Godfrey

Birds of the Lake Athabasca Region,
Saskatchewan

By Robert W. Nero. 1963. Saskatchewan
Natural History Society, Special Publica-
tion 5. 1943 pp. Illustrated. $2.50.

This useful and attractive publication
presents an excellent account of the bird
life of the Lake Athabasca region, Sas-
katchewan. Actually it considerably
transcends the northwestern part of the
province and gives a much clearer picture
than has been possible heretofore of bird
distribution in northern Saskatchewan in
general south to Clearwater and Churchill
rivers.

The Lake Athabasca data are based
mainly on the author's very creditable
field work there in the summers of 1960,
1961, and 1962 and he has included also
data from all other available sources, both
published and unpublished, notable
among which are notes made by Francis
Harper in 1914 and 1920, and by T. M.
Shortt in 1945.

The copiously-annotated list of birds
contains much definite and authentic in-
formation on distribution, status, and
dates for each species in the area, and for
many of those species there are notes also
on behavior, aspects of the breeding
cycle, and ecology. Substantial additions
are made to the known breeding ranges
of several species, and nesting is estab-
lished for a number of others where it
was only suspected heretofore. Valuable
data are given also for more eastern parts
of northern Saskatchewan, notably Has-
bala Lake in the extreme northeast.

The introduction includes a general
account of the author's three expeditions,
a good summary of previous work by
others, a description of the area, notes
and comments on bird distribution there,
and a map of the area. The report is
illustrated by photographs of bird habi-
tats and other subjects. Interesting draw-
ings by Ralph D. Carson are scattered
through the text. This report adds vastly
to our knowledge of the birds of northern
Saskatchewan.

W. Earl Godfrey

1964

Reviews

121

Cacti and Other Succulents

By R. GiNNS. Penguin Books Ltd., Har-
mondsworth, Middlesex, England, 1963.
191 pp., 125 half-tone pi., 5 text fig. (Cana-
dian distributer: Longmans Canada Ltd.,
Paperback Division, 55 Barber Greene
Road, Don Mills, Ontario. $1.85).

This small book is the most pleasant
and handsome introduction to the study
and culture of succulent plants which has
yet appeared. The profusion of really
excellent photographs, beautifully repro-
duced, shows for the most part close-up
views of either small mature plants or of
well-grown seedlings of large species,
thus portraying the plants as the home
grower is most likely to see them. There
is also a generous smattering of photo-
graphs of larger plants including a few in
the wild.

The text is well and interestingly writ-
ten to present an outline of the habitats
of succulent plants, much detail on
methods of culture and, for the latter
half of the book, a short description of a
number of genera and species well suited
to pot culture.

Although the book is written for an
English audience, the directions for cul-
ture are generally satisfactory for
Canadian growers. North American
readers might like to use the University
of California soil mixes rather than the
John Innes formulas, or for epiphytic
plants the chopped sphagnum moss me-
dium developed and used with great suc-
cess by the Montreal Botanic Garden.

Mr. Ginns gives a too brief list of more
extensive reference books. Those wanting
more iivformation on the botany, es-
pecially the taxonomy of these plants
should refer to:

The Cataceae by N. L. Britton and

J. N. Rose. Reprint 1964, Dover

Publications, Inc., New York, N.Y.

1066 pp., 1279 ill., 2 vols, cloth $20.00

(U.S.)

A Handbook of Succulent Plants by

Hermann Jacobsen, 1960, Blandford

Press, London. 1441 pp., 1617 fig., 3

maps, 3 vols. $45.00 (U.S.)

Die Cactaceae, by Kurt Backeberg, re-
commended by Mr. Ginns, is a very
beautiful German work but should be
used with caution, since Backeberg is the
most notorious- splitter among cactus
taxonomists, and many of his names will
not stand.

The best American journal for ama-
teurs is the Cactus and Succulent Journal
of the Cactus and Succulent Society of
America. This magazine is $5.00 (U.S.)
per year {6 issues) and may be ordered
from Scott Haselton, Editor, 132 West
Union Street, Pasadena, California.

To return to Mr. Ginns' book, we can
recommend it wholeheartedly to anyone
interested in succulent plants, especially
cacti. The book is free from important
technical blunders, most of the few de-
tected being the result of incomplete
statements, unavoidable in so short a
work.

Anyone who buys the book may want
to buy plants as well. Aside from local
shops, the only Canadian grower of im-
portance is Ben Veldhuis, Dundas,
Ontario, who deals with the public
mostly through visits to his greenhouses.
Other sources may be found in classified
columns of gardening magazines or in
the Cactus and Succulent Journal.

E. W. Greenwood

Ramsayville, Ontario

Handbook of North American Birds,
Vol. 1. Loons through Flamingos

Edited by Ralph S. Palmer. Yale University
Press, New Haven. 1962. 567 pp. $15.00.

When all volumes of this handbook
are published they will constitute the
most comprehensive assemblage of facts
on North American birds that has ever
been available. Everyone with a profes-
sional interest in birds, and many serious
amateur students of ornithology, should
have access to the set.

For each species, information is given
under the following headings: diagnostic
characters, detailed description of the

122

The Canadian Field-Naturalist

Vol. 78

definitive stage (the Villalobos system of
colours is used), descriptions of plumages
and moults, measurements, weight, colour
phases, hybrids, diagnostic description of
subspecies, field marks, voice, habitat,
distribution (maps show breeding range,
wintering range, and, in some instances,
migration routes and areas of hybridiza-
tion), migration, banding studies, repro-
duction, survival and longevity (if data
are available), habits, and food. The pre-
ceding list gives some idea of the breadth
of this work; it scarcely conveys any
idea of its detail.

Different sections and subsections are
the work of different authors, who are
identified by their initials. All data are
credited. A telegraphic style of writing is
employed. Not all species are illustrated,
but colour plates depict some of the less
familiar characteristics of plumage and
soft part colouration. Black-and-white
sketches illustrate some aspects of be-
haviour.

David A. Munro

Canadian Wildlife Service
Ottawa, Ontario

Minnesota's Rocks and Waters:
A Geological Story

By George M. Schwartz and George A.
Thiel with the assistance of Peggy Hard-
ing Love. The University of Minnesota
Press, Minneapolis. Revised (second) Edi-
tion. 1963. 366 pp.; 161 illustrations. $4.50.
(Minnesota Geological Survey Bulletin
37). Canadian representatives: Thomas
Allen Limited, 266 King Street West,
Toronto.

The State of Minnesota, comprising
over 84,000 square miles, is situated ap-
proximately in the central part of North
America. Its surface waters drain in three
major directions: to the northward into
the Red River and eventually Hudson
Bay, to the eastward into Lake Superior
and the Atlantic Ocean, and to the south
by the Mississippi into the Gulf of
Mexico. Its northern boundary is Canada,
and while the volume was prepared for

the citizens of Minnesota its description
of the geological features and how they
were developed will be of great interest
to many Canadians.

The landscape is composed of lakes,
swamps and rivers— of hills, ridges and
plains— of farm country, and rocky area
in the northern part. It contains some
14,000 lakes, giving a larger water area
than any other state in the union. The
details of the surface were largely pro-
duced by continental glaciers which ad-
vanced and in turn retreated during the
Great Glacial Age. The last glacier re-
treated from Minnesota as recently as
11,000 years ago.

Over the greater part of the state the
consolidated rocks at the surface are of
Precambrian age. They are ancient lava
flows, intrusives, and sediments including
iron-formations. The length of Precam-
brian time and the absence of fossils for
dating any beds makes correlation in
widespread areas difficult. In Minnesota
these rocks are regarded as having formed
in three geological eras: the Early Pre-
cambrian, the Middle Precambrian, and
the Late Precambrian. Most of Canadian
geologists prefer to divide Precambrian
time into two eras, an older called the
Archaean and a younger era named the
Proterozoic. Both of these are sub-
divided, the Archaean into the Keewatin
and the Timiskaming, and the Protero-
zoic into the Huronian and the Keween-
awan. In the southern part of the state are
Cambrian, Ordovician and Devonian
strata but Upper Paleozoic and Lower
Mesozoic ages are not found. Rocks of
Cretaceous rest on Precambrian and on
early Paleozoic formations.

The mineral resources are of very
great value. The chief production is iron
ore. The total production in the state up
to January 1, 1962, was 2,529,737,533
tons. Toatl taxes paid on iron ore to
January 1, 1961, were approximately
$1,257,448,400., a very important source
of funds for the state government. Some
60 per cent of the total produced in the
United States has come from Minnesota.
Three iron ranges are the Mesabi, the

1964

Reviews

123

Vermilion and the Cuyuna. Other
mineral resources in the state are archi-
tectural, monumental and structural
stone, produced from granite, limestone,
dolomite and other rocks; gravel and
sand are excavated and clay is used for
many ceramic products.

F. J. Alcock

398 Third Avenue

Ottawa, Ontario

Dr. Alcock is a former director of the National

Museum of Canada.

Les Libellules du Quebec

By Adrien Robert, cs.v. Ministere du
Tourisme, de la Chasse et de la Peche,
Province de Quebec. Service de la Faune,
Bulletin 1. 1963. 223 pages, 278 figures.

Now that the taxonomy of the Can-
adian Odonata rests on a firm foundation,
there is a place for popular regional
manuals which will encourage the be-
ginner and provide an abridged yet ade-
quate guide for the local collector.
Brother Robert's book is designed to
meet this need for Quebec, a province in
which he has studied dragonflies actively
for more than twenty-five years. It is
appropriate that this province should be
the first in Canada to devote a handbook
to its dragonflies. It contains at least 130
of the some 200 species recorded from
Canada; and yet, with its northern parts
extending beyond tree-line, it offers en-
vironments which limit the distribution
of dragonflies as a group. This handbook
will therefore foster interest in these
insects in an area where their study
should be singularly rewarding.

Printed in an edition of 1,000 copies,
this book is sent free to libraries and
entomologists who apply to the publisher
(at 5075, rue Fullum, Montreal). En-
tomologists will be gratified that the
Ministry has devoted the first bulletin of
this series to an insect group; and this
being so, the choice of dragonflies was a
happy one. The behaviour of these strik-
ing and beautiful creatures can readily
be observed in nature, their capture fre-

quently offers a challenge to the in-
genuity and patience of the collector, and
they are particularly numerous near lakes
and rivers where so many people congre-
gate during the summer.

The book is arranged in three parts. In
the first, which provides a general intro-
duction to the order, there are sections
devoted to the structure and life-history
of the larva and adult; the relationships
of dragonflies with other animals (pre-
dators, prey, parasites, etc.); the history
of studies on the order in Quebec; and
methods of collection and preservation.
The second, principal part (of 112 pages)
comprises a key for identification of
adults, and the third part an annotated
list of species with brief remarks on
their dates of adult appearance and dis-
tribution. An addendum and bibliography
of 62 references complete the text. The
book is liberally illustrated with bold,
clear line-drawings and eleven well-pro-
duced photographs; the latter show
typical habitats and are unusually attrac-
tive.

Information is clearly presented, and
great care has been taken to make the key
incisive and easy to use. An excellent
feature is the accompanying drawings in
which pertinent characters are indicated
by arrows. This will earn the gratitude of
all who use the key, and (we may hope)
provide a precendent to be followed in
subsequent bulletins of this series. The
author's aim— to provide a guide for
identification— has been effectively ful-
filled: this book should certainly be
possessed by all who intend to study
dragonflies in or near Quebec. But it
also provides a readable introduction to
the Odonata, and draws attention to the
varied and fascinating problems their
study offers the naturalist. It would
therefore make a useful addition to any
high school library.

The few errors lie in the illustrations
or their captions and only one is serious.
This is the portrayal (page 36) of a pair
of Coenagrion interrogatum ovipositing
in a manner exemplified by neither sub-

124

The Canadian Field-Naturalist

Vol. 78

order. To be correct (and typical of the
sub-order this species represents) this
figure should show the female legs grasp-
ing a support, and the eggs being inserted
into plant tissue. Less important sources
of potential confusion include the ter-
minology of the larval labium, which
does not conform to current usage, and
the use of the ambiguous (though pos-
sibly correct) generic name Agrion in-
stead of Calopteryx. These shortcomings
represent minor and exceptional depar-
tures from the high standard which
characterizes the text and illustrations.

The author and publishers are to be
congratulated on producing this attrac-
tive and eminently useful handbook.

Philip S. Corbet

Entomology Research Institute
Canada Department of Agriculture
Ottawa, Ontario

Investigations in the Natural History
[Floristics and Geo-morphology] of the
Soviet Far East [Kamtchatka] Issledovanie
prirody dal'nego vostoka')

E. Parmasto, Editor. A collection of papers
published as No. 450 of the Academy of
Sciences of the Estonian S.S.R., Tartu,
1963. 1.54 rubles.

The text is in Russian, but each paper
is followed by a clear English summary,
sufficiently detailed for evaluation of the
work. The translated table of contents
lists the following:

Kaarel Orviku. On the IVLorphology of
the Coast of Kronoki Bay (9 pp., 4
photographs);

A. V. Raukas. On the Geology of the
Geyser Valley (17 pp., 6 photographs);

A. Raik. On the Regime of Kamchatka
Geysers (56 pp., 8 photographs);

Kaarel Orviku & A. Raukas. Geyserites
in the Geyser Valley, Kamchatka (15

pp., 12 photographs);

H. Trass. On the Vegetation around Hot
Water Springs and Geysers of Geyser
Valley, Kamchatka (34 pp., 7 photo-
graphs);

E. Kukk. On the Algal Flora of the Gey-
ser Valley (12 pp., 30 species);

H. Trass & E. Lellep. Floristical Notes
from Kamchatka and the Island of
Medny (9 pp., 112 species);

H. Trass. On the Lichen Flora of Kam-
chatka I. (50 pp., 218 species including

1 sp, nov., 2 vars. nov., 8 f. nov., and 3
comb, nov.; 9 figures of gross charac-
ters);

E. Parmasto. On the Fungus Flora of
Kamchatka (68 pp., 185 species includ-
ing 3 sp. nov., 1 var. nov., 2 f. nov., 3
comb, nov.); 7 photographs, 7 figures
mainly of the spores of 7 species;

T. Nikola) eva. The Hydnaceae in Kam-
chatka and Kunashir (9 pp., 30 species,

2 figures);

A, Raitviir. List of Fungi belonging to
the order Helotiales collected in Kam-
chatka and Kunashir (5 pp., 18 species
including 1 sp. nov., 1 comb, nov.);

A. Raitviir. List of Dacrymycetales and
Tremellales collected in Kamchatka
and Kunashir (4 pp., 14 species).

Four striking color reproductions of
paintings from the area add to the ar-
tistry of the book which is attractively
designed and bound, legibly printed. For
those of us completely unfamiliar with
Kamchatka, and for all interested in
floristics and especially for taxonomists in
the groups covered, this book is an essen-
tial addition to the scientific library and
desirable in the personal library.

LUELLA K. WeRESUB

Plant Research Institute

Canada Department of Agriculture

Ottawa

NOTES

Changing Status of the Cowbird
in Prince Edward Island

Prior to 1960 the Eastern Cowbird,
Molothrus ater ater (Boddaert), was re-
corded from Prince Edward Island on
but four occasions. Godfrey (1954, Na-
tional Museum of Canada Bulletin 132:
155-213) reported observations of three
birds made in 1933 and 1947; and Mills
(1957, Nova Scotia Museum of Science
Newsletter 2(2): 25-27) recorded one
bird each in 1953 and 1954, with evidence
of breeding. Its status in Nova Scotia is
given by Tufts (1962, Birds of Nova
Scotia) as a rare summer resident until
1950, then increasing as a permanent resi-
dent seen more often in winter than in
summer.

The writer first recorded the Cowbird
through a reliable report from Bideford,
Prince County, in the fall of 1960. On
April 15, 1961, one male and one female
were observed at Ellerslie, Prince
County; and from April 16 to 29, eight
birds remained in that district. None were
seen again until October when several
adults and juveniles, and a flock of about
twenty-five were recorded from Ellerslie.
On April 9, 1962, a few were seen among
flocks of Starlings and Common Crackles
which might have been female Cowbirds,
but conditions were unfavourable for
identification.

In 1963 the Cowbird was frequently
observed. Fourteen birds representing
both sexes were recorded from Ellerslie
May 4-28. Thirteen juveniles, often ac-
companied by Robins, Flickers, or Spar-
rows, were seen in central Prince County
during late July; and about sixty Cow-
birds were recorded throughout August,
mostly associated with other blackbirds
foraging in meadows. In the period Sep-
tember 2 3 -October 16 two flocks of
about two hundred Cowbirds each, and
about ten similar flocks of mixed Starlings

and Cowbirds were observed. No para-
sitized nests have yet been discovered.

A small summer population may have
existed here before 1960, for with few
observers and an abundance of black-
birds, the Cowbird could remain unde-
tected for some time. However, no resi-
dent has yet been encountered who had
previously seen the bird. The Cowbirds
seen among migrating flocks during late
September, 1963, were probably from
regions beyond the province, most local
blackbirds having left by late August.

Since about 1955 several species of
birds apparently have extended their
range into Prince Edward Island, or have
become more numerous there. Unfor-
tunately, the scarcity of observers here
may result in these changes being inade-
quately documented, as were avifaunal
conditions in the past.

Stanley E. Vass

Ellerslie, P.E.I.
4 November 1963

Some Interesting Plants in the
Barron Canyon in
Algonquin Park

In the course of visits to the canyon of
the Barron River we have been delighted
to discover several plants whose occur-
rence was most unexpected. This part of
the river, noted for its beauty, is ac-
cessible only by canoe. The Barron River
drains Grand Lake on the east side of
Algonquin Park and joins the Petawawa
River not far from its junction with the
Ottawa. Judging from the vegetation,
this area is similar to the general sur-
rounding terrain in having the acid soil
of the southern part of the Canadian
Shield.

During our first visit in October 1961
we found that one of the rare rock
cresses Arabis Holboellii Hornem. grew
on exposed rock ledges. We had pre-
viously seen it on the rocks of the lower

125

126

The Canadian Field-Naturalist

Vol. 78

Barron and T. C. Brayshaw of the
Petawawa Forest Experimental Station
has found it nearby on the Ottawa River
on the face of famous Oiseau Rock.

Celastrus scmideiis L. was fairly com-
mon on rock slides and of interest because
it bore fruit. Scattered vines of bitter-
sweet are well established at Des Joachim
and Deep River but do not fruit as they
do in the calcereous soil to the east. It
has been suggested that both sexes may
not have moved along together and I
must check this. These localities are just
beyond the limit of spread shown by
Soper and Fleimburger (1961, 100 Shrubs
of Ontario).

In June of 1962 on the cool, shaded,
north-east side we were excited to find
Saxifraga aizoon Jacq. and one plant of
the little spleenwort Asplenium tricho-
manes L. That the occurrence here of
the saxifrage is unusual may be inferred
from the report of Soper and Maycock
(1963, Canadian Journal of Botany 41
(2): 183-198). On May 26 of the follow-
ing year, much to our pleasure since it
was a hot day, we encountered a fall of
ice in this part of the canyon.

Also on May 26, 1963 we found a
colony of another rare crucifer Draba
hirta L. (D. arabisans). A second dis-
covery which defined identification was
a unique, evergreen, dwarf shrub or tree
about 30 inches tall sprawling at the base
of a moss and lichen-covered rock slide.
It would not appear to be a new species,
but rather a mutant of some more com-
mon plant as there are three forms of
needles or branches. In appearance it is
rather like a large Cassiope mertensiana
(which of course it could not be, so far
out of range) with a few branches of
enlarged needles of Juniperus horizon-
talis and a few more of /. communis.
W. G. Dore, by sectioning a part of the
stem, has established that it is a conifer
of several years growth and it is said by
C. Frankton to smell of cedar.

Three more visits were made in 1963.
In mid- June we located Dryopteris
fragrans (L.) Schott var. remotiuscula

Komarov. The presence on the Barron
of this fern has been reported by T. C.
Brayshaw who first discovered it there
(In press, Canadian Field-Naturalist).

In September, after examining many
rock ferns, a small colony of the glandu-
lar, jointless Woodsia cathcartiana Ro-
bins, was found. B. Boivin who made the
identification considers this to be a form
of W. oregana. The plants were on a
dry, exposed rock and earth face on the
south-east side. A few more specimens of
Asplenimn tricho^nanes were located.
Several plants of Dryopteris fragrans
were seen under a moist overhang beside
the main waterfall and it was also ob-
served on dry rock slides where little
grew except this and the common Wood-
sia ilvensis. D. fragrans is evidently fairly
common in the canyon and also, we have
observed, on the cliffs of the Mattawa
River between Pimisi Bay and the Talon
Chute. In addition to the plants found
in the canyon, we have collected Cepha-
lanthus occidentalis L. (button-bush),
Acorus calaTfMs L. (sweet-flag) and the
uncommon Viola primtdifolia L. along
the shores of the Barron River. Ceanothus
ovatus Desf. has been observed in the
canyon and along the valleys of the Chalk
and Petawawa rivers but not to the west.

In conclusion it is noted that the Bar-
ron and Petawawa Rivers are considered
to have been part of an old drainage
system between the Upper Great Lakes
and the Champlain Sea which once filled
the Ottawa valley. The plants may have
arrived at this time, then become stranded
in crevices of the cliffs where they found
survival possible. Some of them are
known to require lime in the soil. This
region is underlain mainly by acid,
granitic rocks and the occurrence of
lime "would be unusual. However, it
might occur in glacially transported soils
or the plants may signify the presence of
calcium bearing rocks such as the Gren-
ville-type limestones known to occur
nearby, or of other calcium-bearing
rocks, such as amphibolite or other basic
rocks, that occur within the complex of

1964

Notes

127

igneous and metamorphic rocks of the
Canadian Shield. Whatever the reason,
these unusual occurrences make the can-
yon of the Barron River of considerable
interest botanically.

I wish to acknowledge the advice of
the members of the Plant Research Insti-
tute, Ottawa, mentioned above to whom
specimens were submitted and of N. R.
Gadd of the Geological Survey of
Canada.

Mary I. Moore

6 Laurier Ave.
Deep River, Ont.
12 November 1963

The Holotype of the FrankUn
Grouse (Canachites franklinii)

Stenhouse (1930, Novitates Zoologicae
35:270-276) calls attention to the exis-
tence in the Royal Scottish Museum,
Edinburgh, of a specimen of Canachites
franklinii, probably the type specimen.
I have recently examined the specimen
to determine any further details about it.
The specimen is now catalogued as
1930/183 in the museum, and bears two
labels. One, evidently originally attached
to the stand of the bird while it was on
display as a mounted specimen, bears no
data of significance except the written
statement on the reverse "Exhibited
Wemerian Society, 20.2.1830". The ink,
and the position of this note relative to
the position of the red "Type" label of
recent origin, leads to the suspicion that
even this note may have been applied
recently. The data upon the museum
label were evidently transcribed from the
details contained in Douglas' diary, pub-
lished in 1914. There would, therefore,
be grave doubts about the authenticity
of this specimen were it not for certain
supporting details. In the first place the
specimen was originally in the Edinburgh
University collection, where it is known
Douglas' specimens were deposited. More
important, however, and apparently un-
noticed heretofore, is that it agrees close-
ly with the description by Douglas of the

specimen collected by him on the west
side of Athabasca Pass) now in British
Columbia) upon May 1, 1827.

As described (Douglas, 1914, Journal.
London, p. 258) the bird taken was an
adult male. It is further stated that: "This
being the first I have seen, could not re-
sist the temptation of preserving it,
although mutilated in the legs." The
specimen in the Royal Scottish Museum
has had the right leg shattered just above
the foot and the left foot almost removed,
apparently by shot. There seems to me,
therefore, to be little doubt that the
specimen in the Royal Scottish Museum
is in fact the one mentioned by Douglas.

Later in his travels, Douglas mentions
shooting other specimens. These -were
taken in the eastern foothills of the
Rocky Mountains, in an area that we now
know to be inhabited only by Canachites
canadensis or by a population showing
intermediate characters. No mention is
made of any specimens being preserved
except for the one above mentioned.

When Douglas prepared the original
description of Canachites franklinii (1833,
Transactions Linnaean Society of London
16:139) he included an accurate account
of its colour in every detail, except that
he remarks in the English, but not in the
Latin description, "Tail square . . . black,
white at the points". The tail in franklinni
is almost always completely black, as it is
in the specimen here described. It is safe
to assume that the statement was based
on his memory of the other individuals
shot in the foothills and believed by him
to be the same as his first specimen.
These eastern foothill birds do in fact
have the tail tip yellowish brown or dirty
white. The inadequate description of the
female was also no doubt added from
memory and without reference to a
specimen. Another product of faulty
memory is the statement in the original
description that the flesh is white, where-
as in his diary he records accurately that
the flesh was dark.

Although Douglas makes no specific
mention of any specimen in his original

128

The Canadian Field-Naturalist

Vol. 78

description, and thus designates no type
specimen, his treatment, in prior position,
of the male plumage in detail that was
not merely extracted from his diary,
leaves no doubt that he had a male speci-
men before him. In my opinion the speci-
men in question is the one now in the
Royal Scottish Museum and, as the only
specimen known to have been in the
possession of the describer, can be re-
garded as the holotype. The type locality
then becomes Athabasca Pass, British
Columbia, on the headwaters of the
Canoe River.

I. McT. Cowan

Department of Zoology
University of British Columbia
Vancouver 8, B.C.
18 November 1963

Bushy-tailed Wood Rat in the
Peace River District, Alberta

The distribution of the bushy- tailed
WOOD RAT, Neotoma cinerea druTmnondi
(Richardson), is usually reported as in-
cluding the Peace River district of
British Columbia, without mention of the
Alberta section (Rand, 1948, National
Museum of Canada Bulletin 108:162-163;
Hall and Kelson, 1959, The MamTnals of
North America 2:704).

Soper (1948, Journal of Mammalogy
25:59) reported the species in the Wapiti
River valley south of Wembley, Alberta.
He was informed that it formerly oc-
curred at Dunvegan, but had been re-
cently exterminated. It seems desirable,
therefore, to record a specimen in the
National Museum of Canada from Dun-
vegan, Alberta. The specimen (no.
11513), a juvenile male, was taken by Dr.
L. S. Russell on August 30, 1932, at his
field camp on the banks of the Peace
River just east of Dunvegan (Section 8,
Township 80, Range 4, W.6).

It appears that bushy-tailed wood rats
(or pack rats), emigrated from the
Rocky Mountains eastward down the

river valleys into the Peace River District
of north-western Alberta.

A. W. F. Banfield

National Museum of Canada
Ottawa, Ontario
10 December 1963

The Stonecat, No turns flavus,
Newly Recorded in Alberta

Three specimens of the stonecat. No tu-
rns flavus Rafinesque, were caught in the
Milk River, about 18 miles west of Wild-
horse, Alberta, on the night of June 19-
20, 1962, by J. R. Nursall and R. C. B.
Hartland-Rowe, who were participating
in a faunal survey of the Milk River
canyon for the University of Alberta.

The party was stationed at the winter
camp of George Ross, a rancher of the
district; the fish were captured at the
camp. The water was thick with sediment
("milky") and the current was swift.
At 9:00 a.m., June 19, 1963, the water
temperature at the camp was 19.6°C,
the pH 7.8. Conductivity of the water
was about 200 micromhos.

Seining was attempted in the river,
but was of limited success, owing to tur-
bulent water and a treacherous, shifting,
sandy bottom. Only flathead chub,
Hybopsis {Flaty gobio) gracilis (Richard-
son), were taken by this method. Subse-
quently, small traps were fabricated from
window screening and wire, baited with
hamburger and bacon and staked into
the river. The stonecats and several flat-
head chub were taken by this method.

Seining in oxbows of the Milk River,
about one mile east of the Ross camp,
produced more flathead chub plus some
specimens of the burbot. Lota lota (Lin-
naeus), but no stonecats. Here also were
found specimens of the Western Painted
Turtle, Chrysemys picta belli Gray, as
reported by Lewin (1963, Copeia (2):
446-447).

The specimens noted are deposited in
the University of Alberta Museum of
Zoology, Edmonton. Measurements on
Noturus flavus are as follows:

1964

Notes

129

Catalogue

Total

Standard

Weight

Dorsal

Anal

No.

length

preserved

rays

(mm)

(gm)

100

229

193

138

1 + 6

101

225

192

131

1 + 6

102

176

153

1 + 6

W. B. Scott ( 1958, A Checklist of the
Freshwater Fishes of Canada and Alaska,
Royal Ontario Museum, p. 19) said that
Noturus flavus "is to be expected in
southern Canadian plains region, al-
though no valid records exist". In the
same place Scott throws doubt on the
record of Bissett (1927, Canadian Field-
Naturalist 41(6) : 127-128) of Noturus
flavus in Manitoba. Hinks (1943, The
Fishes of Manitoba, Manitoba Depart-
ment of Mines and Natural Resources,
102 pp.) mentioned only Bissett's (1927)
record and stated that "the record needs
confirmation" (p. 62).

Rostlund (1952, University of Cali-
fornia Publications in Geography, 9, p.
274) published a range map for Noturus
flavus, showing it in the South Saskatche-
wan River drainage of the southeast cor-
ner of Alberta, and the Assiniboine —
Red River drainage of Manitoba, with a
doubtful distribution between these
across southern Saskatchewan. The Mani-
toba record was based on Hubbs and
Lagler (1947, Fishes of the Great Lakes
Region, Cranbrook Institute of Science,
Bulletin 26, p. 72), which was based on
Bisset (1927). The Alberta record was
from Eigenmann (1895, Bulletin of the
U.S. Fish Commission 14: 101-132), who
stated (p. 107) that "A number of speci-
mens of this species (150 to 250 mm.
long) were obtained with hook and line
at night in the Missouri River at Craig,

Mont. They were [also] reported to me
at Medicine Hat, but I did not procure
any specimens at that place." It seems
probable to us that verbal accounts of
the stonecat from Medicine Hat would
refer to specimens taken in the Milk
River or its tributaries, which lie about
60 miles south of that city. Eigenmann
himself (1895 p. 119) lists Noturus flavus
only for the Missouri River system.

The species was not listed by Rawson
(1949, A Check List of the Fishes of
Saskatcheivan, Royal Commission of the
Fisheries of Saskatchewan, Saskatche-
wan Department of National Resources
and Industrial Development, 8 pp.). F.
M. Atton (pers. comm.) states that no
specimens have been collected in Saskat-
ewan.

The Milk River is tributary to the Mis-
souri River. The stonecat is found in
the upper tributaries of this system (e.g.,
Simon, 1946, Wyoming Fishes, Bulletin
4, Wyoming Game and Fish Department,
pp. 94-95; Brown, 1962, Proceedings of
the Montana Academy of Science 22,
pp. 21-26). Mr. W. Alvord (Chief of
Fisheries Management, State of Montana
Department of Fish and Game) further
informs us (pers. comm.) that this spec-
ies has been recovered from the Milk
River within Montana.

j. r. nursall,
Victor Lewin

Department of Zoology
University of Alberta
Edmonton, Alberta
13 November 1963

LETTER TO THE EDITOR

During early July, 1962, my family and
I spent seven days exploring Churchill,
Manitoba, and environs. Through the
courtesy of Mr. and Mrs. Irwin Smith
and mutual use of their truck and canoe,
we were able to range as far as Twin
Lakes in one direction and Button Bay
in another. The Smiths have a deep love
and respect for the North and its native
peoples, plants and animals. Mr. Smith
("Windy") has background experiences
in the North worthy of documentation.
The Smiths have been gracious hosts to
many amateur and professional natura-
lists.

In spite of several cold, rainy days and
hordes of mosquitoes on two sunny days,
we soaked up the magnificence of tundra
and forest edge and the great Churchill
River and Hudson Bay.

Our first impressions of Churchill's
richness of nature came from the displays
of native flowers. The natural lavish
gardens were a dramatic contrast to the
rawness of man-made disturbances of the
land and the careless disposal of all sorts
of junk. Here is a frontier town and a
seaport with its share of Indians and
Eskimos, already or fast becoming human
derelicts. All too well and woefully illus-
trated in Churchill are the almost insane
and depraved manners in which "civil-
ized" peoples can slash into and depre-
ciate the native beauty of a countryside
and can disturb the integrity of Indians
and Eskimos.

Within a few hours of beating around
Churchill— its truly wonderful "Town
Slough", river front and great coastal
rocks, pools, pockets of soil and cobble

and sand beaches — the thought that
Churchill could be a place of great
natural beauty began to gnaw away
within our reflections. We discovered a
few town's people who resented the
rough manner in which developers of all
sorts, including the armed forces, had
treated the area.

Many naturalists have gone to Churchill
and tourist excursions are made periodic-
ally by train each summer. Yet no one to
our knowledge has come out strongly
with a proposal that Churchill is worthy
of careful planning with a major goal of
preserving its natural beauty and wealth
of flora and fauna. While there we wit-
nessed three white town boys shooting
down Parasitic Jaegers. Some of the
most beautiful natural gardens and parts
of the Town Slough were being used as
dumping grounds.

More seriously, we were deeply dis-
turbed by maladjustments obviously
existing among the whites, Indians and
Eskimos who make up permanent and
drifting populations of the area.

There is great challenge all through
Canada's North for better planning of
towns and for development premised in
large part on preservation of natural
beauty of the land and integrity of
Indians and Eskimos.

Admittedly these observations made
by my family and me are sketchy and
limited, but we believe they are of import
and worthy of reporting.

Douglas E. Wade

Northern Illinois University
Lorado Taft Field Campus
Oregon, Illinois
28 March, 1964.

130

AFFILIATED SOC3ETIES

Edmonton Bird Club

President, H. J. MohnrcoMERY; Vice-President,
Dr. V. E. Lewin; Secretary-Treasurer, Dr. W. G.
Evans, Department of Entomology, University of
Alberta, Edmonton, Alta.; Field Secretary, Dr.
R. W. TxmNER; Librarian, D. A. Boag; Audubon
Representative, B. Sparks.

Mcllwraith Ornithological Club

President, W. R. Jarmain; Past President, Dr.
F. S. CooK; Vice-President, Dr. G. Cummings;
Recording Secretary, Mrs. G. A. MacDougall;
Corresponding Secretary, Mrs. A. M. Coote, 644
Base Line Rd., London, Ontario; Treasurer, Mrs.
H. J. Wheaton; Migration Secretary, J. W. Leach-,
Migration Editor, W. G. Girling.

Natural History Society of Manitoba

President, Miss J. M. Waiter; Honorary Presi-
dent, A. H. Shortt; Honorary Vice-President, E.
Gilbert; Past President, G. S. Cotter; Vice-Presi-
dent, Dr. L. Smith; Treasurer, W. D. Kyle;
Assistant Treasurer, J. Jack; General Secretary,
Mrs. a. E. Axcell, 310 Linwood St., St. James,
Manitoba; Assistant Secretary, Miss R. McGregor;
Mailing Secretary, Miss L. M. Lovell; Executive
Secretary, Mrs. G. Keith.

Nova Scotia Bird Society

President, Dr. L. B. Macpherson; Vice-President,
Mrs. Victor Carooza; Secretary -Treasurer, Miss
Sylvia J. Fullerton, 1051 Lucknow St., Halifax,
N.S.; Editor, Mrs. J. W. Dobson.

Provancher Society of Natural History
of Canada

President, Ronald E. Blair; First Vice-President,
Benoit Pelletier. Second Vice-President, James P.
Coristine; Secretary-Treasurer, Georges A. Le-
clerc, 628 Eraser St., Quebec, Que.

Province of Quebec Society for the
Protection of Birds

President, Mrs. G. H. Montgomery; Vice-
Presidents, Dr. Ian McLaren, Miss R. B. Blan-
chard; Honorary Treasurer, Miss G. E. Hibbard;
Honorary Secretary, Miss R. S. Abbott, 164 Sen-
neville Road, Senneville, P.Q.; Honorary Librari-
an, Mr. W. H. Rawlings.

Toronto Field Naturalists' Club

President, Dr. D. Hoeniger; Vice-President,
R. F. Norman; Secretary-Treasurer, Mrs. H. Rob-
son, 49 Craighurst Ave., Toronto 12, Ont.; As-
sistant Secretary, Miss Rirra Marshall; Junior
T.F.N.C., R. J. MacLellan, 416 St. Clements Ave.,
Toronto 12, Ont.

Vancouver Natural History Society

Honorary President, Dr. M. Y. Williams; Past
President, Dr. R. Stace-Smith; President Dr. J. E.
Armstrong; Vice-President, N. F. Piillen; Corres-
ponding Secretary, Mrs. D. J. Martin, 2038 Mac-
donald St., Vancouver, B.C.; Treasurer, Mrs. E. N.
Copping; Programme Secretaries, Miss R. Ross,
Mrs. H. Pinder-Moss; Editor of Bulletin, C. B. W.
Rogers; Recording Secretary, Miss K. Milroy.

ADVICE TO CONTRIBUTORS

Authors are asked to share the cost of publication by paying for each
page of an article that is in excess of the Umit of twelve journal pages,
the cost of illustrations and of setting small-sized type and tables.

Manuscripts

The Style Manual for Biological Journals is
recommended, in general, as a guide for authors.

Manuscripts should be typevi^ritten on one side
of nontransparent paper measuring 8i by 11 inches.
Authors are requested to use at least one given
name. All text matter, including quotations, foot-
notes, tables, literature references, and legends for
figures should be double-spaced. Only those w^ords
meant to appear in italics should be underlined.
Every sheet of the manuscript should be number-
ed.

Notes should bear the name of one author only
and references in notes should be incorporated
directly in the text.

Illustrations

Line drawings should be made with India ink
on white drawing paper, blue tracing linen, or
blue-lined co-ordinate paper. Co-ordinate lines
that are to appear in the reproduction should be
ruled in black ink. Descriptive matter should be
lettered, not typewritten, and all parts of the
drawing should permit easy legibility even if a
reduction is made.

Photographs should have a glossy finish and
show sharp contrasts. For reproduction as a com-
plete plate they should be mounted without space
between prints.

For large drawings and mounted photographs
the ratio of height to width should conform to
that of the journal page (4 J by 7i inches) but the
height sliould be adjusted to allow for the legend.

Reprints

Reprints, with or without covers may be bought.
The cost is given on the reprint order form which
is attached to the galley proofs.

Reprints of

A GUIDE TO THE GEOLOGY
OF THE OTTAWA DISTRICT

by
Alice E. Wilson

and

A GUIDE TO THE GEOLOGY
OF THE GATINEAU-LIEVRE DISTRICT

by
Donald D. Hogarth

jnay be obtained at a cost of one dollar each.

For orders, please ivrite:

The Canadian Field-Naturalist
W. J. Cody, Business Manager
Central Experimental Farm
Ottawa, Canada

LIBRARY

DEC 2 9 136'^

The CANADIAMv™

IVERSITY

FIELD 'NATURALIST

Published by THE OTTAWA FIELD-NATURALISTS' CLUB, Ottawa, Ontario

Articles

William Copeland McCalla — An Appreciation A. E. Porsild 1 3 1

Plant Collections from Carswell Lake and Beartooth Island, Northwestern

Saskatchewan, Canada George W. Argus 139

Some Interesting Plant Records from the Chalk River District, Ontario

T. C. Brayshaw 150
Notes on the Amphibians of Browns Flat Area, New Brunswick

Stanley W. Gorham 154
The Rock Ptarmigan, Lagopus mutus rupestris in Ontario and Manitoba

Harry G. Lumsden 161
Fish Collections from Eastern Hudson Bay D. E. McAllister 167

The Food Habits of the Red-winged Blackbird, Agelaius phoeniceus, in Manitoba

Ralph D. Bird and Lawrie B. Smith 179
Additional Records and a Correction of the Type Locality for the Boreal

Chorus Frog in Northwestern Ontario Francis R. Cook 186

Reviews 193

The Last Horizon — Where is that Vanished Bird? — Fishes of the Western North Atlantic —
Fish and Wildlife, A Memorial to W. J. K. Harkness — Rowan Field Notes: A Review —
Other New Tides.

Notes

Occurrence of Some Small Mammals in Southwestern Ontario Charles A. Long 197

Black Duck Breeding Record for Alberta William G. Leitch 199

Piping Plover in Ottawa, Ontario A. E. Bourguignon 199

Two Interior British Columbia Records for the Ancient Murrelet Walter B, Johnstone 199

A Probable Breeding Record of the Bobolink at Vermilion, Alberta James K. Lowther 200

Harris' Sparrow in Quebec James K. Lowther 200

Additional Specimens of the Small-mouthed Salamander from Pelee Island, Ontario

Francis R. Cook 201
Nest-Site Competition between Bufflehead, Mountain Bluebird and Tree Swallow

A. J. Erskine 202
Notes on Townsend's Solitaire in ^Vestern Chilcotin District, British Columbia

W. Adrian B. Paul 203

Notes on the Birds of Riding Mountain National Park, Manitoba Donald A. Blood 204

Letter to the Editor 206

Can. Field Nat. Vol. 78

No. 3

p. 131-206

Ottawa, July-September 1964

THE OTTAWA FIELD-NATURALISTS' CLUB

Founded in 1879

— Fatrons —
Their Excellencies The Governor General and Madame Vanier

The club is a corporate member of the Federation of Ontario Naturalists and is
affiliated with the American Association for the Advancement of Science.

MEMBERS OF COUNCIL

President: George H. McGee, 2052 Woodcrest Road, Ottawa 8, Ontario

First Vice-President: W. Winston Mair

Second Vice-President: G. R. Hanes

Secretary: A. W. Rathwell, Canadian Wildlife Service, Norlite Building,

150 Wellington St., Ottawa 4, Ontario
Treasurer: Miss Anne Banning, Box 4099, Postal Station E, Ottawa, Ontario
Additional Members of Council: Mrs. F. R. Cook, Miss L. Kingston, Mrs. D. A. Smith,
Miss M. Stuart; Messrs. W. K. W. Baldwin, A. W. F. Banfield, D. R. Beckett, E. L.
Bousfield, C. G. Champ, A. H. Clarke, Jr., W. J. Cody, F. R. Cook, R. Frith, J. M.
GiLLETT, H. Groh, J. W. Groves, D. D. Hogarth, P. H. Jones, E. L. Leese, H. Lloyd,
H. N. Mackenzie, A. E. Porsild, F. H. Schultz, K. R. Scobie, D. A. Smith, V. E. F.
SoLMAN and G. Tessier.
Auditors: J. M. Gillett and R. J. Moore

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

Editor: Francis R. Cook Business Manager: W. J. Cody

National Museum of Canada, Ottawa, Ontario Central Experimental Farm, Ottawa, Ont.

Associate Editors: F. J. Alcock (Geology), John W. Arnold (Entomology), W. A. Bell
(Paleontology), J. Sherman Bleakney (Herpetology), Arthur H. Clarke, Jr.
(Malacology), Willlvm G. Dore (Botany), J. R. Dymond (Ichthyology), W. Earl
Godfrey (Ornithology), A. G. Huntsman (Marine Biology), Phillip M. Youngman
(Mammalogy).

The Canadian Field-Naturalist is published quarterly by the Ottawa Field-Naturalists'
Qub with assistance of the affiliated societies listed on the inside back cover. Manuscripts
representing personal observations or the results of original research in any branch of na-
tural history are invited. In the preparation of papers authors should consult the most
recent issue and the information for contributors on the inside back cover. Advertising
rates and prices of back numbers of this journal and its predecessors, TRANSACTIONS
OF THE OTTAWA FIELD-NATURALISTS' CLUB, 1879-1886, and the OTTAWA
NATURALIST, 1887-1919, are obtainable from the business manager.

MEMBERSHIP AND SUBSCRIPTION

Authorized as second-class mail by the Post Office Department of Ottawa, and ttir payment of postage in
Cash.

MUS. COMR ZOOL
LIBRARY

The Canadian Field-Naturalist ^^^ 2 9 1964

Volume 78 JULY-SEPTEMBER 1964 Number 3

WILLIAM COPELAND McCALLA - AN APPRECIATION

A. E. PORSILD
National Museum of Canada, Ottawa, Ontario

William Copeland AicCalla, normal school teacher and internationally
known amateur botanist, was born on November 8, 1872, at St. Catharines,
Ontario, and died at Calgary, Alberta, on August 22, 1962. He grew up in St.
Catharines where he received his early education; in the early 1890's he went
to Cornell University but, unfortunately, had to discontinue his studies owing
to indifferent health and eye troubles. However, he was at Cornell long
enough to come under the lasting influence of Dr. L. H. Bailey and Dr.
K. M. Wiegand.

McCalla had been interested in plants from early childhood and in his teens
took care of the plants in his father's conservatory at St. Catharines; about this
time he also became deeply interested in photography. In the summer of 1899
he made his first botanical collecting trip which took him to Banff in the
Canadian Rockies. Among the plants brought back were many not previously
known from Alberta and even some that proved undescribed. A distinctive
western willow, a tiny purple Primula and a western Draba were named for
McCalla by the specialists who described and recorded them as new to Science.

For some years McCalla operated "Sunny Acres" fruit farm now a part
of the city of St. Catharines. A victim of asthma, he was advised to leave
Ontario and in 1913 moved with his family to Edmonton where for one year
be became a partner in a construction firm that disappeared with the bursting
of the great building boom. In 1914 he bought a farm near Bremner, 13 miles
east of Edmonton. For some years he was free of asthma, but soon his health
forced him to abandon farming. In 1922 he joined the staff of the Edmonton
Normal School as librarian, and later as a teacher of Nature Study. In 1925
he moved to Calgary where he taught Natural History at the Normal School
until he retired in 1938. During these years hundreds of student teachers had
the stimulating experience of field trips with him and of examining his Natural
History specimens and photographs. For teaching purposes McCalla made
nearly 1000 hand-coloured lantern slides of plants and animals. Many of these
are now in the Department of Botany of the University of Alberta at Calgary,
or in the Department of Entomology at Edmonton.

Following his retirement McCalla was able to devote an increasing part
of his free time to botanical studies, plant photography, and to extended field
trips from Canada's western prairies to the coast of British Columbia, south

Mailing date of this number: 23 December, 1964

131

HARVARD
JJNJVERSiTY

132

The Canadian Field-Naturalist

Vol. 78

Figure 1. William Copeland McCalla.

1964

Porsild: William Copeland McCalla

133

Figure 2. Douglas Fir (Pseudotsuga taxifolia) on steep bank above Bow River Falls,
Banff, Alberta.

134 The Canadian Field-Naturalist Vol. 78

through the western States to the Mexican border. On all these he was
accompanied by Mrs. McCalla who took a devoted and active interest in his
work; she was also an experienced camper and, besides cooking, kept notes and
records for her husband. On most of these trips they carried camping equip-
ment so as to be independent of commercial hostelries. Once, when revisiting
the habitat of a rare plant, they camped near it for an entire week, until
conditions were suitable for obtaining the photographs they had come there to
make. This was before the coming of dependable light meters, electronic
flashlights and miniature cameras, when the field photographer had to carry a
portable dark-room for reloading his plate holders and for making test develop-
ments of negatives.

During these field trips McCalla kept adding to his growing herbarium in
which he invariably deposited "voucher specimens" of all plants photographed.
The winters following the field trips were spent developing and printing his
negatives and in the study and classification of plant specimens.

Widely recognized as an authority on the flora of Alberta, A4cCalla corres-
ponded and exchanged plants with many Canadian and foreign botanists, giving
freely of his time and personal observations. Many thousands of duplicates,
often of rare or little known western plants, were presented to the herbaria of
the National Museum of Canada at Ottawa, the Royal Botanical Gardens at
Kew, England, the New York Botanical Garden, and the University of British
Columbia. In 1960 McCalla presented his entire herbarium, numbering about
14,000 sheets, to the University of Alberta, Edmonton, together with the
negatives of his plant photographs. In the collecting and preparation of
botanical specimens McCalla devoted meticulous care and thought, and those
selected for his own herbarium, all carefully annotated, were of such exceptional
perfection and beauty as is rarely attainable in standard herbarium practice.

During seven field seasons in the Canadian Rockies I was often a guest in
the hospitable McCalla residence on the North Hill in Calgary when evenings
were spent examining specimens in McCalla's herbarium or in viewing selections
from his large collection of exquisite colour transparencies or of black and
white prints of wild flowers. A selection of 1411 enlarged wildflower photo-
graphs, including many of landscapes and plant habitats, all carefully labelled
and mounted in 25 large albums. Dr. McCalla presented to the National Museum
of Canada. In a letter dated February 14, 1959, he wrote about these:

"I have considered the matter and have come to the conclusion that nothing
could give me the same satisfaction as to present as a gift the 25 albums,
containing all 1411 photographic prints, to the National Museum of Canada.

"These photographs were taken over a long period of time and under all
kinds of conditions; there were frequent difficulties, I often breathed something
like a prayer that I might be able to do justice to the beauty of Nature in front
of the camera.

"I had no thought of the financial value of what 1 was doing. The work
was fascinating, challenging, sometimes disappointing, often rewarding— a grand

1964

PoRsiLD: William Copeland McCalla

135

Figure 3. Western Flowering Dogwood (Comus Nuttallii) near Victoria, B.C.

136

The Canadian Field-Naturalist

Vol. 78

Figure 4. Western Flowering Dogwood, | natural size.

Figure 5. Flowering Bunchberry {Comus canadensis) ,

1964

Porsild: William Copeland McCalla

137

Figure 6. Flowering Bitter-root (Le%visia rediviva) near Cranbrook, B.C. i natural size.

Figure 7. Pasque-flower or Prairie Crocus {Pulsatilla Ludoviciana) , near Calgary, Alberta.
I natural size.

138 The Canadian Field-Naturalist Vol. 78

avocation adding to the interest and joy of life. I am happy to have so many
of them go to the National Museum where they will be useful and be given
good care".

The 25 albums of photographs are now in the National Museum of Canada
where they will long remain an invaluable research tool and a lasting source of
botanical information and aesthetic pleasure. The six plant portraits illustrating
this article are truly representative of Dr. McCalla's photographic skill.

To the hundreds of student teachers who attended his classes and examined
his biological specimens or photographs, and to the many who from time to time
were able to accompany McCalla in the field, the association with this gifted
and knowledgeable student of Nature must have been truly inspiring. Several
distinguished Canadian biologists have acknowledged their indebtedness to him
for their initial interest in Nature and its many wonders.

In his teaching, and not least in his private herbarium, now in the Univer-
sity at Edmonton, in the thousands of duplicated specimens distributed to other
herbaria and in the truly unique collection of photographs presented to the
National Museum of Canada, McCalla has left an invaluable heritage to the
botanical science, and a great monument to one of the ablest and yet most
modest of Canadian botanists. It is most appropriate that the University of
Alberta, in 1956, saw fit to confer upon William Copeland McCalla the degree
of Doctor of Laws, Honoris Causa.

CHRISTMAS BIRD COUNT

The Kitchener- Waterloo Field-Naturalists' Club has collected and
tabulated results of the 1963 Christmas Bird Counts from 26 clubs in
Ontario. The tabulated data is contained on a single sheet 11 x 17
inches. Photostatic copies of this interesting data can be obtained
from F. W. Cooper, President, K.-W. Field-Naturalist' Club, 317
Highland Road East, Kitchener, Ontario. The price is 25 cents
per copy.

It is interesting to note that a total of 133 species and 175,000 in-
dividuals were reported by the participating clubs.

PLANT COLLECTIONS FROM CARSWELL LAKE AND

BEARTOOTH ISLAND

NORTHWESTERN SASKATCHEWAN, CANADA

George W. Argus
W. P. Fraser Herbarium, University of Saskatchewan, Saskatoon, Canada

The flora and vegetation of northern Saskatchewan is known primarily
from the collections and publications of Professor Hugh M. Raup (1936, 1946)
who explored the Saskatchewan portion of the Lake Athabasca region in 1935.
Other collections from this area have been made by J. B. Tyrrell in 1892 and
1893 (Tyrrell and Dowling, 1896), and more recently by Scotter (Scotter,
1961; Thompson and Scotter, 1961) in the Black Lake region east of Lake
Athabasca. Collections of bryophytes made by Mr. M. Welsh in northern
Saskatchewan are included in Conard's list (1957). The Alberta section of
Lake Athabasca is better known botanically than the Saskatchewan section and
several expeditions were made in northeastern Alberta by H. Raup (1936) and
Lucy Raup, who concentrated on the lichens (1928, 1930). More recently
collections by Cody ( 1956) have added to the knowledge of the flora of Alberta.
However, northwestern Saskatchewan has been infrequently visited by botanists
and most collections are from the shores of Lake Athabasca, with the exception
of Scotter's work in the Black Lake region. Prior to this study the vast inland
sedimentary region south of Lake Athabasca was unknown botanically.

During the summer of 1962 two locahties in the Lake Athabasca region of
northwestern Saskatchewan were visited: Carswell Lake and Beartooth Island.
These localities were visited as an incidental part of studies in the sand dune
region on the south shore of Lake Athabasca. The time spent at each locality
was short, three days at Carswell Lake (July 12-14) and two days on Beartooth
Island (July 15 and 16), and the total number of collections small; however
they have proved to be of floristic importance.

The Carswell Lake region was of particular interest because of the
anomalous limestone outcrops in this area and the promise that species unknown
in the surrounding region may occur here. The sand blowouts on Beartooth
Island led us to suspect that the island may support an unusual flora similar to
that of the sand dunes on the south shore of the lake only 14 miles away.
However, the flora of Beartooth Island proved to be like that of the north shore
of Lake Athabasca and contained none of the endemics known from the south
shore (cf. H. Raup, 1936).

The 143 taxa listed here only represent a sample of the flora. For the area
explored was small, many common species were not collected due to the press
of time, and the mosses and lichens were only incidentally collected. However,
of the total, 34 taxa are new to northern Saskatchewan, of which two vascular
plants, 11 bryophytes, and three lichens are new to the province; 11 taxa are
new to northwestern Saskatchewan but have been known from adjacent
Alberta; and 33 taxa were previously uncollected from the south side of Lake
Athabasca.

139

140 The Canadian Field-Naturalist Vol. 78

The field research was supported by the Institute for Northern Studies,
University of Saskatchewan, during my tenure as a National Research Council
of Canada Postdoctorate Fellow. My field companion on the expedition was
Dr. Robert Nero, ornithologist, University of Saskatchewan, Regina Campus.
Dr. Nero (1963) has published an account of the ornithology of the Lake
Athabaska region. At Carswell Lake we had the good fortune to accompany
a party of geologists including Professor F. Edmunds and Mr. L. Beck and
party. My appreciation is extended to the specialists who identified or verified
specimens in certain difficult groups and to Dr. Dix for reading the manuscript
and helpful suggestions,

Carswell Lake

Carswell Lake (locally known as Trout Lake) is located about 22 miles
east of the provincial boundary and 32 miles south of Lake Athabasca (lat.
58° 35' N., long. 109° 25' W.). The region south of Lake Athabasca is under-
lain by sandstone of the Athabaska formation (Tyrrell and Dowhng, 1896).
Rising out of the gently rolling terrain are a series of limestone escarpments
produced by six ridges of fine-grained, highly folded and metamorphosed
limestone extending in an arc westward from the southwestern end of Carswell
Lake (Blake, 1956). Blake reports that this rock is unknown in the region
north and immediately south of Lake Athabasca. Our camp was located near
the lake at the foot of a cliff marking the edge of one of these ridges. Botanical
exploration was mainly carried out in the limestone area.

The vegetation in the vicinity of the limestone ridges is predominantly
open Finus banksiana woods on the uplands and Picea mariana, Larix laricina
muskeg on the lowlands. At the base of the cliffs are mixed Fmus banksia?ia,
Populas tremuloides woods associated with the shrubs, Cornus alba ssp.
stolonifera, Amelanchier alnifolia, and Prufius virginiana. Woods of Picea
glauca are rare and only two small stands of that species were observed. The
dry south-facing cliffs and the drier portions of the ridge tops support a
xerophytic vegetation including Juniperus cofmnimis, J. horizontalis, Saxifraga
tricuspidata, Erigeron compositus, et al. The limestone cliffs also support some
taxa apparently confined to calcareous rocks in northern Saskatchewan, includ-
ing Pellaea glabella var. occideiitalis and Draba cinerea. A wet limestone cliff
over which water was falling contained an interesting assemblage of plants
including Dryas dru?mnondii, Selaginella selaginoides, Anemone parviflora,
Carex leptalea and the mosses Cinclidium stygium and Bryum pseudotriquetrmn.

Beartooth Island

Beartooth Island is a small sandy-gravel island about three-quarters of a mile
long and one-half of a mile wide. It lies near the center of Lake Athabasca about
eleven miles east of the provincial boundary. The island consists of sand
overlying sandstone boulders and stones, and although it is mapped geologically
as Athabasca sandstone no bedrock outcrops were observed.

In the recent past Beartooth Island apparently supported well developed
forests of Picea glauca and Betula papyrifera and the island was passed longingly

1964

Argus: Collections From NVV Saskatchewan

141

'^'^^r- LAKE ATHABASCA
BEARTOOTH ISLAND *^

Figure 1. Map of northwestern Saskatchewan.

by the biologist F. Harper in 1914 and 1920 (pers. corres. cited by Nero, 1963).
However, extensive cutting, presumably for use on wood burning vessels
plying the lake, and a major fire about 25 to 30 years ago has changed the
aspect of the vegetation considerably. The island now is predominantly sand
blowouts and burn regeneration. Only two relatively undisturbed stands of
Picea glauca Avoods and Picea fnariana muskeg occur on the island. Some
indication of the age and development of the former Picea glauca woods is given

142 The Canadian Field-Naturalist V^ol. 78

by cut stumps on the eastern side of the island which are 8 to 18 inches in
diameter at 3 feet above the ground and 115 to 125 years old.

The blowouts are active although partly stabilized by mats of Empetrum
hemtaphroditmn, tufts of Festuca saximontana and Poa glauca, and scattered
individuals of Ficea glauca and Finns banksiana. Ficea glo'uca saplings in some
blowouts were determined to be 17 to 21 years old, and a Flmis banksia?ta
sapling was seventeen years old. In burns that did not blowout woody species
are well established and the vegetation contains saplings of Ficea glauca and
Fifius banksiana associated with a mixed shrub cover of Ledum groenlandicu?n
and occasional Frunus peimsylvanica. The gravel beach surrounding the island
is open and the sandstone cobbles and boulders are lichen covered. The older
beach levels are vegetated by shrubs including Ribes glandulosum, Frimus
pennsy Ivajjica, Sorbus scopidina, Rubus strigosus var. canadensis, Salix bebbiana,
and S. planifolia. At one point on the shore shrubby specimens of Fopidus
balsamijera were noted growing on a submerged stony beach.

An Annotated List of Plants

A complete set of specimens is deposited in the W. P. Eraser Herbarium,
University of Saskatchewan. A second set of the vascular plants has been sent
to the Department of Agriculture Herbarium, Ottawa. A duplicate set of
mosses are in the Herbarium, National Museum of Canada, and a second set of
lichens are in the United States National Herbarium, Washington, D.C.

All specimens were identified by the author with the exception of the
Polypodiaceae, Musci, and Lichenes which were determined by Drs. R. and A.
Try on, H. Crum, and iVI. Hale respectively. Several other groups were verified
or determined by specialists as indicated.

Three symbols are used to indicate species of particular distributional
importance: (NS) indicates taxa new to the flora of northern Saskatchewan,
(A-NS) indicates taxa new to northwestern Saskatchewan but known from
adajcent Alberta, and (LA-S) indicates taxa known from Lake Athabaska but
new to the sedimentary region south of the lake. Taxa observed, but not
collected, are cited.

The collection numbers cited in this paper are those of the author.

Vasculares

EQuiSETACEAE L. obscuTuin L. var. dendroidewn (Michx.)

Equisetmn arveiise L. D. C. Eaton

Carswell L.: on sandy lake shore, 609-62. Beartooth I.: with the preceding, 641-62.

E. fiuviatile L. L. tristachywu Pursh

Carswell L.: emergent aquatic on lake Beartooth I.: with the preceding, 640-62.

shore, 612-62.

E, ' , T ^ ,v INC selaginellaceae

E.hyemale L. ssp. affine (tngelm.) Stone Selaginella rupestris (L.) Spreng

(NS)

Carswell L.: growing on open sand in

Carswell L.: on sandv lake shore, 606-62. r,- , r • " ^ j ^u u £ i-~

■' ' Ptnus banksiana woods near the base of lime-

lycopodiaceae stone cliff, rare, 591-62.

Lycopodium annotinum L. var. annotinmn S. selaginoides (L.) Link (A-NS)

Beartooth I.: in Picea glauca burn regener- Carswell L.: in wet sandy soil at edge of

ation, 639-62. Carex meadow, 538-62; in moss mat on wet

1964

Argus: Collections From NW Saskatchewan

143

limestone cliff near waterfall, associated with
Bryum pseudotriquetrum, Ccimpylium stel-
latum, and Cinclidimn stygiufn, 57S-62C.

POLYPODIACEAE

Determined by Drs. R. and A. Tryon
Cystopteris fragilis (L.) Bemh. (LA-S)

Carswell L.: in crevices in limestone boul-
der at base of cliff, 542-62, 546-62.
Pellaea glabella Mett. ex Kuhn var. occiden-

talis (E. Nels.) Butters (LA-S)

Carswell L.: abundant in crevices in south-
facing limestone cliff, 482-62, 591-62. The
species was cited by H. Raup (1936) from
the dolomite hills at Cornwall Bay on the
north shore of Lake Athabasca. He noted
that it seems to be confined to limestone or
dolomitic rocks.
Woodsia glabella R. Br. (LA-S)

Carswell L.: in crevices in limestone boul-
ders at base of chff, 541-62, 598-62. Known
previously from one locality on the north
shore of Lake Athabasca (H. Raup, 1936).
This species may also be restricted to cal-
careous habitats.

PINACEAE

Juniperus conmiunis L. var. depressa Pursh

CarsweU L.: abundant on dry south-facing
limestone cliffs, 495-62.
J. horizontalis Moench (LA-S)

Carswell L.: common on dry south-facing
limestone cliffs, 496-62.
Larix laricina (DuRoi) K. Koch

Observed at Carswell Lake in muskegs
associated with Ficea mariana.
Picea glauca (Moench) Voss

Observed infrequently at Carswell Lake,
but the most abundant conifer on Beartooth
Island.
P. mariana (Mill.) B. S. P.

Observed in muskegs at Carswell Lake and
Beartooth Island, uncommon at the latter
locality.
Pinus banksiana Lamb.

Carswell L.: on a sandy ridge near lime-
stone cliff, associated with a sparse ground
flora including Vaccinium myrtilloides and
Arctostaphylos uva-ursi, 515-62. Observed
to occur in blowouts and burn regeneration
on Beartooth Island.

TYPHACEAE

Typha latifolia L. (A-NS)

Carswell L.: emergent aquatic on lake
shore, 622-62.

NAJADACEAE

Potaniogeton filijormis Pers. var. borealis

(Raf.) St. John (A-NS)

Carswell L.: aquatic in lake, water 2 to 3
feet deep, sand bottom, 624-62.
P. graTnineus L.

Carswell L.: aquatic, with the above,
623-62.

GRAMINEAE

Determined or verified by Dr. W. Dore

Cala?nagrostis canadensis (Michx.) Beauv.

Carswell L.: uncommon in Picea glauca
woods, 610-62.
C. purpurascens R. Br. (LA-S)

Carswell L.: in PiTms banksiana woods on
limestone ridge, 545-62; common on dry
face of limestone cliff, 490-62.
Elymus innovatus Beal (NS)

Carswell L.: in Pinus banksiana woods on
limestone ridge, 544-62. Known previously
from Ft. Smith and Calumet in northeastern
Alberta but uncollected from western Lake
Athabasca (H. Raup, 1936). Known in
Saskatchewan from Methye Portage south-
west of Cree Lake.
Festuca saxi?nonta?ia Rydb.

Carswell L.: in Pinus banksiana woods on
limestone ridge, 480-62; sandy lake shore,
605-62; Beartooth I: in partly stabilized sand
blowout, 644-62; in burn regeneration, 642-
62; on old gravel beach, 634-62.
Poa glauca Vahl

Carswell L.: on dry south-facing limestone
cliff, 485-62; on sandy lake shore, 608-62.
Beartooth I.: common on gravel beach,
631-62, 633-62, 631-62; in partly stabihzed
sand blowout, 645-62.
P. pratensis L.

Beartooth I.: on gravel beach, 632-62.
P. interior Rydb. (LA-S)

Carswell L.: on dry south -facing limestone
cliff, 491-62. This species was not reported
by H. Raup (1936) but it was collected at
Ft. Smith by Cody (1956) and at Faraud and
Dodge Lakes by Scotter (1961). The identity
of this individual (491-62) was considered
questionable by Dr. Dore; however, he
noted, "some 'sprawly' cliff plants like this
grow into P. interior in my garden!"
Schizachne purpurascens (Torr.) Swallen

(LA-S)

Carswell L.: in Pinus banksiana woods on
sand ridge, 558-62.

CYPERACEAE

Determined or verified by Dr. F. Hermann.

144

The Canadian Field-Naturalist

Vol. 78

Car ex buxbaumia Wahl.

Carswell L.: in Carex meadow at edge of
pond, 559-62.
C. capillaris L. ssp. chlorostachys (Stevens.)

Love, et al. (C. capillaris var. elongata

Olney) (LA-S)

Carswell L.: on wet limestone cliflt near
waterfall, 517-62, 51S-62.
C. deflexa Hornem.

Beartooth I.: forms small mats in bum
regeneration on sandy soil, 638-62.
C. disperma Wahl. (LA-S)

Carswell L.: in wet Picea mariana, Salix
spp. woods on limestone ridge, 584-62.
C. eburnea Boott (LA-S)

Carswell L.: on dry south-facing limestone
cliflF, 493-62. Previously known from only
one locality on the north shore of Lake
Athabasca (H. Raup, 1936).
C. foena Bailey (LA-S)

Carswell L.: on sandy lake shore, 601-62.
Collected previously by Scotter (1961) at
Higginson Lake east of Lake Athabasca.
C. interior Bailey (NS)

Carswell L.: in Picea inariana, Larix lari-
cina muskeg, 506-62.
C. leptalea Wahl. (A-NS)

Carswell L.: with the above, 505-62; on
wet limestone cliff near waterfall, 512-62.
C. rami Boott (NS)

Carswell L.: on dry south-facing limestone
cliff, 489-62.
C. scirpoidea Wahl. (LA-S)

Carswell L.: on edge of Carex meadow,
associated with Carex buxbaumia and Anten-
naria pulcherriina, 561-62.
C. tonsa (Fern.) Bickn.

Carswell L.: in Pinus banksiana woods on
sandy limestone rubble, 461-62.
Eriophorum viridicarinatum (Engelm.) Fern.

(A-NS)

Carswell L.: in Picea mariana muskeg,
511-62.

juncaceae
Jimcus balticus Willd. var. littoralis Engelm.
Carswell L.: in Pinus banksiana woods on
sand ridge, 541-62.

liliaceae
Tofieldia glutinosa (Michx.) Pers. (NS)

Carswell L.: in wet sandy soil at edge of
Carex meadow, 536-62; in Picea tnariana
muskeg, 511-62. Rare in northern Saskat-
chewan and adjacent Alberta. Previously
known only from the Wood Buffalo Park
(H. Raup, 1935).

ORCHIDACEAE

Habenaria hyperborea (L.) R. Br. (LA-S)

Carswell L.: in Picea mariana muskeg,
512-62; in marsh at edge of pond, 615-62.

SALICACEAE

Populus balsamifera L.

Beartooth L: on submerged gravel beach,
655-62.
P. tre?mdoides Michx.

Observed at Carswell Lake growing at the
foot of limestone cliffs in association with
Pinus banksiana.
Salix bebbiana Sarg.

Carswell L.: in Pinus banksiana woods on
limestone ridge, 519-62, 520-62; in Picea
mariana muskeg, 508-62. Beartooth I.: on old
gravel beach, 628-62; on exposed gravel bar
extending out from island, 636-62. This
species occurs as shrubs 2 to 7 feet tall, on
Beartooth Island decumbent specimens were
noted. The decumbent specimen from Bear-
tooth Island {636-62) is an unusual variant of
5. bebbiana resembling material of the
variety capreifolia Fernald from the Gaspe
Peninsula, Quebec. Although considerable
variation is expected in 5. bebbiana this speci-
men with its long, elliptic to obovate leaves
(6-7 cm. long) , densely tomentose immature
leaves, prominent stipules (up to 10 mm.
long), long pistillate aments (6-7 cm. long),
and long capsules (9-11 mm. long) is alto-
gether different from any material I have
seen in western Canada.
5. Candida Fluegge ex Willd. (NS)

Carswell L.: locally common on the boggy
margin of a pond, shrubs 5-8 feet tall, 516-62,
523-62. The species is generally rare in
northern Saskatchewan.
S. myrtillijolia Anderss. (LA-S)

Carswell L.: in Picea mariana muskeg,
504-62; on wet limestone cliff near waterfall,
510-62.
S. pedicellaris Pursh (including var. hypo-

glauca Fern.)

Carswell L.: common in Picea mariana
muskeg, 503-62, 510-62, 515-62.
S. pedicellaris X S. planifolia (NS)

Carswell L.: in Picea mariana muskeg,
shrubs 1-3 feet tall, common, 498-62, 499-62,
501-62, 502-62, 501-62, 514-62, 516-62, 522-62.
This hybrid is common in muskegs in the
boreal forest of Saskatchewan where the
parental species occur in some abundance.
A paper dealing with this hybrid and its
possible connection with 5. athabascensis
Raup is in preparation.

1964

Argus: Collections From NW Saskatchewan

145

S. planifolia Pursh

Carswell L.: common in Picea ?nariana
muskeg, 4-5 feet tall, 500-62; shrub 12 feet
tall, with the preceding, 509-62. Beartooth
I.: on gravel beach, shrub 7 feet tall, 630-62.
S. scouleriana Barr.

Carswell L.: in Picea glauca woods, 611-62;
on the edge of Piniis banksiana woods and a
Picea mariana muskeg, 518-62.
S. serissima (Bailey) Fern. (LA-S)

Carswell L.: lake edge, rare, 604-62. Pre-
viously known from one locality on the
north shore of Lake Athabasca (H. Raup,
1936) . Uncommon in northern Saskatchewan.

MYRICACEAE

Myrica gale L.

Observed at Carswell Lake in a Picea
mariana, Betula glandtilosa scrub on a boggy
pond margin.

BETULACEAE

Alnus crispa (Ait.) Pursh

Carswell L.: in Pirrns banksiana woods on
limestone ridge, 410-62.
Betula glandulosa Michx.

Carswell L.: on boggy pond margin, asso-
ciated with Picea mariana, Myrica gale,
and Ledum groenlandicum, 526-62.
B. papyrifera Marsh.

Observed at Carswell Lake and on Bear-
tooth Island, uncommon.

POLYGONACEAE

Rmnex mexicanus Meisn.

Beartooth L: rare on old beach gravels,
635-62.
R. occidentalis S. Wats. (A-NS)

Carswell L.: in marsh on lake edge, 620-62.

CARYOPHYLLACEAE

Arenaria stricta Michx. ssp. dawsonensis

(Britt.) Maguire (LA-S)

Carswell L.: on a limestone scree slope
below ridge, uncommon, 530-62.
Stellaria longpipes Goldie

Beartooth L: associated with the following
species, 648-62.
S. subvestita Greene (A-NS)

Beartooth L: growing in a mat of Em-
petrum hermaphroditum in a burn regenera-
tion, with the previous species, 649-62. This
prairie and foothills species is new to the
flora of Saskatchewan. However, it does oc-
cur in the Alberta portion of Lake Athabasca
(Porsild, 1963 ) . It may be distinguished from
S. longpipes in the field by its strongly

pubescent internodes. Although in 649-62
some of the sepals have fine cilia near the
base similar to S. edivardsii (S. ciliatosepala)
Dr. Porsild (pers. corres. 1963) feels that this
material better fits his concept of S. sub-
vestita.

RANUNCULACEAE

Ane?none multiflda Poir (LA-S)

Carswell L.: in Pinus banksiana woods on
limestone ridge, 466-62, 419-62.
A. parviflora Michx. (LA-S)

Carswell L.: on wet limestone cliff near
waterfall, 568-62. Previously known in
Saskatchewan from Tyrrell's collection from
the "north shore of Lake Athabasca" (Tyr-
rell and Dowling, 1896) .
Aquilegia brevistyla Hook. (LA-S)

Carswell L.: at base of limestone boulder
in Pinus banksiana woods, rare, 543-62.
Caltha palustris L. (NS)

Carswell L.: in marsh on lake edge, 619-62.
This collection represents a locality inter-
mediate between Calumet, Athabasca River,
Alberta and Great Slave Lake (H. Raup,
1936).
Ranunculus aquatilis L. var. capillaceus

(Thuill.) DC. (A-NS)

Carswell L.: lake aquatic in water 2-3 feet
deep, sand bottom, 621-62.

CRUCIFERAE

Arabis holboellii Hornem. var. retrofracta

(Graham) Rydb. (LA-S)

Carswell L.: in Pinus banksiana woods on
limestone ridge, 416-62; on limestone scree
slope, 532-62.
A. lyrata L.

Carswell L.: in Pinus banksiana woods on
limestone ridge, 475-62; in Pinus banksiana
woods on limestone rubble at base of cliff,
464-62, 595-62.
Barbarea orthoceras Ledeb.

Beartooth I.: on gravel beach at edge of
water, uncommon, 654-62.
Draba cinerea Adams (LA-S)

Carswell L.: on dry south-facing limestone
cUff, 492-62; in limestone rubble at base of
cliff, 596-62. Apparently confined to cal-
careous habitats in northern Saskatchewan
(H. Raup, 1936).

DROSERACEAE

Drosera rotundifolia L.

Carswell L.: on wet sandy soil at edge of
Carex meadow, associated with Selaginella

146

The Canadian Field-Naturalist

Vol. 78

selctginoides, Tofieldia glutinosa, and Cla-
donia coccifera, 537-62.

saxifragaceae
Mitella nuda L. (LA-S)

Carswell L.: in Ficea mariana, Salix spp.
woods in wet drainage area on limestone
ridge, 563-62.
Ribes glandulosum Grauer

Beartooth I.: on old gravel beach, 629-62.
Saxifraga tricuspidata Rottb.

Carswell L.: in Finus banksiana woods on
limestone ridge, 473-62; on dry south-facing
limestone cliff, 483-62.

rosaceae

Amelanchier alnifolia (Nutt.) Nutt.

Carswell L.: in rubble at base of limestone
cliff, S 94-62.
Dryas drimmiondii Richards. (LA-S)

Carswell L.: on wet limestone cliff near
waterfall, locally abundant, 561-62. Ap-
parently confined to limestone or dolomitic
rocks in northern Saskatchewan (H. Raup,
1936).
Fragaria virginiana Duch. ssp. glauca (Wats.)

Staudt (LA-S)

Carswell L.: in Finus banksiana woods on
limestone ridge, common, 411-62.
Fotentilla fruticosa L. (NS)

Carswell L.: on boggy lake shore, 525-62.
Not previously known from northern Sas-
katchewan, but reported by Raup (1936)
from Ft. Smith, Alberta.
P. norvegica L.

Carswell L.: in marsh at lake edge, 616-62.
Beartooth I.: on gravel beach at edge of
water, 656-62.
F. palustris (L.) Scop.

Carswell L.: in marsh at lake edge, asso-
ciated with Caltha palustris and Cicuta
mackenzieana, 611-62.
P. pensylvanica L. (LA-S)

Carswell L.: on dry south-facing lime-
stone cliff, 488-62.
Frunus pensylvanica L. f.

Beartooth L: in Ficea glauca burn regener-
ation, 650-62; on old gravel beach, 652-62.
F. virginiana L. (NS)

Carswell L.: in limestone rubble at base
of cUff, 593-62. Apparently a significant
northward extension of the Saskatchewan
range of this southern boreal forest— prairie
species.
Rosa acicularis Lindl. > ;' ' • "•

Carswell L.: in Fimis banksiana woods on
limestone cliff, 521-62. ,

Rubus idaeus L. var. canadensis Richards.

Beartooth L: on an old gravel beach ridge,
651-62.
Sorbus scopulina Greene

Beartooth L: on old gravel beach ridge,
uncommon, 653-62.

empetraceae
Empetrum hennaphrodituTn (Lge.) Hagerup
Beartooth L: forming large mats in sand
blowouts, common, 643-62.

elaeagnaceae

Shepherdia canadensis (L.) Nutt. (LA-S)

Carswell L.: in Finus banksiana woods on
limestone ridge, 468-62.

halagoridaceae
Hippuris vulgaris L.

Carswell L.: emergent aquatic on lake
shore, 625-62.

umbelliferae
Cicuta mackenzieana Raup
Carswell L.: in marsh on lake edge, 613-62.

cornaceae
Cornus alba L. ssp. stolonifera (Michx.)

Wangerin (LA-S)

Carswell L.: in limestone rubble at base of
cliff, 592-62. Previously known in northern
Saskatchewan from one locality on the north
shore of Lake Athabasca (H. Raup, 1936).

pyrolaceae
Fyrola asarifolia Michx. var. purpurea

(Bunge) Fern.

Carswell L.: on boggy edge of pond, asso-
ciated with Betula glandiilosa and Salix
Candida, 526-62 A.

ERICACEAE

Arctostaphylos uva-ursi (L.) Spreng.

Observed in Finus banksiana woods at
Carswell Lake.
Ledum groenlandicum Oeder

Observed at Carswell Lake in Ficea
mariana muskeg and on Beartooth Island in
Ficea glauca burn regeneration.
Vaccinium ?nyrtilloides Michx.

Observed in Finus bafiksiana woods at
Carswell Lake.

PRIMULACEAE

Androsace septentrionalis L. (LA-S)

Carswell L.: on dry south-facing limestone
cliff, 481-62. Previously known from one
locality on the north shore of Lake Atha-
basca (H. Raup, 1936).

1964

Argus: Collections From NW Saskatchewan

147

Moldavica parviflora (Nutt.) Britt. (LA-S)
Carswell L.: on limestone scree slope,
531-62. Previously known in northern Sas-
katchewan from one locality on the north
shore of Lake Athabasca, as Dracocephalum
parvifloru?n Nutt. (H. Raup, 1936).
Scutellaria galericulata L. (A-NS)

Carswell L.: in marsh on lake edge, 614-62.

SCROPHULARIACEAE

Melampyrum lineare Desv.

Carswell L.: on wet sandy soil at edge of
Carex meadow, 535-62.

RUBIACEAE

Galium septentrionale R. & S. (G. boreale of

authors) (A-NS)

Carswell L.: on dry south-facing slope of
limestone cliff, 494-62.

CAPRIFOLIACEAE

Lonicera dioica L. var. glaucescens (Rydb.)
Butters. (LA-S)
Carswell L.: on limestone outcrop, 527-62.

CAMPANULACEAE

Campanula rotundifolia L.

Carswell L.: in Pinus banksiana woods on
limestone ridge, common, 414-62.

LOBELIACEAE

Lobelia dortmanna L. (NS)

Carswell L.: emergent aquatic in sand on
lake edge, water 2-3 feet deep, only basal
leaves collected in 1962, 626-62. The identity
of this vegetative collection was later veri-
fied by collections made in 1963 at Little
GuU Lake, about 30 miles northward. This
collection represents the second report of
this principally eastern species in Saskat-
chewan, the other is from Windrum Lake,
appr. lat. 56° 02' N., long. 104° (Breitung,
1957).

COMPOSITAE

Determined or verified by Dr. A. Cronquist.
Achillea millifolium L. var. nigrescens Meyer

(A-NS)

Carswell L.: in Pinus banksiana woods on
limestone ridge, 411-62, 528-62.
Antennaria pulcherrima (Hook.) Greene

(NS)

Carswell L.: at edge of Carex meadow,
560-62. This record fills a gap in the distribu-
tion of this species between Wood Buffalo
Park (H. Raup, 1935) and McKague, Sas-
katchewan (Breitung, 1957).
A. rosea (D. C. Eaton) Greene (LA-S)

Carswell L.: in Pirms banksiana woods on
limestone ridge, 469-62.
Artemisia campestris L. ssp. borealis (Pall.)

Hall & Clements

Carswell L.: on dry south-facing limestone
cliff, 491-62.
Aster juncifortnis Rydb. (A-NS)

Carswell L.: on wet limestone cliff near
waterfall, 569-62; on wet sand at edge of
Carex meadow, 534-62.
Erigeron compositus Pursh var. discoideus

Gray (£. trifidus Hook.) (NS)

Carswell L.: on dry south-facing limestone
cliff, uncommon, 486-62. This represents a
southward extension of this taxon from
Great Slave Lake (H. Raup, 1936).
E. glabellus Nutt. (NS)

Carswell L.: in Pinus banksiana woods on
limestone ridge, 418-62. Apparently the only
record of this species between Rocky Lake,
Manitoba, 70 miles north of The Pas (Scog-
gan, 1957) and Wood Buffalo Park, Alberta
(H. Raup, 1935).
E. hyssopifolius Michx.

Carswell L.: on limestone outcrop, 529-62.
Petasites frigidus (L.) Fries var. palmatus

(Ait.) Cronq.

Carswell L.: in Picea mariana, Salix spp.
woods in Avet drainage area on limestone
ridge, 565-62.
P. sagittatus (Pursh) Gray (LA-S)

Carswell L.: with the preceding, 562-62.
Senecio streptanthifolius Greene (LA-S)

Carswell L.: in Pimis banksiana woods on
sandy limestone rubble, 465-62; in similar
woods on limestone ridge, 412-62.
Solidago hispida Muhl. (NS)

Carswell L.: on limestone scree slope, un-
common, 533-62. A northern extension of
the range of this principally southern species.

Musci

Genera arranged in alphabetical order.
Identified by Dr. H. Crum.
Abietinella abietina (Hedw.) Fleisch. -• Pinus banksiana, Populus tremuloides woods,

Carswell L.: on limestone boulders in 581-62A, 589-62.

148

The Canadian Field-Naturalist

Vol. 78

Aniblystigiella spriicei (Bruch) Loeske {A.

jungermannioides (Brid.) Giac.) (NS)

Carswell L.: with the preceding, 584-62.
New to the flora of Saskatchewan.
Brachythecium salebrosiim (Web. & Mohr)

B.S.G. (NS)

Carswell L.: with the preceding, 581-62.
Not previously known in Saskatchewan
north of latitude 56° (Conard, 1957).
Bry oerythrophy Hum recurvirostrum

(Hedw.) Chen (NS)

Carswell L.: with the preceding, 586-62.
Not previously known in Saskatchewan
north of latitude 56° (Conard, 1957).
Bryuni lacustre Bland (NS)

Beartooth I.: in wet clay slump below
Picea ?nariana muskeg, 651-62. New to the
flora of Saskatchewan.
B. pseudotriquetriim (Hedw.) Schwaegr.

(NS)

Carswell L.: on wet limestone cliff near
waterfall, 51 4-62 A. Not previously known
in Saskatchewan north of latitude 55°
(Conard, 1957).
Coffipylium stellatum (Hedw.) Jens. (NS)

Carswell L.: with the preceding, 51 4-62 A.
Not previously known in Saskatchewan
north of latitude 56° (Conard, 1957).
Cinclidium stygium Sw. (NS)

Carswell L.: with the preceding, 514-62B.
New to northern Saskatchewan.
Dicranum rugonmi Brid.

Carswell L.: on limestone boulders in
Pinus banksiana, Populus tremuloides woods,
5 80-62 A.
Distichium capillaceum (Hedw.) B.S.G.

Carswell L.: with the preceding, 511-62.
Ditrichum flexicaule (Schwaegr.) Hampe

(NS)

Carswell L.: with the preceding, 581-62,
5 88 -62 A. New to the flora of Saskatchewan.
Encalypta procera Bruch (NS)

Carswell L.: with the preceding, 581-62,
584-62. New to the flora of Saskatchewan.
E. vulgaris Hedw. (NS)

Carswell L.: with the preceding, 511-62.
New to the flora of Saskatchewan.
Grin?fma apocarpa Hedw. var. siricta

(Turn.) Hook. & Tayl. (NS)

Carswell L.: with the preceding, 588-62B.
New to the flora of Saskatchewan.
Hypmim cupressijonne Hedw. (NS)

Carswell L.: with the preceding, 516-62,
581-62B, 583-62, 612-62. Not previously
known in Saskatchewan north of latitude
56° (Conard, 1957).
H. fastigiatum Brid. (NS)

Carswell L.: with the preceding, 581-62.
New to the flora of Saskatchewan.
Neckera pennata Hedw.

Carswell L.: with the preceding, 518-62.
Orthotrichimi ctnomalwu Hedw.

Carswell L.: with the preceding, 579-62.
Pleuroziimi schreberi (Brid.) Mitt.

Carswell L.: with the preceding, 580-62B;
in wet Picea mariana, Salix spp. woods on
limestone ridge, 566-62.
Rhytidium rugosimt (Hedw.) Kindb. (NS)

Carswell L.: on limestone boulders in
Pinus banksiana, Populus tremuloides woods,
589-62. New to the flora of Saskatchewan.
Tortella tortuosa (Hedw.) Limpr. (NS)

Carswell L.: with the preceding, 585-62.
New to the flora of Saskatchewan.
Tortilla ruralis (Hedw.) Crome (NS)

Carswell L.: with the preceding, 581-62B.
New to the flora of Saskatchewan.

Lichenes

Genera arranged in alphabetical order.
Identified by Dr. M. Hale and by Dr. J. W. Thompson.

Caloplaca elegans (Link.) Th. Fr.
Carswell L.: on dry south-facing lime-
stone cliff, 603-62A, 603-62C, 603-62D;
with Physcia sciastra, 603-62B.

Candelariella vitellina (Ehrh.) Miill. Arg.
Beartooth I.: on beach cobbles, 647-62E.

Cladonia cemaurocrea (Flk.) Schaer.

Carswell L.: on limestone boulder in Pinus
banksiana, Populus tremuloides woods,
582-62.

C. coccifera (L.) Willd.
Carswell L.: in wet sandy soil at edge of
Carex meadow, 539-62.

Dermatocarpon miniatimi (L.) Mann.

(A-NS)
Carswell L.: on dry south-facing lime-
stone cliff, 600-62.
New to the flora of Saskatchewan.

Lecanora melanophthahna (DC.) Ram. (NS)
Beartooth I.: on beach cobbles, with Leca-
nora polytropa, Rhizocarpon disporum, R.
geographicum, and Umbilicaria byper-
borea, 641-62B.
New to the flora of Saskatchewan.

Lecanora polytropa (Ehrh.) Rabenh. (NS)
Beartooth I.: on beach cobbles, with Leca-

1964

Argus: Collections From NW Saskatchewan

149

nora melanophthalma, Rhizocarpon dis-
porum, R. geographicimi, and Umbilicaria
hyperborea, 641-62B.
New to the flora of Saskatchewan.
Lecidea rubiformis Wahl. (NS)
Carswell L.: on dry south -facing limestone
cliff, 599-62.
New to the flora of Saskatchewan.
Parmelia centrifuga (L.) Ach.

Beartooth I.: on beach cobbles, 641-62D.
P. conspersa (Ach.) Ach. (A-NS)
Beartooth I.: on beach cobbles, 641-62].
New to the flora of Saskatchewan.
P. lineola Berry (NS)
Beartooth I.: on beach cobbles, 641-62K.
New to the flora of Saskatchewan.
Physcia muscigena (Ach.) Nyl. (NS)

Carswell L.: on dry south-facing limestone
cUfF, 601-62.
New to the flora of Saskatchewan.
P. sciastra (Ach.) Du Rietz (NS)
Carswell L.: on limestone cliffy, with Calo-
placa elegans, 603-62B.
New to the flora of Saskatchewan.

Ranmlimt intermedia Nyl. (NS)
Beartooth I.: on beach cobbles, 647-62F.
New to the flora of Saskatchewan.

Rhizocarpon disporimi (Naeg.) Miill. Arg.

(NS)
Beartooth I.: on beach cobbles, with
Rhizocarpon geographicum, Lecanora
melanophthalma, L. polytropa, and Um-
bilicaria hyperborea, 641-62B.
New to the flora of Saskatchewan.

R. geographicimi (L.) DC. (NS)

Beartooth I.: with the preceding and assoc-
ciated with the same species, 641-62B.
New to the flora of Saskatchewan.

R. obscuratum (Ach.) Mass.

Beartooth I.: on beach cobbles, 641-62C.

Umbilicaria hyperborea (Ach.) Hoffm.
Beartooth I.: on beach cobbles, with Leca-
nora ?}telanophthal?na, L. polytropa, Rhizo-
carpon disporum, and R. geographicu?n,
641-62B.

Xanthoria candelaria (L.) Arn.

Beartooth I.: on beach cobbles, 641-62G.

References

Alcock, F. J. 1936. Geology of Lake Atha-
basca region, Saskatchewan. Geological
Survey of Canada Memoir 196.

Blake, D. A. 1956. Geological notes on
the region south of Lake Athabasca and
Black Lake, Saskatchewan and Alberta.
Geological Survey of Canada Paper 55-33.

Breitung, a. J. 1957. Annotated catalogue
of the vascular flora of Saskatchewan.
American Midland Naturalist 58:1-72.

Cody, W. J. 1956. New plant records for
northern Alberta and southern Mackenzie.
Canadian Field-Naturalist 70:101-130.

CoNARD, H. 1957. Bryophytes of Saskat-
chewan, Bryologist 60:338-343.

Nero, R. 1963. Birds of the Lake Athabasca
region, Saskatchewan. Saskatchewan Na-
tural History Society, Regina. Special
Publication 5.

PoRsiLD, A. E. 1963. Stellaria longipes
Goldie and its allies in North America.
National Museum of Canada Bulletin
186:1-35.

Raup, H. M. 1935. Botanical investigations
in the Wood Buffalo Park. National
Museum of Canada Bulletin 74:1-174.

. 1936. Phytogeographic studies

in the Athabasca - Great Slave Lake re-
gion. I. Catalogue of the vascular plants.
Journal of the Arnold Arboretum 17:
180-315.

-. 1946. Phytogeographic studies

in the Athabaska - Great Slave Lake re-
gion. IL Journal Arnold Arboretum 27:
1-85.

Raup, L. C. 1928. A list of the lichens of
the Athabaska Lake region of northwestern
Canada. Bryologist 31:83-85, 100-104.

. 1930. Lichens of the Shelter

Point region, Athabasca Lake. Bryologist
33:57-66.

ScoTTER, G. W. 1961. Botanical collections
in the Black Lake region of northern
Saskatchewan, 1960. Blue Jay 19:28-33.

Thompson, J. W. and G. W. Scotter. 1961.
Lichens of northern Saskatchewan. Bryol-
ogist 64:240-247.

Tyrrell, J. B. and D. B. Dowling. 1896.
Report on the country between Athabasca
Lake and Churchill River, etc. Geological
Survey of Canada Annual Report for 1894,
vol. 8, pt. D.

Received for publication 10 October 1963

SOME INTERESTING PLANT RECORDS FROM THE
CHALK RIVER DISTRICT, ONTARIO*

T, C. Brayshaw

Forest Research Branch, Forest Experiment Station, Chalk River, Ontario

While collecting in the Chalk River area during the past few years, the
author has found several species growing beyond their previously known range
limits. Some of these are obviously recent arrivals which have followed
railways or roads into the district, but others are undoubtedly naturally
occurring species that hitherto have gone unrecorded.

The following species are considered worthy of note and are treated in
detail below:

Isoetes macrospora Dur.

Dryopteris fragrans (L.) Schott var. remot'msciila Komarov

Junipenis virginiana L. var. crebra Fern. & Griscom

Najas gracillima (A. Br.) Adagnus

Butoinus umbellatics L.

Fanicwn virgatum L.

Epipactis Helleborine (L.) Crantz

Thalictrimi venidosimt Trel.

Saxifraga Aizoon Jacq. var. fieoqaea Butters

Fotentilla Hippiana Lehm.

P. gracilis Dougl. var. pulcherrima (Lehm.) Fern.

P. rivdis Nutt. var. millegrana (Engelm.) S. Wats.

Rhus aromatica Ait.

Cephalanthus occidentalis L.

In citing herbarium specimens, the herbaria in which they are located are
indicated by their codes, as follows:

CAN National Museum of Canada, Ottawa.

DAO Plant Research Institute, Central Experimental Farm, Ottawa.

PFES Petawawa Forest Experiment Station, Chalk River, Ontario.

TRT Department of Botany, University of Toronto, Toronto, Ont.

The area within which most of these records occur is indicated in Figure 1 .
Figures 2 and 3 show the distributions of two species; in these maps, solid spots
indicate the sites of collections and open circles sight reports only.

Isoetes macrospora Dur. Chalk River. It occurs in water with a silty

This species of quillwort is distinguished bottom, in company with 7. riparia and /.

from the locally common Isoetes riparia nmricata Dur. It probably would not have

Engelm. by its larger megaspores (0.6-0.8 mm been found but for the fact that at the time

diameter) with low-crested reticulate ridges of collection, the river level, lower than at

and its short, broadly deltoid ligule. It has any time in the past fifty years, permitted the

been found at only one locality in the dis- discovery of plants that are normally

trict: King Point on the Ottawa River near covered by several feet of water.

'Department of Forestry, Canada, Forest Research Branch Contribution No. 629

150

1964

Brayshaw: Plant Records From Chalk River

151

Figure 1. Map of the Chalk River district (top).
Figure 2. Distribution of Dryopteris fragrans var. remotiuscula in the Chalk River

district (bottom, left).
Figure 3. Distribution of Cephalanthus occidentalis in the Chalk River District
(bottom, right).

In Canada, /. macrospora is widely distri- in the eastern Clay Belt region of Quebec
buted along the Atlantic seaboard, in Que- indicate. It is also known from inland re-
bec, the Maritime Provinces and Newfound- gions of the eastern United States. So far as
land; but it is occasionally present further the writer is aware, this is the first record of
inland, as records from Amos and Senneterre the species in Ontario. However, its pre-

152

The Canadian Field-Naturalist

Vol. 78

sently known distribution suggests that it
may be found in other parts of the province.

Specimen 4^70 has been examined by Dr.
B. Boivin of the Plant Research Institute,
Ottawa, who has confirmed the identity.
Specimen 4425 is similar, but with the im-
mature megaspores only 0.5-0.6 mm in di-
ameter.

Specimens: King Point, Chalk River,
Ontario, 2 September 1962, Brayshaw (PFES
4470); King Point, August 1962, Brayshaw
(PFES 4425).

Dryopteris fragrans (L.) Schott var. reino-

tiuscula Komarov

This arctic and subarctic fern, known
from a number of points on the north shore
of Lake Superior, the Gulf of St. Lawrence
and further north, has been collected at two
localities and sighted at two others in this
district. All the plants found so far are in
the valley of the Barron River (see Figure
2) growing on vertical or near-vertical
north-facing cliffs overlooking water. These
are naturally cool habitats, seldom if ever
receiving direct sunlight. It may or may not
be significant with regard to the palatability
of this species to deer that all plants found
are above a conspicuous browse-line that
follows the shores here.

The local occurrence of this fern is no
doubt a function both of its ecological re-
quirements and of the history of the area.
The Barron River, at present a clear stream
with a small flow volume, runs for several
miles through a series of gorges cut into the
Precambrian Shield to a maximum depth of
about 400 feet, with long deep still reaches
through the depths of the gorges. In its
present form this river is obviously incapable
of eroding such a formation. This fact, to-
gether with the disjunct occurrences of at
least two plants of generally more northern
distribution (see also under Saxifraga Ai-
zoon), suggests that possibly in the late Plei-
stocene Epoch (while the ice still covered
the Ottawa and Petawawa River valleys to
the north) the Barron carried the main dis-
charge of water from the land to the west,
and possibly even from the upper Great
Lakes.

In addition to the two collections cited
belo^v, the species has been observed w^ithout
collection at two points in the Barron River
Caiion (the deepest part of the series of
gorges, just above the point where the river

leaves Algonquin Park). One of these sites
is close to the station for Saxifraga Aizoon.
Specimens: S bank of Barron R., 2 miles E
of Barron River road, 13 October 1961, Bray-
shaw (PFES 3909); S shore of Carcajou Bay,
Achray, Algonquin Park (with isolated
colony of Alnus crispa), 7 July 1962, Bray-
shaw (PFES 41 S7).

Juniperus virginiana L. var crebra Fern. &

Griscom

The previously known northern limit of
red juniper in this part of the country was
at Deacon, near Killaloe, in the Bonnechere
Valley. However, it has recently been found
at two localities near Chalk River.

On ledges on the vertical south-facing
cliffs of Oiseau Rock overlooking the Ot-
tawa River, several trees (some with fruit)
up to 25 feet tall have been found. This site
is an isolated, warm, dry, sunny habitat,
where the trees obviously form a permanent
stand. However, the second locality is in a
red pine plantation on the Petawawa Forest
Experiment Station, where the junipers must
have arrived fairly recently. One of the two
very stunted bushes found there showed
clear signs of having been repeatedly
browsed; although the plant was only some
two feet high, a low branch from it was
found to be 10 years old. The plants pro-
bably originated from seeds carried by birds
from the Oiseau Rock stand, five miles ENE
of this site.

Specimens: Oiseau Rock, Chalk River, 18
July 1961, Bravshaw and Van Wagner
(PFES 3486; duplicate in TRT) . Two miles
E of Chalk River, 1 November 1961, Mayo
& Brayshaw (PES 3745).

Najas gracillima (A. Br.) Magnus

Though this species is reported from much
of the eastern United States, in Canada it
has previously been collected only in Nova
Scotia. Its discovery near Chalk River is, so
far as the author is aware, the first record
for Ontario.

It is present in two rivers, the Barron and
Chalk, and also in Corry Lake (on the Chalk
River). In these waters it is not uncommon,
occurring mixed with the more widely dis-
tributed N. flexilis (Willd.) Rostk. and
Schmidt. N. gracillrina can be distinguished
from N. flexilis at sight by its more diffuse
appearance, caused largely by its significantly
narrower and more thread-like leaves. The

1964

Brayshaw: Plant Records From Chalk River

153

wider leaves of N. flexilis produce an overall
greener, denser foliage which hides objects
beyond it; whereas such objects are generally
visible through a plant of N. gracillima.

Specimens: The Canadian records of N.
gracillima known to the author are as fol-
lows: NOVA SCOTIA: Charlotte Lake,
Queens Co., 16 August 1954, E. C. Smith
et al. 1234S (CAN); Cameron Lake, Hants
Co., 18 August 1954, E. C. Smith et al. 12500
(CAN); ONTARIO: Corry Lake, Chalk
River, 5 September 1958; Brayshaw (PFES
213); same locality, 30 August 1962, Bray-
shaw (PFES 4466) ; Chalk R. above Corry L.,
3 September 1962, Brayshaw (PFES 4418,
specimen now in DAO) ; Barron River at
Brigham Chute, Algonquin Park, 8 Septem-
ber 1962, Brayshaw (PFES 4491).

Butornus umbellatiis L.

The flowering rush, a European marsh
plant first established near Montreal, has
now extended its range up the Ottawa River
as far as Pembroke. It was first seen there
by the author in 1958, but was not collected
until 1962. It grows on a marshy shore at the
mouth of Indian River, accompanied by
Spargamum eurycarpunm, Scirpits fluviatilis
and Iris pseudacorus.

Specimen: Pembroke, 14 July 1962, Bray-
shaw (PFES 4331).

Epipactis Helleborine (L.) Crantz

This, the only European orchid to become
established wild in this country, has recently
been found in the district. In 1961 it was
found in an old clearing a mile south of the
Forest Experiment Station Headquarters.

Specimen: Chalk River, Petawawa Forest
Experiment Station, 29 August 1961, Bray
shaw (PFES 3519).

Fanicuni virgatuTn L.

Known from the St. Lawrence Valley and
Great Lakes region in southern Ontario, this
grass has recently arrived in the Chalk River
district by rail. It was found on the embank-
ment of the Canadian Pacific Railway some
three miles SE of Chalk River. So far as it
is known to the author, this is its first re-
corded appearance in the Ottawa Valley.

Specimen: Chalk River, 29 August 1961,
Brayshaw (PFES 3604).

Thalictrum venulosum Trel.

This subarctic and prairie meadow-rue has
not previously been reported from the

southern half of Ontario. It has established
itself in a small but spreading colony on the
railway embankment not far from the above-
mentioned site for Fanicum virgatum and
undoubtedly has entered the district by the
same means.

Specimen: Chalk River, 16 August 1961,
Brayshaw (PFES 4506).

Saxifraga Aizoon Jacq. var. neogaea Butters
The presence of this unexpected saxifrage
in the district was first drawn to the author's
attention by the late Dr. A. M. Moore of
Deep River. A calciphilous plant of arctic
distribution, 5. Aizoon grows in this area in
two small colonies on near-vertical north-
facing cliffs in the gorge of the Barron River
in Algonquin Park. The rocks are non-
calcareous, but the presence of a white limy
surface deposit on south-facing cliffs farther
down the gorge suggests that lime-bearing
seepage-water must be the source of calcium
for these plants. Dryopteris fragrans has
been seen close to one of the colonies of
this saxifrage.

Specimen: S. bank of Barron River canon,
Algonquin Park, 2 July 1962, Bravshaw
(PFES 4139) .

Potentilla Hippiana Lehm. and P. gracilis
Dougl. var. pulcherrima (Lehm.) Fern.
Both these species are native to the Great
Plains region from Minnesota westward
{P. Hippiana is also known from northern
Michigan). Both have been found by Mrs.
M. I. Moore, growing within a few yards of
each other in an old pasture south of Deep
River. Their locality suggests introduction
in imported hay. This probably occurred
many years ago, since the pasture is now
largely overgrown with bush and does not
appear to have been in regular use for a long
time.

Specimen: P. Hippiafia: Wylie Road,
Deep River, M. I. Moore (PFES 3600);
P. gracilis var. pulcherrii?ia: Wylie Road,
Deep River, M. I. Moore (PFES 3601).

Potentilla rivalis Nutt. var. millegrana

(Engelm.) S. Wats.

The finding of this species in the forest
here marks a considerable eastward exten-
sion of its known range, since it has not pre-
viously been recorded east of Sauk Ste.
Marie.

Specimen: Maunsell Lake, Chalk River, 16
July 1957, Brayshaw (PFES 2138) .

154

The Canadian Field-Naturalist

Vol. 78

Rhus arojnatica Ait.

This low shrub which is distributed
around the shores of the Great Lakes and
along the southern fringe of the Canadian
Shield, with an isolated population in the
Ottawa district, has not previously been
recorded from further up the Ottawa Valley
than Pontiac Station, 30 miles west of Hull.
It is present at the First Chute on the Barron
River at the southern boundary of the
Petawawa Forest Experiment Station. Only
one small clump has been found at this
locality, but Mrs. M. I. Moore has recently
shown the writer a specimen collected on
Oiseau Rock.

Specimen: Barron River at First Chute,
Petawawa Forest Experiment Station, 3
September 1961, Brayshaw (PFES 55/5;
duplicate in TRT).

Cephalanthus occidentalis L.

Already known from the Barron River,
this marsh-inhabiting shrub has been found
at several points in the valley of the Peta-
wawa River which joins the Barron in Lac

du Bois Dur near Petawawa. In addition to
the points on the Petawawa River, button-
bush has been found at a few places around
the shore of Carrier Lake and along Carrier
Creek, the highest and northernmost locality
so far being on the creek just below the out-
let of Moosegrove Lake, half a mile above
the head of Carrier Lake. This point is about
eight miles north of the previously recorded
station on the Barron River (see Figure 3).
It should be looked for along the upper
reaches of the Petawawa River.

Dr. D. A. Fraser of this Station informs me
that he recently saw, but did not collect, a
plant on an island in the eastern end of
Sturgeon (Chalk) Lake, about five miles ESE
of Chalk River village.

Specimens: Petawawa River below Half-
mile Rapid, 2 September 1961, Brayshaw
(PFES 3611); rocky island in Carrier Lake,
6 October 1960, Brayshaw (PFES 3205);
Carrier Creek below Moosegrove Lake,
Petawawa Forest Experiment Station, 20
October 1962, Brayshaw (PFES 4509) .

Received for publication 17 October 1963

NOTES ON THE AMPHIBIANS OF BROWNS FLAT AREA,

NEW BRUNSWICK

Stanley W. Gorham
National Museum of Canada, Ottawa, Ontario

The following notes, most of which were made during the years 1948-1953,
deal with the amphibians of the Browns Flat area, Kings County, New Bruns-
wick, The Browns Flat area here defined (Figure 1 ) includes the village itself
and the area for 10 miles along the western shores of the Saint John River
from Victoria Creek, near Greenwich Hill, northeast to the most northeasterly
part of Oak Point village. The average width of this area, between the river
and the Kings-Queens County line, is two to four miles. The area is about
1 5 miles due north of the city of Saint John.

The Browns Flat area is a rather hilly and rolling region of the southern
Saint John River valley. The greater portion of the cleared land is within a
mile of the river; the remainder of the area has a heavy softwood growth with
a hardwood growth on the ridges. The greatest elevation is Mount Serjeant
(1000 feet), three miles northwest of Browns Flat village.

1964

GoRHAM: Amphibians of Browns Flat

155

ONE MILE
HISHW«y

SEcoNDflRV Roads

RAILROAD

Figure 1. Map of Browns Flat Area

There are three main drainage systems in this area emptying into the Saint
John River: Devils Back Brook at Victoria Creek, near Greenwich Hill
village; Jones Creek Brook at Jones Creek, near Central Greenwich village;
Flaglor Brook at Marley Creek, approximately one-half mile southwest of Oak
Point. There are also numerous smaller spring-fed brooks which empty
directly into the Saint John River. There are six lakes in the area and many

156 The Canadian Field-Naturalist Vol. 78

ponds, bogs and swamps. Clark Lake, three-quarters of a mile in length, is the
largest lake. The ice is generally out of the lakes by the last week of April
but it may be out as early as April 10, or as late as May 5.

The greatest width of the Saint John River within this area is about one
and one-half miles. There are five islands: Catons Island, near Browns Flat and
Glenwood, is about one mile in length and mainly wooded; Rocky Island and
Isle of Pines, opposite Glenwood and Central Greenwich, are connected by
intervale land but are in themselves mainly wooded; Rush Island, one-quarter
mile south of Oak Point, is a low grassy island which is underwater during the
spring freshet; Grassy Island, opposite Oak Point village, is approximately
three-quarters of a mile in length and is a low grassy island which is usually
covered by water during the spring freshet. The river level raises as high as
twelve to fifteen feet during April and May.

My interest in amphibians has always been keen but it was Mr. W. Austin
Squires, Curator of Natural Science Department, New Brunswick Museum,
who impressed upon me the importance of keeping notes in regard to early
spring appearance of amphibians. Mr. Squires also supplied me with a manu-
script checklist of the amphibians (also reptiles, birds and mammals) of New
Brunswick. From 1953 to 1957 Dr. J. Sherman Bleakney, Curator of Herpet-
ology, National Museum of Canada was always willing to help me with my
queries regarding the amphibians of New Brunswick. Mr. Francis R. Cook,
the present Curator of Herpetology at the National Museum of Canada, has
helped me in every way possible with my inquiries regarding New Brunswick
amphibians. Through the courtesy of Dr. W. B. Scott I was allowed to
examine the New Brunswick amphibian specimens in the collection of the
Royal Ontario Museum, Toronto.

Ambysto?na viaculatimi, Spotted Salaman- New Brunswick material formerly referred

DER (local name — ^yellow-spotted lizard) to Amby stoma je-ffersonianimi in the Na-

This species was most commonly seen tional Museum of Canada has been identi-

during the spring when the adults travelled fled as Ambystoma laterale by Thomas M.

to the breeding ponds and ditches. The Uzzell, Jr. This species was found in the

roadside ditches along both the main and spring in a similar habitat as the, Spotted

secondary roads, railway ditches and mead- Salamander but sometimes frequented shal-

ow and woodland ponds were very good lower ditches. A good collecting spot in

spots to observe the Spotted Salamander at early April was at Oak Point in a roadside

that time of year. On an early morning ditch where the main highway crosses the

(April 1950) after a night's rain and over a railway track, another was the railway ditch

distance of one mile of main highway, I near Grandview station at Browns Flat,

counted twenty Spotted Salamanders which Whether this species was as plentiful as

had been killed by automobiles. My notes the Spotted Salamander I cannot say; how-

for the first spring appearance are April 3, ever, over a mile of road during the April

1948; April 4, 1949; April 5, 1950; April 3, morning when twenty dead Spotted Sala-

1951. In the fall I have seen Spotted Sala- manders were picked up, I could not find a

manders on several occasions under logs, but single Blue -spotted Salamander. One of the

never in ponds, as late as October 19, 1950 earliest appearance dates was April 9, 1953.

and October 11, 1951. Other dates are from April 15 to the end

of April. During the summer months I have

Avibystofna laterale, Blue-spotted Salaman- taken Blue-spotted Salamanders under wood

DER (local names — blue-spotted lizard, piles. November 5, 1950 is the latest record

black lizard, big lizard) I have and this was a half-grown specimen.

1964

Gorham: Amphibians of Browns Flat

157

Notophthalmus viridescens, Red-spotted
Nevtt (local names — red lizard, green
lizard, trout lizard)

The adults of this species were fairly
common at Browns Flat during the latter
part of April and early May where they
could be found in muddy woodland ponds
and shallow lakes. In late April, I saw Red-
spotted Newts in the railway ditch at ap-
proximately one mile above Victoria Sta-
tion and in Galilee Lake (artificial) at
Browns Flat, also at Clark Lake in the shal-
low muddy waters near the outlet. Red-
spotted Newts could usually be observed
during the summer along the shallower
edges of Lily Lake, Browns Flat. The red
eft or immature of this species could often
be found under woodpiles or slabs of wood
during the summer. The earliest appearance
date for the red eft was May 15, 1955 when
a specimen was found in a rotted log while
I w^as looking for Red -backed Salamanders.
The latest date the Red-spotted Newt was
observed in ponds was October 20, 1951.

DesTnognathus fuscus, Dusky Salamander
(local names — spring lizard, black lizard,
brook lizard, well lizard)
This is a common salamander of wells,
springs and spring-fed brooks. I have taken
Dusky Salamanders and Two-lined Sala-
manders under the same stone only a few
inches apart. However, certain habitats
where the Two-lined Salamanders are col-
lected, for example, large permanent streams
which are not spring-fed, one is not likely
to find the Dusky Salamander. The spring
appearance of this species was May 2, 1951
and April 20, 1952. The Dusky Salamander
was most plentiful during the months of
June, July, August and early September and
was found in decreasing numbers up until
November. I have seen Dusky Salamanders
dug from the bottom of cold springs in
early December.

Eurycea bislineata, Two-lined Salamander
(local names — brook lizard, brown lizard)
This was a common salamander of the
large permanent gravelly and rock bottom
brooks and streams. They also frequented
smaller brooks which were spring-fed, I
collected Two-lined Salamanders in the
Devils Back Brook during early May. It
was very common during the months of
June and early July in the spring-fed Lindsay
Brook (too small to be included on map)
about one-third mile from Browns Flat

centre. The Two-lined Salamander was
most common in June, early July and Sep-
tember and in varying numbers during the
latter part of July, August and early
October.

Plethodon cinereus, Red-backed Salamander
(local names — red-back lizard, wood
lizard)

The Red-backed Salamander was very
common in the wooded swamps (mostly
cedar, some black spruce) during the late
spring and summer where they could be
found in partly rotted fallen trees and
stumps. On May 15, 1955, I collected them
in partly rotted logs in a cedar swamp ap-
proximately one mile north of Browns Flat
centre. In addition I have one report of
this salamander in late April 1953 when it
was found in a rotted log. During the last
week of July 1956 I took a specimen from
under a partly submerged stone in a brook
while collecting Two-lined Salamanders two
miles southwest of Browns Flat. In the
middle of August 1958, about one mile north
of Browns Flat centre, Red-backed Sala-
mander eggs were found in a partly rotted
cedar log. This salamander was not com-
monly collected after the heavy frosts of
mid-October but individuals have been
taken in early November under rotted cedar
logs in a swamp.

Biifo americcmus, American Toad (local

name — -toad)

This was probably the best known of the
amphibians in Browns Flat area. They could
be heard calling in late April, May and early
June in most roadside ditches and ponds.
The earliest calling dates were May 1, 1950
and April 30, 1951. The latest date I have
heard an American Toad calling from a
breeding pond was on July 30, 1952. On May
1, 1951, I observed an American Toad in a
small burrow where it had apparently spent
the winter. The burrow was on a bare sec-
tion of a side hill which had been covered
by snow until quite recently. The toad had
apparently picked a spot where there was
little danger of frost penetration as small
potatoes which were left in the ground
at this spot the previous fall were untouched
by frost and sprouted later. This showed
a frost penetration of not more than four
to six inches. As the weather remained quite
cool it was usually only in the afternoons
that the toad would have its head out of the
burrow getting the sun. It appeared to be a

158

The Canadian Field-Naturalist

Vol. 78

male. Each day I visited the burrow and it
was not until May 25 after a heavy rain that
the toad disappeared. I examined the bur-
row and it was about six to eight inches in
depth. On July 2, 1952, after a month's
drought, many recently transformed and
transforming American Toads were observed
on the edge of a drying pool. They were so
small that they were being picked up by
Chipping Sparrows. Adult American Toads
were observed in varying numbers until the
end of October and the first week in
November, usually under stones or rotted
logs and wood.

Hyla crucifer, Spring Peeper (local name —

peeper)

This small amphibian was very common
in the meadow and woodland ponds and
roadside ditches in the spring from the
middle of April onward. It was heard call-
ing on April 19, 1950, April 6, 1951 and
April 10, 1952. Spring Peepers were picked
up dead on the highway road on April 4,
1951 and April 7, 1952. The latest date I
have heard a Spring Peeper calling from
a breeding pond was July 12, 1951. The
chorus is usually over by late June. On
July 19, 1956, transformed and transforming
Spring Peepers were collected, some still
had their tails and had climbed up in the
bushes which bordered the edge of a pond.
In August, September and October I heard
individual Spring Peepers caUing from trees,
particularly before a shower or rainstorm.
On November 15, 1949, it was very mild
and Spring Peepers were calling occasion-
ally from trees. On October 1-18, 1950 in-
dividual Spring Peepers were heard caUing
from trees. October 22, 1950, was extremely
cold — one of the coldest days on record
for that date — with several inches of snow.
November 17, 1950, the weather was mild
and Spring Peepers were heard calling from
trees. December 12, 1950, was very mild
with a temperature of 60° F.; a single Spring
Peeper was heard calling from a bush very
low to the ground or on the ground but it
could not be located. On November 1, 1951,
the weather was cold and Spring Peepers
were not heard after that date.

Rafia sylvatica, Wood Frog (local name —

brown frog)

This frog was an early spring caller at
Browns Flat and was commonly found in
woodland ponds as well as ditches and ponds
bordering woodlands. Early spring appear-

ance was noted on April 9, 1949; April 19,
1950; April 10, 1952 and April 9, 1953.
Calling lasts until mid-May. During the
summer adults were often seen in damp
woodland areas. On November 17, 1949, a
Wood Frog was heard calling from the edge
of a pond. On November 17, 1950 a Wood
Frog was heard calling from a damp section
of an apple orchard but it could not be
located. On November 27, 1950, a Wood
Frog was heard calling and was located in
leaves under a maple tree. On December 3,
1950, it was mild and a Wood Frog was
heard calling and was located in leaves only
a short distance from the tree where the
November 27 frog was observed. This frog
was smaller than the one seen on Novem-
ber 27.

Rana pipiens, Leopard Frog (local names —

spotted frog, meadow frog)

This species was common around the end
of April and early May where they were
heard calling from ponds, ditches and along
the shores of lakes. On May 6, 1949, and
April 30, 1950, they were heard calling.
The Leopard Frog called until mid-June
although the main chorus was usually over
by the end of May. During the summer
months they are numerous in the meadow-
lands and occasionally they were seen in
this habitat until the end of October. On
October 23, 1949, a Leopard Frog was ob-
served in the water at Grassy Island in the
Saint John River opposite Oak Point.
Grassy Island is about one-third of a mile
from the nearest mainland. There is a fifteen
inch rise and fall of tide in the river at Oak
Point during the summer and early autumn,
with slightly less rise and fall of tide if the
autumn rains have been heavy. During the
summer when the river is low the water is
known to be slightly brackish, although
never to the point where it is unfit for cattle
to drink.

Rana palustris, Pickerel Frog (local name^ —

spotted frog)

During the spring this species may be
found in ponds, roadside ditches and lakes.
In the breeding season they are considerably
more plentiful in lakes than the Leopard
Frogs. I have heard Pickerel Frogs calling
in late April from ponds and roadside
ditches but the main chorus is to be
heard in May from the larger po-nds and
lakes. When Leopard Frogs and Pickerel
Frogs were calling from the same habitat

1964

Gorham: Amphibians of Browns Flat

159

it was somewhat difficult to distinguish the
call. Early spring calling was noted on April
29, 1950, from a roadside ditch. On April 3,
1952, a live adult Pickerel Frog was found
in a well. During the haying season of July
and August I have seen adult Pickerel Frogs
in the hayfield, although in not as large
numbers as the Leopard Frogs. By late
August and early September I have seen
hundreds of young Pickerel Frogs on the
bogs near Lily Lake, Browns Flat and at
Clark Lake, north of Oak Point. On Nov-
ember 28, 1950, an adult Pickerel Frog was
found in a cold spring. On January 18, 1951,
three adult Pickerel Frogs were found dead
in a cold spring where they had apparently
been hibernating.

Rana clamitans, Green Frog (local names —

green frog, bullfrog)

This species was common in the ponds,
ditches and springs during the spring, sum-
mer and fall. On March 27, 1954 I took a
Green Frog from under a slab of wood
in a ditch about a mile north of Browns
Flat. Snow was still on both sides of the
ditch so the frog had apparently spent the

winter there. Green Frogs called from late
April until mid-June but the main chorus
ends around the latter part of May. During
the haying season I have seen half-grown
Green Frogs in the damp sections of mead-
owlands. Green Frogs, both adult and
juvenile, have been observed around springs
in early November.

Rana catesbeiana, Bullfrog (local name —

bullfrog)

This species is common in the lakes and
larger ponds during the latter part of the
spring and summer months. I have also
taken both half-grown and adult Bullfrogs
in roadside ditches and springs. On April
20, 1952 a large Bullfrog was found in a
cold spring. During the summer months I
have observed half-grown Bullfrogs in damp
meadowlands. I have taken half-grown
Bullfrogs under stones along the shores of
lakes in mid-October and have also observ-
ed a few Bullfrogs around cold springs in
early November. After September 20 or
October 1, depending on weather condi-
tions. Bullfrogs were never seen resting on
lily pads in the lakes and ponds.

It is possible that Rmia septentrionalis, the Mink Frog, occurs in the Browns
Flat area but I have never collected or observed it there. This may have been
due to insufficient collecting at favourable localities. Bleakney (1958) mentions
this species as common in northern and south-central New Brunswick with
records from the counties of Madawaska, Restigouche, York, Saint John and
Albert. Logier and Toner (1961) mention an additional record for York
County and there is a specimen (No. 5931) in the Royal Ontario Museum
from Digdeguash River, Dumbarton Township, Charlotte County, which was
collected by W. B. Scott and E. J. Crossman in May 1958. While on field
work for the National Museum of Canada during late August 1959 I found
the Mink Frog to be the most common species at Twin Lakes, about 12 miles
north of St. Andrews and about 12 miles northeast of St. Stephen. Nineteen
specimens were collected at that time and later deposited in the National Mu-
seum of Canada (NMC 4970, NiVIC 4979). No Mink Frogs were observed
in other lakes in the same general area. However in a small lake near Piske-
hagen (in Sunbury County near the Charlotte County border) Mink Frogs
were observed. Most of the Mink Frogs were observed resting on lily pads
and appeared to hold the head and back lower than a Bullfrog would in a
similar position. I have never observed or heard Hyla versicolor, the Gray
Treefrog, in the Browns Flat area; however, it has been taken near Fredericton
which is approximately sixty-five miles to the north. There are two specimens
in the Royal Ontario Museum (Nos. 4605-4606) which were taken by C. E.
Atwood on June 26, 1935 "/z mile from the mouth of the Nashwaak River".

160

The Canadian Field-Naturalist

Vol. 78

Bleakney (1958) also reported this species from vicinity of Fredericton. Hemi-
dactylhim scutatum, the Four-toed Salamander, is found in Ontario, Quebec
and Nova Scotia and with sufficient collecting in favourable localities it is likely
that it vi/ill be taken in New Brunswick. The bogs bordering some of the
lakes in the Browns Flat area may be suitable habitat for this species but although
I have looked for it my efforts have been unsuccessful.

Comparative data (earliest spring appearance, or earliest calling date) with
Logier (1952):

Browns Flat area, southern

New Brunswick Ontario

Antby stoma maculatinn April 3 early April

Ambystonm later ale April 9 early April

Notophthalrmis viridescens late April middle or late

April

Des?nognathtis jiisciis April 20

Eurycea bislineata early May

Flethodon cinereits middle May

Biijo americanus late April late April

Hyla criicifer April 4 April

Ra77a sylvatica April 9 late March

or early April
Ra7ia pipiefjs April 30 April

Rana paliistris April 29

Rana clamitans late April

Ran\a catesbeiana April 20

Of the six species of salamanders and nine species of frogs and toads known
from New Brunswick, thirteen are found in the Browns Flat area. Nova
Scotia has five species of salamanders (one of which has not yet been found in
New Brunswick) and eight species of frogs and toads. Prince Edward Island
has four species of salamanders and five species of frogs and toads. (Bleakney,
1958; Logier and Toner, 1961; Cook, hi Press).

References

Bleakney, J. S. 1958. A zoogeographical Irwin & Co., Ltd., Toronto: 1-127

study of the amphibians and reptiles of Logier, E. B. S. and G. C. Toner. 1961.

Eastern Canada. National Museum of Check list of the amphibians and reptiles

Canada Bulletin, No. 155:1-119. of Canada and Alaska. Royal Ontario

Cook, F. R. [In Press.] An analysis of the Museum, Life Sciences Division, Contri-

herpetofauna of Prince Edward Island. bution 53:1-92.

National Museum of Canada Bulletin. Squires, W. A. [1948]. Check list of the

Logier, E. B. S. 1952. Frogs, toads and amphibians of New Brunswick (Unpub-

salamanden of Eastern Canada. Clarke, lished manuscript).

Received for publication 24 October 1963

THE ROCK PTARMIGAN, LAGOPUS MUTUS
RUPESTRIS, IN ONTARIO AND MANITOBA

Harry G. Lumsden
Ontario Department of Lands and Forests, iUaple, Ontario

For some years Indians in Northern Ontario have reportd the occurrence of
Rock Ptarmigan on the Ontario coast of Hudson Bay. The purpose of this
paper is to place on record the recent information on the status of the bird in
Ontario and Manitoba and to summarize the history of its discovery in the
Hudson Bay area.

Early Records
The earliest mention of the occurrence of Rock Ptarmigan on the south-
western Hudson Bay coast is that of Isham who completed his Observations on
Hudsotis Bay in 1743 (Rich and Johnson, 1949). He describes wood partridges
(Spruce Grouse Canachites canadensis), willow partridges (Willow Ptarmigan
Lagopiis lagopus) and rock partridges saying that the last are smallest and are
white with black from the eve to the bill and with 14 black tail feathers.

Isham was stationed at York Factory and Churchill during his years of
service with the Hudson's Bay Company in Canada, and probably became
familiar with the bird during its winter invasions of that area.

There is another early mention of the occurrence of Rock Ptarmigan on
the south shore of Hudson Bay in another manuscript titled OhservatioTis on
Hudson's Bay (about 1782). This manuscript has been attributed to Dr.
Thomas Hutchins, but Glover (in Rich and Johnson, 1951), has pointed out
that it is in all probability by Andrew Graham. Glover wrote as follows about
this manuscript ". . . . long attributed to Thomas Hutchins .... is in many places
identically worded with other versions of Graham's "Observations" and contains
internal evidence showing that Hutchins could not have written it. To
Graham, then, is due the credit for the information on birds and animals for
which naturalists using this manuscript have made acknowledgement to
Hutchins."

The first of those who used this manuscript was probably Pennant who
quoted part of Graham's section on the Rock Ptarmigan almost verbatim in the
second edition of his Arctic Zoology (1792). (First edition 1784-87 not seen.)
He then clearly had access to Graham's manuscript.

At the time that Pennant was preparing and publishing the first edition of
his work, Dr. Thomas Hutchins was the corresponding secretary of the
Hudson's Bay Company in London; it is very likely that Pennant met him
because in the second edition of his Arctic Zoology he wrote that: "I was
unspeakably obliged for his [Hutchins] judicious remarks made during 16
years residence in Hudson's Bay of which he most liberally indulged me with
the perusal." This is clearly an acknowledgement of the loan of a manuscript.
Could this have been the one by Graham? The warmth of his remarks suggest

161

162 The Canadian Field-Naturalist Vol. 78

a personal acquaintanceship. Pennant's acknowledgement of help from Andrew
Graham is far less warm, it merely mentions "numbers of observations" and
"the use of multitudes of specimens of animals transmitted by him to the late
Museum of the Royal Society,"

Graham (about 1782) had this to say about the Rock Ptarmigan. "Us-
cathachish. Is a bird of the Grous Genus and denominated by us the rock
partridge. At all seasons of the year it frequents dry rocky ground and Juniper
plains. Its natural history corresponds with the Ptermigan only it is a size
smaller; has a black line under each eye and makes a croaking noise which is
performed with a stretched neck and seeming difficulty. They are numerous
on the extremes of the Bay and never visit our middle settlements but when the
Ptermigans are scarce and too truly denotes a hard winter with the poor natives."

Manning (1952) has pointed out that Pennant's description of the Rock
Ptarmigan (which was really Graham's) was the basis for Gmelin's (1789 not
seen) formal description of Tetrao rupestris. The type locality was given as
"in borealibus oris ad sinum Hudsonis = shores of Hudson Bay" (American
Ornithologists Union Check List, 1957). Graham encountered the southern
race of the Rock Ptarmigan, now known as Logapus mutus rupestris some time
during his service on Hudson Bay. The only trading posts at which he served
in Canada, prior to the completion of his observations, according to A. M.
Johnson (Archivist, Hudson's Bay Company, pers. covi.) were Fort Prince of
Wales, at the mouth of the Churchill River and opposite the present site of
Churchill, York Factory, and Fort Severn. Rock Ptarmigan are likely to occur
at all three of these localities (see below) but are far more regular in occurrence
and more abundant in the Churchill area. It is reasonable then to restrict the
type locality of this form to "Fort Prince of Wales, Manitoba".

Swainson and Richardson (1831) in listing two species of Rock Ptarmigan
did not recognize as we do today a single species with a circumpolar distribu-
tion. They quoted Graham with the credit again going to Hutchins under
the heading Tetrao rupestris and added ". . . . is found on Melville peninsula and
the barren grounds seldom going further south in winter than Latitude 63° in
the interior but descending along the coast of Hudson's Bay to Latitude 58°
and in severe seasons still further southward." Under the heading Tetrao
mutus they list " .... a specimen in summer plumage sent to Sir John Franklin
from Churchill river [which] was identified by John Sabine esq. with the Scotch
Ptarmigan thus establishing it as an inhabitant of the American continent."

Hellmayr and Conover (1942) state that Audubon gave the range for his
Lagopus americanus as "Melville Island, Churchill River", and further remark
that Audubon later quoted Richardson as his authority for the Churchill River
locality. Today we recognize that different races of Rock Ptarmigan occur
at these two localities. Hellmayr and Conover (1942) therefore recognize the
priority of Audubon's name for the northern race with the type locally
"Melville Island". Gmelin's name rupestris, however, applies to the southern
race which occurs at "Churchill River" with the type locality restricted here
to "Fort Prince of Wales, Manitoba",

1964

LuMSDEN : Rock Ptarmigan

163

Figure 1. Localities in Ontario and Manitoba mentioned in the text.

In 1845 Dr. Gillespie Jr. of the Hudson's Bay Company presented a
collection of birds to the Edinburgh Museum among which was a pair of Rock
Ptarmigan in winter plumage (Clarke, 1890). They were collected by him
during his residence at Fort Churchill.

Macoun (1900) wrote somewhat inconsistently that: "No authentic
records of its being taken in Ontario or southern Quebec have been seen and
the same statement may be made of Manitoba and westward." However, he
later quotes Richardson's statement that they descend along the Hudson's Bay
coast to Lat. 58° (which would include the Churchill area), and in severe seasons
to Lat. 55°. This latitude was actually not mentioned by Swainson and
Richardson (1831); it does, however, include the whole Hudson Bay coast of
Ontario.

According to Preble ( 1902) the people of Fort Churchill say that the species
occurs at that post regularly in winter.

Recent Records and Reports from Manitoba
Taverner and Sutton (1934) reported that: "Lloyd, who was stationed at
Churchill for several years, saw Rock Ptarmigan every winter, but he was of
the opinion that the species never occurs regularly in summer." They found
Rock Ptarmigan rather numerous at Churchill in May and early June, 1931.
They recorded their last observation of the species on July 10. In 1930 the
only one they collected was an autumn plumaged bird taken on August 19 near

164 The Canadian Field-Naturalist Vol. 78

Fort Prince of Wales. They reported this to be a female but W. E. Godfrey,
Curator of Birds, National Museum of Canada, in a personal communication
states that the only specimen in the National Museum taken on that date at that
locality was an adult male.

Figure 1 shows the localities round the Hudson Bay coast of Ontario and
Manitoba mentioned in the text and the places from which Rock Ptarmigan have
been reported.

There seems to be no specimen evidence at present of Rock Ptarmigan
breeding anywhere in Manitoba, although the iManitoba Department of Mines
and Natural Resources (1945) suggests that the species may breed in the
Churchill area.

In the Registered Trapline annual reports for Manitoba there are three
recent references to the occurrence of Rock Ptarmigan in that province. All
refer to the winter season.

Mr. T. M. Nichol (1954) then with the Manitoba Game Branch in his
1953-54 report mentions that: ". . . . The Kaska trappers reported an increase in
rock ptarmigan." Again in his 1954-55 report he states that: ". . . . A few rock
ptarmigan were reported from the Kaska group." The Kaska Indians occupy
the coastal area east of Cape Tatnum adjacent to the Ontario Boundary.

The third reference to the species was made by Mr. W. R. Burns (1957)
Manitoba Game Branch in his 1956-57 report for the Churchill area. He states
that both Willow and Rock Ptarmigan were found in the Churchill area but
the latter were scarce.

Sometimes Rock Ptarmigan may penetrate inland south of the area occupied
by the Kaska Indians. At Shamattawa, Mr. Stephen Redhead told me that he
saw a flock of three during the winter of 1961-62 about five miles northwest
of the village on the God's River.

Recent Records and Reports from the Hudson Bay Area of Ontario

The Indians living in the northern part of the Patricia portion of Ontario
know the Rock Ptarmigan well and call the bird "Apistabemish". They say
that flocks appear on their traplines in winter only, at intervals of six or eight
years. Unless otherwise stated, the reports on the distribution of the Rock
Ptarmigan in Ontario which follow were derived from personal communications.

Mr. Joseph Chokomolin told me that during the hard winter of 1935 his
brother John killed six small ptarmigan, at the mouth of the Sutton River. He
said that they all had black feathers between the eye and the bill.

During the winter of 1956-57, Conservation Officer T. M. Nichol, then
with the Ontario Department of Lands and Forests, reported a single Rock
Ptarmigan on the airport at Weenusk.

During he winter of 1960-61, a small flight of Rock Ptarmigan penetrated
as far as the region of Shagamu Lake (55''05'N, 87°05'W). Mr. Michel
Hunter, the chief of the Weenusk Indian band, shot about 1 5 Rock Ptarmigan
there on his trapline. He also killed over 100 Willow Ptarmigan during the
same winter. He saved one Rock Ptarmigan and took it to Weenusk as a
specimen but it was later destroyed in error.

1964 Lumsden: Rock Ptarmigan 165

The winter of 1961-62 was marked by a major flight of both Willow and
Rock ptarmigan into the Hudson Bay area of Ontario. Rock Ptarmigan were
most abundant close to the coast but one Ontario report refers to birds in the
interior. Mr. Joseph Morris, the chief of the Big Trout Lake Indian band,
told me that he saw a flock of about 30 Rock Ptarmigan ten miles north of
Sherman Lake at 54°38'N, 91°25'W; which is about 180 miles from the Hudson
Bay coast.

At Fort Severn Willow Ptarmigan were extremely abundant and both Mr.
Fred Close of the Hudson's Bay Company and Mr. Angus Miles reported that
many thousands were killed for food by the villagers during the winter. Mr.
Close told me that about one in fifty was a Rock Ptarmigan. He personally
killed three Rock Ptarmigan in one day but kept no record of the total number
he killed during the winter.

Mr. Mason Koostachin reported that there were about 20 Rock Ptarmigan
among the Willow Ptarmigan he killed near Fort Severn during the winter
of 1961-62.

At Weenusk also. Rock Ptarmigan were abundant and Mr. Michel Hunter
said he saw flocks numbering from 25 to 60 birds. Thev fed in the willows
along the coast and frequently flew out onto the sea ice where he saw them
while trapping arctic foxes. He killed 30-35 Rock Ptarmigan and 60-70 Willow
Ptarmigan during the winter while trapping west of the mouth of the Weenusk
River. He reported that they arrived just before Christmas, 1961, and did not
leave until the snow began to thaw at the end of March, 1962.

Mr. Moses Koostachin reported that Rock Ptarmigan were present on his
trapline, which Hes east of the mouth of the Weenusk River, during the winter
of 1961-62. His son John George Koostachin killed two there that winter.

Mr. Xavier Sutherland told me that Rock Ptarmigan occur regularly in
winter on Cape Henrietta Maria and birds were present in 1960-61 and 1961-62.

Seven specimens were preserved from the 1961-62 flight, one is in the Royal
Ontario Museum of Zoology and Palaeontology and six are at the Southern
Research Station, Maple. There were three males and one female killed in
January, 1962 by Mr. Elijah Stoney and Mr. Peter Patrick at Fort Severn; and
two males and one female killed on March 25, 1962 by Mr. Michel Hunter at
Weenusk.

Recent Reports from the James Bay Area

Baillie (1956) has suggested, on the basis of a report from Mr. Sam Waller,
who lived at Moosonee for some years, that Rock Ptarmigan might be found
some winters in the James Bay region. According to Mr. Simeon Scott and
other Indians, who were present at Fort Albany when I enquired. Rock
Ptarmigan are never found north of Moosonee on the west side of James Bay.
They all said that Cape Henrietta Maria was the nearest place where the species
might be found.

In Qubec, on the east side of James Bay, however, the situation is quite
different. Mr. Josie Sim at Fort George said that both species of ptarmigan

166 The Canadian Field-Naturalist Vol. 78

occur there. The Rock Ptarmigan appear only in winter, they come every
year and occasionally in great numbers.

Farther south at Rupert House, Mr. Willie Weestchee and Mr. Isiah Salt
told me that the Rock Ptarmigan, which they call "Skangish", appear nearly
every winter.

Rupert House lies about 80 miles east and a little north of Moosonee on the
southern end of James Bay. I seems likely then that if Rock Ptarmigan do
occur at Moosonee, they come from the Quebec side of James Bay and not
from the west.

Taverner and Sutton's ( 1934) summary of the status of the Rock Ptarmigan
in the Churchill area of Manitoba as "a winter visitor irregularly common", can
probably not be improved. In Ontario the species should be regarded as a
periodic winter visitor in the extreme north occurring sometimes in substantial
numbers, and of hypothetical occurrence at the southern end of James Bay.

ACKNOW^LEDGMENTS

I should like to acknowledge the help of Miss A. M. Johnson, Archivist
and Mrs. S. S. Smith, Librarian of the Hudson's Bay Company, who supplied
me with biographical sketches of Thomas Hutchins and Andrew Graham and
drew my attention to the correct authorship of the manuscript "Observations
on Hudson's Bay". The quotation on Rock Ptarmigan from this manuscript
is published by permission of the Governor and Committee of the Hudson's
Bay Company. Dr. E. F. Bossenmaier sent unpublished references on the
occurrence of Rock Ptarmigan in Manitoba and gave permission for publication.
Finally, I am grateful to Mr. M. Hunter, Mr. E. Stoney and Mr. P. Patrick who
collected specimens and preserved them for me.

References

American Ornithologists' Union. 1957. Ottawa. 207 pp.

Check List of North American Birds. Manitoba Department of Mines and Na-

Baltimore, Maryland. 133 pp. tural Resorces. 1945. Game Birds and

Baillie, J. L. 1956. Ontario Grouse. Royal Animals of Manitoba. 47 pp.

Ontario Museum. 14 pp. Manning, T. H. 1952. Birds of the West

Burns, W. R. 1957. Manitoba Game James Bay and Southern Hudson Bay

Branch Regulated Trapline Annual Re- Coasts. National Museum of Canada, Bul-

port, 1956-57. Unpublished. 116 pp. letin 25. 38 pp.

Clarke, W. E. 1890. On a collection of Nichol, T. M. 1954. Manitoba Game

birds from Fort Churchill, Hudson's Bay. Branch Regulated Trapline Annual Re-

The Auk 8(4): 321. port 1953-54. Unpublished. 89 pp.

Gmelin, J. F. 1788. Systema Naturae 1 . 1955. Manitoba Game Branch

(pt. 2). 751 pp. Regulated Traplines Annual Report 1954-

Graham, a. About 1782. Observations on 55. Unpublished. 49 pp.

Hudson's Bay. Unpublished ms. Hudson's Pennant, T. 1792. Arctic Zoology. Second

Bay Company archives. E 2/13. 97 pp. Edition. Vol. 1. London. 364 pp.

Hellmayr, C. E. and B. Conover. 1942. Preble, E. A. 1902. A Biological Investiga-

Catalogue of Birds of the Americas and tion of the Hudson Bay Region. North

the Adjacent Islands. Zoological (1) America Fauna No. 22, Washington. 104

Series. Field Museum of Natural History pp.

13(pt. 1) Pub. 514:205-207. Rich, E. E. and A. M. Johnson. 1949. James

Macoun, J. 1900. Catalogue of Canadian Ishams Observations on Hudson Bay 1743.

Birds, Part 1. Geological Survey of Canada, The Champlain Society, Toronto. 123 pp

1964 LuMSDEN: Rock Ptarmigan 167

. 1951. Cumberland House Jour- Fauna Boreali-Americana Part 2. London.

nals and Inland Journal 1775-82. Hudson's pp. 350-354.

Bay Record Society, Vol. 14. London. Taverner, P. A. and G. M. Sutton. 1934.

Introduction XVIII. The Birds of Churchill, Manitoba. Annals

SwAiNSON, W. and J. Richardson. 1831. of the Carnegie Museum 23. 43 pp.

Received for publication 20 January 1964

FISH COLLECTIONS FROM EASTERN HUDSON BAY

D. E. McAllister
National Museum of Canada, Ottawa, Ontario

Introduction
Few collections have been made in the eastern waters of Canada's inland sea,
Hudson Bay. Vladykov (1933) and Dymond (1933) describe the marine fish
and summarize past literature. Dunbar and Hildebrand (1952) describe the
fishes of Ungava Bay. The only further marine ichthyofaunal study has been
that of Edwards (1961) on the fishes of Richmond Gulf. However, reports on
single species have appeared: McPhail (1961) on Arctic charr and (1963) on
ninespine stickleback, Legendre (1961) on the Greenland cod and Scott (1960)
on the round whitefish. McAllister (1960) provided a key to the marine Arctic
Canadian fishes, including Hudson Bay. References to the literature up to
1960 on freshwater fishes may be obtained from Harper (1961) and Fowler
(1961). Power and Oliver (1961) give freshwater records from the southern
Ungava Bay drainage.

The area must still be considered poorly known as each study has revealed
further species. In Richmond Gulf, for example, the National Museum of
Canada expedition in only ten marine stations was able to add four species to
Edward's (1961) list— the lumpfish, round whitefish, lake whitefish, and the
Arctic sculpin. One collection by the Fisheries Research Board in 1959 has
been found to contain a further species, the American plaice, Hippoglossoides
platessoides. Further work would be worthwhile, particularly in the deeper
waters.

This paper briefly reports on marine and freshwater fishes collected by
the National Museum of Canada expedition to eastern Hudson Bay in the
summer of 1963. The author and Dr. A. H. Clarke, Jr., assisted by Mr. H. D.
Athearn, collected fishes, molluscs, and other invertebrates from Port Harrison
in the north to Moosonee, James Bay, in the south. Additional collections
made by John G. Robertson at Povungnituk in 1963 are also reported on.
Figure 1 shows the locality of the collecting sites; Table 1 presents the field data.

Itinerary
The author left Ottawa on July 7, by train and arrived at Moosonee July 8.
On July 10 he took off by Canso aircraft for Port Harrison and en route picked

168

The Canadian Field-Naturalist

Table 1. — Field Data for Collections

Vol. 78

Coll. No.

Locality

Salinity

Temperature
°C

Bottom

Capture

Depth -

Feet

Gear

NMC63-162

P.Q.: Povungnituk

stones, pebbles

—

seal net

NMC63-163

P.Q.: Povungnituk

—

algae and seaweed
rocky

gill net

NMC63-164

P.Q.: Povungnituk

salt

—

algae and seaweed
stones, pebbles

5-30

line with spoon
gill net

NMC63-165

P.Q.: Povungnituk

salt

—

algae and seaweed
stones, pebbles

5-30

line with spoon

NMC63-166

P.Q.: Small stream
entering
Povungnituk R.

fresh

algae, rocky

gill net

NMC63-167

P.Q.: Povungnituk

salt

—

algae and seaweed
rocky

10-40

line with spoon

NMC63-168

P.Q.: Povungnituk

salt

—

algae and seaweed

rocky

algae, rocky

4-20

line with spoon

NMC63-169

P.Q.: Povungnituk

3 inch gill net

NMC63-170

P.Q.: Povungnituk

—

algae, rocky

3-6

gill net

NMC63-171

P.Q.: Povungnituk

—

rocky

1-3

gill net

NMC63-172

P.Q.: Povungnituk

salt

—

algae and seaweed
rocky

10-20

line with spoon

NMC63-173

P.Q.: Povungnituk

—

algae, rocky

i-3

gill net

NMC63-174

P.Q.: Povungnituk

—

rocky

—

NMC63-175

P.Q.: Povungnituk

—

gill net

NMC63-176

P.Q.: Small stream
entering
Povungnituk R.

fresh

algae, rocky

i-5

gill net

NMC63-177

P.Q.:PovungnitukR.

fresh

—

algae, rocky

1-5

gill net

NMC63-178

P.Q.:PovungnitukR.

fresh

—

algae, rocky

1-5

gill net

NMC63-179

P.Q. :PovungnitukR.

—

rocky

15-30

line with spoon

NMC63-180

P.Q.:PovungnitukR.

fresh

—

algae, rocky

i-5

gill net

NMC63-195

P.Q.: Head Five
Mile Inlet

7.9 parts
per thou-
sand

8.5

algae, sand

0-3

bag seine

NMC63-196

P.Q.: Head Five
Mile Inlet

7.9 parts
per thou-
sand

9.0

rocky

0-2

rotenone

NMC63-197

P.Q.: Rivermouth,
head Five Mile
Inlet

N.W.T.: off n. end

probably
brackish

boulders

8-15

3-inch gill net

NMC63-198

salt

ca. 4

mud

2-foot dredge

Patterson I.

NMC63-199

P.Q.: rill tributary
to lake 3 mi. ne.
Port Harrison

fresh

10.5

grass, pebbles,
mud

0-2 1

rotenone

NMC63-200

P.Q.: mainland opp.
Hotchkiss Is.

28 parts
per thou-
sand

sand

0-3

bag seine

NMC63-201

P.Q.: mainland opp.
Hotchkiss Is.

salt

boulders, gravel

20-40

l-and 2|-inch
gill net

NMC63-202

P.Q.: mainland opp.
Hotchkiss Is.

salt

9.5

sand and clay
few boulders

0-3

rotenone

NMC63-203

P.Q.: bay i mi. off
mouth Kikkerteluk
R.

P.Q.: mouth

salt

J- and 2i-inch
gill net

NMC63-204

rock and sand

0-3

3-inch gill net

Kikkerteluk R.

NMC63-205

P.Q.: 2 mi. above
mouth Kikkerteluk
R.

N.W.T.: Tottenham

fresh

weeds

dipnet

NMC63-206

24partsper

8.5

sand

J- and 2i-inch

Bayi ne. end

thousand

gill net

B rough ton I.

at surface

NMC63-207

N.S.T.: Tottenham
ne. end Broughton
I.

24 parts
per thou-
sand

8.5

fucus, boulders

0-2

rotenone

NMC63-208

N.W.T.: lakes,
centre Broughton

N.W.T.: side pool,

fresh

gravel, sand,
boulders

1-3

line with
spinner

NMC63-209

fresh

+ 14

grass, sand, silt

0-i

rotenone

upper lake, centre

Broughton I.

NMC63-210-S

N.W.T.: found on
shore e. central
Broughton I.

NMC63-211

N.W.T.: bay, s. end
Mowat I.

salt

—

}- and 2i-inch
gill net

NMC63-212

N.W.T.: bay, s.
end Mowat I.

salt

10 at surface

fucus, rocky

jigging with
spoon

NMC63-213

P.Q.: Nastapoka R.
2 mi. above mouth

fresh

sand, gravel

dipnet

'Suggested name for unnamed bay at 57°25'N, 76°49'W, at northeast end of Broughton Island (see fig. 1 and 4).
Named after Const. R. L. Tottenham of the Northwest Mounted Police.

1964

McAllister: Fish From Hudson Bay

169

Table 1. — cont'd.

Coll. No.

Locality

Salinity

Temperature
°C

Bottom

Capture
Depth -

Gear

Feet

NMC63-214

N.W.T.: bay, ne.
end Anderson I.

salt

—

sea urchins,
brittle stars

30-35

gill net

NMC63-215

N.W.T.: stream,
enters bay ne. end
Anderson I.

fresh

algae clumps
sand, silt,
detritus

12 12

dipnet

NMC63-216

N.W.T.:lake, 35-ft.
altitude ne. end
Anderson I.

fresh

boulders and sand

1-2

hand

NMC63-217

N.W.T.: tide pool
s. tip Ross I.

salt

rocky with
boulders and
gravel

0-1

rotenone

NMC63-218

P.Q.: pool, lake
outlet s. side large
island, Richmond
Gulf

fresh

weeds, sand

hand

NMC63-219

P.Q. : bay s. side
large island,
Richmond Gulf

ca. 14-16
parts per
thousand

sand

1-3

bag, seine

NMC63-220

P.Q.: bay s. side
large island,
Richmond Gulf

+ 16

parts per
thousand

10 at surface

sand, silt

5-20

f- and 2i-inch
gill net

NMC63-221

P.Q.: bay s. side
large island,
Richmond Gulf

fresh

16.5

algae, boulders

0-31

rotenone

NMC63-222

P.Q.: Deer R. 2 mi.
above mouth,
Richmond Gulf

fresh

16.5

algae, boulders

gill net

NMC63-223

P.Q.: Richmond
Guii 2 mi. w. Deer
R. mouth

salt

mud and clay

36-90

2-foot dredge

NMC63-224

P.Q.: Richmond
Gulf 3 mi. nw.
Deer R. mouth

salt

floating 4-inch
gill net

NMC63-225

P.Q.: island off
Charr Lake^ w.
central Richmond
Gulf

ca. 16
parts per
thousand

fucus, boulders
and sand, rocky

0-3

rotenone

NMC63-226

P.Q.: Charr L. 2, w.
central Richmond
Gulf

fresh

NMC63-227

P.Q.: just outside
Clearwater R.
lagoon

somewhat
brackish

sand

0-2

bag seine

NMC63-228

P.Q. : Clearwater R.
just below rapids
at mouth

fresh

boulders

0-10

2-inch gill net

NMC63-229

P.Q.: lagoon, mouth
of Clearwater R.

brackish

—

f- and 2j-inch
gill net

NMC63-230

P.Q.: bog pond,
shore Clearwater
R. lagoon

fresh

grass, moss,
black mud

dipnet

NMC63-231

P.Q.: bay, s. of e.
end of Gulf
Hazard, in
Richmond Gulf

salt

12.5
at surface

boulders and sand

10-15

jigging with
spoon

NMC63-232

P.Q.: bay, s. side of
e. end of Gulf
Hazard

salt

algae mat on
gravel

0-2 i

bag seine

NMC63-233

P.Q. : bay, s. of e.
end of Gulf
Hazard, in
Richmond Gulf

salt

sea urchins and
shells

1- and 25-inch
gill net

NMC63-234

P.Q.: bay, s. of e.
end of Gulf
Hazard, in
Richmond Gulf

salt

boulders, sand

7-15

2-inch gill net

NMC63-235

N.W.T.:n. end of
Castle I. in e. end
of Boat Passage

P.Q.: bay n. central

salt

fucus, sea urchins
mussels, rocky

15-50

J- and 2|-inch
gill net

NMC63-236

fresh

ca. 18

sand and detritus

0-2 i

bag seine

shore Burton L.

patches

NMC63-237

P.Q.: creek, n.
central shore
Burton L.

fresh

mud, gravel
patches

0-3

bag seine

NMC63-238

P.Q.: middle branch
Roggan R.

fresh

—

rocky

angling

NMC63-239

Ont.: Moose R. at
Moosonee

fresh

mud

0-3

bag seine

NMC63-240

Ont. : creek
tributary to
Moosonee 3 mi.
above mouth at
Moosonee

fresh

20.5

mud

0-6

dipnet

'Unofficial local name for lake, unnamed on charts.

170 The Canadian Field-Naturalist Vol. 78

up Dr. Clarke and Mr. Athearn at Great Whale River. We collected in the Port
Harrison area until July 13, when we left via chartered trap boat (see Figure 7)
for Great Whale River. Collections were made on route to Great Whale
River at numerous points. On July 23 the expedition arrived in Great Whale
River; the boat and crew then returned to Port Harrison. A chartered flight
was made to Burton Lake and Roggan River on July 24. The following day
we left via Canso for Moosonee. Final fish collections were made on July 25
and 26 in the Moosonee area. The author then returned to Ottawa by train.

Conditions

Ice was reported to have broken up on the Moose River at Moosonee on
May 18 and on James Bay on June 18. On the trip up, little ice was seen on
James Bay. In Hudson Bay there were rare patches of ice south of Great
Whale River, a few broader patches northward; rivers and lakes were com-
pletely ice free, but a few ravines had snow. On the return trip by boat only
a single piece of ice was seen. Weather during the boat trip varied from cool
to warm, never approaching freezing. About half the days were cloudy, and
most cloudy days had some rain. Winds were light, the maximum being
about 40 mph. In Richmond Gulf swimming was comfortably indulged in.
Water temperatures at collecting stations varied from 3° to 18° C in brackish
and salt waters (the highest temperatures of 14 and 18° C in Richmond Gulf,
10° C elsewhere) and from 10.5 to ca. 18° C in freshwater (except in Moosonee
area where 20.5° and 24° were recorded). In Gulf Hazard, which joins
Hudson Bay to Richmond Gulf, surface temperatures were cooled to 3.5 ° C at
its narrowest and most turbulent point; here mist formed above the water.

Twenty-eight species of fishes (12 marine, 5 anadromous, and 11 fresh-
water), belonging to 14 famihes were collected. These are discussed below
in phylogenetic order. The collection number and the number of specimens
(in parentheses) are given for each collection of that species.

Species

Rajidae Salvelinus alpinus (Linnaeus), Arctic charr,

Raja radiata Donovan, thorny skate, rale omble chevalier.

de mer epineuse. Collections: NMC63-162 (1); NMC63-163

Collections: NMC62-233 (1) (2); NMC63-170 (1); NMC63-173 (2);

Represented only by an egg capsule. Al- NMC63-178 (1); NMC 63-180 (1); NMC

though the capsule is of smaller size (36x48 63-197 (not kept); NMC 63-199 (3); NMC

mm) than those given by Vladykov (1936), 63-204 (2); NMC63-226 (2).

48-73x66-90 mm, they are within the limits This species is being commercially fished

of those given by Jensen (1948), 24-41x45-66. by Eskimos in Richmond Gulf with Depart-

Raja radiata is the only skate known from ment of Northern Affairs co-operation.

Richmond Gulf (Edwards 1961), or indeed Salvelimis fontinalis (Mitchell), brook charr

Hudson Bay. (trout), omble de la fontaine.

Salmonidae Collections: NMC63-169 (1); NMC63-176

Salmoninea (2); NMC63-177 (1); NMC63-178 (1);

Salvelinus namayciish (Walbaum), lake NMC63-205 (1); NMC63-208 (2); NMC

charr (trout), touladi. Figure 2. 63-220 (2); NMC63-221 (26); NMC63-228

Collections: NMC63-208 (2). (22).

One specimen had eaten half a dozen Pim- Specimens from the lower lake Broughton

gitiiis pungitius. Island (NMC63-208) were apparently sea-

1964

McAllister: Fish From Hudson Bay

171

80 W

Povunqnituk

- ' ^— nmc63— 162to180

75° W

60° N

nmc63— 195 to 197
nmic 63 198

nmc 63— 200 to 202

nmc63 — 203 to 205

HUDSON BAY

nmc 63-208 to 210

nmc 63- — 199

nmc 63-206 to 207

Mowat.ls. 11

nmc 6 3—213 fif^Nastapoka.R.

nmc 63-227 to23a
nmc 63-221 to222

nmc 63-223to224

„_.^ co-_o<^x-o< g nmc 63-225

nmc 63 -21 4 to 216 ^o — ^-^^

nmc 63-21 8 to 220 nmc bJ-2 26

nmc63-232 nmc63-217

nmc63-211 to212

nn.c 63—231,233,234

Figure 1. Map of eastern Hudson Bay showing collection sites of 1963 National Museum
of Canada expedition. The Moosonee sites in southern James Bay are not shown.
Numbers preceded by NMC are catalogue numbers.

172

The Canadian Field-Naturalist

Vol. 78

run, as evidenced by copepods in their
mouths. The Povungnituk specimens ap-
parently extend the known range north-
ward over 50 miles from the previous nor-
thernmost point of Payne Lake, mouth of
outlet, reported by Legendre and Rousseau
(1949). Brook charr specimens from 15
miles inland were also seen at Port Harrison
(but not preserved).

Coregoninea
Prosopiimi cylindraceum (Pallas), round

WHiTEFisH, menomini.
Collections: NMC63-178 (1); NMC63-180
(1); NMC63-228 (3); NMC63-229 (1).

All collections were from fresh water, ex-
cept Ni'VIC63-229 which was brackish. The
northernmost Quebec record in the litera-
ture appears to be Bateman's {in Harper,
1961) at Iron Lake south of Leaf Bay. The
Povungnituk specimens are from over 75
miles north of this point. The species is
known north of Povungnituk in the western
Arctic, however.

Coregonus artedi Lesueur, Cisco, cisco. Figure

3.
Collections: NMC63-171 (1); NMC63-220
(11); NMC63-225 (1); NMC63-229 (2).

This species has apparently been known
north only to Fort Chimo, in Quebec. The
Povungnituk specimens are from over 130
miles north of that point. The species is
known to range further north than Povung-
nituk in central Arctic Canada.

Coregonus clupeaformis (Mitchell), lake

AVHiTEFisH, cotcgone de lac. Figure 8.
Collections: NMC63-171 (1); NMC63-176
(3); NMC63-177 (9); NMC63-178 (4);
NMC63-180 (5); NMC63-204 (6); NMC
63-220 (1); NMC63-229 (1); NMC 63-236
(104); NMC63-239 (1).

The northernmost Quebec record appears
to be the lower Leaf River. The Povung-
nituk specimens recorded here extend the
known Quebec range over 75 miles further
north. The species does occur further north
than Povungnituk in the western Arctic.
This species is being commercially caught
in Richmond Gulf by Eskimos with Depart-
ment of Northern Affairs' cooperation.

OSMERIDAE

Mallotiis villosus (Miiller), capelin, capelan.
Collections: NMC63-220 (60) .

About a thousand capelin were caught in
one overnight set of a 30x6 feet panel of i-
inch mesh; 60 were kept.

ESOCIDAE

Esox lucius Linnaeus, northern pike, grand

brochet.
Collections: NMC63-238 (2).

Pike were reported in Clearwater Lake,
inland from Richmond Gulf.

Catostomidae
Catostomus catostomus (Forster), longnose

sucker, meunier.
Collections: NMC63-166 (1); NMC63-176
(4); NMC63-178 (4); NMC63-180 (1);
NMC63-221 (29); NMC63-222 (2); NMC
63-237 (1).

The most northerly record previously
reported appears to be that of Dunbar and
Hildebrand (1952) for the Leaf River. The
Povungnituk specimens reported here are
at least 75 miles north of this point.

Cyprinidae
Rhinichthys cataractae (Valenciennes), long-
nose DACE, goujon a long nez.
Collections: NMC63-213 (27); NMC63-221
(13).

The upper lip and lower fins of the Deer
River specimens were red. The Nastopoka
River specimens, though not constituting a
northern record (they extend north in the
interior to Whale River (Power and Oliver,
1961), are further north on the Hudson Bay
coast than previous records.

Couesius pliiTnbeus (Agassiz), lake chub,

mene de lac.
Collections: l<iMC6l-21,9 (1).

Notropis sp.

Collections: NMC63-239 (1).

Gadidae
Gadus ogac Richardson, Greenland cod,

ogac. Figure 6.
Collections: NMC63-162 (1); NMC 63-
164 (8); NMC63-165 (16); NMC 63-167
(22); NMC63-168 (6); NlMC63-172 (4);
NMC63-179 (4); NMC63-197 (8); NMC
63-201 (26); NMC 63-206 (4) ; NMC 63-120-
S (skeleton on beach); NMC63-212 (1);
NMC63-214 (2); NMC 63-233 (3); NMC
63-245 (13).

This was one of the most commonly
caught marine species. Its numbers might
well provide the basis for local fisheries.

1964

McAllister: Fish From Hudson Bay

173

Figure 2. A lake charr, Salvelinus namaycush, 360 mm in standard length, from NMC
63-208, a lake on Broughton Island.

Figure 3. A cisco, Coregomis artedii, 262 mm in standard length, from NiMC63-171, a
stream at Povungnituk.

174

The Canadian Fifxd-Naturalist

Vol. 78

-*%*

"f'Vv:

" - * - * - *. f ji

^^-|i?^a^%Js'V> -^^

Figure 4. Tottenham Bay, Broughton Island, site of collections NMC63-206 — gill net in
25 feet of water, sand, out from lefthand man — Gadiis ogac, Myoxocephalus sc orpins,
Lmnpenus jabricii and NMC63-207 rotenone among boulders with Fucus, near right-
hand man — Myoxocephalus scorpioides, M. scorpius, Stichaeiis pimctatus.

Percidae

Stizostedion vitreu?n vitreimi (Mitchell),

WALLEYE, dore jaune.
Collections: ^MC6^-2n (1).

COTTIDAE

Myoxocephalus quadricornis (Linnaeus),
FOURHORN scuLPiN, chaboisscau a quatre
cornes.
Collections: NMC63-164 (1); NMC 63-174
(1); NMC63-175 (1); NMC 63-195 (11);
NMC63-196 (5); NMC63-20O (2); NMC63-
201 (1); NMC63-202 (6) ; NMC63-220 (10);
NMC63-229 (4); NMC63-232 (1); NMC
63-234 (3).

This was the most common species of
Myoxocephalus caught, scorpioides the
rarest. The three species of Myxocephalus
rarely may be caught in the same gill net set
(NMC63-234). M. quadricornis is generally
caught in more brackish water (7.9-28°/oo)
and in shallower depths (0-40 feet), scorpius
in more saline water (16-1- to 24-(- °/oo) and

in deeper depths usually 5 to 50 feet deep.
Myoxocephalus scorpius (Linnaeus), short-
horn SCULPIN, chabolsseau espines.
Collections: NMC63-201 (2); NMC63-203
(1); NMC63-206 (12); NMC63-207 (19);
NMC63-211 (2); NMC63-214 (5); NMC
63-220 (1); NMC63-231 (4); NMC63-234
(1); NMC63-235 (8).

My oxocephalus scorpioides (Fabricius) ,
Arctic sculpin, chaboisseau artique.

Collections: NMC63-207 (2); NMC63-217

(13); NMC63-234 (1).
The three collections of M. scorpioides

were caught in generally saline water 0-15

feet deep.

Gymnocanthiis tricuspis (Reinhardt) , Arctic

STAGHORN SCULPIN, tricomc arctique.
Collections: NMC63-211 (2); NMC63-233

(1).

In a male specimen, NMC63-211, there
are bright white spots on the abdomen, on

1964

McAllister: Fish From Hudson Bay

175

Figure 5. Crew of cruise, left to right, Joe, Lasarus, Charlie and below, Judd.

the inside of pectoral fins and on both sides
of the pelvic fins; these spots turn yellowish
on the posterior of the body. The vertical
fins are striped black and yellowish; the chin
is yellowish; the head and most of the body
are dark brown; the pineal region is white;
the eyes are bronze coloured; the buccal
cavity is white.

Cottus bairdii Girard, mottled sculpin,

chabot.
Collections- NMC63-221 (2); NMC63-237
(3); NMC63-240 (1).

The Deer River collection extends the
known coastal distribution considerably to
the north, although it is known to extend
almost to Ungava Bay in central Quebec.

Cottus cogTiatus Richardson, slimy sculpin,

chabot visqueux.
Collections: NMC63-221 (35); NMC63-240

(4).

Agonidae
Aspidophoroides olrikii Liitkin, Arctic alli-

GATORFiSH, poisson alligator arctique.
Collections: NMC63-198 (1).

Cyclopteridae

Cyclopterus liimpus Linnaeus, lumpfish^

grosse poule I'eau.
Collections: NMC63-224 (1).

This specimen represents the first speci-
men for eastern Hudson Bay. Lumpfish were
caught fairly commonly in floating gill nets
set for Arctic charr in Richmond Gulf by

176

The Canadian Field-Naturalist

Vol. 78

Figure 6. Gadus ogac, collection NMC63-201, from east side of Hopewell Channel,
opposite Hotchkiss Island. Note the absence of a prominent white lateral band which
is found in the related species, Gadus morhim.

Figure 7. The motor launch used on the cruise.

1964

McAllister: Fish From Hudson Bay

177

the Eskimo commercial fishing camp being
started by the Department of Northern
Affairs.

Stichaeidae
Stichaeus pimctams (Fabricius), Arctic

SHANNY, stichee arctique.
Collections: NMC63-207 (3).

These specimens -were brown bodied and
had a reddish eye, the edge of dorsal and
anal white, the pectoral and caudal with
red-brown stripes, the anal with yellow and
charcoal stripes, the dorsal yellow brown
with black spots having yello-w ocelli, and
the chin with black stripes. They represent
the first record for eastern Hudson Bay.

Liimpenus fabricii (Valenciennes), slendeer

EELBLENNY.

Collections: NMC63-206 (1).

Ammodytidae
Ammodytes hexapterus Pallas, sand lance,
lan^on dAmerique.

Collections: NMC63-195 (15)-, NMC63-219
(16); NMC63-227 (54).

Gasterosteidae
Pungitius pungitius (Linnaeus), ninespine

stickleback, epinoche a neuf epines.
Collections: NMC63-195 (1); NMC63-199
(6); NMC63-208 (6 in stomach of lake
charr) ; NMC63-209 (50); NMC63-215 (15);
NMC63-219 (23); NMC63-226 (1); NMC
63-227 (12); NMC63-232 (9); NMC 63-236
(4); NMC63-247 (11).
Gasterosteus aculeatus Linneaus.

threespine stickleback, epinoche a trois

epines.
Collections: NMC63-215 (8); NMC63-216
(4); NMC63-218 (15); NMC63-219 (185);
NMC63-221 (2); NMC63-226 (18); NMC
63-227 (73); NMC63-230 (21); NMC 63-232
(32); NMC63-237 (9).

The collections consist mainly of the
semiarniata type, with a few of the trachura
type.

Figure 8. Coregomis clupeaformis, collection NMC63-204, from mouth of Kikkerteluk
River.

Acknowledgments
The cooperation and assistance of Dr. A. H. Clarke and .Mr. H. D. Athearn,
who accompanied the author on the expedition and of the able Eskimo crew
Lasarus, Charlie, Judd, and Joe who selflessly worked long hours, greatly
contributed to the success of the expedition. To the director of the Protection
Service, Jean Duguay, Departement des Pecheries et de la Chasse, is due thanks
for authorization to collect fish specimens. Howard Dove, Hudson's Bay
Company, and Rodney Evans, Department of Northern Affairs, of Povung-
nituk, assisted greatly in organization of the expedition. Dave Price contri-
buted a specimen of lumpfish from Richmond Gulf, and David Neave two
pike from Roggan River (both of the Department of Northern Affairs). The

178

The Canadian Field-Naturalist

Vol. 78

elegant drawings and map are by John Tottenham. To all these persons the
author is very grateful.

Summary
Distribution and ecological data are presented from the 1963 National
Museum of Canada expedition to eastern Hudson Bay. Twenty-eight marine
and freshwater fishes are reported. The known northern limits in Quebec of
Salvel'mus fojithialis, Prosopium cylindraceiim, Coregonus artedi, Coregonus
ckipeaformis, and Catostomus catostomiis are extended. Cyclopterm lumpus
and Stichaeus pwictatus are reported for the first time from eastern Hudson Bay.

References

Dunbar, M. J., and H. H. Hildebrand.
1952. Contribution to the study of the
fishes of Ungava Bay. Journal of the
Fisheries Research Board of Canada 9(2):
83-128, 1 fig.

Dymond, J. R. 1933. The coregonine
fishes of Hudson and James Bays. Contri-
butions to Canadian Biology and Fisheries,
New Series 8(2): 1-12.

Edwards, Robert L. 1961. The fishes of
Richmond Gulf, Ungava, Canada. Pro-
ceedings of the American Philosophical
Society 105(2) : 196-205, 2 fig.

Fowler, Henry W. 1961. Taxonomic
notes on fishes of the interior of the Un-
gava Peninsula. Journal Elisha Mitchill
Scientific Society 77(2) :309-311, 2 fig.

Harper, Francis. 1961. Field and his-
torical notes on fresh-water fishes of the
Ungava Peninsula and on certain marine
fishes of the north side shore of the Gulf
of St. Lawrence. Journal Elisha Mitchill
Scientific Society 77 (2): 3 12-342, 20 maps,
2 pi.

Jensen, A. S. 1948. Contributions to the
ichthyofauna of Greenland, 8-24. Skrifter
udgivet af Universitetets zoologiske
Museum K0benhavn 9:1-182.

Legendre, Vianney. 1961. Ogac ou morue
de roche, Gadus ogac Richardson 1836:
Synonymie et bibliographic. Naturaliste
Canadien 88(4): 85-93.

Legendre, Vianney, and Jacques Rousseau.
1949. La distribution de quelques-uns de

nos poissons dans le Quebec Arctique. An-
nales de I'ACFAS 15:133-135, 1 fig.

McAllister, D. E. 1960. Keys to the
marine fishes of Arctic Canada. Natural
History Papers, National Museum of
Canada (5): 1-21.

McPhail, J. D. 1961. A systematic study
of the Salvelimis alpinus complex in North
America. Journal of the Fisheries Research
Board of Canada 18(5) :793-816, 6 fig.

. 1963. Geographic variation in

North American ninespine sticklebacks
Pungitiiis pimgitius. Journal of the
Fisheries Research Board of Canada 20(1):
27-44, 6 fig.

Power, G. F., and D. R. Oliver. 1961.
Notes on the distribution and relative
abundance of fresh-water fish in Ungava.
Canadian Field-Naturalist 75(4) : 22 1-224,
1 fig.

ScoTT, W. B. 1960. Summaries of current
information on round whitefish and
mountain whitefish. Ontario Department
of Lands and Forests. Research Informa-
tion Paper (Fisheries) (8): 1-19.

Vladykov, Vadim D. 1933. Fishes from
the Hudson Bay region (except the Core-
gonidae). Contribution to Canadian Biol-
ogy and Fisheries, New Series 9(2):
13-61, 5 fig.

. 1936. Capsules d'oeufs de raies

d'Atlantique Canadian appartenant au
genre Raja. Naturaliste Canadien 63:
211-231, illus.

Received for publication 19 February 1964

THE FOOD HABITS OF THE RED-WINGED BLACKBIRD,
AGELAIUS PHOENICEUS, IN MANITOBA*

Ralph D. Bird and Lawrie B. Smith
Canada Department of Agriculture, Research Station, Winnipeg, Manitoba

The Red-avinged Blacbird, Agehrms phoeniceus (L,), has been shown to feed
on a variety of vegetable and animal material. Beal (1900), examined the
stomachs (gizzards) of 1083 Redwings collected throughout the United States
at various times of the year and found vegetable matter to be 73.4 per cent of
the yearly average with a large proportion being weed seeds. In farmed
areas the food of autumn concentrations of Red-wings has been found to be
mostly grain; rice in Arkansas (Neif and Meanley, 1957); corn in Ohio (Giltz
and Stockdale, 1960) and South Dakota (DeGrazio, 1961); and sunflowers,
wheat, oats, and barley in Saskatchewan (Hurd, 1962).

Allen (1914) studied the ecology of Red-winged Blackbirds in a cat-tail
marsh in New York and examined the stomachs of about 100 birds. He found
the food to be nearly 100 per cent vegetable in the spring and autumn, and 100
per cent insects in the mating and nesting periods.

This paper reports on food consumed by the Red-winged Blackbird and
the habitat occupied by the species during its period of residence in agricultural
and marsh areas, in south-central Manitoba, in 1960.

Materials and Methods
Southern Manitoba, no^v intensively cultivated, is situated in the aspen
parkland region of Western Canada (Bird, 1961). Red-winged Blackbirds
nest in emergent vegetation around bodies of water in the farming area and in
large marshes at a distance from cultivated land. Their use of nesting habitat
in two different types of areas gave an opportunity to compare their food habits
under disturbed conditions and under relatively natural conditions. Two
representative agricultural areas and a marsh were selected for study.

Area I. Simfloiver and cereal crop area near Altojia, Manitoba

Cereal crops, sunflowers, sugar beets, field peas, corn and alfalfa were
grown in this area, which is situated 80 miles southwest of Winnipeg near the
North Dakota boundary. A small breeding population of Red-winged Black-
birds occurred along Buffalo Creek. They nested in cattails, Typha latifolia
L., and bullrushes, Scirpus spp. In August and September thousands of
migrants formed night roosts in the rushes and ranged into the adjacent fields
to feed.

Area II. Cereal crop area northeast of Portage la Prairie, Manitoba

In this district, known locally as Flee Island, barley, wheat, and oats were
the main crops. No sunflowers or corn were grown and there was only a small

•Contribution No. 130 Canada Department of Agriculture Research Station, Winnipeg, Manitoba.

179

180 The Canadian Field-Naturalist Vol. 78

acreage of sugar beets and field peas. There was a small breeding population
of Red-winged Blackbirds in ponds and roadside ditches. Large flocks of
migrant Red-winged and Yellow-headed Blackbirds, Xanthocephahts xantho-
cephalus (Bonaparte), visited the fields to feed from roosts in the adjacent
marshes at the south end of Lake Manitoba from July 20 to October 15.

Area 111. Marsh area along the shore of Lake Manitoba near St. Ambroise,
Ma?iitoba

Large numbers of Red-winged and Yellow-headed Blackbirds nested in
dense stands of reed grass, Phragmites communis Trin. var. berlancUeri (Fourn.)
Fern., rushes and cattails. They fed in adjacent hay meadows and left the area
by August 20, as soon as the young were able to fiy. No grain fields w^ere
found within 10 miles.

The three study areas were visited every second week from May through
October in 1960. While the birds were nesting, typical study sites within these
areas were used for observations and collections. Later, flocks feeding in fields
and pastures, and returning to roosts within the areas were studied. The birds
were observed with a pair of 8 x 30 binoculars and a 15x telescope, and collec-
tions were made for gizzard analysis of at least four adults of each sex, and of
nestlings when present, from each study site, or from flocks. In 1960, 434
Red-winged Blackbirds were collected.

Gizzard and gullets were removed, shortly after the balckbirds were shot,
and preserved in 70% alcohol. The contents were examined in a petri dish
under a binocular microscope. A combined method of volumetric and
numerical analysis as recommended by McAtee (1912) and Hartley (1948)
was used. The volume of food, in alcohol, was measured in cubic centimeters
and the percentage of each item estimated by measurement over a quarter inch
grid. Individual seeds and insects were identified and counted when possible.

Results
Observations on the Ecology of the Red-winged Blackbird

Adult male Red-winged Blackbirds commenced to return in early April
but it was not until May 1 that they were abundant and had started to defend
territories. Females and immature males arrived about two weeks later than
the males. Nesting commenced shortly thereafter and the first eggs were
found on June 7. Nests were built in cattails, reed grass, sedges and willows
growing in shallow water. Some nests were found in patches of snowberry,
Symphoricarpos occidentalis Hack., in pastures adjacent to creeks or ponds
without suitable nesting sites but there was no nesting in fields of grain or
alfalfa as reported by Giltz and Stockdale (1960) for Ohio and Neff and
Meanley (1957) for Arkansas. Roadside ditches with water and sufficient
vegetation to support nests were utilized. A breeding population of 509 males
and females was counted in roadside ditches on a single trip on May 24 along
thirty miles of highway between Winnipeg and Poplar Point. Our observations
indicated that Red-winged Blackbirds nested readily close to cultivated fields
where grain gleanings and weed seeds were abundant since few breeding birds
were found in a community pasture between Areas II and III that appeared to

1964 Bird and Smith: Red-Winged Blackbird 181

contain suitable nesting habitat. However, larger marshes such as Area III
were used, but the birds left that area when the young were able to fly,
presumably to join flocks feeding in fields. The first fledgling was seen at the
end of June and the last in the first week of August. There was no indication
that there was more than one brood of young per breeding pair per season.

Flocks began to form as soon as the young were strong fliers. These flocks
ranged in size from four or five hundred to a thousand or more and were seen
feeding in fields during August and September. Most of the birds were
migrants, some leaving for the south as others moved in from the north. The
population was reduced by October and by the middle of the month only
stragglers were left.

The flocks were predominantly Red-winged Blackbirds but other species,
Yellow-headed Blackbirds; Brewer's Blackbirds, Euphagus cyanocephalus
(Wagler); Common Crackles; Brown-headed Cowbirds, Molothrus ater (Bod-
daert); and Starlings, Sturnus vulgaris L., were associated with them. Mature
males usually formed in flocks separate from those composed of females and
immature males.

During the flocking period the blackbirds spent the night in roosts. The
roost was usually in cattails, rushes or Fhragimtes growing in shallow water and
contained many thousands of birds. Suitable sites for night roosts were an
essential habitat requirement. Three were located in Area I and several were
known to occur in the marshes adjacent to Area II. The birds returned to the
roost during the hour before sunset and left the roost during the half hour after
sunrise. During the day they alternately fed in fields, drank at nearby water
(often a farm pond) and rested in adjacent trees between periods of feeding.
Water and trees close to food and suitable sites for night roosts were essential
requirements for blackbirds after the young were on the wing.

Analysis of the Food of the Red-winged Blackbird

The total volume of food and mineral grit found in the gullet and gizzard
increased with the season. The average, per bird, for May, June, July, August
and September was 1.25, 1.30, 1.60, 1.75 and 2.95 cc, respectively. Only after
the young were flying and flocks had begun to form was food retained in the
gullet, the quantity sometimes exceeding that in the gizzard. The mineral grit
was greatest when the vegetable food was greatest and was absent when the
diet was solely insects.

The food of the blackbirds in the agricultural districts. Areas I and II was
similar. When the birds returned in the spring the food averaged 90 per cent
vegetable material. Animal food, chiefly insects, increased to 70 per cent in
June and early July, when the young were being fed. Vegetable food again
became dominant when flocks commenced to form and was 69 to 94 per cent
of the total contents when the birds left on migration (Tables 1 and 2).
Although the adults continued to eat some vegetable food in June the nestlings
were fed entirely on insects.

The food of the blackbirds nesting in the large marsh, Area III, was almost
exclusively animal (Table 3). Some vegetable material was found in the

182

The Canadian Field-Naturalist

Vol. 78

■ u ...

•rt r-ioOrOfOfNr^rOT-^CMro

lO 00

^ro ^H

ro ro •*

Os ■^ "O \o ^ ro O

ID lO

Tt< ON 00

H^H

H^^

■rti ro O fN 04 I rrj | o

H^,

irj lO

H Uh

t^^ ICN lOOCNON^O-rt

O I fS I OCK

lO ID ID

CN 00

00 CN

in \o

CN ro

B
>
o

arr cs 03 o

«2 X

o ^

^o^

S <u *^

O! S"

Q oJ
a
a

-5 5 o ]2 a

^_cd w u-a E-n oj^
coP-itOp-c

o b

!^ C

1964

Bird and Smith: Red-Winged Blackbird

183

CN 'f ,3-J

lo lo lo o lo o o

O "0 O "-H "O CN o ■^ ro

o
o

si §

"-" '-I —

H^H,

f^^HHH

,H,

I ^^<z>^ ■

> —

,HH I H

T^ VO

,HH

H^H

s—
"<\

H I h

Hi I H I H

H I I HHH

,HH

ID CN CN l^ I I P<l ■rt r<i

(N I fO CN I I 1 •^ ■*

0\ '-I I CN

^1^ I <^ lO I <» I 1^^ O

H I IH

00 ^ C<1 I t^ cs

.HH I H

'HH I I H

— 1 oq

■^ ro

ro '-I

■^ "*

.hi o

0:; 3

0) txo
biO ?%

T3 ■"'

•c O

fti c

a-o o a 2 OJ g i; S

!" to g^^iH.^^j ro^

-O O

KQ,

184 The Canadian Field-Naturalist Vol. 78

gizzards of birds taken on May 24. This had probably been picked up when
the birds were migrating. Some of the birds taken on July 19 contained the
dehulled seeds of a grass.

The main items of vegetable food in Areas I and II were wheat, sunflowers,
oats, green foxtail, Setaria viridis (L.) Beauv., and barley (Tables 1 and 2).
Wheat averaged 37 per cent of the food in Area II but only 6 per cent in Area I.
Observations indicated that it was taken mostly as gleanings from the fields
since only mature kernels were found in the stomachs until mid-July when the
current crop began to ripen. After mid-September harvesting operations had
been completed in virtually all fields. But wheat was also removed from the
ripening heads in the late milk and dough stages. Sunflowers were very attrac-
tive to the blackbirds and made up 23 per cent of the gizzard contents of birds
collected in Area I. Flocks concentrated on therfi from the time the kernels
formed until the seed coat became too hard for them to break. They also
consumed gleanings from threshed fields. Oats were eaten in the milk and
dough stage and as gleanings. The hull was always removed. Green foxtail,
which was abundant in most of the fields, was consumed in large quantities.
Nine hundred and eighty-four seeds were found in one bird. Barley was eaten
in the milk and dough stage. No evidence was found of barley being eaten
after it was ripe. Sweet corn was eaten in gardens but field corn was not eaten
to any extent except as gleanings. Fields of soup peas were visited for insects
but the peas were not eaten.

Animal food was mainly insects and consisted mostly of pest species
grasshoppers e.g. Melanoplus bivittatus (Say) and Camimla pellucida (Scudd.)
lepidoptera e.g., the larvae of the beet webworm, Loxostege sticticalis (L.)
coleoptera e.g., the sweetclover weevil, Sitona cylmdricollis Fabr., and the
strawberry root weevil, Brachyrhimis ovatus (L.). The corn leaf aphid,
Rhopalosiphimi maidis (Fitch), the pea aphid, Macrosiphuni pisi (Harr.), and
the sugar-beet root aphid, Femphigus betae Doane, along with their predators,
lacewing larvae and syrphid larvae, were eaten. Carabid beetles were often
consumed, particularly in the spring and fall. Recently emerged damselflies
and chironomids were taken in the early summer. Spiders and harvestmen
(Phalangida) were eaten to a limited extent throughout the season.

The soft parts of insects were quickly digested, but the hard parts, particu-
larly the jaws and the chitinous plate found on each side of the knee of the hind
legs of grasshoppers were retained for grit. One gizzard contained 44 jaws
and 77 chitinous plates.

Summary
In southern Manitoba the food of the Red-winged Blackbird consisted
of up to 90 per cent vegetable material in the spring and again in the autumn.
It was composed of the seeds of cereal crops, sunflowers, and weeds. In June
and July, animal food, mostly insects, was dominant and represented up to 70
per cent in agricultural areas and 100 per cent in a large marsh. Young were
fed entirely on animal food. When insect food increased, mineral grit de-
creased, its function apparently being carried out by the hard parts of insects.

1964

Bird and Smith: Red- Winged Blackbird

185

Table 3. — Gullet and gizzard content of the Red-winged Blackbird from the marsh area

at St. Ambroise, Man., in 1960

May

June

July

Aug.

Date

Total

Number of Blackbirds

Total Volume of Food cc

7.1

6.3

8.0

9.5

14.2

4.6

2.3

52.0

Average

Vegetable Food

Sunflower

0.5

—

Incidental and Undetermined

4.0

—

Animal Food

Snails

Phalangida

—

Spiders

—

Insects

Odonata (Damselflies)

—

Orthoptera

—

Lepidoptera

—

Coleoptera

Carabidae

Diptera

—

Incidental & Undetermined

—

1.0

—

100

Mineral Grit

T .

0.5

"Less than 0-5%

Differences in the food items consumed by the birds in different areas were due
to differences in local abundance of foodstuffs.

Food consumption per bird increased as the season progressed and in the
autumn flocking period food was stored in the gullet.

Red-winged Blackbirds nested close to agricultural land when suitable sites
were available. They also nested readily in large marshes remote from agricul-
ture. In August and September they gathered in large flocks to feed in the
fields. They required trees for resting and water for drinking close to a food
supply. A suitable site for a night roost within a few miles of the feeding area
was also essential.

The Red-winged Blackbird has adapted itself to changes brought about
by agriculture and has benefited from an abundant food supply. It still utilizes
nesting sites in remote marshes but appears to abandon them for cultivated areas
as soon as the young are able to fly.

ACKNOWLEDGM ENTS

We wish to thank Dr. W. R. Richards, Entomology Research Institute,
Canada Department of Agriculture, Ottawa, for identification of aphids, H. A.

186 The Canadian Field-Naturalist Vol. 78

Hochbaum and Dr. F. M. McKinney of Delta Wildfowl Research Station,
Delta, Manitoba for helpful suggestions and information on blackbird behaviour;
and Professor A, de Vos and Dr. David A. Munro for criticism of the manu-
script.

References

Allen, A. A. 1914. The Redwinged Black- The Redwinged Blackbird Story. Special

bird: A study in the ecology of a cattail Circular 95, Ohio Agricultural Experiment

marsh. Proceedings Linnean Society New Station.

York, Nos. 24-25: 43-123. Hartley, P. H. T. 1948. The assessment of

Beal, F. B. L. 1900. Food of the bobolink, the food of birds. Ibis 90: 363-381.

blackbirds and grackles. United States De- Hurd, A. E. 1962. Prevention of crop

partment of Agriculture, Division of Bio- damage caused by blackbirds. The Blue

logical Survey, Bulletin 13, 77 pp. Jay 22: 110-111.

Bird, R. D. 1961. Ecology of the aspen McAtee, W. L. 1912. Methods of estimat-

parkland of Western Canada. PubUcation ing the contents of bird stomachs. Auk

1066, Canada Department of Agriculture. 29: 449-464.

DeGrazio, John W. 1961. Cooperative in- Meanley, Brooke. 1961. Tlie distribution,

vestigations on blackbird depredation con- ecology and population dynamics of black-

trol in the vicinity of Sand Lake Nat. birds. Report Patuxent WildHfe Research

Wildlife Refuge, South Dakota. Progress Center.

Report No. 1. Bureau of Sport Fisheries Neff, J. A. and B. Meanley. 1957. Black-

and WildHfe, Denver Wildlife Research birds and the Arkansas rice crop. Arkansas

Center, Denver, Colorado. Agricultural Experimental Station (Fay-

GiLTz, M. L. and T. M. Stockdale. 1960. etteville) , Bulletin 584.
Received for pubhcation 20 February 1964

ADDITIONAL RECORDS AND A CORRECTION OF THE

TYPE LOCALITY FOR THE BOREAL CHORUS

FROG IN NORTHWESTERN ONTARIO

Francis R. Cook
National Museum of Canada, Ottawa, Ontario

Collections of amphibians from northwestern Ontario are few and the present
range maps are often inadequate for even the commonest species. This is
particularly true for the Boreal Chorus Frog, Fseiidacris triseriata inaculata
(the choice of scientific name for this form is discussed at the end of this paper) .
Logier and Toner (1961, p. 38) list and map its Ontario occurrences as:
''Cochrane Dist., Fort Albany (ROM). Patricia Dist., Akimiski Island (PC:
F. R. Gelbach). Fort Severn (ROM). Raijiy River Dist. Emo (ROM)." One
additional locality listed with the above but received too late to include on
their map was ''Thimder Bay Dist., Connor Twp. (PC: A. E. AUin)." This
should be corrected to O'Connor Township, which is 20-25 miles almost due
west of Fort William (PC: A. E. Allin, August 15, 1963).

On the afternoon of May 20, 1963, the writer heard several Boreal Chorus
Frogs calling from small roadside ponds 10 miles northeast on Hwy. 11 of
Beardmore, Ontario. One specimen (NMC 7077) was collected at that time.

1964

Cook: Boreal Chorus Frog 187

The area was boreal forest with tamarack, black spruce and aspen predomin-
ating. The chorus frogs were calling from three small, shallow grass-edged
ponds in roadside clearings. The locality was revisited after dark and eight
more specimens (NMC 7081) were obtained. Only about a half dozen addi-
tional individuals were heard calling. Other species collected at this area, in
roadside ponds or along the nearby flooded edge of a small lake, were Rmia
clavnta?is, Rcma sylmtica and Hyla criicifer. The latter was in full breeding
chorus and 68 specimens were collected. Tiny Raiia sylvatica tadpoles were
taken still clustered around the disintegrating egg mass from which they had
hatched. The afternoon had been warm and partly sunny but temperatures
dropped rapidly during the evening and most of the collecting after dark was
done during a light but steady snowfall.

A survey was made along Hwy. 1 1 to Geraldton by car, stopping period-
ically to listen for chorus frogs. They were heard at the following localities
(recorded by nearest town and distance from it by Hwy. 11): Jellicoe, 1 mi.
E. (few), 11.6 mi. E. (several); Geraldton, 13.7 mi. W. (few), 12.2 mi. W.
(one), 0.8 mi. W. (one). Falling evening temperatures made an auditory
survey east of Geraldton impractical.

The range extension to Geraldton diminishes, to some extent, the eastern
gap between records from the western end of Lake Superior and those from
James Bay. Geraldton is about 150 miles northeast of O'Connor Township
and 290 miles southwest of Fort Albany.

It is interesting to note that during field studies in the Lake Nipigon area
in 1921, 1922 and 1924 by E. B. S. Logier of the Royal Ontario Museum this
species was not found (Logier, 1928). As his studies were made in June, July
and August it is likely the species escaped notice because its breeding season
had ended.

A few additional Ontario locality records are available. The Royal
Ontario Museum has five unreported specimens from Halfway Point, Cochrane
District, collected June 1, 1942. Halfway Point is listed in the Ontario volume
of the Gazetteer of Canada (p. 226) as on the west shore of James Bay at 51°
54' N., 80° 45' W. This is a slight eastward extension of the range along
James Bay from the published limit. Fort Albany, 52° 14' N., 81° 36' W. One
ROM specimen from Goldpines, Patricia District, collected in 1935 had been
previously cited by Smith (1956). The National Museum of Canada has three
unreported specimens (NMC 7036) from Big Trout Lake, collected by D. H.
Johnston, June 20, 1961. This is the village at 53° 49' N., 89° 53' W., 170
miles southwest of Fort Severn, rather than any of the numerous bodies of
water in Ontario by that name.

Dr. A. E. Allin of Fort William, who is familiar with the call of this species,
has kindly contributed the following auditory records: Rossport, April 18,
1938; April 28, 1939; April 11, 1941; April 23,' 1946; May 25, 1946, and Fort
William, May 2, 1946 (PC: August 15, 1963). Rossport, on Lake Superior, is
85 miles due east of Fort William and 67 miles southwest of Geraldton. It
is the easternmost locality known for the subspecies along the north shore of
Lake Superior. Dr. Allin (PC: October 3, 1963) has also provided additional

188 The Canadian Field-Naturalist Vol. 78

records of when the species was heard, usually the "first heard" of the year,
from his series, The Canadia?! Lakehead, published in The Flicker. All of these
records are from the Thunder Bay District and are as follows: April 10, 1955
(The Flicker 27(2): 88); April 22, 1956 (The Flicker 28(2): 75); April 20,
1958 (The Flicker 30(2): 62); April 26, 1959 [at Whitefish Lake] (The Flicker
31(2): 49); April 28, 1960 (The Flicker 32(3): 95); April 21, 1961 (The
Flicker 33(3): 79). The Whitefish Lake locality is southwest of O'Connor
Township. In addition, Mr. Kenneth Campbell of Peterborough had reported
that he collected, recorded and photographed this species within the city limits
of Port Arthur in 1949 and 1950, and that it was heard commonly all over
the district (PC: August 24, 1963).

Dr. Allin (PC: October 3, 1963) also heard the species at Emo, April 26,
1951 (This record was noted in his article in The Flicker 24(2): 92-93, June
1952). On May 27, 1959, the writer heard it calling fairly continuously from
roadside ponds and ditches while driving from Fort Frances to Kenora via Hwy.
71 and 70, and from Kenora to the Manitoba border via Hwy. 17. One
specimen (NMC 4470) was collected at Dryden, June 28, 1960. The species
was heard at numerous localities along Hwy. 17 from 23.3 miles south-
east of Borups Corners to the Manitoba border. May 1, 1962. All of the above
localities are shown in Figure 1.

The nine specimens collected 10 miles northeast of Beardmore (NMC
7077, 7081) vary in snout-vent length from 25 to 29 mm. The tibia divided
by the snout-vent length gives percentages of 33 to 36 with a mean of 34.1%.
The Dryden specimen (NMC 4470) had a snout- vent length of 27 mm with
a tibia/snout- vent percentage of 37. These are well below the 39.3% mean
for the tibia/snout-vent percentage reported for the short-legged Boreal
Chorus Frog by Smith (1956). Specimens reported here were measured after
they had been killed with ether and before they were preserved. They would
be expected to average less than Smith's figures as the latter were taken from
preserved specimens. Bleakney (1959, pp. 202-203) has pointed out that dif-
ferential shrinkage is common in preserved specimens. However, the per-
centage is enough below Smith's figure to indicate agreement even allowing
for differential shrinkage.

The eastern limit of the Boreal Chorus Frog is still to be determined. The
night previous (May 19) to the collections reported here from the Beardmore-
Geraldton area was spent at Hearst, about 150 miles northeast. Due to snow
and cool temperatures no amphibians of any species were heard.

By retracing the field work back to May 16, it is possible to show a real
hiatus between the Boreal and Western chorus frogs. The evening of May 18
was spent collecting in the area around Kenogami Lake (the northernmost of
the three solid triangles in Figure 1). Rana sylvatica, Hyla cnrcifer and Bufo
americcmus were calling in large choruses. A few Rana pipiens, although not
calling, were collected. The evening of May 17 was spent collecting along
Hwy. 17, 13'/2 to lOYz miles south of North Bay (southeasternmost of the three
solid triangles in Figure 1). Hyla crucifer and Bufo americaiius were calling
in large choruses. A few Rana pipiens and Hyla versicolor were calling, and

1964

Cook: Boreal Chorus Frog

189

Figure 1. Distribution of Chorus Frogs in Ontario.
Boreal Chorus Frog (northwestern Ontario) : solid circles = published records, half-
filled circles = new records (museum specimens) reported in this paper, hollow circles
= new auditory records reported in this paper.

Western Chorus Frog (southern and eastern Ontario) : solid squares = published records
from Logier and Toner 1961, hollow squares = auditory records reported in this paper.
Solid triangles are localities in central Ontario given in the text where Chorus Frogs
are known to be absent.

Rania clamitmis and Rana septentrionalis, although not heard, were also col-
lected. At both of these localities ideal weather conditions prevailed. If
Pseudacris occurred in these areas it certainly would have been heard calling.

The evening of May 1 6 was spent at Renfrew, which is within the range of
the other Ontario chorus frog subspecies, the Western Chorus Frog, Pseudacris
triseriata triserima. Pseudacris t. triseriata, Hyla crucifer, Bufo americanus
and Rami pipiens were noted calling. The limit in eastern Ontario for the

190 The Canadian Field-Naturalist Vol. 78

Western Chorus Frog is at or near 7 miles southeast of Pembroke. On April
28-29, 1962, the writer noted Fseudacris calling from roadside ponds and ditches
along Hwy. 17 from Ottawa to this point but not beyond (see Figure 1). Other
known limital records for the Western Chorus Frog in Ontario are given by
Logier and Toner (1961, pp. 36-37) and are shown in Figure 1.

Some additional evidence is available for the gap between the two Ontario
subspecies of Fseudacris in central Ontario. On May 24, 1959, the writer
heard a loud chorus of breeding amphibians from roadside ponds at 2.1 miles
east on Hwy. 17 of Narin Centre (south westernmost of the three solid triangles
in Figure 1). Hyla crucijer, Hyla versicolor, Rana pipiens and Btifo mneri-
cctnus were represented but no Fseudacris were heard. Logier (1942) did not
find Fseudacris in the Sault Ste. Marie, Ontario, region. C. Bruce Powell col-
lected for the National Museum of Canada at Massey, Ontario, from August 24
to September 3, 1963, without finding chorus frogs, although 568 specimens of
other herptiles were taken during this time. Unfortunately, both of the latter
studies were carried out after the Fseudacris breeding season and auditory
checks were not possible.

Available data strongly suggest that, although the eastern limit of the
Boreal Chorus Frog is not yet known, its apparent separation from the closely
related Western Chorus Frog in Ontario as shown on previous range maps
(Conant, 1958; Logier and Toner, 1961) is real. Auditory surveys during the
peak of the spring amphibian breeding season in the critical area between the
presently known limits of the two subspecies will eventually establish the area
of separation. As shown by Bleakney (1959) auditory surveys at this time
give positive evidence for the presence or absence of Fseudacris.

Although Harper (1963) has recently expressed reservations on the validity
of the Boreal Chorus Frog as a distinct subspecies, it is accepted here pending
further study. Collection and analysis of several thousand specimens of this
form from the Canadian Prairies, which should shed light on the problem, is in
progress as part of a general study of that region.

Some Beardmore specimens in life exhibited the green color phase which
is typical of many individuals from the Canadian Prairies. This color does
not occur in several hundred Ontario Fseudacris triseriata triseriata which have
been examined. Some specimens exhibit the spotted pattern which is fairly
frequent in the northern form but rare in triseriata. Although neither of these
characters seems taxonomically significant in separating these subspecies, they
do emphasize a difference in their gene pools. The best character for separating
this subspecies seems to be the tibia/snout-vent ratio as outlined by Smith
(1956).

The correct scientific name for the Boreal Chorus Frog has been a matter
of contention. Despite recent papers recommending nomenclature changes,
Logier and Toner (1961) and Harper (1963) have retained the name Fseuda-
cris nigrita septentrionalis Boulenger. Smith (1956) re-evaluated the range of
the subspecies and pointed out that the subspecies name macidata Agassiz 1850
should supplant septentrionalis Boulenger 1882. A subsequent change in the
species name became necessary when Schwartz (1957) presented evidence that

1964 Cook: Boreal Chorus Frog 191

the Fseudacris nigrita complex should be treated as two species, P. nigrita and
P. triseriata. The latter separation has been questioned but is, at least tent-
atively, widely used (e.g. Conant, 1958). Boreal Chorus Frog is a subspecies of
the Pseudacris triseriata group.

The problem of macidata vs. septentrionalis centers around Agassiz's failure
to record where he collected the specimens on which he based his description
of Hylodes macidatus {in Agassiz and Cabot, 1850, pp. 378-379). Nor is there
any indication of this locality in Cabot's narrative in the same volume (pp.
11-133). However, Cope (1899, pp. 345-346) in placing Hylodes macidatus
in the synonymy of Chorophilus triseriatus gave a description based on
"Professor Agassiz's typical specimen," and noted three specimens from "Lake
Superior, north shore; Prof. L. Agassiz." ' Barbour and Loveridge (1929, p.
281) also gave the locality as "Lake Superior" and listed two specimens, number
38, as the types of Hylodes macidatus. They indicated that this name was a
synonym of Pseudacris nigrita. Schmidt (1953, p. 75) placed the name in the
synonymy of Pseudacris nigrita triseriata and restricted the type locality to
"vicinity of Sault Ste. Marie." As Harper (1963) has pointed out there is
no indication whether he intended it to apply to the locality in Ontario or
the one in Michigan, and if he intended the Ontario locality the restriction is
invalid as no Pseudacris are known from that part of Ontario.

As the specimens were collected from Lake Superior according to Cope
(1889) and Barbour and Loveridge (1929) they must have come from the north
shore at or east of about 20 miles west of Fort William, the most westerly point
of the expedition according to Cabot's narrative (iti Agassiz and Cabot, 1850,
pp. 11-133). Specimens from this area were correctly assigned to the Boreal
Chorus Frog by Smith (1956) and macidata must therefore replace septentrio-
nalis as he suggested. Previous assignments of macidata to the synonymy
of nigrita or triseriata are invalid. Pseudacris is known along the north shore
of Lake Superior only as far east as Rossport, although it may yet be found
farther east. Lacking any other evidence, the type locality has to be arbitrarily
chosen from somewhere within this area. As the Boreal Chorus Frog occurs
at Fort William and the expedition is known to have stopped and explored
there {in Agassiz and Cabot, 1850, p. 80-88), the corrected type locality
designated here is the vicinity of Fort William, Ontario. This correction is in
accordance with Recommendation 72E of the 1961 International Code of
Zoological Nomenclature which states (p. 77) that "If a type locality was
erroneously designated or restricted, it should be corrected."

The correct name for the Boreal Chorus Frog is Pseudacris triseriata
maculata. Its synonymy is that presented by Smith (1956) with the addition
of the change in species name from Pseudacris nigrita to Pseudacris triseriata
according to Schwartz (1957) and the type locality corrected to "the vicinity
of Fort William, Ontario" of this paper.

Acknowledgments
The writer would like to express his appreciation to Dr. A. E. AUin for
permission to use his unpublished data and for compiling a list of the records
which he published in The Flicker; to Kenneth Campbell for contributing

192 The Canadian Field-Naturalist Vol. 78

unpublished records and to Dr. W. B. Scott and Dr. E. J. Grossman for the
loan of specimens in the Royal Ontario Museum.

Particular thanks are due to R. A. Henry and C, Bruce Powell who assisted
in the field in 1960 and 1963 respectively, and to Joyce C. Cook who prepared
the map.

Summary

Nine specimens collected 10 miles northeast of Beardmore on May 20,
1963, and auditory records between this point and Geraldton extend the range
of the Boreal Chorus Frog eastward in northwestern Ontario. Additional
records for northeastern Ontario, including Halfway Point, an eastern extension
along James Bay, and Rossport, an eastern extension along Lake Superior,
are reported.

The reported gap between the range limit of the Boreal Chorus Frog and
the Western Chorus Frog is real as substantiated by three localities between
the known range of the two subspecies where no Fseiidacris were calling during
observations at the height of the spring amphibian breeding period.

The nomenclatorial problem of the correct scientific name for the Boreal
Chorus Frog is discussed and the name Pseudacris triseriata nmculata is
accepted. The erroneous type locality restriction of Schmidt (1953) is
rejected and a replacement, vicinity of Fort William, Ontario, is designated.

References

Agassiz, Louis and J. Elliot Cabot. 1850. gation of the Lake Nipigon region, Ontario

Lake Superior: its physical character, Transactions of the Royal Canadian In-

vegetation, and animals, compared with stitute 16 pt. 2):233-291.

those of other and similar regions. Boston. . 1942. Reptiles and amphibians

pp. i-xii, 9-428, 16 pi. 1 map. of the Sauk Ste. Marie region, Ontario.

Barbour, Thomas and Arthur Loveridge. pp. 154-163 In Snyder, L. L., E. B. S.
1929. Typical reptiles and amphibians. Logier and T. B. Kurata. 1942. A faunal
Bulletin of the Museum of Comparative investigation of the Sauk Ste. Marie re-
Zoology 69(10) : 205-360. gion, Ontario. Transactions of the Royal

Bleakney, Sherman. 1959. Post glacial Canadian Institute 24(pt. 1) : 99-165.

dispersal of the Western Chorus Frog in Logier, E. B. S. and G. C. Toner. 1961.

eastern Canada. The Canadian Field-Nat- Check list of the amphibians and reptiles

uralist 73 (4): 197-205. of Canada and Alaska. Royal Ontario

Conant, Roger. 1958. A field guide to Museum, Life Sciences Division, Contri-

reptiles and amphibians of the United bution No. 53:1-92.

States and Canada east of the 100th meri- Schmidt, Karl P. 1953. A check list of

dian. Houghton Mifflin Co., Boston, pp. North American amphibians and reptiles,

i-xv, 1-366. Sixth Edition. American Society of Ich-

CoPE, E. D. 1889. The Batrachia of North thyologists and Herpetologists. pp. i-viii,

America. Bulletin of the United States 1-280.

National Museum 34:1-524. Schwartz, Albert. 1957. Chorus Frogs

Harper, Francis. 1963. Amphibians and {Pseudacris nigrita LeConte) in South

reptiles of Keewatin and northern Mani- Carolina. American Museum Novitates

toba. Proceedings of the Biological So- No. 1838:1-12.

ciety of Washington 76:159-168. Smith, Philip W. 1956. The status, cor-

Logier, E. B. S. 1928. The amphibians and rect name, and geographic range of the

reptiles of the Lake Nipigon region, pp. Boreal Chorus Frog. Proceedings of the

279-291 In Dymond, J. R., L. L. Snyder Biological Society of Washington 69:

and E. B. S. Logier, 1928. A faunal investi- 169-176.

Received for publication 26 February 1964

REVIEWS

The Last Horizon

By Raymond F. Dasman. The MacMillan
Company, New York (CoUier-MacMillan
Canada Ltd., Toronto). 1963. vi + 279 pp.

$8.00.

"There are many ways of life that
remain with us today that seem already
doomed unless some cogent reasons for
maintaining them can be discovered . . .
It is difficult, however, to attract people's
attention to such problems as these under
the present circumstances. . . . Our
people are too baffled or too cynical to
be much interested in a crusade, yet
once more a crusade is needed, one to
keep this world a fit place for people,
all kinds of people."

At a time when the complexity of
controversial issues often drives the pro-
fessional biologist into a non-commital
refuge of pure scientific objectivity,
Dasman has penned a strongly crusading
and self-admittedly opinionated sum-
mary of man's ever-increasing effects on
his environment. He presents some
straightforward reasons for restraints on
the seemingly inevitable destruction of
every last untouched refugia of the pre-
civilized "natural" world.

From two thought-provoking intro-
ductory chapters which stress the rapid-
ness with which man has accelerated his
obliteration of the former landscape,
Dasman traces the means and types of
change and points out ho-sv often a single
purpose has prevailed over a perspective
of potential over-all effects. These chap-
ters cover grassland, fire, introductions,
forestry, arctic and boreal regions, the
last wild game herds and islands. The
two concluding chapters dwell on the
human population explosion and the
increasing world uniformity in habitat
and culture. The coverage is necessarily
brief but a thirteen page bibliography
documents the text by chapters.

It is possible that books stressing the
rate at which the destruction of the
world flora and fauna is being accom-
plished and the need for strong measures
for conservation are merely an exercise
in futility in a world seemingly commit-
ted to discovering the maximum number
of human beings that can be crowded
onto a finite planet. However, if the tide
can be stemmed, Dasman has produced
an eloquent and readable contribution.
It should be read by every biologist,
naturalist, and "nature-lover", and per-
haps especially by those in other spheres
of interest with little previous inclina-
tion or sympathy toward conservation.
Francis R. Cook

Where is that Vanished Bird?

By Paul Hahn. 1963. Royal Ontario Mu-
seum, Toronto. 347 pp. $3.50.

The late Paul Hahn's deep interest in
extinct birds goes back to 1887 when, as
a 12-year-old boy living in Germany,
he was appalled by the accounts of the
shocking slaughter of Passenger Pigeons
that was taking place in North America.
Some years later he moved to Canada
and, in 1902, when he first saw a mount-
ed specimen of the Passenger Pigeon he
was impressed by its beauty and sadden-
ed by the certainty that never again
would anyone see the incredible flocks
that once darkened the sun.

This was the beginning of a lifelong
avocation of searching out and acquiring
specimens of the Passenger Pigeon. He
donated these to the Royal Ontario Mu-
seum where they are now safely preserv-
ed for scientific purposes. No less than
seventy were acquired by Hahn, many
of which were thus saved from eventual
destruction by insects, fire, or neglect.

In 1957, he became curious to know
how many specimens of the Passenger

193

194

The Canadian Field-Naturalist

Vol. 78

Pigeon are preserved in other institutions
and private collections throughout the
vi^orld. He prepared and widely distri-
buted a questionnaire requesting infor-
mation on specimens of this and six other
extinct, or nearly extinct, North Ameri-
can bird species. In the course of five
years he received over one thousand
replies -which showed the following
numbers of specimens preserved as skins
or mounts, or as skeletons, in various
parts of the world:

Passenger Pigeon (1532; also 16 skele-
tons); Eskimo Curlew (365; 2 skeletons);
Great Auk (78; 2 skeletons); Ivory-bill-
ed Woodpecker (413; 5 skeletons)
Whooping Crane (309; 8 skeletons)
Carolina Parakeet (720; 16 skeletons)
Labrador Duck (54; no skeletons).

The book gives all the basic data
furnished by the owners concerning each
specimen, including (when known) the
name and address of the present owner,
catalogue number, sex, collecting date
and locality, and name of collector. In
the case of many specimens of the Great
Auk and Labrador Duck extensive his-
torical notes concerning the individual
specimens are given. This valuable and
interesting record of vanishing data is an
appropriate memorial to the enthusiasm
and dedication of Mr. Hahn, who died
on July 20, 1962.

W. Earl Godfrey

Fishes of the Western North Atlantic

By H. B. Bigelow, M. G. Bradbury, J. R.
Dymond, J. R. Greeley, S. F. Hildebrand,
G. W. Mead, R. R. Miller, L. R. Rivas,

W. C. SCHROEDER, R. D. SUTTKUS, V. D.

Vladykov. Memoir of the Sears Founda-
tion for Marine Research, New Haven.
Number 1, Part 3, 1963 (?1964), 630 pp.,
129 fig., 2 maps, $27.50.

The most recent part of this monu-
mental work has just been issued. The
text quality of the preceding volumes
has on the whole been maintained. The
extensive descriptions and synonymies,

the carefully constructed keys, and the
figures of adults and in some cases larvae
will make this work the starting point
for much future research.

The reviewer's general comments are
few. Some authors have neglected to
examine as large or as geographically
extensive a series of specimens as might
be desirable. In several sections a region-
al bias is exhibited. Most of the charac-
ters in the descriptions of some families
(Engraulidae, Clupeidae, Elopidae and
Albulidae) are external. In some species
descriptions, characters which the au-
thor should have examined himself are
given from the literature, e.g. "Branchi-
ostegal rays 10-11 reported." (p. 509),
"Pyloric caeca, average 38.4 reported."
(p. 527). Common names are capitalized.

Some minor errors have crept in.
Branchiostegals are present in some fos-
sil Dipnoi and one is present in acipen-
seroids; the polyodontoids lack the sub-
operculum (p. 5, etc.). A small gular is
present in Albula (p. 132). Clupea haren-
gus is the type-species of the genus
Clupea not "by implication (unquestion-
ed)" but by selection by Gill, 1861. The
types of some of the other genera are
not correctly cited.

In this volume are included the orders
Acipenseroidei, Lepisostei, and in part,
the Isospondyli. The long sections on the
Atlantic salmon, Arctic charr, brook
charr and tarpon will be of particular
interest to the angler.

Although the part is dated 1963, the
reviewer did not receive his copy until
1964. The most recent reference found
in a quick perusal was 1961. It is to be
hoped that future manuscripts will be
published more rapidly although the task
in a multi-authored volume is not easy.

Another problem is the rising price
of the volumes. The first was $10, the
second $15; the present one is $27.50. At
the present rate of price increase and
since less than one-quarter of the fishes
are yet covered, only millionaires will be
able to buy the last volumes! While the
volumes are large and use the finest

1964

Reviews

195

paper and binding, they do not have
coloured plates and are published in
large editions; therefore one would
think that $27.50 per volume is some-
what excessive.

Despite the high price, it is an essen-
tial reference for the working ichthyo-
logist. Its style renders it readable to the
intelligent amateur. It would grace the
shelves of both.

D. E. McAllister

National Museum of Canada
Ottawa, Ontario

Fish and Wildlife: A Memorial to W. J.
K. Harkness

Edited by J. R. Dymond. Longmans Canada
Ltd., Toronto. 214 pp. Frontispiece.

$6.00.

Among the contributions of the fifteen
authors are: The naturalist in modem
society, The need for a habitat, Aninial
numbers and behavior, The fisheries of
the Great Lakes, How -are fisheries ?nan-
aged, A philosophy of conservation, and
The footsteps of a sportsman, as well as
sketches of Harkness. Among the not-
able scientists and authors who contri-
bute are Gregory Clark, J. R. Dymond,
W. E. Ricker, Dennis Chitty, E. J. Fry,
W. M. Sprules and C. H. D. Clarke. The
variety of topics bespeaks the breadth of
W. J. Harkness' interests.

Despite the shortness of the articles
each adequately covers its topic. Despite
the diversity in authors the editor has
managed to infuse a unity of style. Tech-
nical problems of limnology and popu-
lation dynamics are discussed in clear
English. The writing is almost error free,
and is free of sentiment.

The vignettes of the man and articles
on fish and wildlife will provide several
evenings of pleasant and thoughtful
reading.

The book is a fine and useful tribute
to the memory of W. J. K. Harkness.

D. E. McAllister

National Museum of Canada
Ottawa, Ontario

Rowan Field Notes — A Review

When Dr. Wm. Rowan died on June
30, 1957, he left a considerable amount of
unpublished written material, much of it
pertaining to the ornithology of the pro-
vince of Alberta. Some of this was pur-
chased by the University of Alberta and
deposited in the Library of that institu-
tion. Among it were his journals, con-
tained in a series of volumes entitled
"Ornithological and other notes by Wm.
Rowan". These journals cover the period
from 1908 to June 5, 1957; the entries
for the first few years however, are quite
brief and apparently were made from
recollections at a later date. The earlier
volumes especially contain much illus-
trative material in the form of sketches,
wash drawings, and photographs. Each
of the volumes is indexed. Some of the
volumes cover periods of more than one
calendar year and many of them do not
begin and end with a calendar year.

A typewritten transcription of these
journals has been made and, under the
title "Rowan Field Notes", has been
bound into six volumes. Volume I in-
cludes notes of the period 1908 - May
15, 1921; Volume II, May 16, 1921 - Oct.
22, 1929; Volume III, Mar. 17, 1930 -
Dec. 11, 1935; Volume IV, Feb. 15, 1936

- Jan. 4, 1943; Volume V, Jan. 14, 1943

- Dec. 29, 1951; and Volume VI, Jan. 4,
1952 - June 5, 1957.

The transcription is a reasonably good
but not an exact copy of Rowan's Jour-
nals. It contains some omissions of words
and phrases and many errors of spelling,
grammar and English, many of which
reflect the inability of the transcriber to
read Rowan's handwriting or to under-
stand his scientific and colloquial expres-
sions. The original journals of course,
are not entirely devoid of such errors.
Illustrative material is not copied into
the transcription but a short verbal des-
cription of each illustration appears in
its place. The volumes are well bound
but the transcription, which was not

196

The Canadian Field-Naturalist

Vol. 78

initially intended for publication, is on
unsuitably flimsy paper.

During the first years of his residence
in Alberta, Rowan was an enthusiastic
field-man whose major interest was the
shorebirds. At that time these birds oc-
curred on migration in great abundance
and variety at Beaverhills Lake about 50
miles east of Edmonton. Here he camped
during the migration periods making
observations and collections of skins. His
field notes for this period are quite com-
prehensive reflecting perhaps the enthus-
iasm engendered by sights new to him.
These early journals are of particular
interest since they provide present-day
ornithologists with some basis for com-
parison. For example. Rowan, who never
missed the spectacular, gives only pass-
ing mention to Snow Geese in the 1920's
while today they stop over in the area
in tens of thousands. His interest in the
shorebirds also led him to the muskeg
areas northwest of Edmonton where he
found snipe, dowitchers, and Greater
and Lesser yellowlegs nesting.

In later volumes one can trace chang-
ing enthusiasms, taxonomy being on the
wane and physiology in the ascent.
There are references to the canaries and
j uncos caged in his backyard for early
experiments on the effects of changing
light and activity periods. His stories of
attempts, not always successful, to cap-
ture crows to prove his hypothesis are
sometimes amusing, sometimes almost
pathetic. Descriptions of his experiments
are not included. Still later his interest
in cycles of abundance of some bird and
mammal populations is evidenced by
lists of weights of game birds taken by
himself and his friends. At this time
descriptions of hunting expeditions form
a large part of the journals.

One does not read far before realizing
that Rowan was inclined to overlook or
ignore certain groups of birds. If the
journals are any indication there are
some species not uncommon in Alberta
which rarely if ever came under his ob-
servation. The passerines in general re-

ceive little attention; one may look in
vain in some volumes for mention of
warblers, thrushes, or flycatchers. Birds
of prey, which were still abundant when
he arrived in Alberta, receive little more
than passing mention. Records of num-
bers are rarely precise and seem at times
devoid of the objectivity expected of a
scientist.

Among the ornithological notes are
interspersed numerous references to his
family, his friends, his acquaintances and
his pets. Characteristically his pithy
comments usually serve to give a more
vivid picture of their author than of
their subjects, often revealing unexpect-
ed facets of his personality. His opinions
are expressed freely and forcefully.
Rowan was not one to sit on a fence.

It is doubtful that the Rowan journals
will be published in any but this present
form. Copies of the typewritten tran-
scription bound in six volumes have been
placed on the shelves of the Library of
the University of Alberta. They form
a part of the regular Library collection
and are made available to readers under
the usual Library regulations.

W. Ray Salt

Department of Anatomy
University of Alberta
Edmonton, Alberta

Other New Titles

Queen Elizabeth Island Game Survey
1961

By John S. Tener, Canadian Wildlife Serv-
ice Occasional Papers No. 4. 1964. 50 pp.
-|- map. (Queen's Printer, Ottawa).
Age Determination in the Polar Bear
By T. H. Manning. Canadian Wildlife Serv-
ice Occasional Papers No. 5. 1964. 12 pp.
A Wildlife Biologist Looks at Sampling
Data Processing and Computers
By Denis A. Benson. Canadian Wildlife
Service Occasional Papers No. 6. 1964.
16 pp.
Rabiolaria in Plankton from Arctic Drift-
ing Station T-3, Including the description
of three new species

By KuNiGUNDE HuLSEMAN. Atctic Institute
of North America. Technical Paper No.
13. 1963.

1964

Reviews

197

The Peacock Camping Book

By Rex Hazlewood and John Thurman.
A Peacock Book. 1964. (Available in
Canada through Longmans Canada Ltd.).
$0.85.

Birds of the Detroit-Windsor Area: A

Ten-Year Study

By Alice H. Kelley, Douglas A. Middle-
ton, Walter P. Nickell and The Detroit
Audubon Society Bird Survey Commit-
tee. Cranbrook Institute of Science.
Bulletin 45. 1963. 119 pp. $1.00.

Stefansson: Ambassador of the North

By D. M. LeBourdais. Harvest House,
Montreal. 1963. 204 pp.

Contributions to Zoology, 1963

National Museum of Canada Bulletin No.
199. 109 pp. $1.50. (Queen's Printer,
Ottawa) .

Contents:

P. C. Adshead, G. O. Mackie and P. Paetkau,
On the Hydras of Alberta and the Northwest Ter-
ritories;

Arthur H. Clarke, Jr. and Anne Meachem Rick,
Supplementary records of Unionacea from Nova
Scotia with a discussion of the identity of Ano-
donta fragilis Lamark;

Edward B. Reed, Records of freshwater Crus-
tacea from Arctic and Subarctic Canada;

George O. Mackie and Gillian V. Mackie, Sys-
tematic and Biological notes on living Hydrome-
dusae from, Puget Sound;

D. E. McAllister and E. I. S. Rees, A revision
of the Eelpout Genus Melanostigma with a new
genus and with comments on Maynea.

NOTES

Occurrence of Some Small
Adammals in Southwestern
Ontario

From August 24 to August 29, 1963,
my wife Claudine F. Long and I visited
southwestern Ontario to collect mam-
mals. Collections were made in the vicin-
ity of English River (August 26); three
miles west of Dry den (August 27); and
one mile south and ten miles east of
Kenora (August 29). All of the localities
are in Kenora District. Habitats were
chiefly characterized by numerous moist
situations where grasses and sedges were
abundant and by the presence of spruce,
fir, and birch growing abundantly on
high ground. Lake-shore habitats were
investigated at English River and in the
vicinity of Kenora. Cleared marshy fields
were investigated west of Dryden, as
were woods on high ground (the latter
with no success). I am grateful to my
wife for helping with the field work
and to Professor Donald F. HoflFmeister
for examining manuscript and for his
suggestions. All specimens are in the
Museum of Natural Flistory, University

of Illinois. Kinds of mammals obtained
in this study are listed as follows:
Sorex palustris palustris Richardson:

This shrew is seemingly rare in western
Ontario (Cahn, 1937, Journal of Mam-
malogy 18: 21), but is known from
Quetico Provincial Park. Another record
is from Michipicoten Island, in Lake
Superior (Jackson, 1928, North Ameri-
can Fauna 51:180). Anderson (1947, Na-
tional Museum of Canada Bulletin 102, p.
20) states that S. p. palustris occurs in
western Ontario. Two specimens (28829-
28830, ? females) of this subspecies were
obtained from the shore of Brown's Lake,
English River, Ontario. They were taken
within two meters of the water in dense
timber, mainly birches. Both were molt-
ing, and the pigmentation on the under-
sides of their skins showed molt extend-
ing from nose to eyes to pinnae to shold-
ers to tail in 28830. In 28829 the pattern
was similar except that immediately an-
terior to the eyes there was no evidence
yet of molt, although a distinct spot of
pigmentation showed evidence for molt
immediately behind the nose.

198

The Canadian Fifxd-Naturalist

Vol. 78

Tamias striatus griseus Meams: A. H.
Howell (1929, North American Fauna
52:21) recorded the eastern chipmunk
from Ingolf, Ontario. To the eastward
(as near as Kapuskasing) Cameron (1950,
Journal of Mammalogy, 31:347-348) as-
signed records of occurrence to T. s. que-
becensis. A marginal record of occur-
rence for the species is provided by a
specimen (28835) from one mile south
and ten miles east of Kenora. This speci-
men is indistinguishable from specimens
of griseus from Minnesota, Wisconsin,
and Illinois, except that the mid-dorsal
black stripe is wider and less obscure on
the Canadian specimen than on some
specimens from Illinois. The Kenoran
chipmunk was trapped among weathered
outcrops in coniferous forest approxi-
mately 100 yards from a lake.

Eutaniias minimus neglectus (J. A.
Allen): Three specimens (28837-28839)
of the least chipmunk were taken 2-2-2-
miles west of English River in glades in
coniferous forest. One chipmunk (28840)
from one mile south and ten miles east of
Kenora was trapped in sedges and grasses
one meter from the shore of a lake. This
grassy habitat was adjacent to sparse
coniferous forest where another least
chipmunk was observed. Tamias and
Eutajnias occur together in the forest at
this locality.

Tamiascirus hudsonicus hudsonicus
(Erxleben): The red squirrel, or chicka-
ree, was seen or heard at all of the trap-
ping localities. One (28841) was found
dead on a highway five miles west of
English River.

Peromyscus maniculatus maniculatus
(Wagner): Concerning the deer mouse,
Osgood (1909, North American Fauna
28:41-45) ascribed southern Ontario to
the geographic range of P. m. manicul-
atus, indicating that this subspecies inter-
graded with gracilis in northern Minne-
sota. The latter subspecies is character-
ized by long tail, narrow skull, and bright

upper parts; therefore, it is surprising
that Gunderson and Beer (1953, The
maviinals of Mi?inesota, Occasional Pap-
ers of the University of Minnesota, Mu-
seum of Natural History 6:104-105) re-
fer without comment ten specimens to
long-tailed gracilis inasmuch as their
measurements do not fit with those re-
corded by Osgood for gracilis. Of addi-
tional interest are the nine specimens
(referred to gracilis by Osgood) obtain-
ed from Tower, Minnesota, having short
tails. These assignments are supported
by Cahn (1937, Journal of Mammalogy
18: 26), who listed gracilis from Quetico
Park. On the basis of dull upper parts,
broad skulls, and tails shorter than usual-
ly seen in specimens of gracilis, three
specimens (28843-28845) of the deer
mouse from one mile south and ten miles
east of Kenora are assigned to Peromy-
scus m. jfianiculatus. Their close resem-
blance to specimens from northern Min-
nesota is noted, and their external mea-
surements are as follows: Total length,
184, 177, — (subadult); length of tail,
91, 90, 89; hind foot, 20, 20.5, 20; ear from
notch, 18, 18, 17. A subadult (28842)
from two miles west of English River is
provisionally assigned to P. m. manicul-
atus on geographic grounds. External
measurements are: 155, 80, 20, 19.

Clethriono?)iy s gapperi gapperi (Vig-
ors): One specimen (28846) of the red-
backed vole taken two miles west of
English River, contained the record num-
ber of eight foetuses (Hall and Kelson,
1959, The Mammals of North America,
2:713). Each measured approximately 22
mm in crown-rump length. Another
specimen (28847) from one mile south
and ten miles east of Kenora was lactat-
ing. Both voles were taken in dense
coniferous forest.

Microtus pennsylvanicus drummondi
(Aud. and Bach.): The meadow vole
was abundantly taken in grassy habitats.
Two specimens were taken from two
miles west of English River; seven were

1964

Notes

199

taken three miles west of Dryden; and
three were taken one mile south and ten
miles east of Kenora.

Synaptofnys cooperi cooperi Baird: A
specimen (28863) of the southern bog
lemming from one mile south and ten
miles east of Kenora provides a marginal
record of distribution for the species, the
second for southwestern Ontario (see
Wetzel, 1955, Journal of Mammalogy,
36:13). The bog lemming was trapped
in dense coniferous forest among ferns,
mosses, and weathered rock-outcrops.

Zapus hudsonius kudsonius (Zimmer-
mann): The meadow jumping mouse was
abundant among sedges and grasses with-
in two meters of bogs, lakes, and streams.
Specimens were taken as follows: two
miles west of English River, 2; three
miles west of Dryden, 1; one mile south
and ten miles east of Kenora, 4.

Charles A. Long

Department of Zoology

and Museum of Natural History

University of Illinois

Urbana, Illinois

2 December 1963

Black Duck Breeding Record
for Alberta

What is believed to be the first breed-
ing record for the Black Duck {Anas
rubripes) in Alberta was obtained in the
vicinity of Hanna (9 miles north and 3
east), on June 9, 1963, when Angus
Gavin, General Manager of Ducks Un-
limited (Canada) and Fred Sharp, Pro-
vincial Naturalist for the same organi-
zation, saw a female Black Duck with a
brood of 5 young, approximately 10 days
old. The weather was clear with little
wind. Identification was positive since
the observers were able to approach
within 100 feet of the duck and brood.
Eight-power binoculars were also uti-
lized.

The brood was on the creek channel
immediately below the Ducks Unlimited
Mattis Project. Water is maintained in
the channel from a small pipe through

the dam. The surrounding area is typical
of the treeless southern Alberta plains.
Taverner (1926, Birds of Western
Canada) mentions the spread of Black
Ducks westward, as do Salt and Wilk
(1958, The Birds of Alberta). This has
been apparent to waterfowl biologists
working on the prairies. Black Ducks
are now common in Manitoba during
the hunting season and there are many
reports from Saskatchewan and Alberta
each fall.

William G. Leitch

Chief Biologist
Ducks Unlimited (Canada)
606-389 Main Street
Winnipeg 2, Manitoba
20 January 1964

Piping Plover in Ottawa, Ontario

On August 24, 1950, the writer collect-
ed a male Piping Plover, Charadrius
melodus, at Britannia Beach, Ottawa,
Ontario. This is an addition to the birds
of the Ottawa area and was not included
in Lloyd's (1944, Canadian Field-Na-
turalist, 58:143-175) list.

A. E. BOURGUIGNON

979 Hare Avenue
Ottawa 13, Ontario
12 February 1964

Two Interior British Columbia
Records for the Ancient
Murrelet

On January 20, 1964, Mr. O. W. Aast-
land, a Cranbrook, British Columbia
taxidermist, asked me to verify his iden-
tification of a bird. On arriving at his
place of business I was somewhat aston-
ished to find a live Ancient Murrelet,
Synthlibora^nphus antiquus, in typical
winter plumage. Mr. Aastland informed
me that this bird had been found that
morning floundering in the snow near
the western boundary of the Cranbrook
city limits.

A discourse about this rather unusual
occurrence prompted Mr. Aastland to
produce from his deep freeze another

200

The Canadian Field-Naturalist

Vol. 78

Ancient Murrelet in the flesh and in
similar plumage, which he had picked
up dead during the early winter of
I960, at a point approximately twenty
miles north of the site of this more
recent discovery.

As far as I am aware, there is only
one published record of this bird for
the British Columbia interior, viz., Swan
Lake, Okanagan, October 26, 1939
(Munro and Cowan, 1947, A Review of
the Bird Fauna of British Columbia).
The appearance of this sea bird so far
inland from the Coast Littoral Biotic
Area, its natural habitat, leads to con-
jectures as to whether each occurrence
inland had been immediately subsequent
to a weather disturbance on the Pacific
coast. The finding of this live Murrelet
at Cranbrook on January 20, 1964, cer-
tainly suggests this, for press reports
state that there were westerly winds of
up to sixty-five miles per hour on the
Pacific coast during January 19, 1964.

Walter B. Johnstone

P.O. Box 704

Cranbrook, British Columbia

28 January 1964

A Probable Breeding Record of
the Bobolink at Vermilion,
Alberta

On July 29, 1961, a flock of Bobolinks,
Dolichonyx oryzivorus (Linnaeus), was
seen at Grizzly Bear Coulee near High-
way 41, five miles south of Vermilion,
Alberta. After observing the birds for
about 45 minutes, the author was able
to count five adult males, seven w^hich
were presumed to be adult females, and
17 recently fledged young. Most of the
young had short tails, and uttered call
notes characteristic of Bobolink young.
A few of these birds could not fly more
than 100 yards before dropping to the
ground. Twice the author watched an
adult female carry food to and actually
feed one of the immature birds.

Several attempts were made to catch
one of the young birds, but the wetness
of the valley made running difficult, and
it was impossible to exhaust any of them.
However, these birds were such poor
fliers that it is unlikely that they were
born very far from the site of observa-
tion.

The A.O.U. Check-list of North
American Birds (1957, Fifth Edition)
reports that Bobolinks breed in southern
Alberta, although no specific region is
cited. Salt and Wilk (1958. Birds of
Alberta. Queen's Printer, Edmonton)
state that this species is scarce in the
province, and that it is known to nest
around Calgary, Heinsberg (approxi-
mately 35 miles northeast of Vermilion)
and Camrose (approximately 65 miles
west southwest of Vermilion). These
authors suggest that it is almost certainly
nesting in other regions of Alberta.

In the summers of 1957 and 1958, the
author was in the temporary employ of
the Canadian Wildlife Service to assist
in waterfowl studies around Vermilion.
During this time, there was no evidence
of Bobolinks breeding in the area. Thus
the observation of the flock of 12 adult
and 17 flying young Bobolinks reported
herein suggests that a breeding colony
may have been established in a new
locality in Alberta, namely Vermilion.
James K. Lowther

Biology Department
Bishop's University
Lermoxville, Quebec
19 February 1964

Harris' Sparrow in Quebec

On September 29, 1957, an adult Harris'
Sparrow, Zonotrichia querula (Nuttall),
was caught at St. Laurent, Quebec. The
bird was part of a flock of Song, Lincoln's
and White-throated sparrows, and
Swainson's and Gray-cheeked thrushes.
These birds were casually moving
through some hedgerows that mark the
boundaries between farm fields. These
hedgerows are composed of wild cherry,

1964

Notes

201

hawthorn, elm, and ash trees which are
overgrown with vines of Virgina creeper
and wild grape. Some of the birds, in-
cluding the Harris' Sparrow, were chased
by the author and his wife into a Jap-
anese mist net placed across an opening
through a hedgerow.

The Harris' Sparrow was identified by
its black cap, pink bill, and heavy black
streaks on the upper flanks. The black
throat and large amount of black on the
crown distinguished it as an adult. The
bird was taken back to Montreal alive,
but unfortunately it escaped before it
could be made into a museum skin. It was
wearing band numbered 22-108480, with
which it had been banded immediately
after capture.

To the best of the author's knowledge,
there are no previous records of Harris'
Sparrow in Quebec. The A.O.U. Check-
list of North American Birds (1957, Fifth
Edition) shows that in eastern Canada,
this species occurs occasionally around
Toronto, Ontario. To the south, Harris'
Sparrows have been reported during the
winter and early spring from Connecti-
cutt (Ball, 1946. Auk, 63: 448-450), and
from Ingham, Ipswich, and Boxford in
Massachusetts (Mason, 1949. Auk. 66:
95-96). The "in-hand" observation of
the adult Harris' Sparrow reported here-
in appears to be an easterly record for
this species in Canada, as well as a new
record for the province of Quebec.
James K. Lowther

Biology Department
Bishop's University
Lennoxville, Quebec
19 February 1964

Additional Specimens of the
Small-mouthed Salamander from
Pelee Island, Ontario

The Small-mouthed Salamander, Am-
bystoma texanufn, was first reported for
Canada by Uzzell (1962, Canadian Field-
Naturalist 76(3): 182) on the basis of
two previously misidentified museum
specimens from Pelee Island, Ontario.

The writer spent April 16-17, 1963, on
Pelee Island and collected four addition-
al specimens of this species. As these add
to our limited knowledge of the
Canadian population of A. texanwn, they
are reported here.

During the afternoon of April 16, areas
of low, partially flooded woodland were
searched for salamanders. Despite abun-
dant cover in the form of rotting logs,
no salamanders were found. The even-
ing was cool and an auditory survey for
frogs along the main roads of the island
failed to detect any calls. About 9:30
p.m. a ditch at the south end of the
island was carefully examined. It was
deep and steep sided, bordered by bushes
along the road edge and by open fields
on the opposite side. At first no amphi-
bians were seen or heard, but three sala-
mander eggs {Amby stoma, sp.) were
found in relatively shallow water along
the ditch's roadside edge. One end of
the ditch was fairly steeply banked like
its sides, and was bordered by an area
covered by a few scattered bushes and
thick matted dead grass. Crayfish bur-
rows were numerous. An adult A?nby-
stofna texanum was discovered in the
matted grass about three feet from the
edge of the ditch. Careful search over
the next half hour in an area up to about
30 feet from the edge resulted in the
discovery and capture of three more
adults. These specimens were apparently
foraging, as all were more or less in the
open.

Dissection has shown them to be two
males and two females. The latter con-
tain eggs indicating that breeding had
not occurred. The measurements and
proportions of these specimens (NMC
6904) are (in millimetres): viales — total
length 156, 143; snout- vent length 86,
79; tail length/total length ratio .449,
.448; jemales — total 173, 169; snout-vent
101, 94; tail/total .416, .444. All speci-
mens are larger in snout-vent length than
the only adult, a 70 mm female, available
to Uzzell (1962). All exceed the 4i-54
inches given by Conant (1958, A Field

202

The Canadian Field-Naturalist

Vol. 78

Guide to Reptiles and Amphibians, p.
211) as the usual range of total length,
but none approach his maximum of 9?
inches. All had 15 costal grooves count-
ing one over each limb, or 13 if only
those between the limbs are counted.
The colour was bluish black to slightly
brownish in life. In three specimens the
sides were a light bluish grey giving
them a more or less evenly frosted ap-
pearance. In one specimen the bluish
grey was broken into lichen-like mark-
ings on the sides and back. The sides of
the tails were variously frosted or lichen-
marked with bluish grey. The venters
were black. In two specimens they were
marked with bluish grey lichen markings
and the throat and chin were solid bluish
grey. In the other two the venter was
marked with a few irregularly shaped
bright blue spots and the throat and
chin were also spotted with blue. In
preservative all markings have faded so
that they are nearly indistinguishable
from the ground colour. The relative
smallness of the mouth and head char-
acteristic of this species is evident in all
specimens. Tooth and tongue characters
agree with those given by Uzzell (1962).
The three Antbystoma eggs collected
(NMC 6944) were in an advanced stage
of development. The embryos measured
approximately 6 mm and had three pro-
minent gill stubs on each side of the
head. Both front and rear limb buds
were evident. The jelly capsules were
large, and the diameter of the eggs were
12, 11 and 9.5 mm after preservation.
According to Bishop (1943, Handbook
of Sala^iianders, p. 158) the eggs of A.
texanuni may be deposited singly or in
small clusters. A. later ale which has been
recorded from Pelee Island as well, also
occasionally lays single eggs so that as-
signment of this collection is not pos-
sible. It is likely that the eggs were laid
in late March or early April as southern
Ontario had a period of warm spring
temperatures at that time and the e^g^^
are well advanced. If they were laid by
A. texanum a breeding season of more

than two weeks is indicated for the
species on Pelee Island.

The only other amphibian seen was a
single Blanchard's Cricket Frog, Acris
crepitans blanchardi (NMC 6905), 22
mm snout-vent, collected in water at
the end of the ditch after the last of the
salamanders had been taken.

Francis R. Cook

National Museum of Canada
Ottawa, Ontario
27 February 1964

Nest-Site Competition between
Bufflehead, Mountain Bluebird
and Tree Swallow

Several examples of interactions be-
tween hole-nesting birds were observed
in the Cariboo district of British Colum-
bia, in the summers of 1958 and 1959
(Erskine, 1959, Canadian Field-Natural-
ist, 73:131, and 1960, 4:161-162). Ob-
servations at a nest, in a poplar tree at
Watson Lake near 100 Mile House, are
outlined in Table 1.

The Mountain Bluebird, Sialia curru-
coides, was remarkably persistent in re-
building its nest after the nest material
was removed and scattered. Suitable
nest-holes were numerous in that area,
although the rapidly increasing popula-
tion of Starlings, Sturnus vulgaris, oc-
cupied a large proportion of available
sites in 1958. The bluebird built a com-
plete nest and laid one c^g between our
visits on May 17 and 20. Perhaps the
need to lay may have prompted such
feverish nest-building activity.

The 14 Bufflehead, Bucephala albeola
eggs were laid over a period of nearly
one month. The laying sequence up to
May 14 was normal for Bufflehead, but
the addition of only two eggs in the next
nine days suggested that a second bird
had been involved. Measurements of the
eggs (Erskine, 1960, M.A. thesis. Univer-
sity British Columbia, p. 45 and Figure
9) suggested that at least eight of the
first 11 eggs were laid by one bird, and
two by another. The last three eggs

1964 Notes

Table 1. — Contents of nest cavity on visits during May and June, 1958

203

Date

Contents of cavity, and remarks

6 May

7 „
9 „

14 ,,

17 „

20 „

23 ,,

3 June

8 „
12 „

16 ,,

19 .,

21 „
23 ,,
30 ..

Female Buff.* on nest, contents unknown.

4 Buff, eggs, cool.

5 Buff, eggs, cool, under grass nest; grass was removed.

9 Buff, eggs, cool, at several levels in dry grass of nest; grass was removed.
9 Buff, eggs, cool, under grass nest; grass was removed.
1 Mountain Bluebird egg in grass nest; 10 Buff, eggs under and in lowest
layers of grass.

1 Buff, egg in grass nest; Bluebird egg broken through grass; 10 Buff, eggs
under grass; grass was removed.

Buff, eggs (not counted),, warm, in grass nest.
Female Buff, (caught and banded) on 3 Buff, eggs in grass nest.
3 Buff, eggs and 1 Tree Swallow egg, warm, in grass nest; 11 Buff, eggs,
cold and dirty, under grass.

2 adult Tree Swallows on nest; contents as on 12 June.
1 Swallow on nest; contents unchanged.

1 Swallow on nest (caught and banded); contents unchanged.

1 Swallow on nest; contents unchanged.

No Swallows seen; eggs cold; no further activity observed.

*Buff. = Bufflehead

were probably laid by a third individual,
although the measurements were com-
parable to those of the first eight eggs.

The most remarkable feature of the
nesting was the Tree Swallow, Irido-
procne bicolor, incubating the Buffle-
head eggs. Incubation lasted from not
earlier than June 9, until sometime after
June 23, a period similar to that normally
found for the swallow. When the three
Bufflehead eggs that had been covered
by the swallow were opened, one em-
bryo that was judged to be about one-
third term (feather tracts readily ap-
parent but feathers not yet erupted) was
found. The other two eggs were un-
developed. Evidently the swallow was
able to supply sufflcient heat to permit
development of the tg^, at a rate not
markedly different from that in normal
Bufflehead nestings. The normal incu-
bation period for Bufflehead is 30 days,
so one-third term would be about ten
days. Those eggs were under the swal-
low for at least 11 days (June 12-23),
but possibly longer.

A. J. Erskine

Dept. of Zoology

University of British Columbia

Vancouver 8, B.C.

27 February 1964

(Present address:

Canadian Wildlife Service

Sackville, New Brunswick)

Notes on Townsend's Solitaire
in Western Chilcotin District,
British Columbia

The following is derived from obser-
vations of the Townsend's Solitaire,
Myadestes townsendi, extending over
fourteen years and involving seventy-five
nests (all of which were at elevations
between 2800 and 3000 feet above sea
level).

The nests seen by this observer have,
with one exception, been built in cut-
banks beside a road or trail. A favorite
position is a foot below the top of the
cutbank with a few branches of kin-
nikinick (Arctostaphylos Uva-ursi)
hanging down over it. Some nests are
within ten feet of cars and trucks passing
at the rate of about four per hour. It
would seem that, like Robins and
Mountain Bluebirds, Solitaires sometimes
prefer to risk proximity to man for the
sake of reduced danger from predators.
However, one nest was found in a natu-
ral crevice in a riverside cliff.

Incubation does not exceed fourteen
days. About 40 per cent of nests are
destroyed by predators, by which some-
times eggs are removed without the
nests being damaged; at other times the

204

The Canadian Field-Naturalist

Vol. 78

nest is crushed and eggs or young
destroyed. It is probable that human
predators are very scarce here. The
first eggs are usually laid between May
18 and 25. If a nest is destroyed a second
clutch will often be started, but eggs are
seldom laid after June 15.

Occupation of territories (perhaps a
hundred yards of cutbank) yearly for
three or four years points to the same
birds returning year after year; some-
times in fact the nest is rebuilt in the
same spot as last year. If a nest is
destroyed early in the season it is a safe
assumption that a second nest will be
started in the same territory.

About one out of four nests has five
eggs, most of the remainder four eggs;
occasionally a second nest has only three
eggs. On one memorable occasion a pair
raised one brood and immediately laid
a second clutch in the same nest.

The eggs have spots in one of two
patterns, namely scattered fairly uni-
formly over the entire surface, or alter-
natively forming a loose ring near the
larger end.

From the laying of the first eggs to
the vacating of nest by the nestlings
is usually about twenty-nine days. Some
young stay in the nest until well feath-
ered; in other cases they leave before
they can fly more than a few feet. On
one occasion when young had just left
a nest and were hidden in some bushes,
both parents hovered closely above my
dog and turned him aside.

No Solitaire nest, to my knowledge,
has ever contained a Cowbird egg, al-
though there are usually some of these
birds in the vicinity.

About five per cent of Solitaire eggs
fail to hatch, probably in most cases due
to being exposed to direct sunlight. On
one occasion the female (and male?)
continued to attempt to incubate a
clutch of eggs for such a long time that
after they had abandoned the nest it was
found that the eggs were dehydrated to
such an extent that the air space occupied
two-thirds of the egg; in fact if you
placed the egg on a smooth surface it

insisted on standing on end. The germ
was found to have died about the second
day of incubation. It was thought that
in this case cattle feeding or resting
close to the nest may have kept the hen
away from the nest for too long a time.
The beautiful song is usually heard
continuously for about seventeen sec-
onds, early in the morning, for a few
days only, starting at the end of April.
When a first nest is destroyed there may
be a renewal of singing prior to the
second clutch of eggs. Singing birds
usually perch on or near the top of a
pine tree, but on one occasion I observed
a bird singing several times while a
strong wind carried it upwards a hundred
or more feet above the top of a steep
hillside. It is thought that our western
Chilcotin Townsend's Solitaires spend
the winter at or near sea level along the
coast and islands of British Columbia.

W. Adrian B. Paul

Kleena Kleene, British Columbia
2 March 1964

Notes on the Birds of Riding
Mountain National Park,
Manitoba

During the course of range management
studies in Riding Mountain National
Park, Manitoba, in 1962 and 1963, in-
cidental observations were made of the
local bird fauna. Only the more signi-
ficant observations, which supplement
bird lists prepared by Taverner and
Sutton (1940, National Museum of Can-
ada, unpublished manuscript 20 pp.) and
Soper (1953, Canadian Wildhfe Service,
Wildlife Management Bulletin, Series 2,
No. 6, 54 pp.) are recorded here. Consid-
erable time was spent in the park in the
summers of 1962 and 1963, and periodic
visits were made during the intervening
winter. All observations were confined
to the area of the park west of Highway
Number 10.
Aix spans a, Wood Duck

On September 29, 1962, a male Wood
Duck was seen on a beaver pond among
heavy aspen forest about two miles south

1964

Notes

205

of Gunn Lake in the west-central part
of the park. According to Taverner
(1949, Birds of Canada, Musson, Tor-
onto, 446 pp.) the Wood Duck is " . . .
rare or absent throughout the prairies,
occasional in southeastern Manitoba . .
Thus the present record, 130 miles north
of the International Boundary and only
40 miles east of the Manitoba-Saskatche-
wan boundary, is somewhat northeast of
the usual range of the species. The
nearest published Wood Duck records
appear to be those of Taverner (1919,
Ottawa Naturalist, 32(8): 142) and Seton
(1908, Auk, 25:450-454) who reported
that local residents occasionally saw
Wood Ducks at Shoal Lake, about 35
miles northwest of Winnipeg.

Bucephala albeola, Bufflehead

Soper did not see Buffleheads in sum-
mer and remarked that they are un-
common in the park at all times. On
July 6, 1962, I observed two females on
a beaver pond in Birdtail Creek. That
was my only summer observation of
this species.

Cathartes aura, Turkey Vulture

Although not observed by Soper and
listed as an "occasional casual visitor"
by Taverner and Sutton, seven obser-
vations of Turkey Vultures were made
between June 15 and October 20, 1962,
and three between May 4 and September
17, 1963. Several of those observations
were of pairs. All were seen between
Lake Audy and the west park boundary.

Pandion haliaetus, Osprey

According to Soper (1953) the Osprey
is "a rare visitor where it has not been
recorded during spring and summer".
His only park record was made on
October 7, 1946. On May 23, 1962, in the
company of park warden George Klapp,
I observed a pair of Ospreys fishing at
Bob Hill Lake near the west end of the
park. They were not seen on subsequent
visits to the area so presumably did not
stay and breed.

Coccyzus erythropthalmus,
Black-Billed Cuckoo

This species is rare enough in the
Riding Mountain area to warrant the
recording of observations near Bob Hill
Lake, Bddy Lake, and Moose Lake on
July 9, July 12, and August 9, 1962,
respectively. Two of those observations
were of pairs (July 9 and 12), the other
was a single bird.
Surjiia ulula, Hawtc Owl

On two occasions in November, 1962,
Hawk Owls were seen in parkland habi-
tat in the Birdtail Valley near the west
end of the park. Taverner and Sutton
(1940) listed this species as a "probable
winter visitor" but did not observe it.
Soper does not list it. Riding Mountain
falls within the general winter range of
this owl listed by Taverner (1949) as
"most of Southern Canada".
Fetrochelidon albifrons, Cliff Sw^ allow

The distinctive nests of this swallow
were seen during the summer of 1962 on
a shed and house at the Deep Lake
Warden Station, near the west park
boundary. Young Cliff Swallows were
fledged there that summer, but no mem-
bers of this species appeared there in
1963. Soper does not list this species and
Taverner and Sutton (1940) did not
observe it at Riding Mountain, but re-
marked that it should occur as a migrant
or nester.
Sturnus vulgaris. Common Starling

Several starlings were seen in April and
May, 1962 and 1963, in the Birdtail
Valley, but they did not appear to re-
main there to breed as none were ob-
served during the summer. It is not
known how recently starlings moved
into the Riding Mountain area but they
may have been in the region for several
years, since they reached southern Man-
itoba from the east about 1934 (Myers
1958, Occasional Papers B.C. Provincial
Museum, No. 11, 60 pp.). However,
Soper did not include this species in his
1953 list. Donald A. Blood

Canadian Wildlife Service
Edmonton, Alberta
2 April 1964

Letter to the Editor

Dear Mr. Editor:

It takes a while for the slicks to get
up our way, but a copy of your maga-
zine arrived with the last load of strych-
nine capsules from Ottawa, and I got to
reading it, and I can't say it makes me
too happy.

I don't think Major Banfield has been
as kind to Captain Mowat as he might
have been. Not that I want to defend
any of your two-legged monstrosities,
but fair is fair. He hasn't been too kind
to me either — or to the rest of the
family. You can get used to strychine
(I guess Capt. Mowat ain't much of a
chemist — him and his cyanide) but' it
takes time. One thing though, it seems
to stretch out a wolf's life. And how
does Captain Banfield know how long a
wolf lives anyway? Has he been one?
Or has he just got himself fouled up in
a bunch of statistics from the Ottawa
Zoo. The animal zoo, I mean. Not the
big one.

Anyway, fair is fair, and since Major
Mowat won't speak for himself — a shy
fellow, he is, I guess its up to me. That
caribou plan, for instance. Lent. Banfield
ought to remember that the whole idea
of the Caribou survey was originated
by Lt. Col. Mowat the year before Sgt.
Banfield ever heard of it. It was present-
ed to the Arctic Institute in the faint
hope that some money might be forth-
coming. None was. But the Federal
Government (wolf-haters, the lot of
them!) decided that it was too big a
project for individuals, and took it over.
So far as I known Brigadier Mowat
never let a peep out of him when Cpl.
Bandield took over the whole scheme,
including the complete plan of operation
as devised by General Mowat and a
fine, forgotten fellow named Andrew
Laurie who actually did most of the
work, and never did get any credit at
all. If I was Oberlieutnant Mowat I'd
have sued Private Banfield for plagiarism,
but Mowat, he's all for live-and-let-love.
I don't think that ought to apply to
biologists, do you?

Terrible memory that Cadet Banfield

has too. Can you imagine Marshal Mowat
ordering a folding canoe? What he
actually ordered was a twenty-five foot
cabin cruiser with a built in bar — but
try and get that one past the Tresurey
Board! Folding canoe indeed!

Now that''s a low one, that remark
about poor Admiral Mowat's punctua-
tion, style, and grammar in his wolf
report. Call him a liar if you must —
he can stand it — but to impugn (is
that how you spell it?) his punctuation
. . . Did Generalissimo Mowat ever
suggest that Apprentice Banfield can't
tell the difference between a gopher
skull and a pickled cormorant? Not on
your life, he didn't.

We wolves (whats left of us) have
decuded to fight Banfield with fire.
We've got our own little plan under
way for human-control. Going to get
some help from dogs too. We plan on
planting mesquite buttons in the places
where those fellows in Ottawa usually
graze. Whats the idea of that? Well, you
see, we sort of figured that it might help
to free their imaginations a little bit; put
a little colour in their lives you might
say. Do you think they'd be happy if
we did that? Because thats what we
wolves want — is happy people. You see
how superior our philosophy is to yours?
Well thats enough. But you can tell MR.
Banfield that MR. Mowat is some sorry
about all those letters the Deputy Min-
ister's been getting from all those people
who don't mind wolves, and passing on
down the line to Mr. Banfield. It is kind
of a dirty trick, and I suppose I'd be
sore about it too, if I was him.
Uncle Albert.

Received and relayed through Daisy
Mae, the Voice of Mowat's Instantan-
eous Wolf Translation Service, this fifth
day of April.

F. M.

Editors note: This letter, although addressed to
the editor, reached him by an indirect route. Be-
wildered readers should refer to a review of Never
Cry Wolf in the Canadian Field-Naturalist 78 ( 1 ) :
52-54. In deference to the writer the original gram-
mar and speDing have been retained as nearly as
possible. Unfortunately Uncle Albert's exact sig-
nature, a more-or-less careful paw mark, had to be
omitted from the printed version as was a note in
Farley Mowat's handwriting indicating some dif-
ficulty incurred in obtaining it.

206

AFFILIATED

Edmonton Bird Club

President, H. J. Montgomery; Vice-President,
Dr. V. E, Lewin; Secretary-Treasurer, Dr. W. G.
Evans, Department of Entomology, University of
Alberta, Edmonton, Alta.; Field Secretary, Dr.
R. W. TxmNER; Librarian, D. A. Boag; Audubon
Representative, B. Sparks.

Mcllwraith Ornithological Club

Natural History Society of Manitoba

President, Miss J. M. Walker; Honorary Pre-
side?it, A. H. Shortt; Honorary Vice-President, E.
Gilbert; Past President, G. S. Cotter; Vice-Presi-
dents, Dr. L. B. Smith, H. V. Hosford; Treasurer,
W. D. Kyle; Assistant Treasurer, T. L Smith;
General Secretary, Mrs. H. V. Hosford, 4116 Rob-
lin Blvd., Charleswood 20, Manitoba; Executive
Secretary, Mrs. G. Keith; Mailijtg Secretary, Miss

L. M. LOVELL.

Nova Scotia Bird Society

President, Dr. L. B. Macpherson; Vice-President,
Mrs. Victor Cardoza; Secretary -Treasurer, Miss
Sylvia J. Fihxerton, 1051 Lucknow St., Halifax,
N.S.; Editor, Mrs. J. W. Dobson.

SOCIETIES

Provancher Society of Natural History
of Canada

President, Ronald E. Blair; First Vice-President,
Benoit Pelletier. Second Vice-President, James P.
Coristine; Secretary -Treasurer, Georges A. Lb-
CLERc, 628 Eraser St., Quebec, Que.

Province of Quebec Society for the
Protection of Birds

President, Mrs. G. H. Montgomery; Vice-Presi-
dents, Miss R. B. Blanchard, A. R. Lepingwell;
Treasurer, Miss G. E. Hibbard; Secretary, Miss R.
S. Abbott, 164 Senneville Road, Senneville, P.Q.

Toronto Field Naturalists' Club

President, Dr. D. Hoeniger; Vice-President,
R. F. Norman; Secretary-Treasurer, Mrs. H. Rob-
son, 49 Craighurst Ave., Toronto 12, Ont.; As-
sistant Secretary, Miss Ruth Marshall; Junior
T.FJSf.C., R. J. MacLellan, 416 St. Qements Ave.,
Toronto 12, Ont.

Vancouver Natural History Society

Honorary President, Dr. M. Y. Williams; Past
President, Dr. R. Stage-Smith; President Dr. J. E.
Armstrong; Vice-President, N. F. Pxjllen; Corres-
ponding Secretary, Mrs. D. J. Martin, 2038 Mac-
donald St., Vancouver, B.C.; Treasurer, Mrs. E. N.
Copping; Programme Secretaries, Miss R. Ross,
Mrs. H. Pinder-Moss; Editor of Bulletin, C. B. W.
Rogers; Recording Secretary, Miss K. Milroy.

ADVICE TO CONTRIBUTORS

Authors are a^ked to share the cost of pubUcation by paying for each
page of an article that is in excess of the limit of twelve journal pages,
the cost of illustrations and of setting small-sized type and tables.

Manuscripts

The Style Manual for Biological Journals is
recommended, in general, as a guide for authors.

Manuscripts should be typewritten on one side
of nontransparent paper measuring 8i by 11 inches.
Authors are requested to use at least one given
name. All text matter, including quotations, foot-
notes, tables, literature references, and legends for
figures should be double-spaced. Only those words
meant to appear in italics should be imderlined.
Every sheet of the manuscript should be number-
ed.

Webster^ Neiv International Dictionary is the
authority for spelling. However, in a case of
diflFerence in the spellmg of a common name, and
in the use of a variant name, a decision of a
learned society is preferred.

Notes should bear the name of one author only
and references in notes should be incorporated
directly in the text.

Illustrations

All figures, includmg each figure of the plates,
should be numbered consecutively in arable
numerals. The author's name, title of the paper,
and figure number should be written in the lower
left comer of the sheet on which the illustration
appears. The legend should not be incorporated
in the figure.

Photographs should have a glossy finish and
show sharp contrasts. For reproduction as a com-
plete plate they should be moimted without space
between prints.

For large drawings and mounted photographs
the ratio of height to width should conform to
that of the journal page (4| by 7i inches) but the
height should be adjusted to allow for the legend.

Reprints

Reprints, with or without covers may be boughc
The cost is given on the reprint order form whicb
is attached to the galley proofs.

ANNUAL MEETING

The eighty-sixth annual meeting of the Ottawa Field-Naturalists'
Club was held on Tuesday, December 8, 1964, at 8:15 p.m. in the
auditorium of the National Museum of Canada.

AMERICAN ASSOCIATION FOR THE
ADVANCEMENT OF SCIENCE

Members are reminded that the one hundred and thirty-first
annual meeting of the American Association for the Advancement of
Science will be held in Montreal, December 26-31, 1964. The Ottawa
Field-Naturalists' Club is affiliated with the AAAS.

The CANADIAW^
FIELD 'NATURALIST

Published by THE OTTAWA FIELD-NATURALISTS' CLUB, Ottawa, Ontario

Articles

Albert Andrew Wood 1885-1963 H. B. Wressell 207

The Breeding Birds of Mandarte Island, British Columbia

R. Drent, G. F. van TetSj F. Tompa and K. Vermeer 208

The Rusty Colour Phase of the Canadian Toad, Bicfo hemiophrys

Francis R. Cook 263

Notes

Two Helpful Uses of "Terylene" for Biologists Andrew Radvanyi 268

A Range Extension for the Wood Frog in Northeastern Saskatchewan

Robert W. Nero and Franqs R. Cook 268

Index to Volume 78 Compiled by Mrs. G. R. Hanes 270

Can. Field Nat.

Vol. 78

No. 4

p. 207-282

Ottawa, October-December 1964

THE OTTAWA FIELD-NATURALISTS' CLUB

Founded in 1879

— Patrons —
Their Excellencies The Governor General and Madame Vanier

The objects of the club are to foster an acquaintance with and a love of nature, to
encourage investigation and to publish the results of original research and observations
in aU branches of natural history.

The club is a corporate member of the Federation of Ontario Naturalists and is
affiliated witii the American Association for the Advancement of Science.

MEMBERS OF COUNCIL

President: George H. McGee, 2052 Woodcrest Road, Ottawa 8, Ontario

First Vice-President: W. Winston Mair

Second Vice-President: G. R. Hanes

Secretary: A. W. Rathwell, Canadian WildUfe Service, Norlite Building,

150 Wellington St., Ottawa 4, Ontario
Treasurer: Miss Anne Banning, Box 4099, Postal Station E, Ottawa, Ontario
Additional Members of Council: Mrs. F. R. Cook, Miss L. Kingston, Mrs. D. A. Smith,
Miss M. Stuart; Messrs. W. K. W. Baldwin, A. W. F. Banfield, D. R. Beckett, E. L.
Bousfield, C. G. Champ, A. H. Clarke, Jr., W. J. Cody, F. R. Cook, R. Frith, J. M.
Gillett, H. Groh, J. W. Groves, D. D. Hogarth, P. H. Jones, E. L. Leese, H. Lloyd,
H. N. Mackenzie, A. E. Porsild, F. H. Schultz, K. R. Scobie, D. A. Smith, V. E. F.
Solman and G. Tessier.
Auditors: J. M. Gillett and R. J. Moore

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

Editor: Francis R. Cook Busiriess Manager-. W. J. Cody

National Museum of Canada, Ottawa, Ontario Central Experimental Farm, Ottawa, Ont.

Associate Editors-. F. J. Alcock (Geology), John W. Arnold (Entomology), W. A. Bell
(Paleontology), J. Sherman Bleakney (Herpetology), Arthur H. Clarke, Jr.
(Malacology), William G. Dore (Botany), J. R. Dymond (Ichthyology), W. Earl
Godfrey (Ornithology), A. G. Huntsman (Marine Biology), Phillip M. Youngman
(Mammalogy).

MEMBERSHIP AND SUBSCRIPTION

Authorized as second-class mail by the Post Office Department of Ottawa, and ioi payment of postage in Cash.

JAN 1 1 V935

HARVARD

The Canadian Field^NaturalistuNivERsiTv.

Volume 78 OCTOBER-DECEMBER 1964 NuxMber 4

ALBERT ANDREW WOOD

1885-1963

H. B. Wressell

Entomology Laboratory, Research Branch, Department of Agriculture
Chatham, Ontario

Al Wood was a naturalist of the old school — the school of W. E. Saunders and
John Dearness. In these days of specialists, it was a privilege to know a man
who was interested in so many aspects of nature study; one who could discuss
them with such appreciation and intelligence.

A. A. Wood was born in London, Ontario, of pioneer stock, on May 2,
1885. Originally he had planned to be a doctor and in 1903 he took a pre-
medical year at Washington College, Washington, D.C. But he found that he
could not adapt himself to certain aspects of the course and entered the business
of tailoring, after taking a course in New York City. For some sixteen years
he pursued this work until 1922 when he was persuaded to join the staff of the
Dominion Entomological Laboratory at Strathroy, Ontario. While there, Al
began preparing entomological exhibits for local fairs. His natural aptitude
for this work increased, and eventually he prepared exhibits for entomology
laboratories across Canada and for the National Museum in Ottawa. He
achieved his first great success in this line at the World's Grain Show, held in
Regina in 1933. Al, in his dry way, enjoyed telling the story of the farmer
who visited the exhibit several times on successive days. Finally the man asked
why the wheat plants did not wilt in the hot atmosphere of the cage. Al
always chuckled with pride when relating this; it was a tribute to the pain-
staking care he took when preparing the exhibit. In 1938 he was transferred
to the Chatham laboratory and here he remained until he retired in 1955. He
studied methods of preparation at many American and the larger Canadian
museums and developed techniques for preparing displays of insect and disease
injury in several media. Just before retirement he wrote a manual, "Preparing
Insect Displays". This book shows the same careful work so characteristic of
A. A. Wood. Besides the manual, Al published papers on a variety of topics,
including ornithology, mammalogy, and entomology. He had a pleasant, lucid
style of writing which was also informative.

Al was an ardent collector from boyhood, and received encouragement
from men like J. A. Morden and W. E. Saunders, with whom he went on field
trips. His bird and mammal skins are found in scientific study collections in
many museums, both in Canada and the United States. The great Canadian
bird artist, Allan Brooks, claimed that Al's study skins were among the best he
had seen. Al often told about rising before dawn to go on a trip before his

MaiHng date of this number: 31 December, 1964
207

208 The Canadian Field-Naturalist Vol. 78

day's work. He would describe the dawn chorus and the thrill of hearing a
new song for the first time. That was how he located Kentucky and Blue-
winged warblers — the first being the third Canadian record for the species at
that time. He also had a very fine insect collection which was one reason he
joined the Dominion service. Later he made a collection of flowering plants
native to his area. It was characteristic of him to turn to a new hobby after
retirement — the collection of lichens and mosses, where he found new Can-
adian species. To top it off, in later years he became an ardent star watcher,
just as the space age began! Also, after retirement, he spent several summers
as naturalist at a camp for young people conducted by the Seventh Day
Adventists, to which group Al was a sincere and devoted member.

In 1925 Al married Gertrude Isobel Wilson of London, Ontario. Three
daughters were born to them and a more devoted family group it would be
hard to find.

THE BREEDING BIRDS OF MANDARTE ISLAND,
BRITISH COLUMBIA*

R. Drent, G. F. van Tets, F. Tompa and K. Vermeer

Department of Zoology, University of British Columbia, Vancouver

Introduction

Every year some 5500 individuals of six sea-bird species gather on Mandarte
Island to breed, thus making it the largest and most varied colony on the inner
south coast of British Columbia. Certain plants and the sea-fowl formed an
important resource for the native people in bygone times, and Mandarte is still
an Indian Reserve. At present, however, infrequent egg-collecting is the only
right exercised by the owners.

In 1957 a permanent field camp was established on the island by the Depart-
ment of Zoology, University of British Columbia (Vancouver), and students
have lived there every season since (May 3-September 4, 1957; May 1-August
24, 1958; April 24-September 15, 1959; May 5-September 1, 1960; May 1-
August 30, 1961; May 2-August 31, 1962). Goal of the work was to present
theses on the following topics:

G. F. van Tets 1957-1959 Cormorant ethology
R. Drent 1959-1960 Pigeon Guillemot breeding biology

F. Tompa 1960-1962 Song Sparrow population study

K. Vermeer 1961-1962 Glaucous-winged Gull breeding biology.

Each season as much time as possible was devoted to gathering nesting data,
the material being recorded on cards of the British Columbia Nest Records

"Contribution No. 4 from the B.C. Nest Records Scheme, Department of Zoology, University of
British Columbia, Vancouver 8, British Columbia.

1964

Drent, van Tets, Tompa and Vermeer: Mandarte

209

Scheme (see Myres et al., 1957) and now on file at the Department of Zoology
in Vancouver. In the scarcity of numerical material on the breeding of sea-
birds in the Pacific Northwest, the data we have accumulated in the past six
seasons warrant a general account of the island and its bird life. Following a
brief description of vegetation, topography, climate, and a word on the
mammals, the breeding birds will be treated. For each species distribution
and numbers on the island, laying season, incubation and fliedging periods,
clutch size, and survival of eggs and young will be given. The questions we
seek to answer are, what is the breeding season of the various sea-birds, how
long does it take the pair to raise their young, what is their average production,
and what are the principal causes of loss. With the Song Sparrow, resident on
Mandarte, the approach has been rather different, and the account here con-
cerns chiefly population census and territory size. Our intent is not to draw
theoretical conclusions, but rather to record facts in order to stimulate further
effort in gathering precise data on breeding biology.

Further activities on the island included banding. Banding totals for the
breeding species are listed below.

Table 1. — Birds banded on Mandarte Island, 1957-62

Species

Banded as adult

Banded as nestling or local young

Double-crested Cormorant
Pelagic Cormorant
Black Oystercatcher
Glaucous-winged Gull
Pigeon Guillemot
Tufted Puffin
Northwestern Crow
Red-winged Blackbird
Song Sparrow

77
65

2
115 ,

909

1325

7002

178

438

In addition, nestlings of various sea-birds were supplied to Dr. J. Koskimies
(visiting from the University of Helsinki) for his 1959 thermoregulation work
(not yet published), and to Dr. W. N. Holmes (Vancouver) for his work on
the nasal gland (Holmes et al., 1961). External parasites were collected where
possible, and turned over to Prof. G. J. Spencer (Vancouver), who has reported
one of the records (Spencer, 1960).

Published material concerning Mandarte is scant. W. B. Anderson lived
on the island as warden during the 1915 season, and his brief report (Anderson,
1916) furnishes the earliest census of the birds. There are no published reports
from wardens in later years. J. A. Munro of the Canadian Wildlife Service
documented the status of the sea-birds on a number of visits from 1921 to 1937
(Munro, 1925, 1928, 1929, 1937), and in particular was responsible for record-
ing the establishment of the Double-crested Cormorant as a breeding species.
In later years the Victoria Natural History Society have several times recorded
useful estimates of the birds in their bulletin. Sprot (1937) summarized results
of Glaucous-winged Gull banding for the period 1929-34.

210 The Canadian Field-Naturalist Vol. 78

Work on this account has been shared by the authors as follows, G. F.
van Tets supplied all data for the 1957 and 1958 seasons and the cormorant and
gull data for 1959, whilst K. Vermeer supplied the gull data for 1961 and
1962. These data, and the nest record cards for all years for all species, were
placed at the disposal of Drent who compiled the species accounts, with the
exception of the Song Sparrow section, which was contributed by F, Tompa.
The final form of the paper has been arrived at by mutual criticism.

Acknowledgments

In the first place, we are grateful to the East Saanich Band of Indians for
allowing us to live and work on their island. We all owe a great deal to Dr.
M. D. F. Udvardy, who supervised the work on iMandarte, and to Dr. I. iVIcT.
Cowan and Dr. J. Bendell, who offered advice and encouragement throughout.
Dr. K. Beamish, also of the University of British Columbia, and Dr. A.
Szczawinski, of the Provincial Museum in Victoria, were kind enough to
identify certain plants. The National Photo Library, Ottawa, provided an
excellent enlargement of an aerial photograph, from which the large scale map
of Mandarte was made. iMr. R. H. Turley, Agronomist at the Agricultural
Experimental Station, Saanichton, generously sent us weather records for
his station.

Our work has been financed by a number of bodies, to whom we give
grateful credit: Woodrow Wilson National Fellowship Foundation, National
Research Council of Canada, Fisheries Research Board of Canada, and the
Frank M. Chapman Memorial Fund.

Particular mention must be made of the help in the 1957 season of J. Takacs,
and in the 1958 season of D. Kennedy, and we close with thanks to the Mathews
of Randle's Landing, who have meant much to all of us working on Mandarte.

Description of Mandarte Island

Location and topography

Mandarte, commonly called Bare or Ridge Island, lies among the Gulf
Islands in Haro Strait, off the south end of Vancouver Island. Precisely, the
location is 48° 38' N, 123° 17' W {see Figure 1). A small skerry, termed
North Rock, lies 400 meters northwest of the island, and an islet, here called
South Islet, some 165 meters to the southeast.

Mandarte Island itself is some 100 meters broad and 700 long, and runs
SE-NW along the greater dimension. The island is formed by an escarpment
of calcareous sandstone protruding from the sea. A low broken cliff some 3-4
meters high forms the northeast facing shore (Figure 16), and from this low
side the land rises unevenly to the precipitous southwest facing shore, composed
of steep cliffs ranging from 10 to 29 meters in height. Midway a groove
scores the long axis of the island, and here the soil accumulation supports
shrubbery and a few gnarled trees; elsewhere bare rock and scattered grass
prevail. The low northeast shore is skirted by a broad wave-cut platform
(Figures 2A, 11, 16), but the steep southwest shore shows only a slight nick
at water level (Figure 3). The foreshore, then, is restricted to the northeast

1964

Drent, van Tets, Tompa and Vermeer: Mandarte

211

p/mr/* latand

-46''40'

Mandarte
%. Island

HaUbut
Island

Saanich
Peninsula

12 3

km.

123''20'W

Figure 1. Map of east portion of Haro Strait showing localities mentioned in the text.
Shallows are indicated by stippling.

side and is largely formed by an eroded rock shelf, with a few small pockets
of coarse shell fragments. Beach debris is virtually absent.

Vegetation

Exclusive of cliff side, shrubbery and trees make up some 30 per cent, bare
rock and grassy areas some 70 per cent, of the 5 hectare surface area of
Mandarte {see Figure 2). Near the north end a conspicuous clump of trees
breaks the skyline (Figure 21), the living members being five Douglas Fir
(Pseudotsuga menziesii), three Grand Fir {Abies gra?idis), several Arbutus
{Arbutus menziesii), and a luxurient growth of Willow {Salix spp.). Ocean
Spray {Holodiscus discolor) forms a dense undergrowth. Age and height

212 The Canadian Field-Naturalist Vol. 78

were measured for some of these trees: the Douglas Fir ranged from 60 to an
estimated 200-300 years old, whilst the range in height was 18-21 meters. The
Grand Fir were 100-110 years old, and the largest reached 24 meters, whilst an
averaged-sized Arbutus was 90 years old and 19 meters high. These measure-
ments have implications for the vegetation history of the island.

Elsewhere on the island the tongues of deeper soil support a mixed
shrubbery mostly less than 2 meters high. The chief components are Wax-
berry {Symphoricarpus alba). Wild Rose {Rosa sp.), Ocean Spray (Holodiscus
discolor) Wild Blackberry (Rubus macropetalus) and Fireweed {Epilobium
angustifolmm), in that order of abundance. A scattering of Saskatoon Berry
{Amelanchier florida) and to a lesser extent Bitter Cherry {Frufius ejnargmata)
protrude above the shrub, and at the south end a clump of Garry Oak
{Quercus garryaiia) exists. The oaks hardly exceed 5 meters in height from
the ground, though one large specimen was 125 years old. In addition, two
stunted Crab Apple (Mains fuse a) and several Choke Cherry (Prwms vir-
giniana) survive along the island crest. The rocky open areas remain to be
treated. The dominant plant is Broma Grass (Bromus carinatus), and Camas
(Camassia quamash) is abundant. The conspicuous members of the vegetation
have been listed, and a more detailed treatment will not be attempted here.

There is no reason to believe that the vegetation on the island has changed
much in recent years. The present pattern of shrub and open areas depends on
soil depth (one thinks especially of water-holding capacity), not on the
activities of the nesting birds or some catastrophe such as fire (cp. tree ages).
This relative stability is made clear by a comparison of two photographs of the
island taken in 1915 (Anderson, 1916), when the sea-bird colony was less than
one-sixth its present size, with photographs taken in 1960. Conditions prove to
be practically identical. One change can, however, be traced to the birds: the
larger Douglas Fir and the plants directly beneath them are gradually dying due
to the accumulation of guano from the Double-crested Cormorants and
Glaucous-winged Gulls that perch on these trees.

Climate

Kendrew and Kerr (1955) have characterized the climate of the British
Columbia littoral as having a small annual range of temperature and mild humid
winters, most of the precipitation falling in this season and decreasing after
March, and with warm though not hot summers, July and August forming the
dry season. Mandarte, leeward of the high mountains of Vancouver Island,
Hes in a zone of low precipitation (less than 40 inches annually) compared to
other parts of the coast, a zone that has been distinguished as the Gulf Islands
Biotic Area by Munro and Cowan (1947), chiefly on the basis of botanical
features dependent on the aridity.

The closest station to Mandarte where weather records have been taken
over a long period is the Saanichton Experimental Farm, situated on the
Saanichton Peninsula at 48° 37' N, 123° 25' W, some 9.5 kilometers west of the
island. Table 2 gives the 48-year averages of this station for temperature and
precipitation over the months April-September, embracing the breeding seasons
of the various sea-birds on Mandarte.

1964 Drent, van Tets, Tompa and Vermeer: Mandarte

Table 2. — Weather Records from Saanichton Experimental Farm

213

Month

Temperature (°F.)

Precipitation (inches)

Mean

Mean extremes

April
. May
June
July
August
September

47°
54°
58°
62°
62°
57°

40-55°
45-62°
50-67°
53-72°
53-71°
49-64°

1.6
1.1
1.1
0.7
0.8
1.4

It will be seen that the period is one of moderate temperature and little rain —
only about 22 per cent of the annual precipitation falls in these six months.

The Mammals

Only three terrestrial mammals are known from iMandarte, and others
(bats, seals, whales) will not be listed here. 1. Oryctolagus cu7iiculus —
released on the island long ago (Carl and Guiguet 1958: 11, prior to 1915, see
Anderson 1916) the European Rabbit has recently died out on Mandarte (last
report 1955-56, none seen from 1957 on). 2. Feromyscus maniculatus — the
Deer Mouse is the only mammal at present resident on Mandarte, and is com-
monly seen about the island. 3. Mustek viso?i — although numerous on sur-
rounding islands, the Mink has been seen on Aiandarte only once (December
1960) and has to our knowledge never been present during the breeding season.

The Breeding Birds

Regular Breeders

1. Fhalacrocorax auritus

2. Fhalacrocorax pelagicus

3. Haematopus bachmayii

4. Larus glaucescens

5. Cepphus coluTfiba

6. Liinda cirrhata

7. Hirimdo rustic a

8. Corvus caurinus

9. Agelaius phoeniceus
10. Melospiza melodia

Double-crested Cormorant
Pelagic Cormorant
Black Oystercatcher
Glaucous-winged Gull
Pigeon Guillemot
Tufted Puffin
Barn Swallow
Northwestern Crow
Red-winged Blackbird
Song Sparrow

Species of changi?ig or uncertaifi status

Fhalacrocorax penicillatus, Brandt's Cormorant: expected future breeder
Ardea herodias, Great Blue Heron: past breeder
Selasphorus rufus, Rufous Hummingbird: possible breeder

214

The Canadian Field-Naturalist

Vol. 78

• PIGEON GUILLEMOT NESTS 1957-60

-^LOW WATER MARK

^77 NESTS ^44 NESTS

% DOUBLE -CRESTED CORMORANT SUBCOLOMES 1960

SONG SPARROW TERRITORIES 1961

^ UNMATED
^ MALE

PELAGIC CORMORANT CENSUS OF OCCUPIED NESTS 1959

SONG SPARROW TERRITORIES 1-7 MAY 1962

PROFILE A-B

;jgft BRUSH i TREES
\SM STEEP CUFF

(TO SCALE)

Figure 2. Map of Mandarte Island showing distribution of nesting birds.

Notes on use of names

Double-crested Cormorant and Glaucous-winged Gull are unwieldy com-
mon names, so we have generally used "Double-crest" and "Glaucous-wing" in
the species accounts. Latin nomenclature follows the 1957 A.O.U. check-list,
though there are arguments for ranking the Pigeon Guillemot as Cepphus
grylle columba, and Johnston (1961) has recently urged again relegating the
Northwestern Crow to the subspecies level (Corviis brachyrhynchos caurinus).

1964

Drent, van Tets, Tompa and Vermeer: Mandarte

215

Figure 3. Cliflf along southwest shore of Mandarte Island with nesting Double-crested
Cormorants at B, nesting Pelagic Cormorants elsewhere. At A Munro's Ledge, site of
the original Doublecrest colony.

1. Fhalacrocorax auritus, Double-Crested Cormorant

Census a?id distribution

The Double-crested Cormorant began nesting on the inner coasts of
southern British Columbia and northern Washington about 40 years ago (Drent
and Guiguet, 1961). Of the British Columbia colonies, Mandarte was the first
to be discovered, thanks to the vigilance of W. Burton and the prompt verifica-
tion by J. A. Munro (Munro, 1928). Later the colony on Ballingall was
found, but judged older in origin (Munro, 1937). Aiandarte was thus the
second colony to be established in the Province, but it is today by far the
largest. Available counts for the Mandarte colony are given below; a more
detailed listing with references will be found in Drent and Guiguet (1961:
25-26).

1927 1-3 pair, the first report

1935 5 pair

1936 9-11 pair
1942 15-20 pair

1945 23 pair in original group, total not certain

1953 145 pair total, three subcolonies (25, SS, 65)

1957-60 135-150 pair, in three subcolonies (see text)

216 The Canadian Field-Naturalist Vol. 78

It is of interest to trace the spread of the Double-crest colony over the
island. Munro's (1937) photograph of a group of nests in 1936 shows a ledge
we have been able to locate precisely (Figures 2B and 3). The original 1927
nest was found in the near vicinity, and all the nests were located here until
1942. The area continued to be used until at least 1945, but sometime before
1957 (probably before 1953) the original ledge area was abandoned. At
present the Double-crests are distributed over the southwest cliffs in three sub-
colonies, the minimum number of occupied nests in 1960 being 14, 77, and 44
from north to south (Figure 2B). Further details are lacking.

It is evident that the first site occupied by Double-crests at Mandarte was
not the most favourable cliff formation available, but rather represented the
closest possible Double-crest terrain to the nesting Pelagic Cormorants, res-
tricted to the north cliffs at that time.

Nesting habitat

Birds of all ages perch in the clump of Douglas Fir on the island, and court
in them, but unlike the case at the nearby Channel Island and Ballingall colonies
(approximately 20 kilometers distant) the Double-crest has never nested in
trees at Mandarte. Rather it here builds its nest flat on the rock, choosing
rounded shoulders and broad ledges along the cliffside, in contrast to the
Pelagic Cormorant which prefers more precipitous terrain.

Methods for gathering nesting data

A limitation when working with the cormorants was the constant threat of
crow and gull predation. If put oflr the nest, the cormorants were liable to
lose eggs and small young in short order. Observation on the Double-crest
was therefore confined to checking the nests daily by telescope from a nearby
blind, the contents being ascertained at nest rehef or when the sitting bird rose
to shift the eggs, etc. A further difficulty arose in following the fate of the
young. Banding at the nest was carried out when the chicks were three to
four weeks old, and displacement of some of the older chicks to strange nests
was unavoidable.

Laying season

Progress of clutch commencement in 1959, the only season with complete
data, is shown in Figure 4. The Double-crest is the first of the sea-birds on
Mandarte to commence laying, the first eggs appearing in the latter part of
April. Early layings are lost almost without exception, however, to predating
gulls and crows. Most clutches are started in May, though replacements may
be found up to the middle of July. In favourable years a second period of
laying occurs in early August, and by observation of banded birds in 1959 it
was established that some of these birds had laid previously in the same season.
At least one pair laid a clutch of three after the first brood successfully fledged.
Young were raised from the August layings, so in British Columbia the Double-
crest is, potentially at least, double-brooded. The closely related European
Cormorant is likely also occasionally double-brooded. Kortlandt (1942) gives
six records of the raising of two broods in the same nest in the same season for
Phalacrocorax carbo in the Netherlands. He states that in one case the same

1964

Drent, van Tets, Tom pa and Vermeer: Mandarte

217

o 4

n=33\]

n=7

first
broods

second
broods

I I M I I I I 1 I I I I » I I I I II I I

1959

APRIL MAY

JUNE

JULY AUGUST

DOUBLE-CRESTED CORMORANT

Figure 4. Clutch commencement of the Double-crested Cormorant on Mandarte Island.

parents were most probably involved, in another they were different, and in
the remaining four identity was unknown.

Chitch size and egg replacemejit

Loss of eggs through predation is so common that representative fre-
quencies for clutch size were not obtained, but it can be said that clutches of
four predominate, those of three are common, and the maximum recorded in
the study period was five.

Loss of the entire nest contents (eggs or young) commonly results in a
replacement clutch (i.e. repeat laying). In 12 first replacements (1959 and
1960) 3 of five, 4 of four, 4 of three, and 1 of two eggs, the average interval
from last loss to commencement of the replacement clutch was 13 days (7-8,
8-9, 9, 11-12, 11-13, 11-13, 13-15, 14-15, 14-16, 15-16, 16-17, 19-21 days, with
the accuracy indicated). There were two records where loss of the replace-
ment in turn led to further repeat clutches (loss of repeat clutch of four
followed in not less than 17 days by first of two eggs of third set; in the other
case loss of repeat clutch of two followed in 6-11 days by one t^^, loss in turn
and followed by first of two eggs of the fourth set in 10-11 days). The max-
imum number of eggs laid in any one nest in any one of the three seasons 1958,

218

The Canadian Field-Naturalist

Vol. 78

1959 and 1960 was 11 eggs. Replacement clutches in Phalacrocorax aristotelis
are discussed by Snow (1960) who records an interval of 21 and one of 22 days
between loss of the original and commencement of the repeat clutch.

Incubation period

Incubation commences with the first egg, though the birds do not sit
closely at first. Laying-hatching intervals for 55 eggs are assembled in Table 3.
Laying and hatching were each known to the nearest day, assuming that the
eggs hatched in the order laid.

Table 3.

Laying-hatching intervals in Double-crested Cormorant,
indicated.

Position in clutch

25 days

26 days

27 days

28 days

29 days

30 days

31 days

32 days

33 days

Total eggs

Mean (days)

29.9

28.4

27.9

The material for the first three eggs in the clutch is large enough to allow
a comparison, and leads to the conclusion that incubation becomes fully
effective with the second egg, or shortly thereafter. (Throughout this paper
position in the clutch is indicated by calling the eggs A, B, C, etc., in the order
laid.) B eggs in 3-clutches hatched in the same interval as those in 4-clutches
(5 and 10 records respectively), so our material does not indicate that the
onset of effective incubation is delayed in the larger clutch. The incubation
period for the Double-crest can therefore be considered as 28 days (mean of
40 eggs, from second to fifth in the clutch, with a range of 25-33 days).
Kendeigh (1952:182) quotes Mendall and Lewis that incubation in this species
lasts 24-25 days, but without definitions this figure cannot be compared with
ours.

Fledging period

Precise data are lacking, but the following outline can be offered: after the
third week short excursions beyond the nest rim are undertaken, and visits are
paid to other nests at the close of the fourth and beginning of the fifth weeks.
In the fifth-sixth weeks short flights about the colony are attempted. During
the sixth-seventh weeks, when the ju venal plumage is almost complete, the
chicks start to bathe and swim by their own choice, and gradually leave the
colony to take up an independent life.

1964

Drent, van Tets, Tompa and Vermeer: Mandarte

219

For the related Fhalacrocorax carbo, studied at tree-nesting colonies,
Kortlandt (1942) states that the young fly out at seven weeks and become
independent at 12-13 weeks of age.
Survival of eggs and young

Table 4. — Survival of

eggs and

young in

Double-crested Cormorant

Year

nests
total

eggs
total

chicks

young fledged

per nest

total

% eggs

per nest

total

% chicks

per nest

1958
1959
Both

34
32
66

126

147
273

3.7
4.6
4.1

165

67%
54%
60%

2.5
2.5
2.5

157

94%
96%
95%

2.4
2.4
2.4

Table 5. — Causes of egg failure, Double-crested Cormorant

Predated

Addled

1958
1959

11 eggs, 9% eggs laid
41 eggs, 28% eggs laid

30 eggs, 24% eggs laid
26 eggs, 18% eggs laid

Hatching success was 60 per cent in 1958-59, the balance of the eggs laid
being either lost through predation, or failing to hatch. The latter are
grouped as "addled eggs", and owe their failure to infertility or embryonic
death. Addled eggs made up 56 of the total 273 eggs laid in both seasons,
i.e., 21 per cent. This compares with 201 out of 921, i.e., 22 per cent, in
Fhalacrocorax aristotelis (Snow, 1960, calculated from her Table 8).

Loss from hatching to nest departure is low — in 1958 and 59 only 5 per
cent of the chicks were lost — so that on Mandarte Island the most important
single factor influencing fledging rate in the study period was egg predation.
Egg predation is principally accounted for by the Northwestern Crow, which
nests on the island and constantly patrols the cormorant colonies to scavenge
for fish scraps. These crows are always ready to seize eggs and small young
when this opportunity arises. As an example of their destructive capacity,
consider a 45-minute banding operation among about 120 nests of the Double-
crest (July 8, 1960), when crows were quick to take advantage of the tem-
porary absence of adults from the nest as the two banders moved along the
cliff. An observer kept close watch meanwhile and observed 25 eggs and
eight newly hatched young carried off by crows; loss by gulls was nil. The
principal opportunities offered the crows in natural circumstances are the
moments of nest reHef (see Drent and Guiguet 1961: Figure 55) and colony
panics. Most 'natural' egg loss in the Double-crest probably occurs in the
panics caused by the Bald Eagle. The Bald Eagle is a common nesting bird in

220 The Canadian Field-Naturalist Vol. 78

the area, and its frequent flights over the island may reflect only the use of
updraughts from the cliffs to ease flight. We have never observed eagles to
take birds at Mandarte. In any case, a direct flight over the cliff^s puts the
cormorants and gulls into the air at once, and crows (also gulls, but to a lesser
extent) raid the unguarded nests. Bald Eagles inflict the most damage in this
indirect way early in the season, when the cormorants are easily frightened.
As time goes by the cormorants become less susceptible to disturbance, and
moreover the frequency of eagle visitation declines. In the 1959 season the
number of days on which eagles caused panics was 1 3 for May, 6 for June, and
2 for July; in 1960 the figures were 12, 7 and 4. The decline in visitation
presumably reflects the shift of the eagles to the rivers when the salmon run
begins.

The Double-crest is adapted to withstand considerable egg predation, as
could be deduced from its increase on the B. C. coast in the face of constant
presence of the Northwestern Crow. Comparison of the 1958 and 1959
figures demonstrates that the trebled egg predation in the latter season (reach-
ing some 30 per cent of all eggs laid) was compensated for by replacement
laying, such that the number of young fledged per nest remained constant.
In 1960 (sample of 25 nests, followed by F. Tompa) egg predation again in-
creased, but this time exceeded the ability of the cormorants to make good
their loss by heightened laying. Predation eliminated some 60 per cent of
all eggs laid'(72 of 119), yet the number laid per nest was scarcely higher than
in the previous season — 4.8 versus 4.6 respectively. These figures suggest that
replacement laying was already maximum in 1959, such that egg predation in
excess of 30 per cent surpasses the safety margin and will cause a decline in the
number of young hatched per nest, and thus a decline in fledging rate.

Visitors to the island are a threat to cormorants in the egg stage, as the
adults are invariably put off the nest, exposing the contents to the crows.
When present on the island we were able to prevent such episodes, and it is
significant that of the 48 eggs lost through predation in the 1960 sample, 29,
i.e., 60 per cent, disappeared whilst we were absent on our weekly supply
trips. We suspect that incautious visitors were responsible for the excessive
egg mortality in that season.

Comparable figures on egg and chick survival from the literature on cor-
morants are those of Kortlandt (1942) for Fhalacrocorax carbo in the Nether-
lands and those of Snow ( 1960) on P. aristotelis at Lundy. Kortlandt supplies
figures for the number of young reaching flying age in high tree nests at
Lekkerkerk in five seasons. In total, 211 young were raised in 119 nests for
a mean of 1.8, but Kortlandt thinks that the Dutch average normally lies at
about 1.25. Egg laying and hatching success were not treated.

Snow's data on the Shag extend over four seasons (294 nests in all).
Hatching success varied from 60 to 73 per cent, fledging success from 67 to
95 per cent, normally lying at about 90 per cent and the mean number of
fledged young per nest ranged from 1.3 to 2.3. Hatching and fledging success
are thus closely similar to the Double-crest on Mandarte in the 1958 and 1959

1964 Drent, van Tets, Tompa and Vermeer: Mandarte 221

seasons, but as the Double-crest has a larger clutch on the average, the pair
raises more young per season.

2. Fhalacrocorax pelagicits, Pelagic Cormorant
Census and distribution

There are only five accurate estimates, based on nest counts, available for
the Mandarte colony (see Drent and Guiguet 1961:40).

1915 25 pair

1936 164 occupied nests

1958 339 nests talHed

1959 357 nests tallied, total 370-380

Originally this species vv^as restricted to the highest (and steepest) portion
of the cliffside at the north end of the island, but it now nests throughout the
length of the southwest side, as indicated in Figure 2C. The increase of the
Pelagic Cormorant at Mandarte is part of a general increase in southern British
Columbia (Drent and Guiguet 1961:120). When the study began in 1957 a
group of about 40 pairs nested on South Islet, but this site was heavily disturbed
and no cormorants have nested there since.

Nesting habitat

Tho Pelagic Cormorant nests on narrow ledges and brackets on the more
precipitous portions of the cliff. At several points the recesses and crannies
utilized suggest miniature caves, where the young are raised in partial obscurity.
The distinction in nesting requirements between Double-crest and Pelagic is
illustrated in Figure 3.

Methods for gathering nesting data

The remarks under Double-crest apply here also. In 1957 the South Islet
subcolony was visited by night almost daily, when the 37 nests could be
checked without risk of predation. The resulting disturbance was severe,
however, so in later seasons observations were limited to telescope work from
permanent blinds. The nesting habitat of this species at Mandarte limits such
work, though, so the data are less extensive than those for the Double-crest.

Laying season

Laying commences in the end of May (May 16, 1957; May 27, 1959) and
most first clutches are started before the middle of June, as shown in Figure 5
for the 1957, 58, and 59 seasons. Replacement clutches may occur through an
additional one and one-half months (fresh August 4, 1958). At Race Rocks,
B.C., (48° 18' N, 123° 32' W) in 1958 G. C. Odium (BCNRS) noted the first
eggs on May 26, and recorded 14 of the total 27 clutches as being started in
the second week of June.

Clutch size and egg replacement

Modal clutch size for 56 clutches in the fourth week of June (1957 and
1958) was four, and the maximum six. If the entire clutch is lost a replacement
clutch may appear, as in the Double-crest and the Shag (Snow, 1960). Of 28

222

The Canadian Fiei.d-Naturalist

Vol. 78

nests of the Pelagic Cormorant where the original clutch was lost, the follow-
ing number of eggs appeared:

eggs 10 nests

1 egg 13 nests

2 eggs 4 nests

3 eggs 1 nest

The maximum number of eggs laid in any one nest in the course of the
season was seven, i.e., there are no records of more than one replacement clutch
appearing.

Incubation period

Incubation periods of marked eggs were determined in 1957, and there are
21 records where the events of laying and hatching (i.e. young free of shell)
are each known to the nearest day.

Table 6. — Laying-hatching intervals in Pelagic Cormorant Position
in clutch indicated

28 days

29 days

30 days

]

31 days

32 days

Mean for the 20 B, C, and D eggs is 30.7 days, and assuming that incubation
becomes effective with the laying of the second or third egg as in the Double-
crest, 3 1 days can serve as a provisional figure for the incubation period in the
Pelagic Cormorant. No critical figures are known to us from the literature.
For comparison, the following figures for Phalacrocorax aristotelis (Snow,
1960) may be cited. Seven eggs second or third in the clutch hatched in 30
or 31 days, and eight eggs first in the clutch in 32-35 days.

Fledging period

The chicks in some nests could be followed through to the close of the
season, as owing to the nesting habitat banding did not cause such a severe
shufiling of young as in the Double-crest. Age at nest departure was accur-
ately ascertained for seven young in six different nests (1957, 1958, 1959) as
follows: 42, 44, 48, 48, 49-51, 50-52, 50-51 days of age. The data are few as
most of the chicks of known age had not left the nest at the close of observation.
The maximum recorded for a young still in the nest was 58 days. Thus the
only conclusion to be drawn from our figures is that nest departure begins at
40-50 days of age. Swartz and Cox (in press) report one fledgling Pelagic
Cormorant leaving the nest at 53-56 days, another at 56-60 days of age. At
what age the young finally become independent was not determined. For
comparison Snow (1960) found Phalacrocorax aristotelis young to leave the
nest at 48-58 days of age, with a mean of 53 days for 35 observations.

1964

Drent, van Tets, Tompa and Vermeer: Mandarte

223

»o

•o

«f>

«o

1=^

00 to ^ Cm

saifotnfo ;o jaquunu

o ^

«M

Figure 5. Clutch commencement of the Pelagic Cormorant on Mandarte Island.

224

The Canadian Field-Naturalist

Vol. 78

Survival of eggs ■and young

Table 7. — Survival of eggs and young in the Pelagic Cormorant

Year

nests
total

eggs
total

per nest

chicks

young fledged

total

% eggs

per nest

total

% chicks

per nest

1957
1958
1959

37
17
22

141

3.8

70
43
58

50%

1.9
2.5
2.6

34
43

79%

74%

2.0
2.0

The 1957 data stem from the South Islet sub-colony visited by night, where
loss of young after hatching was unusually heavy and hence is not entered
here. For this season the causes of egg failure can be broken down as follows:

45 eggs predated, 32% eggs laid

26 eggs addled, 18% eggs laid

The 1958 and 1959 data derive from nests observed by telescope from the
north blind, and though the fate of the eggs could not be followed satisfactorily,
figures from hatching onwards were obtained.

The rather small material shows no striking difference from the Double-
crest, but it does seem that the Pelagic is unable to lay as many eggs under
similar predation pressure. The Pelagic Cormorant produces about the same
number of young fledged per nest as the Shag (Snow, 1960: figures cited under
Double-crest) though it starts with a larger clutch, the higher predation at
Mandarte eliminating the difference.

3 . Hae?natopus bach?nani, Black Oystercatcher
Census and distribution

A photograph of a nest with eggs taken in May 1896 by Dawson (Dawson
and Bowles, 1909) furnishes the earliest breeding evidence for Mandarte,
Eggs in the Provincial Museum collections were taken June 24, 1908 and June
10 and 16, 1910. Thereafter records are scant, and the oystercatcher was
apparently absent from the island for a number of years. Anderson (1916),
warden on the island in 1915, wrote "the rare Black or Bachman's Oyster-
catcher, in former years plentiful, has disappeared". Munro makes no mention
of oystercatchers in the accounts of his visits in 1921, 1923, 1927, and 1936
(Munro, 1925, 1929, 1937). The first positive record after 1910 was furnished
by Mr. A. L. Meugens of New Westminster, who photographed a nest with
2 eggs May 25 and 27, 1945.

In our period on the island, two pair have nested every season, one on the
northeast shore north of camp (1957-1961) the other on South Islet 1957-1959,
and the south end of Mandarte 1960-1961. The adults were not banded, so it
is not known if the same individuals were involved each season. Other nesting-
sites of the Black Oystercatcher in the area are Imrie Island (eggs 1958, 1959,

1964

Drent, van Tets, Tompa and Vermeer: Mandarte

225

Figure 6. Double-crested Cormorant, the northern sub-colony, also show n on Fig. 3 at B.

Figure 7. Incubating Double-crested Cormorant, note bulky stick nest.
Figure 8. Typical Glaucous-winged Gull nesting habitat at Mandarte Island: an open
grassy slope.

Figure 9. Nest of the Glaucous-winged Gull with full clutch of three.

226

The Canadian Field-Naturalist

Vol. 78

3
O

o 2-

"-'^

n=8\

J5_

J5^

Race Rocks
1956-60

Hand arte
1957-61

MAY

CLUTCH COMMENCEMENT, BLACK OYSTERCATCHER

Figure 10. Clutch commencement of the Black Oystercatcher on the south coast of
British Columbia.

1960, pair present 1961, chick 1962) and Halibut Island (eggs 1960 and 1961,
not observed on that island previously). Observations at all these sites are
included here.

Nesting habitat

Eggs were laid in nest-bowls lined with flattened stone chips, shells, bar-
nacle fragments, etc., in three situations: (1) gravelly beach, (2) bracket in
rock of beach cliff, (3) earth depression at brow of cliff. None of the sites
were far from high water mark. The first type (Figure 14) was that used by
the birds on Halibut, Imrie, and the south end of Mandarte, where the eggs
were surprisingly difficult to locate against the pale substrate, predominantly
crushed barnacles. As for the second type, the camp pair on Aiandarte used
the same two rock brackets (Figure 11), 2 meters above high water mark and
within 6 meters of each other, in the four seasons 1958-1961 when eggs were
found. If the first clutch was destroyed renesting occured in the alternate
site. Faithfulness to the nest-site is a documented feature of Haeinatopus
ostralegus (Jungfer, 1954), so that the conservatism of the Mandarte birds is
easily explicable by assuming that the same individuals were involved. The
third type, the earth depression site, was recorded once for a replacement clutch
on South Islet (1958). The three sites in our area correspond to Dawson's
descriptions for the species (see Webster 1941) with, the exception that we
have not seen the grass or dried moss type he mentions.

Methods of gathering nestifjg data

Our material is scant, as only the camp pair could be regularly watched
(daily checks 1958, 1959, 1^60). Some data are available from South Islet,
Imrie, and Halibut, but this section could not have been attempted without the
painstaking observations of G. C. Odium, Lightkeeper at Great Race Rock
(48° 18' N, 123° 32' W) who contributed data on four to six nests annually
1956-1960 for a total of 25 nests (BCNRS files). Incubation periods deter-
mined by W. A4ilne, Lightkeeper at Ivory Island, have also been included.

1964

Drent, van Tets, Tompa and Vermeer: Mandarte

227

Laying season

Figure 10 shows dates of commencement of 25 first clutches, eight on
Mandarte 1956-61, 17 on Race Rocks 1956-1960. It will be seen that laying
extends through May, with a peak in the third week. Dates for five known
replacement clutches were June 18, 1960 (Race Rocks); two on about June 10,
1958; one June 15, 1959; and one between July 4 and 5, 1959; the latter four on
Mandarte. For the Sitka region of Southeastern Alaska Webster (1941) re-
corded a full clutch (4 eggs) on May 9, and a hatching egg August 6 or 7, as
extremes in his 1940 study, indicating a spread of dates similar to our area.

Clutch size and egg replacement

The available figures for first clutches at Race Rocks, Mandarte, Halibut,
and Imrie, 1956-1961, are listed below.

Table 8. — Clutch size of the Black Oystercatcher, British Columbia

south coast.

Race Rocks

Elsewhere

Total

Three eggs
Two eggs
One egg

7
1

5
3

The 28 clutches give a mean of 2.6. Webster (1941) reported a mean of
2.7 for the Sitka area, based on 13 first clutches in 1940: 5 of two, 7 of three,
and 1 of four eggs.

The Black Oystercatcher reacts to total clutch destruction by laying a
replacement clutch; five cases, 2 of two eggs, 3 of one, are available in our
records. In one case the interval from loss to commencement of the replace-
ment clutch was 15-18 days, in another 9-17. Of special interest is the Man-
darte camp nest in 1959. The original clutch of three was gradually lost to
crow predation, the last egg disappearing between June 1 and 3. On June 15
the first tg^, and on June 17 the second, of the replacement clutch appeared,
the interval thus being 12-14 days. This set was lost in turn June 24-27, and
on July 4 or 5 the single &g^ of the third set was laid, (thus after a 7-11 day
interval), hatching successfully on July 30.

Webster (1941) reported clutch size of three second sets as 2 of two eggs
and 1 of one.

Incubation period

Table 9. — Laying-hatching intervals (days) in Black Oystercatcher

Egg

Clutches of two

Clutches of three

A
B
C

26, 28, 29, 29, 30, 32
25-26, 26, 26, 27, 27

27-28, 28, 30
25-26, 27, 28, 28
25-26, 26, 27, 27

228 The Canadian Field-Naturalist Vol. 78

Table 9 assembles the data on 22 eggs from the various British Columbia
sites mentioned. Incubation period of the Black Oystercatcher (i.e. the inter-
val from laying of last egg of the clutch until the chick from that egg is free
from the shell) can be stated as 26-27 days, with the possibility that it is some-
times as short as 25 days. More data are needed to bear out the suspicion that
effective incubation commences somewhat later in 3-clutches than in 2-clutches
(note the 28 day periods for B eggs in the former).

Webster (1941) gave four observations of incubation period as follows:
27, not over 26, 26-27, and 27-30 days. These were calculated from laying of
the last tgg (Webster, i?i lift. July 12, 1961) and thus comparable to our figure
of 26-27 days.

Fledging and departure from nesting islet

Scattered observations were made on banded young of known age on
Mandarte. One individual could fly strongly by 47 days of age, but the true
fledging period is doubtless shorter than this. Webster (1942) indicates that
fledging takes place shortly after five weeks of age.

The young we observed remained with their parents on Mandarte to the
close of observation. Last dates of sighting follow: two families in 1957:
September 1, one young 78 days old; September 2, two young about 70 days
old; two families in 1960: August 22, one young about 70 days old; August 23,
one young 75 days old. The two colour-banded young on Imrie Island were
still on the islet with their parents on our last visit August 8, 1960, at about 50
days of age. For comparison, Webster (1941) observed two young two miles
from the nest at 57 days of age, but they were still accompanied by tlheir
parents. These juveniles joined the local flock by the age of 67 days, but
were still being fed by their parents. These notes underline the need of pre-
cise observation to determine age at fledging, departure from nesting islet, and
independence.

Survival of eggs and young

The Race Rocks data (1956-60) yield hatching figures for 16 nests. Of
the 38 eggs laid, 27 hatched (71%), the remaining 11 being accounted for as
follows: six were lost in a storm, three disappeared, and two were addled.
Hatching success on Mandarte was unreasonably low because of constant crow
predation, increased by our frequent disturbance of the sitting birds when we
moved about the island (19 eggs laid yielding five chicks, or 26 per cent hatch-
ing success).

Fledging data are available from observation of banded chicks on Man-
darte (two pair for four seasons), Imrie and Halibut (one pair for one season
each). In ten pair-seasons seven young were raised to an age of 50 days or
older; thus each pair would produce 0.7 young per season on average. This
is doubtless under the natural production in the area, as we consider crow
predation on Mandarte abnormally high — in four pair-seasons here all eggs
were lost to crows, so that no young were raised. Nevertheless our figure is
considerably higher than that reported by Webster (1941) for the Siska
region in 1940, where 24 pairs raised 10 young to fledging.

1964

Drent, van Tets, Tompa and Vermeer: Mandarte

jfftll

229

t *' «•* '

•'X. .^.

.a;
-as?

Figure 11. Nesting habitat of Black Oystercatcher on northeast beach of Mandarte Island
(water's edge at bottom of figure). Arrow points to nest site.

Figure 12. The stone chip nest of the Black Oystercatcher of Figure 11.

Figure 13. Crow-pecked eggs, with a whole egg for comparison, of (A) Pigeon Guillemot,
(B) Glaucous-winged Gull, (C) Cormorant spp.

Figure 14. Nesting habitat of Black Oystercatcher on Halibut Island: the nest was located
at edge of beach debris in the centre.

1915

450

1921

350

1923

600

1927

1000

1936

534

1955

1500

1957-61

1800-2000

1962

2100

230 The Canadian Field-Naturalist Vol. 78

Boyd (1962) has summarized production statistics for the European
Oystercatcher {Haematopus ostralegus) from three studies, carried out in
Wales, Germany, and Finland. In these three areas the number of eggs laid
per female per season (as estimated by clutch size) was about 2.67, 3.01, and
2.88 respectively, hatching success 66%-, 79% and 92% and success from hatch-
ing to fledging 75%, 05%, and 78%. In these three areas, therefore, a pair
raised 1.3, 0.1, and 2.1 young to fledging on the average. Certainly part of this
discrepancy can be accounted for by paucity of the data on fledging, but it
does seem that success varies enormously between different areas.

4. Larus gtmtcescens, Glaucous-winged Gull

Census and distribution

Available counts of the Mandarte colony (main island alone) run as
follows (see Drent and Guiguet 1961: 57-59):

pair, incorrectly given as 225 in the above

pair

pair, a questionable estimate

nests, a total count

pair

see Figure 2B, census area is 28% of occupied

nesting grounds, assuming equal density total

for Mandarte 2000, with an additional 100 on

South Islet.
At present the Glaucous-wing nests in all open areas on Mandarte, and in
addition a couple of pair nest on North Rock and about 100 pair on South
Islet. The spectacular increase of this species on Mandarte is part of a general
increase on the inner south coast of the Province (Drent and Guiguet 1961:
120). Protection and the increasing supply of food made available by man
(especially refuse in nearby cities and harbours) are believed responsible.

Nesting habitat

All the less precipitous open areas of the island are utilized. The majority
nest in the uneven grassy areas (Figure 8), and nests are regularly built in the
brush fringe wherever the birds can penetrate by a sort of run-way. In
addition, the Glaucous-wing nests at many points along the cliffy southwest
shore, where its minimal requirements are intermediate between those of the
Pelagic and Double-crested Cormorant. Young are successfully raised on
rather narrow ledges and other precarious places, so that this species, like the
Herring Gull (Goethe, 1960) can exploit a wide range of nesting sites.

Methods of gathering nesting data

In 1957 and 1958 nest recording on a large scale throughout the northeast
side of the island was carried out by van Tets and his assistants (J. Takacs,
D. M. Kennedy, and S. Shearman). About 1000 nests were recorded each
season, and each was visited about every 2-3 days. The 1957 material forms

1964 Drent, van Tets, Tompa and Vermeer: Mandarte 231

the basis for the census but has not been further used; the 1958 cards were
analysed by D. Kennedy. In 1959 and 1960 effort was limited to the 'gull plot',
an isolated unit of the colony bordered by beach and a dense growth of
shrubbery, situated immediately south of camp and containing approximately
100 pair. In 1961 nest checks were made in several meadows on the northeast
side, including the plot. In 1962 all meadows on the northeast side north of
camp (489 pair in all) were checked.

In the first years all nests in the study area were marked by affixing
numbered tin tags to nearby vegetation, a means not altogether satisfactory
and replaced by wooden stakes in 1961. The nests were then checked as fre-
quently as our other work permitted (GvT in 1959, 65 of 66 days in the laying-
hatching period; RD in 1960, 41 of the 56 days in the laying-hatching period
and 19 of 43 days thereafter; KV in 1961 and 1962, thrice daily in the laying-
hatching period, daily thereafter). Record cards were completed for all nests
in which eggs were found. The eggs were marked as they appeared with nest
number and A, B, C successively, in India ink. The patrols on the plot in
1959-1960 required 1-1 V^ hours during laying, IVz-lVz during hatching, and
1 hour or less thereafter. In 1961 and 1962 with more meadows being checked
the patrols lasted from 3 hours up to about 5 hours on busy days.

In 1959 the young were marked upon hatching by affixing poultry wing
clips to the patagium, but the method proved unacceptable as it was not always
possible to remove the marks without damage later on. In 1960 the young
were marked upon hatching with legbands of coloured binders' tape, one
combination for each brood. The age of the chicks could thus later be deter-
mined within the range of hatching dates of the brood (in most cases to within
two days). When the chicks were sufficiently grown (15-30 days) these
provisional marks were replaced with the standard aluminum rings supplied by
the Canadian Wildlife Service. The checks were continued to the close of the
season, and as many young as could be found in a careful search once over the
terrain, recorded. The main weakness of the method was the impossibility of
checking the young when they started to fly. In 1961 and 1962 the young
received individual combinations of binders' tape, later replaced with individual
colour combinations of plastic legbands in addition to the standard aluminum
rings, allowing recognition from afar. By repeated checks with binoculars
from blinds or shrubbery the fate of the young could be accurately followed
to the close of the season.

Laying season

The first eggs appear on the island in the beginning of May, and in normal
years the majority of clutches laid in the last week of June or later are replace-
ments. Clutch commencement dates for the last four seasons have been plotted
in Figure 15. Earliest dates of the four seasons were May 15, 20, 15 and 4,
and laying was heaviest in the last week of May and the first two weeks of
June. Taking the four seasons together, the central 80 per cent of the 934 first
clutches were commenced in this three week period. The latest date for a
clutch which resulted in fledged young was June 14, I960; June 13, 1961; and
June 30, 1962.

232

The Canadian Field-Naturalist

Vol. 78

Clutch size and egg replacement

The normal first clutch for the Glaucous-wing is three, but smaller
clutches do appear. It is impossible to be certain that an apparent clutch of
two or one is not caused by predation etc., but we believe the following figures
are representative for first clutches.

Table 10. — Clutch size of the Glaucous-winged Gull on Mandarte Island

1959

1960

1961

1962

all years

Clutch size, three

400

607

two

124

one

Total clutches

479

758

Mean clutch

2.61

2.66

2.74

2.82

2.77

There is critical evidence for Lams argentatus and L. fuscus (Paludan,
1951) and L. ridibimdus (Weidmann, 1956) that loss of eggs as they are laid
causes protracted laying, i.e. the birds are indeterminate layers. Contrary
results with L. argentatus (Davis, 1942) and L. calif orniciis (Behle and Goates,
1958) are not supported by critical evidence. Besides this mechanism, loss of
the entire clutch after brooding sufficient to suppress the fourth follicle has
gone on, results in a replacement clutch (in L. argentatus and L. juscus in 11-12
days, in L. ridibimdus in about the same period).

Our observations on the Glaucous-wing indicate a similar response to egg
loss. There are three records of protracted laying under natural circumstances,
where loss of one of the original three eggs during the laying period led to the
laying of a fourth tgg, bringing the set up to three again. The most precise
records are: no. 535, C egg laid June 2, lost June 2 or 3, D egg laid June 4;
no. 571, A egg laid June 6, lost June 6 or 7, B, C, D followed on June 8, 10
and 14.

There are a number of records of replacement clutches, including four
that appeared after the chicks were lost. In the first years none of the adults
involved were marked, but in 1961 three indisputable records with colour-
ringed pairs were obtained. Records for the interval from loss of the original
clutch of three (when the nest was empty) to appearance of the first egg of
the replacement clutch are six cases of 11 days, five of 12 days, one of 13* days,
13-14 days, 15* days, 16* days, and 17 days. (* denotes marked birds). These
16 cases give a mean of 12.5 days, which conforms to the interval found in other
gulls (see above). Clutch size for 22 replacement clutches runs as follows:
10 cases of three, 9 of two, and 3 of one egg.

Incubation period

In the Glaucous- wing, the A egg hatches 1.7 days before the C egg on the
average (49 observations), the B tg^ 0.9 days (45 observations), although they
have been in the nest respectively four and two days before the C &gg has been

1964

10-
5-

Drent, van Tets, Tompa and Vermeer: Mandarte

233

1959

lot

O
30

„„ ^^

not

5 10 MAY 20 25 30 5 10 JUNE 20 25 30 5 10 JUUf

1960

U 89
■ 6

5 10 MAY 20 25 30 5 10 JUNE 20 25 30 5 10 JULY

20:

15-

10-

^ \

1961

U276
■ 26

^30-

"5
^20\-

%10

nn^

MfcJ uJ_

5 10 MAY 20 25 30 5 10 JUNE 20 25 30 5 10 JULY

u-ii-ii-i l-ii-it-ii-ii-i i -ii-it-ii-ii-ii -ii-ii-ii -ii-i i -ii-ii-ii-ii-it-ii-ii-iuji-ii-ii-ii-ii-ii-ii-iM'-' '

1962

n n I— I n I

nr-'

a 478
■ 12

hfti

5 10 MAY 20 25 30 5 10 JUNE 20 25 30 5 10 JUIY

CLUTCH COMMENCEMENT, GLAUCOUS -WINGED GULL
u first clutch m replacement

Figure 15. Clutch commencement of the Glaucous- winged Gull on Mandarte Island.

234 The Canadian Field-Naturalist Vol. 78

laid. Thus, as in other gulls (see Paludan, 1951; Barth, 1955; Ytreberg, 1958;
Beer, 1962) incubation only gradually becomes fully effective, the first two
eggs undergoing little development before clutch completion. Incubation
period is best considered as the period between laying and hatching (i.e. young
free of the shell) of the C egg. Sixty-seven records are available from marked
C eggs in normal first clutches where both events were known to the nearest
day, as set out below for a mean of 27.1 days.

Table 11. — Laying-hatching interval of C egg,
Glaucous-winged Gull

26 days

27 days

28 days

29 days

17 eggs

31 eggs

17 eggs

2 eggs

Previous figures for incubation period in this species have been inadequately
defined, and all lie below our values (Anderson, 1916: 24-25 days; Schultz,
1951: 23 days or less; James- Veitch and Booth, 1954: 23 days average, range
19-30!).

Fledgifig period and colony departure

The age at first strong flight, strictly the fledging period to follow iUoreau
(1946), is distinct from the age at colony departure. The former was estimated
as follows. When the observer enters the gull meadow the nearest adults take
flight and settle on the water, and the chicks, depending on their age, either
crouch in the cover or fly off to join the adults on the water. In 1960 the last
age at which 39 chicks believed to have left the island successfully were found
ashore averaged 40 days, with a range from 31 to 52. Doubtless some chicks
avoided detection ashore beyond the last observation, but on the other hand
some individuals though definitely capable of flight preferred to remain ashore
in their habitual hiding place. We feel our mean figure of 40 days to be a
useful approximation of the fledging period. Schultz (1952) reported that
young Glaucous-wings attempt to fly at five weeks of age if disturbed, and can
fly well by 45 days, conclusions with which our figures agree. James- Veitch
and Booth (1954) give the average age at independent flight for 10 young as
46.5 days. A mean figure of 43 days was derived for the Herring Gull by
Paynter (1949) from the same sort of data as ours.

The food available to the gulls along Mandarte's beaches is rather limited,
and when the young begin to feed themselves they are forced to leave the
island. It is possible that some of them utilize nearby food sources (e.g. Sidney
Spit) foraging at low water and returning at first to roost at the colony. It is
our impression, however, that in most cases once the juveniles leave the island
they do not return, but gradually disperse to areas where food is readily avail-
able. One of these areas is Vancouver, 42 miles (68 km.) to the north, where
sewage and garbage attract large numbers of gulls. Fortunately for us Mr.
R. F. Oldaker has for some years been carrying out telescope observations in

1964

Drent, van Tets, Tompa and Vermeer: Mandarte

235

Vancouver as part of the plumage and movements study organised by Mrs.
Z. M. Schultz. By reading the band numbers Oldaker identified five of the
juveniles from the study plot in 1960.

Table 12. — Mandarte Glaucous-winged Gulls sighted at the Vancouver city dump in 1960

Band no.

Nest

Last seen Mandarte

First seen Vancouver

Date

Age

Date

Age

577-20205
577-20216
577-20212
577-20237
577-20210

923
923
940
986
920

29 July

27 July

29 July
3 August
6 August

40 days
38 days
31-35
31-32
45 days

12 August
12 August
29 August

8 September
26 September

54 days
54 days
62-66 days
67-68 days
96 days

The two young from nest 923 (the third chick died in pipping) supply the
most precise figures, being last handled ashore on the plot at 40 and 38 days old.
It is not known how much longer these birds stayed at Mandarte, as we could
expect them to take flight at the observer's approach beyond this age. Two
weeks later, however, the birds were seen together (now 54 days old) foraging
on the city dump in Vancouver, where the first of the season's juveniles was
sighted August 8 (Oldaker). The fact that they were still together points to
a strong bond between the siblings in this family, as occurs from time to time
in the Herring Gull (Drost, 1951; Goethe 1955).

Indirect evidence on the age at colony departure is given by the age at
which healthy voung capable of flight were last seen on Mandarte. In 1960
four birds whose colour-marks were accidentally not replaced with aluminum
rings were still seen on the plot at 53, 53, 53, and 60 days of age. For 1961 a
considerable material is available based on colour-ringed young. There were
no cases of departure before August 16, but there are 38 last sightings over the
period August 20-28, ranging from 48-65 days old, with a mean of 56, the age
at presumed departure. Some individuals probably escaped notice on days
after their "last sighting", and that this figure is somewhat too low is shown by
the ages of the 97 birds still present on the island the last two days of observa-
tion, August 29 and 30. The ages here ranged from 46-67 days, with a mean
of 56, i.e. identical to the group presumed seen on their last day on the island.

We conclude that young Glaucous-wings begin to leave the colony at
about 50 days of age, that most are gone by 60 days, and a few may remain
until 70 days or older. Schultz (1952) found extensive flights with adults to
occur at the end of the seventh week, and a gradual dispersal from the breeding
colonies after the eighth week; again our figures are in substantial agreement.
Herring Gull juveniles at typical colonies leave at about the same age (Goethe,
1955, 1956), as contrasted to the much longer periods at the Wilhelmshaven
colony studied by Drost (1951, 1952), where ample food is available nearby
the year round.

236

The Canadian Field-Naturalist

Vol. 78

Table 13. — Last sightings of Glaucous-winged Gull young on Mandarte Island in 1961

(see text).

Age

20-28 August group

29-30 August group

45-49 days
50-54 days
55-59 days
60-64 days
65-69 days
total

mean age
range

3
13
16

1
38

55 . 7 days
48-65 days

32
37
15

. 4
97

55 . 5 days
46-67 days

Survival of eggs and young

Table 14. — Glaucous-winged Gull

Year

Total

nests

Eggs laid

Chicks hatched

Young Fledged

Total

Per nest

Total

Per nest

% eggs

Total

Per nest

% chicks

1958
1959
1960
1961

860
92
87
97

2232
244
225
266

2.6

2.7
2.6

2.7

1280
156
150
188

1.5
1.7
1.7
1.9

57%
64%
67%
71%

780

47
95

0.9

0.5
1.0

61%

31%
51%

Figures from hatching success were obtained in four seasons, and show
good agreement. Taking the four seasons together, 2967 eggs were laid in
1136 nests, from which 1774 chicks hatched, for an average hatching rate of
60 per cent. A break-down of &g^ loss is available for two seasons.

Table 15. — Analysis of failure to hatch,

Glaucous-winged Gull

1959

1961

Addled
Disappeared
Died in pipping

31 eggs

51 eggs

6 eggs

13% eggs laid

21% eggs laid

2% eggs laid

48 eggs

24 eggs

6 eggs

18% eggs laid
9% eggs laid
2% eggs laid

The main cause for disappearance is crow predation, some eggs are taken by
gulls, rolled out of the nest, crushed, etc. The figures suggest that the varia-
tion in hatching success in the various seasons may reflect varying predation (to
some extent influenced by technique of the observer) .

Fledging rate was determined in three seasons, but it must be emphasized
that the methods differed. The 1958 data are based on the number of young

1964

Drent, van Tets, Tompa and Vermeer: Mandarte

237

banded in the part of the island covered in the nest records. Every effort was
made to cover the area thoroughly, and we made the practise of removing
bands from any dead recovered on the island, and using these bands again.
Therefore, the banding total should approximate the number of juveniles that
reach flying age. The mortahty between banding and flight is not extreme
in any case; in 1960, eight of 59 or 16 per cent of the chicks banded on the
study plot subsequently were found dead on the island. Applying this rate to
the 1958 figures, the minimal fledging rate would be 0.8 young per nest. The
rate of 0.9 given above is probably closer to the truth, however, because of our
checks for dead juveniles, and the fact that some chicks must have been missed
in the banding.

In 1960 a young was considered successfully fledged if seen in good health
30 days of age or older. This limit was chosen as some birds started to fly at
this age. In total, 97 nests where eggs appeared were located on the plot; 87
of these gave reliable hatching data and were followed through to fledging. A
check on these figures is provided by considering all the young fledged on the
plot (55) versus the total number of nests (97), or a mean of 0.6 young fledged
per nest.

The 1961 data are certainly the most precise, the number of young fledged
being those still alive at 42 days of age. Mortality of the chicks is set out
below.

Table 16. — Mortality of Glaucous-winged Gull chicks, 97 nests in 1961.

to leave colony after seventh week.

N.B. young begin

Age

Total dead

Missing

Found dead

First week

Second week

Third week

Fourth week

Fifth week

Sixth week

'Seventh week

Eighth week

Ninth week

Tenth week

Totals

The high number of chicks entered as 'missing' in the first week is explained by
their disappearance through predation, and to a minor extent by our failure to
find the small carcases in the high grass.

Mortality is concentrated in the first days, as Paynter (1949) and Paludan
(1951) found in Larus arge?itatiis. In the Glaucous-wing practically 80 per
cent of the deaths up to 49 days of age (when the young begin to leave the
colony) occur in the first two weeks. No less than 28 per cent of all chicks
hatched died in their first week. The chief death cause is predation or
molestation by adult gulls (not the parents). Of the 58 carcases found, death
cause could be ascertained for 16, as follows: 14 pecked to death by gulls, of

238

The Canadian Field-Naturalist

Vol. 78

which four had been partially eaten, one killed by fall over cliff, and one
crushed by the observer. The importance of the crow as chick predator is
unknown.

Hatching and fledging rates for other Larus gulls are set out in Table 17.

Table 17. — Hatching and fledging success in Larus gulls

Species.

Hatching
(% eggs laid)

Fledging
(% chicks)

Authority

Larus fuscus
L. argentatus

L. californicus
L. ridihundus

94%

61%

92%

71%

56%, 90%

87%

75%, 78%

55%
5%
41%
51%
20%
70%

Darling (in Paynter)
Paludan 1951
Darling (in Paynter)
Paynter 1949
Paludan 1951
Behle & Goates 1957
Ytreberg 1956

A closer comparison with the figures for L. argentatus is rewarding, as these
were obtained from a reasonably large material, with methods similar to ours,
in habitat not strikingly different (Paynter, 1949; Paludan, 1951; Drost et al.,
1961). Paludan's data for L. fuscm can be disregarded here, as he studied a
dechning population whose low success was due to predation by the Herring
Gull nesting at the same colony.

Table 18. — Reproductive success in 4 gull studies.

Species

Colony

Study
period

Production per season per 100 nests

Eggs

Hatched

Fledged

Authority

argentatus
glaucescens

Graesholm
Kent I.

Wilhelmshaven
Mandarte

1943-44
1949
1948-59
1958-61

300
247
267
261

270
176

156

54
91
66
89

Paludan 1951
Paynter 1949
Brost etal. 1961
This paper

It appears that the Glaucous-wing has a lower hatching rate and a higher
fledging rate than the three colonies of the Herring Gull investigated. More
data are needed to show if these differences are real, however, for the argentati/s
material is small (Paludan 90 pairs, Paynter 100 pairs) and the only fledging
data extending over several seasons (Drost) shows the same range of variation
as the Glaucous-wings at Mandarte. The Wilhelmshaven colony increased
from 107 to 139 pair in 1956-59, and in those four seasons the fledging rate per
pair varied from 0.4 to 0.9 young. In fact, when the difficulties are taken into
account, the data from the various studies are remarkably similar.

1964

Drent, van Tets, Tompa and Vermeer: Mandarte

239

Figure 16. Boulder beach and low cliflf along iMandarte's northeast shore, nesting habitat of
the Pigeon Guillemot (11 nests in the portion shown).

240 The Canadian Field-Naturalist Vol. 78

5. Cepphus columba, Pigeon Guillemot

Census and distribution

Though known to have nested on Mandarte since at least 1902 (Drent and
Guiguet 1961: 78) there are no adequate counts previous to 1957-1960. In this
period we attempted to locate all nests on the island, and as these are used year
after year practically all nests (certainly more than 90 per cent) were known
by the close of 1960. The total of 102 was distributed as follows: three on
North Rock, 80 on Mandarte itself, and 19 on South Islet. We obtained
definite evidence that at least 82 were occupied in the 1960 season, whilst seven
had become unusable and the balance were probably occupied. Bearing in
mind that all nests were not found, we estimate the breeding population at
Mandarte at 100-110 pairs. Distribution of known nests is shown on Figure
2A. It is our belief that the colony has reached maximum size, all available
nest-sites being in use.

Nesting habitat

The Pigeon Guillemot has a strong tendency to lay its eggs under cover.
Only once did we obtain a record of an open ledge site on Mandarte (1960).
Bowman (1961) reported a similar observation from South Farallon, California.

As the thin rocky soil on Mandarte precludes extensive burrowing the
guillemots utilize all manner of natural holes and crannies. These can be
grouped in four categories, the relative importance being indicated by the
number of nests of each type found on the northeast short of Mandarte (total
62 nests): (1) cavities or chambers in loose boulder jumbles along the beach
(24 nests), (2) natural cracks in rock masses (18 nests), (3) chambers in the
soil beneath a boulder cap, usually a natural hollow enlarged by the birds (14
nests), and (4) abandoned rabbit burrows (5 nests), originally excavated by
Oryctolagus cuniculus introduced to the island long ago but extinct there when
our study began. Further possibilities such as beach debris, although used in
the vicinity, do not occur on Mandarte.

On those parts of the island thoroughly worked by us we found nesting
guillemots wherever cavities occurred, at all elevations and in a variety of
situations including nesting groups of cormorants and gulls. The only limita-
tions appeared to be that dense brush was avoided and the birds were generally
prevented from using burrows within one meter of an occupied gull nest.

Laying season

Figure 17 shows the dates of clutch commencement for the seasons 1957-
1960 on Mandarte. Taking the four seasons together, the 124 clutches give a
mean date of June 11, standard deviation of eight days, and a range of 42 days
(May 18-June 29). Young have successfully fledged from eggs laid at each
extreme (May 18, 1960; June 28, 1959). These dates are doubtless near the
limits for this area. Bowles (1921) assembled the data of Washington oologists
and found the earliest date for a fresh complete clutch was May 20, the latest
July 2. Thoresen and Booth (1958) report laying in 1957 to have commenced
about May 20 with a peak June 5-20, for the Fidalgo Island area in Washington,

1964

Drent, van Tets, Tompa and Vermeer: Mandarte

241

not far from Mandarte. In our experience single fresh eggs in July have been
replacements.

Methods of gathering nesting data.

We found the afternoon hours the best time to check the guillemot nests,
as the unoccupied birds are then absent from the colony and thus our disturb-
ance could be kept at a minimum. The nests along the northeast side of the
island formed the study group, being checked every 1-3 days in 1957-1958
(GvT, Takacs, Kennedy) and daily throughout the 1959 and 1960 seasons
(RD). The number of nests covered in these four seasons where at least eggs
appeared was 33, 32, 45, and 45 respectively. The nests on South Islet
(similarly 9, 9, 15, and 18 nests respectively) were checked from six to fourteen
times during the season, and nests elsewhere were visited only for banding of
the young.

Clutch size and egg replacement

Quantitative data for clutch size are given by Winn (1950) for the closely
related Black Guillemot on Kent Island (New Brunswick) and Thoresen and
Booth (1958) for the Pigeon Guillemot in the Fidalgo Island area, Washington,
as set out in Table 19. The Mandarte data are given in Table 20. The usual

Table 19.

— Clutch size, data of Winn and Thoresen & Booth

Black Guillemot

Pigeon Guillemot

one egg
two eggs
three eggs

9
33

Table 20. — Clutch size of the Pigeon Guillemot at Mandarte Island

1957

1958

1959

1960

Totals

Per cent

one egg
two eggs
mean clutch

4
1.87

1.94

1.90

46
1.90

147

1.91

9.3%
90.7%

clutch of the Pigeon Guillemot thus consists of two eggs. Replacement
clutches and nests established over the seasons as being prone to crow predation
were disregarded for the tabulation, so the proportion reported for clutches of
one (about 10 per cent of the total 162) should be near the truth. These were
deposited during the normal egg-laying period, and of the 1 5 eggs nine hatched,
eight of the chicks subsequently fledging successfully. Thus one-clutches
appear normal in every respect.

Two records where more than two eggs appeared in the nest were
definitely the work of two females (banded individuals), birds whose nest had

242

The Canadian Field-Naturalist

Vol. 78

become unusable laying in the nearest available cavity along with the nest
owner. This is doubtless the explanation for the 3 -clutches occasionally
reported for Black and Pigeon Guillemots, as these records are not supported
by critical evidence.

No replacements were noted if only one of a two-clutch was lost, and if
the entire clutch was lost a repeat clutch appeared in approximately 13 days
(eight observations, seven of one egg, one of two eggs) in about half of the
cases. Four of these repeat clutches were lost in turn, but in no case was a
third attempt made.

For the Black Guillemot Winn (1950) recorded two repeat clutches in 15
days or less, and Uspenski (1958) records one 18 day interval. For the Pigeon
Guillemot Thoresen and Booth (1958) estimate two cases at 18 days. All auks
studied replace lost eggs in a pattern comparable to repeat clutches in other
birds (Alca torda, Uria aalge and U. lomvia, Fratercula arctica: Paludan, 1947;
Uspenski, 1958; N0rrevang, 1958; Tschanz, 1959; Kartaschew, 1960).

Incubation period

■ -Laying-hatching intervals were determined for 22 marked eggs of the
Pigeon Guillemot, where both events were known to the nearest day.

Table 21. — Laying-hatching intervals in Pigeon Guillemot

28 days

29 days

30 days

31 days

32 days

i?) days

34 days

Total eggs

Mean (days)

32.0

29.8

As the eggs are laid with an interval of three days, the figures indicate that
little effective incubation occurs before the second egg is laid. Temperature
recording demonstrated that steady incubation does not set in until some time
after clutch completion. The incubation period of the Pigeon Guillemot can
thus best be regarded as the period required to hatch the B egg, that is, 30 days
on the average, with a range of 28-32.

Comparable figures from the literature are scant. Winn (1950) gives 12
records for the Black Guillemot, but does not specify interval from laying to
hatching in seven, and does not distinguish A from B eggs in the other five
(29, 30, 32, 33, 33 days). Uspenski (1958) gives 27-30 days as the incubation
period for this species (B egg). Thoresen and Booth (1958) report four cases
of 31 days for the B egg in the Pigeon Guillemot, but do not state probable
error of their observations.

1964

Drent, van Tets, Tompa and Vermeer: Mandarte

243

- .1

1=1

§1

sai40in)o fo jaqvunu

Figure 17. Clutch commencement of the Pigeon Guillemot on Mandarte Island.

Nestling period

The chick does not leave the nest cavity until close to adult weight (90
per cent on average) and with complete juvenal plumage. Potentially at least
the young are then capable of flight, so here nestling and fledging periods
coincide. As was confirmed by releasing advanced young by day, the young
leave the colony directly and have nothing further to do with their parents
who continue to join the colony assembly long after the chicks have departed
(observations on banded birds).

Fifteen observations of the nestling period on Mandarte range from 29 to
39 days, with a mean of 35 (29 days-2, 30-1, 33-2, 34-1, 35-1, 36-2, 37-2, 38-2,

244

The Canadian Field-Naturalist

Vol. 78

39-2). In each case the chick was last seen in the nest the afternoon or evening
of the day given (being absent the following day), and it is presumed that it
left the nest the same evening, though this event was never witnessed.

For the Black Guillemot in the Russian Arctic Uspenski (1958) gives two
observations, 34 and 36 days, and quotes Kaftanowski that the nestling period
is 35-37 days, a figure reappearing in Kartaschew (1960). For Iceland
Gudmundsson (1953) gives five weeks. Winn (1950) reported one period of
39 days, and two chicks that had not yet left the nest at 36 and 37 days, in the
Bay of Fundy. For the Pigeon Guillemot Thoresen and Booth (1958) state
the nestling period to be 33-37 days (number of observations not given) for
Skagit County, Washington. It will be seen that the Mandarte material is the
largest, and that determinations elsewhere fall within the range of our data.

Survival of eggs and yowjg

A difficulty in employing the data was to decide whether our visits had
influenced nesting success. This involved a number of decisions based on
intimate knowledge of the nests and we believe gross errors have been
eliminated. A special problem was to decide if capture of the adults on the
eggs for banding purposes caused desertion. In fact of the 40 cases analysed
a significant increase in hatching failure occurred in nests where the adult was
captured in the first days after laying (especially up to nine days). For this
reason nests where an adult was captured within the first 19 days after clutch
commencement have not been included here.

Table 22. — Hatching success in the Pigeon Guillemot

Nests

Eggs

Chicks

Per cent

1957

74%

1958

61%

1959

54%

1960

59%

all years

109

200

124

62%

Hatching success in the four seasons does not differ significantly (p < .05).
Table 23. — Analysis of failure to hatch, Pigeon Guillemot 1957-60.

Cause

No. of eggs

%, eggs laid

Addled

Taken by crows

Rolled out of nest

Died in pipping

Unknown

36
26

7
1
1

21%

15%

Analysis of hatching failure was possible only for the nests on the main island,
where 172 eggs yielded 101 chicks over the four seasons (South Island data are

1964

Drent, van Tets, Tompa and Vermeer: Mandarte

245

included in Table 22). The 71 eggs failing to hatch are grouped in Table 23,
showing that addling and crow predation account for most of the failure. The
category 'addled' covers infertility and embryonic death, which could not be
distinguished in the field. Crow predation is heaviest in the first few days of
incubation, as shown in the following table where day is the day of clutch
commencement.

Table 24 — Time of egg loss to crows in the
Pigeon Guillemot

Day

Number of eggs lost

0- 1

1- 2

2- 3

3- 4

4- 5

6-24

25-30

By temperature recording it was determined that steady incubation by day sets
in the day following clutch completion (thus day 4), and by night from 4/5 to
7/8. The table makes clear that crows are Hkely to take eggs only in the period
when they are not continuously covered by the parents. The two observations
at 25-30 days were special cases where the parent had accidentally dislodged
the egg to the burrow entrance where it was taken by crows before the
guillemot could roll it back into the nest.

Table 25. — Fledging success in the Pigeon Guillemot

Year

Nests

Hatched

Fledged

Per cent

1957

92%

1958

88%

1959

90%

1960

41%

1957-59

90%

Considered successfully fledged were healthy chicks that disappeared from
the nest having attained juvenal plumage and juvenile weight (34 days of age
or older). It will be seen that 1960 was an unusually poor year. This was due
to a vastly increased mortality through molestation by juvenile gulls. In this
season no less than 15 guillemot chicks were pecked to death by juvenile
Larus glaucescens that had chanced to scramble into the guillemot nests for
shelter. The explanation for the heightened mortality is found in the weather:
1 960 had a prolonged dry spell, no measurable rain falling on Mandarte between
June 20 and August 14. This dry, hot weather had a drastic effect on the

246 The Canadian Field-Naturalist Vol. 78

vegetation, so where normally clumps of grass and shrubbery would answer
the needs of the gull young, they now had recourse to natural crannies in the
rock, including occupied guillemot nests.

In summary, in a "normal" year hatching success for the Pigeon Guillemot
at Mandarte lies at about 62 per cent (mean 1957-1960) and fledging success
at about 90 per cent (mean 1957-1959), such that each pair on average will lay
1.9 eggs, hatch 1.2 chicks, and raise 1.1 young to nest departure. The cor-
responding percentages of Thoresen and Booth (1958) for the Pigeon Guille-
mot in Skagit County, Washington, in 1957 (54% hatching success, 86%
fledging success) and of Kartaschew (1960) for the Black Guillemot in the
Murmansk region (eggs to fledged young 60%), both based on a much smaller
material, show good agreement with our figures. Winn (1950) gave statistics
for the Black Guillemot in the Bay of Fundy in 1947. He found a similar
hatching success (52%) but a low fledging success (no more than 50%). A4ost
of the chick loss (82% in fact) occurred by flooding of the nest during storms,
and suggests that 1947 was an unfavourable year for the Black Guillemot in the
Bay of Fundy, just as 1960 was a bad year for Mandarte's Pigeon Guillemots,
but for a very different reason.

6. Lunda cirrhata, Tufted Puffin

Known to nest on Mandarte since at least the turn of the century, few
counts of pairs are available, and still fewer finds of eggs or young (see Drent
and Guiguet 1961: 113-115):

1908, 1 nest (egg 25 June), about 1910 no more than 3-4 pair, 1915 3 pair,
1916 4 pair, 1922 2 pair, 1927 15 pair (we question this estimate), 1936 2
pair, 1 nest (egg 12 June), 1940 1 nest (egg about 20 May), 1953 1 pair,
1955 2 pair, 1957-62 at least 2 pair, 1 nest in 1958 (egg 3 July), 1 nest in
1959 (chick 25 July), 2 nests in 1960 (egg 31 July, chick 2 August), 1 nest
in 1962 (chick 10 August).

Apparently the Tufted Puffin has been a regular breeder on Mandarte over
the past 50 years. The only suggestion that there have ever been more than a
couple of pair or at most four pair nesting here is Munro's (1929) estimate in
1927 which was almost certainly too high. Aiunro did not mention puffins in
the accounts of his 1921 and 1923 visits, and gave two pair for 1936 (Munro
1937).

Figure 18. Stone chip nestbowl of the Pigeon Guillemot with full clutch of two (wired for

temperature readings).
Figure 19. Pigeon Guillemot nest cavity in boulder jumble along northeast beach, Mandarte

Island. Arrow points to clutch of Figure 18.
Figure 20. Passerine nesting habitat on Mandarte Island: at shrub edge in foreground

(chiefly Waxberry) a Song Sparrow nest, at base of Saskatoon Berry thicket on right a

Northwestern Crow nest.
Figure 21. Mandarte Island, looking northwest along island crest: on left the cliflF brow,

followed by an open grassy slope, adjoined by the shrub and tree belt: the clump

silhouetted consists of Arbutus, Douglas and Grand Fir, with Willow understory.

Shrubbery is formed chiefly by Saskatoon Berry and Waxberry; in left foreground

Fireweed.

1964

Drent, van Tets, Tompa and Vermeer: Mandarte

247

f5i^' C«4

248 The Canadian Fielu-Nai uralist Vol. 78

Two pair have been seen regularly about the island in the last years, and by
1960 we had located two nests (see Figure 2A). The Tufted Puffin generally
excavates a burrow, but as no suitable terrain exists on Aiandarte both nests were
found in natural crevices in the rockface. Use of similar sites has been
reported from the nearby San Juan Islands (e.g. Dawson and Bowles, 1909).
The north site on Mandarte has been in use for at least the past four seasons.
In 1959 a single downy young was found and banded July 25, and was
apparently still being fed August 22. In 1960 a single young was banded
x\ugust 2, and had left the nest by August 31. In 1961 adults were present at
the site but the nest was not checked. In 1962 another young was banded on
August 10. The records from this nest suggest that the Mandarte colony may
be able to maintain itself without immigration from other colonies. Puffins
visited other crannies on the cliff -face, but we found only grass accumulations
at these sites; possibly a third pair is implicated.

Eggs have been found on Mandarte from about May 20 to July 31, and
chicks from July 25 to August 22. As in other puffins, the clutch consists of
one egg. The Tufted Puffin is seen at Mandarte only in the breeding season
(arrival dates in 1959 and 1960: May 6 and 13 respectively), departing again in
early September (no exact dates).

7. Hirmido rustica, Barn Swallow

The Barn Swallow is a recent addition to Mandarte's breeding species.
The species is known to rely heavily on human habitation for nesting (e.g.
Nordberg, 1950: 22), and the building of cabins on the island provided a
natural experiment in habitat selection. In 1957 a small cabin was constructed,
in August 1958 the frame of another. In 1959 the Barn Swallow was first
noted on the island, being seen on 15 days in the course of the season (usually
one, maximum of three individuals), during which the second cabin was com-
pleted. In 1960 the Barn Swallow was noted 39 times (usually two, maximum
of three individuals) and at least two birds regularly flew into the second cabin
in the period May 24- June 21, to perch on a roof-beam. In 1961 one pair
nested on this beam, the mud necessary for the nest being brought in from else-
where, probably Sidney Island. At least three young left the nest successfully.

In 1962 a pair of Barn Swallows nested in the same site. On May 10, the
birds were seen for the first time about the cabin, on May 1 1 they inspected the
ledge, starting nest-building on May 17. Laying commenced June 3, but the
female was disturbed and the second egg was not laid until June 6, and the
clutch of five was completed on June 9. Two nestlings hatched June 26, the
remainder June 27. Four young survived to leave the nest on July 17, return-
ing on July 18, but permanently gone by July 23. On July 26 the first tgg of
the second clutch was laid, the last of the five eggs being laid July 30. Hatch-
ing occurred August 15-16, and the five nestlings were close to fledging when
the observer left the island August 31. Assuming that the tgg'^ hatched in the
order laid, incubation period (E egg) for the first clutch was 18 days, for the
second 17, rather longer than the 14-15 days given by Kendeigh (1952: 245) as
usual for the species. Probably the frequent disturbance of the sitting bird
(the cabin served as kitchen) is the explanation. Nestling period (hatching to

1964 Drent, van Tets, Tompa and Vermeer: Mandarte 249

first departure) for the first clutch was 20-21 days for the various young,
Kendeigh (1952) gives 20-22 days for H. r. rustica and 18-20 for H. r. erythro-
gaster.

8. Corvus caiirinus Northwestern Crow
Ce?jsiis mid distribution

The crow has had a rather chequered career on the island, as wardens
posted intermittently from 1915 on made a practise of shooting the birds.
However the species is an abundant local nester, and doubtless was always able
to exploit the Mandarte sea-birds as a food source (cf. Munro, 1937). In our
period on the island approximately 20-25 pair have nested every season, the most
complete coverage of the island being attained in 1960 when a trail was cut
through the brush (minimum 20 pairs: 21 nests located of which two probably
were replacements, and at least one missed). Figure 2B shows the location of
crow nests in 1960.

Nesting habitat

All nests save one were located in the shrub and tree belt, the exception
being a nest built in 1960 on the ground in a recess between two boulders on an
uneven grassy slope at the north end of the island (eggs w^ere laid but deserted).
The remainder fall into three categories: (1) nests built on the ground, and
hidden in dense thickets, the most difficult type to find; (2) nests built in dense
shrubbery (especially Waxberry, Wild Rose, Saskatoon Berry) about 1-1 ^2
meters off the ground, often below a snag or tree serving as perch; and (3) nests
built in trees (Douglas Fir, Grand Fir, Saskatoon Berry) at 3 meters up to about
7 from the ground. The tree nests were always so built as to be obscured by
foliage, an especially noticeable feature in the older Douglas Fir where bare
limbs prevail. Garry Oak appear to be unsuitable nesting trees. As an indica-
tion of frequency, in 1960 there were five ground, eight shrub, and seven tree
nests, and the one boulder site. Darcus (1930) has described ground nesting of
this species in the Queen Charlotte Islands.

Methods of gathering nesting data

Casual search for crow nests was carried out in 1958 and 1959 (nine and
ten nests respectively), and trail cutting enabled thorough search in 1960 (21
nests). The objective in the first three seasons was banding of the young, the
usual aluminium rings being supplemented by plastic colour rings from 1958 on.
In 1960 the nests were visited more frequently to obtain figures on nesting
success, and effort was made to follow the fate of the colour-banded young to
the close of the season. A handicap in working with the crows was that visits
during egg-laying caused desertion.

Layi?ig seaso?i

Dates of clutch commencement (to the nearest week) have been deter-
mined for 18 of the 21 nests found in 1960 (three from laving dates, 15 from
hatching dates) as follows:

April 23-30 5 clutches

250 The Canadian Field-Naturalist Vol. 78

May 1-7 6 clutches

8-15 1 clutch
16-23 3 clutches
24-31 1 first clutch & 1 renesting
June 1-7 1 first clutch & 1 renesting

It will be seen that 1 1 of the 16 first clutches were commenced in the last week
of April and the first week of May. The two renestings were replacements
for nests disturbed by us in the laying period, and have been included in the
data below.

Clutch size

Eight reliable figures for clutch size are available from nests located shortly
after clutch completion:

three eggs 1 clutch

four eggs 4 clutches

five eggs 3 clutches

The clutch of three was laid in the first week of May. Over-all mean is 4.3,
comparing to 4.5 reported by Black (Kendeigh 1952:244) for Corviis brachyr-
hynchos.

Incubatioji period

We have no figures; Kendeigh (1952:245) quotes Black {MS) for an
incubation period of 19 days in the closely related C. brachyrhynchos.

Nestling period, fledging, cmd independence

Six nests provide data on the age at which young leave the nest. This is
a gradual procedure, the young first perching on the nest rim, then on nearby
twigs, returning to the nest from time to time. Age differences in the brood
have been disregarded for the following determinations:
3 young at 20-23 days

2 young at 25 days

3 young at 27-29 days
3 young at 31-33 days
3 young at 30-32 days

The two shortest periods were recorded from nests built on the ground, the
remainder from shrub nests at IV, meters from the ground. The 14 young
give a mean nestling period of 28 days, in accord with figures for C. brctchyr-
hynchos, for which Kendeigh (1952:245) cites Black for a nestling period of
27 days, and Parmalee (1952) gives four to five weeks.

The young are uncertain in flight in the first days after leaving the nest,
but probably all normal young can fly to some extent. Occasionally young
incapable of flight were captured after nest departure, but as some were sickly
at the time, and all died within a few days, this flightlessness can be considered
abnormal.

The period of at least partial dependence on the parents for food seems
gradually to come to a close about a month after nest departure. The following

1964 Drent, van Tets, Tompa and Vermeer: Mandarte 251

observations on colour-banded nestlings in 1960 are pertinent:

no. 23: foraging alone on beach 55 days old, seen begging 56 days old

no. 26: do. 60

no. 43: do. 58

no. 72: seen being fed 63 days old, begging at 69 days old

Parmalee (1952) reported that young C. hrachyrhynchos were fed by the

parents in the first one to three weeks after nest departure.

Survival of eggs and young

Desertion occurred in five of the 21 nests in 1960, and these have been
omitted here (our disturbance was responsible in four cases). Six nests
provide data on hatching success: from 25 eggs laid 22 chicks hatched (88%),
two of the &^^s failing to hatch and one disappearing during incubation. Eight
nests supply figures up to nest departure: of 28 chicks hatched 22 left the nest
successfully (79%). Age at disappearance was established for five of the six
young lost in the nestling period, and all were less than 10 days old. Further,
all of the five disappeared from nests where four young hatched. We noted
asynchronous hatching in these broods, the last-hatching young being recog-
nizeable as a 'runt' or 'dwarf compared to its siblings. This is explained by
incubation setting in with the third egg (Black in Kendeigh 1952:245). We
assume that it was the 'runt' that died in these five nests, but this is established
for only one nest.

Asynchronous hatching in Corvids among others is considered to be an
adaptation to allow raising a large brood in years of exceptionally favourable
food supply without endangering the survival of a smaller brood in other years,
in which the bonus young will speedily be eliminated by starvation (cf. Lack
1954:40-41).

Among Corvidae the colonially-nesting Rook has received much attention;
it will suffice here to point out that nesting success is comparable to that in the
Northwestern Crow. In the Rook hatching success varied from 80 to 91 per
cent, survival at nest departure from 66 to 79 per cent, in a large material over
a six-year period as summarized by Owen (1959).

In 1960 fate of the young after nest departure was followed. Thirty-three
nestlings from 15 nests were colour-banded, of which 10 were subsequently
recovered dead on the island, 18 were observed to the close of observations
(end August), and the remaining five were not accounted for. To estimate the
mortality in the first month after nest departure, 11 nests where fate of the
young was accounted for have been selected. In this group 25 young left the
nest successfully, and 18 (72%) were still ahve at an age of 60 days. Of the
seven young dying, three became sick and died at the ages of 36, 47, and 69
days. The birds gradually lost the ability to fly, and spent the last day or so
^liopping about in the underbrush, eventually becoming immobile and dying.
The remaining four died of unknown causes, the dessicated carcasses of three
of them being recovered during gull banding, and the last disappearing after the
age of 30 days from a family closely watched. In 19.59 we observed adult gulls
to attack and kill a crow just out of the nest, after it had wandered into the gull
meadow, and the circumstances of recovery of four of the seven crow car-

252 The Canadian Field-Naturalist Vol. 78

casses in 1960 suggest a similar fate. We believe the chicks so attacked were
abnormal, similar to the uncoordinated birds we were able to capture in the
shrubbery after nest departure — as noted above, these all died later.

When observations were closed 15 crows from nine nests had reached an
age between 90 and 100 days, and three young from two nests an age between
60 and 70 days. In the group of nine nests, 20 young had left the nest success-
fully, so the 15 remaining two months later represent 75 per cent.

9. Agelaius phoeniceus, Red-winged Blackbird

Although resident on the island at least in the early summer of every season
1957-1959, the first breeding evidence was secured in 1960. At least three males
and two females were present on the island when we arrived iUay 5, on May 8
an abandoned nest was found, and on the morning of May 16 nestbuilding was
observed. When located that afternoon, the fresh nest was virtually complete
but the pair was continuously disturbed by crows and eventually deserted.
No Red-wings were seen on the island thereafter until three males arrived on
June 21, remaining until June 28 (one of them had yellow epaulets and was thus
recognizeable). Finally, at the close of the season an old nest was found at
the north end. We feel that at least three pair made efforts to nest on the
island in 1960; two were certainly unsuccessful and the other probably so.

In 1961 at least one pair was present when we paid a brief visit March 17-20,
and a maximum of four males and three females was observed in the first two
weeks of May. By May 20, three males on territory remained, and two nests
were located in the course of the month. In one, building was observed on
May 5, and the nest held four eggs May 21, all hatching on May 28. When
visited again June 3 the nest was empty, probably due to plundering by crows.
The second nest contained four young, about two days old, on May 29; and on
June 3, two young remained when the nest was visited for banding. Thus
certainly two pair and probably three nested on Mandarte in the 1961 season.
In 1962 at least one pair raised a brood, but further data are lacking.

The five nests (three in 1960, two in 1961) were all located in the shrubbery,
and were built 1-1.5 meters off the ground in Waxberry bushes. In the Sidney
area the only other island on which we found Red-wings was Imrie Islet, where
a nest with a single well-grown young was found in low brush June 19, 1960,
and adults observed in other years. The vegetation on this islet, which also
harbours a sea-bird colony, is closely similar to that on Mandarte. Islands we
visited often enough to be certain of Red-wing absence are Halibut, Rum,
Gooch, Rubly, Domville, Forrest, and the smaller Reay, Greig, and Dock.

C. J. Guiguet informed us that the Red-wing is a common though not
abundant breeder in similar habitat in the Victoria area (several low dry islets
in Oak Bay region, Gordon Head, Albert Head, etc.). Orians (1961) notes
nesting on an arid island in San Francisco Bay, so the Mandarte situation is by
no means exceptional.

10. Melospiza melodia, Song Sparrow

Casual observations in our first seasons on the island indicated the Song
Sparrow population on Mandarte to be unusually dense, and prompted a popula-

1964

Drent, van Tets, Tompa and Vermeer: Mandarte

253

tion study, begun in 1960 and still in progress. Findings from the first three
seasons will be briefly reported here.

Methods

Essential to the study was the marking of as many Song Sparrows (both
adult and juvenile) as possible. The birds were captured for the most part in
Japanese mist nets, set up along trails cut through the shrubbery. A few
juveniles were caught in a wire box-trap, and several by chance in our cabins.
The banding of nestlings was found to bring about an increase in mortality,
either by leading crows to the nest, or by causing premature nest departure,
and was therefore kept to a minimum. Where possible the history of individual
nests was followed and the young banded soon after fledging.

Mist-netting was found highly effective. By the close of the first season
more than half, and by the end of the second (when including the birds ringed
as juveniles in the previous year which had survived to breed) more than 90
per cent of the adult population had been ringed. In total 103 adults, 32
nestlings, and 406 fledglings (or juveniles) were ringed in the three seasons.

All birds received standard aluminum rings together with one or two
plastic colour bands. By using eight colours in different combinations each
bird could be recognized individually.

Census work was carried out continuously during the three summer seasons,
and at spaced intervals in the intervening winters (four visits in 1960-1961,
seven visits in 1961-1962).

Numbers

The composition of the adult Song Sparrow population on Mandarte is
shown in Table 26. The figures for 1960 are approximate within the limits
given, as but few birds had been marked at the onset of breeding. The situa-
tion was closely similar in 1960 and 1961, but 1962 was markedly different.
Although the breeding population showed a slight decline in 1962, 25 unmated
males were present, so that the total population showed a 12 per cent increase
over 1961. It should be mentioned, however, that the 1962 figures characterize
only a few days at the beginning of breeding. The high frequency of unmated
birds in the population led to territorial fights throughout the season, and
resulted in the death of some males and the desertion of others. By mid-
summer the number of adults on the island approximated the level of previous
years.

Table 26. — Adult Song Sparrow population on Mandarte Island at the onset of three

successive breeding seasons.

Status

1960

1961

1962

Breeding male
Breeding female
Unmated males a) territorial
b) floating

46-48

4-6

Total adult population

96-102

101

113

254

The Canadian Field-Naturalist

Vol. 78

That territorial behaviour is believed to play a very important role in
regulating the size of the Mandarte Song Sparrow population has been discussed
in an earlier paper (Tompa, 1962).

Territory and habitat utilization

The habitat on Mandarte can be divided into three zones: (1) bare rock
and cliff surface along the shoreline, (2) grassland, and (3) shrubbery, including
small groups of trees. Although the first two of these zones are frequently
utilized by foraging Song Sparrows, most other activities are confined to the
shrubbery, which provides shelter, concealment, and also nesting and mating
grounds including singing and perching posts for the males. Territory defense
is extended only to the shrubbery area of a male (or breeding pair) and its
immediate surroundings, and this actively defended area has been considered
the territory proper, in distinction to the foraging areas outside the shrubbery
which often overlapped (for a fuller discussion see Tompa, in press). The
grouping of territories is dictated by the configuration of the shrubbery (see
Figure 2C and D). Nests are generally built along the shrub edges, either in a
tuft of grass just off the ground, or up to about 0.5 meters in shrubs.

The shrub areas on Mandarte have been accurately measured, and come to
a total of 14,100 square meters. The amount of shrubbery utilized by Song
Sparrows in each season is known, and by using the population census the mean
territory size for 1960 and 1962 has been calculated (Table 27). In 1961 all
territories were measured individually (Tompa, 1962) when territories of 47
breeding males were found to range from 110 to 400 square meters (mean 288),
of five unmated males from 65 to 105 square meters (mean 82). The overall
mean was 268 square meters.

Comparing the three seasons, the effect of the increased number of terri-
torial males in 1962 is evident: the average territory size was smaller, and isolated
patches of shrubbery not utilized in the previous years were occupied (compare
also the territory maps).

Table 27. — Mean territory size of Song Sparrows on Mandarte Island

Year

Number of territories
(Mated and unmated c? cf )

Area of shrub
utilized

Mean territory
size

1960
1961
1962

50-54
52
61

13,946 m2
13,946 m2
14,050 m2

c. 268 m2
268 m2
230 m2

Figures for Song Sparrow territory size for a number of localities in
Eastern North America are available for comparison, as set out in Table 28.
(Figures originally given in acres have been converted to square meters).

It will be seen that on the average territories on Mandarte Island are no
more than one tenth the size of mainland territories in the East, and secondly
that the same tendency to reduction in size is shown by the island populations
there. The unusually high density of Mandarte Song Sparrows calls for

1964 Drent, van Tets, Tompa and Vermeer: Mandarte

Table 28. — Territory size of Song Sparrows in different localities

255

Location

Number

Territory size in m^

Authority

Min.

Max.

Mean

Mainland, continuous area, Ohio
Mainland, lakeshore, Minnesota
Islands (freshwater), Minnesota
Island (freshwater), Minnesota
Mandarte Island, B.C. (1961)

2000
1254

6000

2751

400

2700

1902

2104

810

268

Nice 1943
Suthers 1960
Beer et al. 1956
Swedberg 1957
Tompa 1962

explanation. Although a final answer cannot yet be given, the following
factors play an important role: (1) the quantity and availability of food on
Mandarte throughout the year; (2) partial spatial isolation of the population;
(3) complete absence of mammalian predators; (4) the scarcity of avian pre-
dators, especially during the breeding season when the island is inhabited by
numbers of sea-birds.

General phenology

Song Sparrows on Mandarte Island stay on their territories throughout the
year. Territorial activity is minimal during the post-nuptial moult, and again
from late November to early January. Territory establishment by young males
goes on throughout the winter, even though this is not always conspicuous: in
mid-winter song and serious fighting are absent. Final spacing normally takes
place in late February and March, but in years with a surplus of males (such
as 1962) the process can be considerably delayed. In that year the unbalanced
sex ratio was due to a late snow storm which resulted in the death of many
females. The delay in breeding, however, cannot be attributed to bad weather
conditions directly, as on other islands with low Song Sparrow densities breed-
ing started as usual.

Nest building normally occurs during the last week of March or first half
of April. During the first two seasons a substantial portion of the pairs raised
three broods, the successive broods being well synchronized in the population.
In 1962, mainly because of the continuous fighting, territory desertions, and
shifts in territories which resulted from the unbalanced sex ratio, breeding was
most irregular. Young from the first brood appeared throughout the season,
even as late as July. The number of second broods was low, and there was no
evidence of a successful third brood.

Clutch size

Johnston (1954) gave the average clutch size for the Song Sparrow in
Oregon and Washington as 3.81. Only the first and second clutches (3.65 and
4.00 respectively) were included in this figure.

The data most applicable to the Mandarte situation are those gathered in
the Vancouver- Victoria region of southwestern British Columbia, representing

256

The Canadian Field-Naturalist

Vol. 78

the same subspecies in approximately the same climatic region. These figures
(from the B.C. Nest Records Scheme) show essential agreement with the
Mandarte data, as shown in Table 29.

Table 29. — Clutch size of Song Sparrows in southwestern British Columbia

Area

April

May

June

Total

Source

no.

mean

no.

mean

no.

mean

no.

mean

Mandarte

Adjacent area
(see text)

3.5
3.65

14
25

3.82
3.72

5
12

3.8
3.58

25
69

3.68
3.66

Tompa
BCNRS

Fledging success

Figures on hatching rate were not obtained in sufHcient quantity, but an
attempt was made to estimate the fledging success. Since the conditions in
1960 and 1961 were very similar, and the number of juvenile birds at the end of
breeding much the same, it is thought that fledging success was also approxi-
mately the same in these years. The 1961 minimal fledging success was 60
per cent (from eggs to fledged young), calculated from the total number of
broods throughout the season, and the total number of birds fledged, the latter
determined by the ringing and census program. The actual fledging success
was most likely higher, since in a group of 13 nests observed in 1962 all young
hatched left the nest successfully, and only three eggs (of a clutch of four)
failed to hatch. It is clear that fledging success is higher on Mandarte than has
been reported elsewhere (c. 36% in Ohio: Nice, 1937; and 49.3% in San
Francisco Bay: Johnston, 1956).

The food supply for the nestlings has been sufficient in the past three
seasons. Only one instance was observed where death of a nestling resulted
from starvation. In this nest four eggs hatched one morning, and a fifth one
and a half days later. The fifth young, smaller than its siblings, could
apparently not compete for the food brought by the parents, and died.

Dispersion and Philopatry

Fledglings stay on the territories of the parents for two to three weeks
before gaining complete independence. During this period very few die.
Fledglings from the first broods are mainly cared for by the male, whilst the
female is occupied starting the next one. Fledglings from the last brood are
normally fed by both parents, unless one of them goes through an early moult.
Fledglings entering neighbouring territories were often observed being fed by
the owners of these territories.

The replacement on the territory of old birds which have perished begins
as early as September, when juvenile birds have gone through their first moult.
This spacing, however, is not final, and fighting continues throughout the

1964 Drent, van Tets, Tompa and Vermeer: Mandarte 257

winter. Most young stay in loose feeding groups during the winter, shifting
from one part of the island to another.

As has been discussed elsewhere (Tompa, 1962) the revival of territoriality
in the autumn, once the birds have completed their moult, coincides with a
pronounced emigration of a part of the juvenile surplus. Hahbut Island, a
small wooded islet 1.3 kilometers south of Mandarte, and with a sparse Song
Sparrow population, has been reached by Mandarte emigrants each fall, and
from time to time some of them even establish territories there. One Mandarte
juvenile was discovered as far as six kilometers to the west, on James Island. By
contrast, there is no evidence of the immigration of Song Sparrows to Mandarte,
and it certainly cannot involve more than one to two per cent of the residing
population. Many birds that fledge on Mandarte and leave the island during
their first winter, return and attempt to establish themselves the following
spring.

Once they have bred on the island the site tenacity of Mandarte Song
Sparrows is very strong. The few exceptions to this rule follow. One male,
which had spent the summer of 1960 unmated, in 1961 moved to a neighbouring
territory whose owner had perished during the winter. In 1962 there were a
few cases of territory desertion by males. The only shifts of breeding females
were caused by the death of their male, the females moving to territories of
unmated males. In one case a female deserted her mate, because of the con-
tinuous interference by several unmated males which completely surrounded her
territory.

Summing up, Mandarte Island affords the optimum habitat for Song
Sparrows in the area, and its population has been extremely high during the
three seasons under consideration. Territoriality plays a vital role in adjusting
the population level to the environmental conditions, which may vary slightly
from year to year, and also in redressing any maladjustments in the population
composition (e.g. the unbalanced sex ratio in 1962). A full analysis of the
mechanisms of population regulation of the Song Sparrow is in preparation
(Tompa, Ph.D. thesis).

Species of Changing or Uncertain Status

Fhalacrocorax penicillatus, Brandt's Cormorant

Though present in summer on the British Columbia coast at least as far
north as Queen Charlotte Sound (Munro and Cowan 1947: 52), there are no
known nesting sites of the Brandt's Cormorant in the province (Drent and
Guiguet 1961: 116). At Mandarte the species is an abundant winter visitor
(adults and immatures) and scarce summer visitor (predominantly immatures),
an interesting situation in view of the nearby nesting sites in the San Juan
Islands of Washington.

North Rock and the cliflFs of Mandarte are favoured roosts in the area, the
number present through May and early June being roughly 40-70, increasing
as the adults begin returning in July to a full occupancy of about 1000 birds,
which may be reached by the close of August. Figure 22 shows the return of

258

The Canadian Field-Naturalist

Vol. 78

100

2 3^ ^? 5
MAY JUNE

2 3 4 12 3

JULY AUGUST

Figure 22. Composition of the Brandt's Cormorant roost on Mandarte Island in the course
of the summer (weekly averages).

adult Brandt's Cormorant to the Mandarte roost in 1958 (aged by plumage by
van Tets). The number using the roost during the winter is indicated by the
following counts: 500, January 17, 1959; 800, December 29, 1959. Peak
numbers are usually seen only at dusk, with less than 100 birds present by day.

Birds in immature plumage can be seen to court and build flimsy nests of
grasses and algae throughout June, but up to 1962 no eggs have been laid.
Kortlandt (1942) made an intensive study of Dutch colonies of Phalacrocorax
carbo, and found that almost all one and two year old birds live in the colonies
in May, displaying immature reproductive behaviour and building play nests.
He found the species to start breeding at three years, though many individuals
first bred at four and five years. Of interest here is that though birds usually
bred in the natal colony, they often spent the immature years in other colonies,
and Kortlandt gathered suggestive evidence that new colonies originate in three
phases. First the cormorants use the site as a sleeping place, next immatures
move in during the breeding season and go through play nesting, still returning
to the natal colony when mature however, and finally the colony becomes
established when birds with previous breeding experience elsewhere settle and
begin to nest. We feel that the Mandarte roost of Brandt's Cormorant repre-
sents the second phase, namely use of the site as winter roost and occupation
by immatures in the breeding season, and consider it likely that a nesting group
will be established in the next few years.

1964 Drent, van Tets, Tompa and Vermeer: Mandarte 259

Ardea herodias, Great Blue Heron

Members of the Victoria Natural History Society are responsible for
establishing the nesting of the Great Blue Heron on Mandarte. The records made
by this group on their numerous excursions to Mandarte have been kindly
reviewed by Mr. A. R. Davidson who supplied the following summary (m lift.
8 November 1961). On May 27, 1945, seven heron nests were found, two in
an Arbutus, the remainder in Douglas Firs: four in one tree, one in another.
One nest examined contained only broken eggshells, evidently the work of the
Northwestern Crow. No herons were noted on the next two recorded trips
(June 10, 1950; June 16, 1951), but on June 21, 1952 and June 27, 1953 herons
flew from the trees upon arrival of the party. However, no nests were found.
On July 2, 1955, no herons were noted.

Since 1957 our records indicate that the Great Blue Heron, though common
in the area and nesting as close as Tsehum Harbour, has been only an occasional
visitor to the island in the summer. For example: in 1959 herons were seen
seven times on the island during our stay; in 1960, four times. In summary, at
least seven pairs of Great Blue Herons nested on Mandarte in 1945. No herons
were mentioned by Munro (last recorded visit 1936), and no nests were found
in 1950 or later.

Selasphorus rufus, Rufous Hummingbird

The Rufous Hummingbird is a summer resident on the island, where male
display flights are conspicuous in early summer and individuals have been noted
to the close of August. Hummingbirds have been seen to chase Northwestern
Crows, Red-winged Blackbirds and Savannah Sparrows (the latter does not
breed on Mandarte). We suspect the species to nest in small numbers on
Mandarte, but have not found nests or young to prove this.

Discussion

Mandarte supports flourishing breeding populations of Double-crested and
Pelagic Cormorant, Glaucous-winged Gull, Pigeon Guillemot, Northwestern
Crow, and Song Sparrow. Strictly marginal are the other breeding species.
Black Oystercatcher, Tufted Puffin, (? Rufous Hummingbird), Barn Swallow,
and Red-winged Blackbird. Factors promoting the success of the first group
will be mentioned here, and some general comparisons made.

The sea-birds require freedom from excessive molestation by man, freedom
from land predators, and suitable nesting sites within reach of an adequate food
supply. These conditions are all met at Mandarte. Through protection human
disturbance has been kept below the critical level, and mammalian predators
are absent. As far as nesting sites are concerned, the steep irregular southwest
facing shore offers extensive ledges for the cormorants, the scarcity of vegeta-
tion makes much of the island suitable for gulls, and the broken nature of the
rocky shores provide abundant nesting holes for the guillemots.

The data presented on breeding seasons serve as a description, but are in-
adequate for analysis of either the environmental timers or of the possible
ecological advantage conferred upon the species at that particular time (e.g.

260

The Canadian Field-Naturalist

Vol. 78

superabundance of the food required for the nestlings). It is hoped that this
report will stimulate continued observation to attack these problems.

Table 30. ■ — Nesting success in Mandarte sea-birds

Number per pair
per season of:

Double-crested
Cormorant

Pelagic
Cormorant

Glaucous-
winged Gull

Pigeon
Guillemot

eggs laid
chicks hatched
young fledged
Over-all success

4.1

2.5(60%)

2.4(95%)

57%

3.8

2.5(60%)
2.0(80%)
53%

2.6

1.6(60%)
0.9(56%)

34%

1.9

1.2(62%)
1 . 1 (90%)
56%

Turning now to nesting success, Table 30 shows that hatching success is
similar for all of the "successful" sea-birds on Mandarte, at about 60 per cent.
It appears that "addling", i.e. failure of eggs to hatch due to in'^ertility or
embryonic death, is roughly the same in these species (21%, 18%, 15%, 21%
of all eggs laid, in the order listed in the table), the remainder of the egg loss
being accounted for largely by crow predation. The data on tgg predation
suggest that the presence of the adult at the nest is the only effective mode of
protection. The easily panicked cormorants suffer a far higher loss than the
more steadfast gulls, and of particular significance is the situation in the hole-
nesting guillemot, where egg loss was as heavy as in the gulls, and centred in
the first few days of incubation, before the parents attend the egg continuously.

The cormorants and the Pigeon Guillemot have comparable over-all success
of better than 50 per cent of all eggs laid resulting in fledged young, and it will
be noticed that practically all loss occurs in the egg stage. The Glaucous-
winged Gull is radically different, here losses in the chick stage equal or even
exceed losses of eggs. The primary reason for this difference lies in the
mobility of the gull chicks and the trait of the adults to attack strange chicks
that stray onto their territory. In the dense Mandarte colony this accounts
for most of the chick mortality (as was the case in the Herring Gull studies of
Paynter and Paludan),

Considering now the successful passerines, the dense nesting population of
the Northwestern Crow is doubtless related to exploitation of the eggs and
young of the sea-birds. Calculations from the figures given earlier indicate
that in the period under review, for the whole Mandarte colony in one season,
crows took about 150 eggs of the Double-crested Cormorant, 450 eggs of
Pelagic Cormorant, 700 eggs of the Glaucous-winged Gull, and 30 of the
Pigeon Guillemot. This is a total exceeding 1000 eggs, and it may be assumed
that the resident 25 pair take the major share. Further, many small chicks
are taken, and an additional food source are the fish scraps found in abundance
in the cormorant colonies during the chick stage. The Northwestern Crow
on Mandarte has thus specialized in plundering the sea-birds as has been
reported at other colonies (e.g. Heath, 1915), even to the extent of openly
attacking incubating Pelagic Cormorants (compare Nordberg (1950) on Corviis
corofie molesting incubating Eiders).

1964

Drent, van Tets, Tompa and Vermeer: Mandarte

261

The factors promoting the success of the Song Sparrow on Mandarte are
more complex, and discussion is deferred until completion of the population
study.

Summary

Distribution and numbers of the ten species of birds presently breeding on
iVlandane are described on the basis of six summers' residence on the island.
Statistics on breeding season, nesting success and related topics are presented
for Phalacfocorax auritiis, P. pelagicus, Haematopus bachmani, Larus glaii-
cescens, Cepphr/s columba, Corviis caurinus, and Melospiza melodia.

References

American Ornithologists' Union. 1957.
Check-list of North American birds. Fifth
edition, Baltimore, xiii + 691 pp.

Anderson, W. B. 1916. (Report to the
Director on Bare Island Indian Reserve) .
Annual Report B.C. Provincial Museum
1915, pp. N15-N16.

Barth, E. K. 1955. Egg-laying, incubation
and hatching of the Common Gull {Larus
emus). Ibis 97:222-239.

Beer, C. G. 1962. Incubation and nest-
building behaviour of Black-headed Gulls
II. Behaviour 19:283-304.

Beer, J. R., L. D. Frenzel and N. Hansen.
1956. Minimum space requirements of
some nesting passerine birds. Wilson Bul-
letin 68:200-209.

Behle, W. H. and W. A. Goates. 1957.
Breeding biology of the California Gull.
Condor 59:235-246.

Bowles, J. H. 1921. Breeding dates for
Washington birds. Murrelet 2:8-12.

Bowman, R. I. 1961. Late spring observa-
tions on birds of South Farallon Island,
California. Condor 63:410-416.

Boyd, H. 1962. Mortality and fertility of
European Charadrii. Ibis 104:368-387.

Carl, G. C. and C. J. Guiguet. 1958. Alien
animals in British Columbia. B.C. Provin-
cial Museum Handbook 14, 94 pp.

Darcus, S. J. 1930. Notes on the birds of
the northern part of the Queen Charlotte
Islands in 1927. Canadian Field-Naturalist
44:45-49.

Davis, D. E. 1942. Number of eggs laid by
Herring Gulls. Auk 59:549-554.

Dawson, W. L. and J. W. Bowles. 1909.
The birds of Washington. Seattle, Occi-
Jental Publishing Company, 2 volumes,
iii -(- 997 pp.

Drent, R. H. 1961. Breeding biology of
the Pigeon Guillemot (Ave ; Cepphw;)

Unpublished M.A. thesis. University of
British Columbia.
— , and C. J. Guiguet. 1961. A cata-

logue of British Columbia sea-bird colonies.

Occasional Papers B.C. Provincial Museum

No. 12, 173 pp.
Drost, R. 1951. Beobachtungen an einer

kleinen Silbermowen-Population im Jah-

reslauf. Vogelwarte 16:44-48.
. 1952. Das Verhalten der mann-

lichen und weiblichen Silbermowe (Larus

argentatus Pont.) ausserhalb der Brutzeit.

Vogelwarte 16:108-116.
, E. FocKE and G. Freytag. 1961.

Entwicklung und Aufbau einer Population
der Silbermowe, Larus argeiitatus argenta-
tus. Journal fiir Ornithologie 102:404-429.

Goethe, F. 1955. Beobachtungen bei der
Aufzucht junger Silbermowen. Zeitschrift
fiir Tierpsychologie 12:402-433.

— — — — . 1956. Die Silbermowe. Die Neue
Brehm Biicherei Nr. 182, Wittenberg, 95
pp.

. 1960. Felsbriitertum und weitere

beachtenswerte Tendenzen bei der Sil-
bermowe. Proceedings of the XII Inter-
national Ornithological Congress 252-258.

GuDMUNDSsoN, F. 1953. Islenzkir fuglar
VI. Teista (Cepplms grylle (L.)). Nat-
turufraedingurinn 23:129-132.

Heath, A. 1915. Birds observed on For-
rester Island, Alaska, during the summer
of 1913. Condor 17:20-41.

Holmes, W. N., D. G. Butler and J. G.
Philips. 1961. Observations on the effect
of maintaining Glaucous- winged Gulls
{Larus glaucescens) on fresh water and
sea water for long periods. Journal of En-
docrinology 23:53-61.

Johnston, D. W. 1961. The biosystematics
of American crows. University of Wash-
ington Press, Seattle, 119 pp.

262

Thp: Canadian Field-Naturalist

Vol. 78

Johnston, R. F. 1954. Variation in breed-
ing season and clutch size in Song Spar-
rows of the Pacific coast. Condor 56:268-
273.

■ . 1956. Population structure in salt

marsh inhabiting Song Sparrows. Part II.
Density, age structure, and maintainance.
Condor 58:254-272.

JuNGFER, W. 1954. Ueber Paartreue, Nist-
platztreue und Alter des Austernfischers
(Haematopus o. ostralegus) auf Mellum.
Vogelwarte 17:6-15.

Kartaschew, N. N. 1960. Die Alkenvogel
des Nordatlantiks. Die Neue Brehm
Biicherei Nr. 257, Wittenberg, 154 pp.

Kendeigh, S. C. 1952. Parental care and its
evolution in birds. Illinois Biological
Monographs 23 (1-3), x + 358 pp.

Kendrew, W. G. and D. Kerr. 1955. The
climate of British Columbia and the Yukon
Territory. Queen's Printer, Ottawa, x -|-
222 pp.

Kortlandt, A. 1942. Levensloop, samen-
stelling en structuur der Nederlandse
aalscholverbevolking. Ardea 31:175-280.

Lack, D. 1954. The natural regulation of
animal numbers. Oxford, Clarendon Press,
viii -|- 343 pp.

Moreau, R. E. 1946. The recording of in-
cubation and fledging periods. British
Birds 39:66-70.

JVIuNRO, J. A. 1925. Some observations on
Bare Island, B.C. Canadian Field-Naturalist
39:164-165.

. 1928. Cormorants nesting on

Bare Island, B.C. Condor 30:327-328.

. 1929. Status of seabirds on Bare

Island, B.C. Canadian Field-Naturalist 43:
167.

. 1937. Nesting colonies of the

Double-crested Cormorant in British
Columbia. Annual Report B.C. Provincial
Museum 1936, pp. K26-K30.

-, and I. McT. Cowan. 1947. A

review of the bird fauna of British Colum-
bia. B.C. Provincial Museum Special Publi-
cation No. 2, 285 pp.

Myres, M. T., I. McT. Co WAN and M. D. F.
Udvardy. 1957. The British Columbia
Nest Records Scheme. Condor 59:308-310.

Nice, M. M. 1937. Studies in the life his-
tory of the Song Sparrow I. Transactions
of the Linnaean Society of New York IV,
247 pp.

. 1943. Studies in the life history

of the Song Sparrow II. Transactions of
the Linnaean Society of New York VI,
329 pp.

Nordberg, S. 1950. Researches on the bird
fauna of the marine zone in the Aland
archipelago. Acta Zoologica Fennica 63:
1-62.

N0RREVANG, A. 1958. On the breeding
biology of the Guillemot {Uria aalge
(Pont.)). Dansk Ornithologisk Forenings
Tidsskrift 52:48-74.

Orians, G. H. 1961. The ecology of
Blackbird {Agelaius) social systems. Eco-
logical Monographs 31:285-312.

Owen, D. F. 1959. The breeding season
and clutch-size of the Rook Corvus frugi-
legus. Ihis 101:235-239.

Paludan, K. 1947. Aiken. K0bnhavn, Ejnar
Munksgaard, 106 pp.

. 1951. Contributions to the breed-
ing biology of Larus argentatus and Larus
fuscus. Videnskabelige Meddelelser fra
Dansk Naturhistorisk Forening 114: 1-128.

Parmalee, p. W. 1952. Growth and de-
velopment of the nestling crow. Ameri-
can Midland Naturalist 47:183-201.

Paynter, R. a. 1949. Clutch-size and the
e^gs, and chick mortality of Kent Island
Herring Gulls. Ecology 30:146-166.

Schultz, Z. M. 1951. Growth in the Glau-
cous-winged Gull. Part I. Murrelet 32:
35-42.

. 1952. Growth in the Glaucous-
winged Gull. Part II. Murrelet 33:2-8.

Snow, B. 1960. The breeding biology of
the Shag Phalacrocorax aristotelis on the
island of Lundy, Bristol Channel. Ibis
102:554-575.

Spencer, G. J. Two records of Ixodes sig-
natiis Birula and one of Ixodes uriae
White, marine bird ticks. Proceedings
Entomological Society of British Colum-
bia 57:46.

Sprot, G. D. 1937. Migratory behavior of
some Glaucous-winged Gulls in the Strait
of Georgia, British Columbia. Condor 39:
238-242.

Suthers, R. a. 1960. Territories of Song
Sparrow. Wilson Bulletin 72:232-237.

SwEDBERG, K. C. 1957. Song Sparrow terri-
tories on Schoolcraft Island, Itasca Park,
Minnesota. Itasca Forestry and Biological
Station Paper 46.

van Tets, G. F. 1959. A comparative study
of the reproductive behaviour and natural

1964

Drent, van Tets, Tompa and Vermeer: Mandarte

263

history of three sympatric species of cor-
morants (Phalacrocorax auritus, P. peni-
cillatus, and F. pelagicus) at Mandarte
Island, B.C. Unpublished M.A. thesis, Uni-
versity of British Columbia.

Thoresen, a. C. and E. S. Booth. 1958.
Breeding activities of the Pigeon Guille-
mot Cepphus cohimba columba (Pallas).
Walla Walla College Publications of the
Department of Biological Sciences No. 23,
36 pp.

Tompa, F. S. 1962. Territorial behavior:
the main controlling factor of a local Song
Sparrow population. Auk 79:687-697.

Tschanz, B. 1959. Zur Brutbiologie der
Trottellumme (Uria aalge aalge Pont.).
Behaviour 14:1-100.

UsPENSKi, S. M. 1958. The bird bazaars of
Novaya Zemlva. Translations of Russian
Game Reports Vol. 4, Queen's Printer,
Ottawa, 159 pp.

James-Veitch, E. and E. S. Booth. 1954.
Behavior and life history of the Glaucous-
winged Gull. Walla Walla College Publi-

cations of the Department of Biological
Sciences No. 12.

Vermeer, K. 1963. The breeding ecology
of the Glaucous-winged Gull (Lams
glaucescens) on Mandarte Island, B.C.
Unpublished iM.Sc. thesis, University of
British Columbia.

Webster, J. D. 1941. The breeding of the
Black Oystercatcher. Wilson Bulletin 53:
141-156.

. 1942. Notes on the growth and

plumages of the Black Oystercatcher.
Condor 44:205-211.

Weidmann, U. 1956. Observations and ex-
periments on egg-laying in the Black-
headed Gull (Larus ridibundus L.) . British
Journal of Animal Behaviour 4:150-161.

Winn, H. E. 1950. The Black Guillemots
of Kent Island, Bay of Fundy. Auk 67:
477-485.

Ytreberg, N. J. 1956. Contribution to the
breeding biology of the Black-headed Gull
{Larus ridibundus L.) in Norway. Nytt
Magasin for Zoologi 4:5-106.

Received for publication 22 November, 1963

THE RUSTY COLOUR PHASE OF THE CANADIAN
TOAD, Bujo hemiophrys

Francis R. Cook

National Museum of Canada, Ottawa, Ontario

The dorsal ground colour of the Canadian Toad, Bufo hevnophrys, has been
described as "brown" (Dickerson, 1908: 98), "brownish or greenish" (Wright
and Wright, 1933: 66, 1949: 180; Conant, 1958: 268) or "greenish or brownish"
(Stebbins, 1951: 263, 1954: 108). During studies of the herpetofauna of the
Canadian prairie provinces 3,051 live adult and juvenile toads of this species
have been examined. In the majority the dorsal ground colour varied from
muddy brown to light grey with greenish shades in some individuals.

However, 50 specimens have been collected which differ markedly from
published accounts. In these the dorsal ground colour was reddish, varying
from a light rust-red to reddish brown, distinct from the usual brown variations
which occur in this species. In all aspects of pattern the contrast was the same

264 The Canadian Field-Naturalisi Vol. 78

Table 1. — Collections of Biifo hemiophrys in which the rusty phase occurred.

NMC
Cat. No.

6276

6393

4862

4859

4880

4873

4838
*

4500

Locality

SASKATCHEWAN
White Fox, 2.8 mi. W. on Hw\'. 55

MANrrOBA
Flin Flon, 14.2 mi. SE. on Hwy. 10
Mafeking, 0.8 mi. N. on Hwy.'lO
Birch River, 4.9 mi. S. on Hwy. 10
Benito, 3.8 mi. N. on Hw}-. 83'
Camperville, 11.4 mi. W. on Hwy. 20
Winnipegosis, 16.2 mi. NW. on Hwy. 20
Ethelbert, 13.0-16.1 mi. N. on Hwy. 10
Steinbach, 26.3 mi. SE. on Hwy. 12

Date

Total

Rusty

%
Rusty

8 July 1962

li luly 1962
18 Aug. 1960

18 Aug. 1960
21 Aug. 1960

19 Aug. 1960
14 Aug. 1960

12-13 Aug. 1960
3 luly 1960

121

109

9.5

335

50.0

i?>.i

19.5

50.0

34.8

20.0

15.7

6.4

11.9

"6 collections (4809 (35), 4812 (9), 4814 (3), 4819 (9), 4829 (10), 4832 (49) which contained
one or more rusty individuals, and 4 collections (4826 (3), 4820 (1), 4817 (2), 4811 (3)) which
did not contain rusty individuals, all taken from the same continuous area of road on the same
night, are lumped together here.

as in typical examples. There were usually dark patches in which the warts,
although lighter than the patch, were darker than the ground colour. The
vertebral stripe and lateral streaks were Hght and the underside was dirty white
or slightly yellowish white with a variable amount of dark flecking or spotting.
Structural characters such as the cranial crests or boss varied as in typical
individuals. As this colour seems to be distinct from the usual spectrum of
variation in Bitjo hemiophrys it is designated as the rusty colour phase.

The 3,051 specimens seen ahve from Canada are contained in 216 collec-
tions. Fourteen of these collections have specimens designated as "red" or
"reddish" in field notes taken before they were preserved and are assigned to
the rusty phase. After a period of preservation in formaHn of H or more years,
most rusty specimens are indistinguishable from other colour variations as all
fade to more or less dull greyish. Figure 1 shows the localities where this
phase has been collected. Only nine localities are plotted for the 14 collec-
tions as six collections taken August 12, 1960, 13.0-16.1 miles north of Hwy. 10
of Ethelbert, iVIanitoba, are represented by the same circle. In addition, all
collections of 20 or more B. hemiophrys taken in 1959-63 which did not con-
tain this phase are also mapped. Over 150 smaller collections examined which
also lacked the rusty phase are not shown. The apparent gap between the
southeastern collection in which this phase was present and those northwest of
it is probably real. Large collections from two intermediate localities did not
contain rusty toads. One, taken 2.2 miles north and 0.5 miles east of St.
Francois Xavier (=13 miles west of Winnipeg) totals 266 individuals (NMC
4515, 4517, 4520, 5333, 5334) and the other, from Delta at the southern tip of
Lake Manitoba contains 721 (NAiC 4525, 5388, 5390, 6052). Although the

1964

Cook: Canadian Toad

265

Figure 1. The occurrence of the rusty phase in collections of Biifo he?mopbrys from
Canadian prairie provinces. Solid circles represent collections which contained nisty in-
dividuals. Hollow circles represent collections of 20 or more specimens which did not
contain rusty individuals. The solid triangle is Emma Lake where the rusty phase was
reported by D. J. Buckle. The solid line indicates the approximate known limit of Bufo
hemiophrys modified from previously published maps on the basis of the author's un-
published data.

rusty phase occurs near the eastern edge of the range of B. hemiophrys it may
not be present at the edge. It was not found among 34 specimens (NMC 5364)
taken 22.6 miles west on Hwy. 1 of the junction of Hwys. 1 and 11 (= 32
miles southeast of Winnipeg). This locality is within a few miles of the
eastern limit for the species where it contacts the range of Bufo americanus.

In Table 1 the collections which contained rusty toads are listed with the
percentage of this phase in each. As in Figure 1, collections from near Ethel-
bert are lumped. This percentage of rusty specimens in collections of more
than two individuals varies from 34.8 to 15.7% within the Manitoba area east
of Lake Winnipegosis, with the outlying occurrences, White Fox and Stein-
bach, containing 9.5 and 6.4% respectively. All collections were random with
no conscious attempt to select the rusty phase. No correlation with soil colour
or other habitat factor was noted for rusty individuals that would favour selec-
tion for this phase in nature.

266 The Canadian Field-Naturalist Vol. 78

In snout- vent length rusty specimens measured 16 to 57 mm with a mean
of 34.8 mm. All large collections containing this phase showed a more or less
typical bell curve of distribution when size and numbers were plotted. Rusty
toads occurred only in those size groups which were most plentiful in a given
collection. The minimum and maximum snout-vent measurements of all toads
in collections which contained rusty individuals were 13 and 69 mm. The
maximum length for all Canadian Bjifo he?mophrys examined is 85 mm for
males and 91 mm for females. (The latter betters by slightly more than k inch
the maximum given by Conant, 1958: 265.) It is likely that the apparent
failure of rusty individuals to approach the maximum size is due to the lack
of any large adults in collections from areas where they occur, rather than
a loss of the colour with age, or differential selection between adults and im-
matures. No collections have been made from breeding aggregations in these
areas and this accounts for the paucity of large individuals from them. There is
no correlation between sex and the rusty phase as the 50 specimens were
identified by dissection as 24 males and 26 females.

D. J. Buckle (PC: February 7, 1964) has reported the occurrence of "red"
specimens of B. he?mophry s which presumably were the ritsty phase from
Emma Lake, 25 miles north of Prince Albert, Saskatchewan. This report, the
westernmost for the rusty phase, is indicated on Figure 1 by a solid triangle.
Of a series of 99 specimens measuring 19-25 mm collected July 23 and 29,
1962, 26% were classified as the rusty phase by Buckle.

A presumably allopatric species, Bujo a. americmius, may exhibit brownish,
greenish, yellowish or reddish coloration in eastern Aianitoba, based on
examination of 197 specimens. The reddish colour of B. a?nericmms and the
rusty phase of B. hemiophry s are similar. It is possible that past or present
gene exchange between B. a?nericamis and B. heimophry s could account for the
presence of the rusty phase in the latter. If so, however, one might expect
other variations of B. americmius, such as the yellowish ground colour, to occur
also, which is not the case. In addition, as noted previously a collection of
B. heniiophrys a few miles from the western limit of B. americamis did not
contain rusty individuals. Neither does it appear likely that rusty is a primitive
coloration in B. hemiophrys, relict at the periphery of the species' range.
Available information indicates that it occurs over a fairly large region, and
may be absent at the range periphery. However, more collections are needed
before this possibihty can be discarded. The most plausible explanation of
the origin of this rusty phase is the survival of mutations originating at or near
the area where the phase now occurs. The present disjunct range of the
rusty phase could be due to historical reasons or because mutations have oc-
curred and survived independently in the geographically separated populations.
No factors are presently known which would promote or prevent r7(sty in-
dividuals competing equally as well as other variations.

The common name Canadian Toad is used here in preference to "Dakota
Toad" which was recommended in the list of common names for North Ameri-
can amphibians and reptiles proposed by the American Society of Ichthyolo-
gists and Herpetologists (Committee, 1956: 176). Dakota Toad seems to have
been originated by Schmidt (1953: 67) and presumably was chosen because the

1964 Cook: Canadian Toad 267

type specimens of the species were collected in what is now North Dakota.
However, the name Canadian Toad has had extensive usage (Wright and
Wright, 1933, 1949; Stebbins, 1951, 1954) prior to Schmidt. In addition it
designates the country which contains the major portion of the species range.
It is less restrictive than Dakota Toad, or other names previously coined,
A4anitoba Toad and Winnipeg Toad.

Acknowledgement is due to J. R. Otterdahl (1959), R. A. Henry (1960),
M. G. Foster (1961) and C. Bruce Powell (1962, 1963) who assisted in field
work in the years noted, to Joyce C. Cook who prepared the map, and to
D. J. Buckle who contributed a report of the nisty phase.

Summary
Among 3,051 specimens in 216 collections of the Canadian Toad, Bujo
hemiophrys, examined alive, 50 specimens (contained in 14 of the collections)
were an unreported colour variation for this species. This has been designated
as the rusty phase and has a ground colour of light rust-red to reddish brown.
Most rusty specimens have been collected in the area between Lake Winni-
pegosis and the western i\4anitoba border. They have been collected in south-
eastern Manitoba, and reported in central Saskatchewan at Emma Lake. The
percentage of rusty individuals in populations in which they occur varied from
6.4 to 34.8% of collections containing more than two specimens. They
measured 16 to 57 mm. The 50 rusty specimens were determined by dissection
to be 24 males and 26 females. The origin of this phase was probably by the
survival of mutations in the area where they are now found.

References

Breckenridge, W. J. 1944. Reptiles and American Society of Ichthyologists and

amphibians of A4innesota. University of Herpetologists, Chicago, 111. 280 pp.

Minnesota Press, Minneapolis. 202 pp. Stebbins, Robert C. 1951. Amphibians of

Committee on Herpetological Common western North America. University of

Names. 1956. Common names for North Cahfornia Press, Berkeley and Los An-

American amphibians and reptiles. Copeia geles. 539 pp.

1956(3) -172-185 • 19^4. Amphibians and reptiles of

CONANT, Roger. '1958. A field guide to ^Tr North America. McGraw-Hill

reptiles and amphibians of the United London'^Ts''^ Toronto,

States and Canada east of the 100th meri- ^ur \ a j a tt

,. TT u^ A/ivffi- /^ T> Wright, Anna Allen and Albert Hazen

dian. Houghton Mifnin Company, Bos- tt7 ir>-,-, tt ju i r r i

-,,, ^ r /' Wright. 1933. Handbook of frogs and

r^ " ff ^ T-. r , 1 toads of the United States and Canada.

DiCKERSON, Mary C. 1908. The frog book: Comstock Publishing Co., Inc., Ithaca,

North American toads and frogs with a NY 231 dp

study of the habits of those of the north- Wright, Albert Hazen and Anna Allen

eastern states. Doubleday, Page and Com- Wright. 1949. Handbook of frogs and

pany. New York. 253 pp. toads of the United States and Canada.

Schmidt, Karl P. 1953. A check list of 3rd edition. Comstock Publishing Corn-
North American amphibians and reptiles. pany, Inc., Ithaca, N.Y. 640 pp.

Received for publication 26 February 1964

NOTES

Two Helpful Uses of
"Terylene" for Biologists

Justice and Schaldach (Journal of Mam-
malogy, 39(1): 158) outlined the diffi-
culties encountered in obtaining flujffy
long-staple cotton for filling skins of
small mammals, and their experience and
satisfaction with "Dacron", a synthetic
fiber manufactured by Du Pont.

A similar synthetic fiber manufactured
by Canadian Industries Limited under
the trade name "Terylene" fiberfill is
available in Canada. I have used this
material for filling study skins of birds
and small mammals, and found it super-
ior to cotton because of Terylene's long
fiber length and high resilience.

Terylene has also proven more satis-
factory than cotton for use as nesting
material in live traps for small mammals.
Some small mammals, particularly Mi-
crotus pennsyhanicus, urinate extensive-
ly when caught. As a result, cotton is
trampled down into a soggy mat when
used for nesting material in sheet metal
live traps. Similar results occur when
seepage from heavy rains dampens the
floor of the traps. Terylene, through its
high resilience and low water absorption,
helps keep small mammals dry and warm
by preventing contact with the wet floor
of the trap. I have used Terylene fiber-
fill in live traps near Hinton, Alberta.
With captures ranging between 104 and
158 small mammals daily during an
eight-day period in August 1961, losses
were only between 2.9 and 6.1 per cent,
and those were primarily among shrews.

I recommend Terylene for use as nest
material in live traps for small mammals
as well as for filling museum skins.

Andrew Radvanyi

Canadian Wildlife Service
742 Federal Building
Edmonton, Alberta
27 April 1964

A Range Extension for the Wood
Frog in Northeastern
Saskatchewan

Incidental to ornithological studies in
northeastern Saskatchewan in the sum-
mer of 1963, the senior author obtained
nine specimens of the Wood Frog, Rana
sylvatica. These were collected July 14
to 16 at Hasbala Lake, 59° 58' N, 102°
03''W. They have been deposited in the
National Museum of Canada and cata-
logued as NMC 7682.

Althoug'h distribution maps in Conant
(1958, A Field Guide to Reptiles and
Amphibicms, p. 352) and Martof and
Humphries (1959, American Midland
Naturalist 61 (2): 350-389) include all
of northern Saskatchewan within the
range of the Wood Frog, the most
northerly locality for the eastern part
of the province previously authenticated
by specimens was Wallaston (= Wol-
laston) Lake. This was cited by Logier
and Toner (1961, A Check List of the
Amphibians and Reptiles of Canada and
Alaska, p. 43) on the authority of H.
Beck. Beck's communication was based
on two collections at the University of
Saskatchewan, Saskatoon, taken in Aug-
ust 1956 from WoUaston Lake: Wel-
come Bay (A-173, -174, -175) and Com-
pulsion Bay (A-177, -178, 179). Wel-
come Bay is not given in the Saskatche-
wan volume of the Gazetter of Canada
(1957) but Compulsion Bay is listed as
57°47'N, 103°16'W. This is at the south-
ern end of WoUaston Lake, approxi-
mately 145 miles south of Hasbala Lake.

Hasbala Lake is within the North-
western Section of the Boreal Forest, a
region which is described generally as
"open subarctic woodland" or "open
lichen-woodland" (Rowe, 1959, Forest
regions of Canada). The Transition Sec-
tion in Saskatchewan has been related to

268

1964

Notes

269

the Hudsonian Life Zone (e.g., see Nero,
1963, Birds of the Lake Athabasca re-
gion, Saskatchewan. Special Publication
No. 5, Saskatchewan Natural History
Society, Regina). A camp was establish-
ed on the southwest end of Hasbala
Lake, five miles southwest of the north-
east boundary corner and two and one-
half miles west of the Manitoba border.
Although this area consisted predomin-
antly of open black spruce forest, the
best available campsite was found on a
low esker ridge in an old burn. The
immediate environs were chiefly charred
boles of spruce and pine with scattered
green alder and birch clumps and a few
pine seedlings. In wet places lichens,
mosses, willows, and other bushy or
herbaceous plants grew abundantly, but
the burned area was otherwise rather
bleak. Certain bird species, e.g., Grav-
cheeked Thrush, White-crowned Spar-
row, and Harris' Sparrow, seemed es-
pecially attracted to the burned area.
Black flies and especially horse or bull-
dog flies were unusually abundant at this
site.

A few frogs were found at the camp
in a wet sphagnum bog adjacent to a
narrow ice-formed ridge along the edge
of the lake. In a depression behind the
camp there was a dry, heavily-grassed
"meadow" and a well-established pond
which attracted an even larger number
of frogs. Large willow clumps were
scattered abundantly throughout the
meadow and around the pond. Numer-
ous holes in the ground, apparently
formed when this meadow was a wet
bog, were half-hidden by the tall grass
and made walking difficult. At least one
Wood Frog was seen in the muskeg as
gear was being unloaded on the shore on
July 9, the day of arrival. In the evening
of July 14 four frogs were collected

in the meadow; two others were taken
on July 15, and three on July 16, either
in the meadow or in front of the camp.
On wet days a few frogs were encoun-
tered out in the open on the scorched,
barren surface of the ridge. On one or
two occasions Wood Frogs were seen in
wet situations inland, but the largest
number was noted in the grassy meadow
behind the camp. On the whole, frogs
were uncommon in the area, and there
were numerous suitable situations where
none was encountered. No other species
of herptiles were found.

Of the nine specimens, six were adults
and measured, after preservation, 46, 47
(2), 48 and 50(2) mm snout- vent, aver-
age 48 mm. Their tibia/body length
ratios varied from .417 to .457, average
.433. The four largest specimens were
females with their ovaries distended with
eggs. The three immatures measured 35,
28 and 23 mm. Only two specimens had
a middorsal white stripe. In their detail-
ed maps of variation in Rana sylvatica,
Martof and Humphries (1959) included
populations in northeastern Saskatche-
wan within regions where the adults
averaged less than 40 mm in body length
(p. 358) and more than half the popula-
tion had a middorsal white stripe (p.
367). They noted, however, (p. 355)
that the maps "do not show local condi-
tions with the exactitude one would like
to have". The Hasbala Lake specimens
do agree with the tibia/body length
ratio "less than .475" in which northern
Saskatchewan Wood Frogs are included
(p. 363).

Robert W. Nero
Francis R. Cook

Natural Sciences Division

University of Saskatchewan Regina Campus

Regina, Saskatchewan, and

National Museum of Canada,

Ottawa, Ontario

1 June 1964

INDEX TO VOLUME 78

Compiled by

Mrs. G. R. Hanes

Abies balsamifera, 81; grandis, 211
Abietinella abietina, 147
Ac emtio is homajicinni homemanni, 4
Accipiter cooperii, 14; gentilis, 13; striates, 14
Acer rubnm?, 81, 116; saccharimmi, 117;

spicaUnn, 116
Achillea millejoliimi, 45, 114, 147
Aconitum delphinifoliu?n, 96
A corns calamus, 126
/icm crepitans blanchardi, 202
Actitis ?nacularia, 14
Additional records and a correction of the

type locality for the boreal chorus frog

in northwestern Ontario, bv F. R. Cook,

186
Additional specimens of the small-mouthed

salamander from Pelee Island, Ontario, by

F. R. Cook, 201
Agelaius phoeniceus, 179, 213, 252
Agrostis borealis, 71; tenuis, 110
Aix sponsa, 90, 204
Alberta, Black Duck breeding record for,

by W. G. Leitch, 199
Alberta, Bushv-tailed wood rat in the Peace

River district, by A. W. F. Banfield, 128
Alberta, A probable breeding record of the

Bobolink at Vermilion, by J. K. Lowther,

200
Alberta, The stonecat, Noturus flavus, newly

recorded in, by J. R. Nursall and V.

Lewin, 128
Alca tor da, 242
Albula, 194
Alcock, F. J.

Review of: Minnesota's Rocks and Wat-
ers: A Geological Story, 122
AUigatorfish, arctic, 175
4imis, 45, 46, 81; crispa, 112, 145, 152;

oregona, 65

Alopex lagopus, 5

Avibly stigiella sprucei, 148

Ambystcnna jeffersonianum, 156; later ale,

156, 160, 202; maculatum, 156, 160;

texanwn, 201, 202
Ainelanchier alnifolia, 140, 146; Bartrarniatia,

113; florid a, 111
Ammodytes hexapterus, 177
Aminophila, 81
Amphibians of Browns Flat area, N.B., Notes

on, by S. W. Gorham, 154
Anas acuta, 90; carolinensis, 13, 90; cyanop-

tera, 13; discors, 13; platyrhynchos, 90;

rubripes, 90, 199
A?idro7ueda glancophylla, 113
Androsace ochotensis, 94; septentrio7ialis, 146
Aney/ione imilticeps, 94; multifida, 145;

parviflora, 140, 145
Angelica atropurpurea, 113, 117
A^itemiaria, 116; a?igustata, 76; canesce?is, 76;

Ekvia7iiana, 76; pulcherriina, 144, 157;

rosea, 147
Ant bus spinoletta, 15
Aquilegia brevistyla, 145
Arabis alpina, 74; Holboellii, 125, 145; lyrata,

145
Aralia bispida, 113; nudicaulis, 117
Arbutus menziesii, 211
Arctostapbylos alpina, 75, 113; Uva-ursi,

113, 143,' 203, 246
Ardea herodias, 59, 213, 259
Arenaria interpres interpres, 3
Arefiaria lateriflora, 112; peploides, 73;

rubella, 73; sajanensis, 73; stricta, 145
Aretbusa bulbosa, 112
Argus, George W.

Plant collections from Carswell Lake and

Beartooth Island, northwestern Saskat-
chewan, Canada, 139

270

1964

Index to Volume 7^

271

Aristida, 28, 30

Armeria maritinia, 75

Arnica alpina, 76

Artemisia borealis, 76; campestris, 147

Asio otus, 14

Aspidium Filix-mas, 108, 117; fragrans, 117;

Tfiarginale, 108, 110, 117; spinulosjim, 110
Aspidophoroides olrikii, 175
AspleniuTH jilix-jeinina, 110; thelypteroides,

108, 116; trichomanes, 126
Aster, 45, 102; jimciiormis, 147; imihellatus,

114
Athyriuvi Filix-femina, 1 10
Auk, Great, 194
Autoserica castanea, 62
Ay thy a inarila, 96; valisneria, 13

Banfield, A. W. F.

Bushy-tailed wood rat in the Peace River

district, Alberta, 128

Review of: The Monarch of Alularchy

Mountain, 57

Review of: Never Cry Wolf, 52
Barbarea orthoceras, 145
Bartsia alpina, 75
Bayly, Isabel L.

A plant collection from southwest New-
foundland — John Bell, 1867, 107
Betula, 81; glandulosa, 112, 145; lenta, 108,

116, 117; lute a, 81, 112, 117; Michauxii,

112; papyrifera, 140, 145; pumila, 112
Bird, Ralph D., and Lawrie B. Smith

The food habits of the Red-winged

Blackbird, Agelaius phoeniceus, in

Manitoba, 179
Bird and mammal observations at Hazen

Camp, northern Ellesmere Island, in 1962,

by D. B. O. Savile and D. R. Oliver, 1
Bird records. New, from Cape Breton Island,

N.S., by A. J. Erskine, 89
Bird records, Three new, for Prince Edward

Island, by W. J. /Mills, 62
Birds, The, reviewed by W. E. Godfrey, 56
Birds, The breeding, of Mandarte Island,

B.C., by R. Drent et al, 208
Birds of Kleena Kleene, Chilcotin district,

B.C., 1959-1962, by W. A. B. Paul, 13
Birds of the Labrador Peninsula and Adja-
cent Areas, reviewed bv W. E. Godfrey,

119
Birds of the Lake Athabasca Region, Saskat-
chewan, reviewed bv W. E. Godfrey,

120
Birds of Riding Mountain National Park,

Manitoba, Notes on, by D. A. Blood, 204
Black Duck breeding record for Alberta, by

W. G. Leitch, 199

Blackbird, Brewer's 42-46, 181; Red-winged,
179-186, 209, 252; Yellow-headed, 16,

180, 181
Blackbird, Brewer's, An extension in the

breeding range of, by O. E. Devitt, 42
Blackbird, Red-winged, in Manitoba, The

food habits of, by R. D. Bird and L. B.

Smith, 179
Blarina brevicatida, 78, 103
Blood, Donald A.

Notes on the birds of Riding Mountain

National Park, Manitoba, 204
Bluebird, Mountain, 202
Bobolink, A breeding record for the, in

Prince Edward Island, by S. E. Vass, 60
Bobolink, A probable breeding record at

Vermilion, Alberta, by J. K. Lowther, 200
Boniby cilia garndiis, 91
Bourguignon, A. E.

Piping Plover at Ottawa, Ontario, 199
Brachyrhinus ovatiis, 184
Brachytheciiait salebrosum, 148
Brayshaw, T. C.

Some interesting plant records from the

Chalk River district, Ontario, 150
Breeding birds of Mandarte Island, B.C., by

R. Drent et al, 208
Breeding record for the Bobolink in Prince

Edward Island, by S. E. Vass, 60
Breeding record for the Bufflehead west of

the Coast Range in B.C., by D. A. Han-
cock, 64
British Columbia, Birds of Kleena Kleene,

Chilcotin district, 1959-1962, by W. A.

B. Paul, 13
British Columbia, Breeding birds of Man-
darte Island, by R. Drent et al, 208
British Columbia, Breeding record for the

Bufflehead west of the Coast Range in,

by D. A. Hancock, 64
British Columbia, Notes on Townsend's

Solitaire in western Chilcotin district, by

W. A. B. Paul, 203
British Columbia, Two interior B.C. records

for the Ancient Murrelet, by W. B. John-
stone, 199
Bronius carinatiis, 111
Bryoerythrophylhan reciirvirostnmi, 148
Br yum lacustre, 148; pseud otriquetnmi, 140,

143, 148
Bilbo virginianus, 14, 59
Bucephala albeola, 64, 90, 202, 205; ishrndica,

90
Buckner, C. H.

Preliminary trials of a camera recording

device for the study of small mammals, 77
Bufflehead, 64, 201, 205

272

The Canadian Field-Naturalist

Vol. 78

Bufflehead, Breeding record for, west of the
Coast Range in B.C., bv D. A. Hancock,

Bufo mnericamis, 65, 157, 160, 188-190, 265,
266; a. americanus., 266; hemiophrys, 263-
267

Bunting, Snow, 4, 5, 6

Bushy-tailed wood rat in the Peace River
district. Alberta, by A. W. F. Banfield,
128

Buteo jamaicejisis, 14, 23; lagoptis, 23; swain-
soni, 14

Butomus umbellatus, 150, 153

Butorides virescens, 59, 90

Cacti and Other Succulents, reviewed by E.
W. Greenwood, 121

Cakile edentula, 112

Calamagrostis canadensis, 110, 143; pnrpuras-
cens, 143

Calcarms lapponicus, 30, 31, 92; /. lapponicus,
4; pictiis, 28-31

Calidris canutus camitus, 3

Caloplaca elegans, 148

C alt ha palustris, 145

Canmssia quamash, 111

Ca?nmda pellucida, 184

Cainpa7iula rotundifolia, 75, 94, 147;
tiniflora, 75

Campsis radicans, 114, 118

Campy Ihnn stellatuni, 143, 148

Canachites canadensis, 127, 161; franklinii, 127

Candelariella vitellina, 148

Canis lupus, 5

Canvasback, 13

Capelin, 172

Capella gallinago, 3, 14

Cardainine bellidifolia, 74; hirsuta, 112;
pennsylvanica, 112; pratensis, 74; purpurea
96

Carex, HI; angiiillata, 11; arctata, HI; aurea,
111, 116; Bigelowii, 11; buxbaumia, 144
capillaria, 11, 111, 144; cephalantha, 111
crinita. 111; deflexa, 144; dispernia, 144
eburnea, 144; f/^i'a, 111; joena, 144; g/^rf-
a/iV, 72; glareosa, 11; holostatna, 11; in-
terior, 111, 144; intumescens. 111; Lache-
nalii, 11; lacustris. 111; lasiocarpa. 111;
lenticularis. 111; leptalea, 140, 144; lepton-
ervia. 111; Mackenziei, 111; vienibranacea,
11; fnisandra, 11; nardi?ia, 11; norvegica,
11; paleacea. 111; rariflora, 111; roj«7, 144;
rosirata, 111; rupestris, 11, 94; ^a/ma, 111;
scirpoidea, 11, 111, 144; scoparia, 111;
stipata, 111; supina, 11; tonsa, 144; wVi-
^z^/a, 111
Caribou, 6
Carpodacus f/iexicanus, 16

Carya ovata, 59

Casmerodias albus egretta, 59

Cassiope hypnoides, 75; mertensiana, 126;

tetragona, 75
Castanea, 118; dentata, 112
Castilleja septentrionalis, 114
Catbird, 91
Cathartes aura, 205
Catoptropborus seinipalniatus, 61
Catostomus catostomus, 172
Ceanothus ovatus, 126
Celasirus scandens, 126
Cephalanthus occidentalis, 126, 150, 154
Cepphus columba, 213, 240; grj//^ columba,

214
Cerastium alpinum, 73, 94; cerastoides, 73
Chamaedaphne calyculata, 82, 113
Changing status of the Cowbird in Prince

Edward Island, by S. E. Vass, 125
Charadrius melodus, 109; vociferus, 14
Charr, arctic, 170; Brook, 170; lake, 170, 173
C/je77 hyperborea atlantica, 1
Chenopodiu?n album, 112
Chlidonias niger, 14
Cbondestes gra?rmiaciis , 92
Chorophilus triseriatus, 191
Chrysemys picta belli, 128
Cicuta mackenzieana, 146
Cinclidimn stygium, 140, 143, 148
Circium muticum, 108, 117; pumilum, 108,

117
Cisco, 172, 173
Cistothorus platensis, 45
Cladonia amaurocrea, 148; coccifera, 148
Clafigula biemalis, 1
Claytonia caroliniana, 107, 112, 117
Cletbrionomys andersonii, 87; gapperi, 78; g.
gap peri, 198; g. pallesce?7S, 80-88; n/fo-
canus, 87
Clough, Garrett C.

Local distribution of two voles: evidence
for interspecific interactions, 80
Chi pea bare?igus, 194
Coccyzus erytbropbtbahfms, 205
Cocblearia officinalis, 74; tridactylites, 112
Cod, Atlantic, 70; Greenland, 172
Coefiagrion interrogatimi, 123
Columba livia, 17, 91
Colymbus grisagena, 67
Coma?idra livida, 112
Common Egrets nesting near Amherstburg,

Ontario, by Winnifred Smith, 59
Conioselinum cbi?iense, 113
Contopus sordidulus, 15
Cook, Francis R.

Additional records and a correction of
the type locality for the boreal chorus
frog in northwestern Ontario, 186

1964

Index to Volume 77

273

Additional specimens of the small-mouth-
ed salamander from Pelee Island, Ontario,
201

A northern range extension for Bufo am-
ericanus and Rana sylvatica, 65
The rusty colour phase of the Canadian
toad, Bufo hemiophrys, 263
Review of: A Sharing of Joy, 58

Cook, Francis R., and D. R. M. Hatch
A spadefoot toad from Manitoba, 60

Corallorhiza trifida, 112

Corbet, Philip S.

Review of: Les Libellules du Quebec, 123

Coregonus artedi, 172, 173; clupeaformis, 172

Cormorant, Brandt's, 213, 257, 258; Double-
crested, 13, 209, 213-219; Pelagic, 209,
213, 221-224

Comus alba, 140, 146; caTiadensis, 113, 136;
nuttallii, 135; stolanifera, 45; suecica, 113

Corvus brachyrhynchos, 250, 251; b. caurinus,
214; caurinus, 213, 249; corone, 260

Cottus bairdii, 175; cognatus, 175

Couesius plumbius, 172

Cowan, I. McT

The holotype of the Franklin Grouse
(Canac bites franklinii) , 127

Cowbird, Brown-headed, 16, 181; Eastern,
125

Cowbird in Prince Edward Island, Changing
status of, by S. E. Vass, 125

Crane, Sandhill, 2; Whooping, 194

Crataegus Brunetiana, 113; coccinea, 117

Crocethia alba, 3

Crow, Northwestern, 209, 214, 249

Cuckoo, Black-billed, 205

Curlew, Eskimo, 194

Cyclocephala borealis, 62

Cy clopterus lumpus, 175

Cyprepedium calceolus. 111

Cystopteris fragilis, 71, 143

Dace, longnose, 172

Dendroica auduboni, 16; juagnolia, 16;

petechia, 16; townsendi, 16
Derfuatocarpon miniatuni, 148
Desmognathus fuscus, 157, 160
Devitt, O. E.

An extension in the breeding range of

Brewer's Blackbird in Ontario, 42
Diapensia lapponica, 75, 113
Dickcissel, 119
Dicranwn rugosimi, 148
Dicrostonx groenlandicus, 6
Digitaria ischaemum, 30
Distichium capillaceujn, 148; flexicaule, 148
Distributional summary and some behavioral

notes for Smith's Longspur,

Calcarius pictus, bv E. Kemsies and W.
Randle, 28

Dolichonyx oryzivorus, 60, 200

Dove, Mourning, 14; Rock, 91

Dow, Douglas D., and M. Anne Dow

iMass mortality of gulls at Rondeau Park,
Lake Erie, 62

Drab a arabisans, 112, 118, 126; aurea, 94;
cinerea, 74, 140, \'\S;crassifolia, 74; glabel-
la, 74; hirta, 126; lactea, 74; nivalis, 74;
sibirica, 92, 96

Dracocephalum parvijlormn, 147

Drent, R., G. F. van Tets, F. Tompa and K.
Vermeer The breeding birds of Man-
darte Island, British Columbia, 208

Drosera intermedia, 112; rotmidifolia, 145

Dryas drummondi, 140, 146; integrifolia, 75

Dryopteris Filix-nms, 110, 117; fragrans, 107,
110, 117, 126, 150, 152

Duck, Black, 90; Labrador, 194; Ruddy, 13,
90; Wood, 90, 204

Duck, Black, breeding record for Alberta, by
W. G. Leitch, 199

Dumatella caroli7iensis, 91

Dunlin, 91

Eagle, Bald, 59

Eastern spiny sofe-shelled turtle from Que-
bec Province, by J. Lovritv and N.

Denman, 63
Eelbenny, slender, 177
Egrets, Common, nesting near Amherstburg,

Ontario, by Winnifred Smith, 59
Eider, King, 2, 6
Eleocharis halopbila, 110; palustris, 111; par-

vula, 110
Elymus innovatus, 143; viollis, 110; virgini-

cus, 110
Empetrum hermaphroditum, 140, 146; 7ii-

grimi, 75, 82, 113
Empidonax dificilis, 15; ha?mfwndii, 15;

minimus, 14; trail Hi, 14, 45
Encalypta procera, 148; vulgaris, 148
Epilobium angustifolimn, 32-41, 75, 212;

hirsutimi, 38; latifolium, 25, 27, 75, 108,

113, 114, 117; palustre, 113
Epipactis belle borine, 150, 153
Equisetum arvense, 71, 142; fluviatile, 142;

byemale, 142; sylvaticimi, 110; variega-

tum, 71
Eremopbila alpestris, 15
Ereunetes matiri, 14
Erigeron, 76; alpiniformis, 16; borealis, 16;

compositus, 140, 147; eriocephalus, 15, 76;

glabellus, 147; humilis, 76; hyssopifolius,

147; unalaschkensis, 16; uniflorus, 16

274

The Canadian Field-Naturalist

Vol. 78

Eriophorum angustijolium, 72, 111; callitrix,
72; Chamissonis, 111; opaciim, 111;
Scheuchzeri, 72; tenellum, 111; vaginatum,
72, 111; viridi-carinatum, 111, 114

Ermine, 5, 6

Erolia alpina, 91; bairdii, 3, 91; mmutilla, 14

Erskine, Anthony J.

Nest-site competition between Bufflshead,
iMountain Bluebird and Tree Swallow,
202
New bird records from Cape Breton
Island, Nova Scotia, 89

Erysinmm, 96

Esox litems. 111

Euphagiis cya770cephalus, 42, 181

Euphrasia, 94; arctic a, 75; Randii, 114

Eiirycea bislineata, 157, 160

Eiitainias miniums, 78; in. neglectus, 198

Extension in the breeding range of Brewer's
Blackbird in Ontario, by O. E. Devitt, 42

Fagiis graiidifoUa, 81

Falco cohuubarius, 14; peregrinus, 14

Falcon, Peregrine, 14

Festuca brachyphylla, 72; rubra, 110; saxi-
VTontana, 142, 143

Finch, House, 16

Fish collections from eastern Hudson Bay,
by D. E. McAllister, 167

Fish and Wildlife: A Memorial to W. J. K.
Harkness, reviewed by D. E. McAllister,
195

Fishes of the Western North Atlantic, re-
viewed by D. E. McAllister, 194

Flicker, 125

Florida caerulea, 62, 90

Flower variation of Epilobiuni angustifoliuni
L. growing over uranium depositis, by
H. T. Shacklette, 32

Flycatcher, Hammond's, 15; Least, 14; Olive-
sided, 15; Traill's, 14, 45; Western, 15

Food habits of the Red-winged Blackbird,
Agelaius phoeniceus, in Manitoba, by
R. D. Bird and L. B. Smith, 179

Fox, arctic, 5, 6

Fragaria, 45; virginia?ia, 146

Fratercula arctica, 242

Frog, Blanchard's cricket, 202; bullfrog, 159;
gray treefog, 159; green, 159; leopard,
158; mink, 159; pickerel, 158; wood, 158,
268

F"rog, boreal chorus, in northwestern On-
tario, Additional records etc., by F. R.
Cook, 186 .

Gadus morhua, 70; ogac, 172

Galiwn asprellum, 114; ka?nschaticum, 114;

labradoricmn, 114; palustre, 114; septen-
trional e, 147
G aster osteus aculeatus, 177
Gaultheria shallon, 65
Gavia stellata, 2, 90
Gentiana iiesophila, 114
Geothlypis trichas, 16, 45
Gemn macrophylluvi, 113
Glaiicidiiim gnoma, 14
Glyceria canadensis, 110
Godfrey, W. Earl

Review of: The Birds, 56

Review of: Birds of the Labrador Penin-
sula and Adjacent Areas, 119

Review of: Birds of the Lake Athabasca
Region, Saskatchewan, 120

Review of: Where is that Vanished
Bird?, 193
Godwit, Hudsonian, 91
Goose, Greater Snow, 6; Snow, 2
Gorham, Stanley W.

Notes on the amphibians of Browns Flat
area, New Brunswick, 154
Goshawk, 13

Grackle, Common, 125, 181
Grebes, Red-necked, Winter mortality

among, in Ontario, by A. de Vos and

A. E. AUin, 67
Greenwood, E. W.

Review of: Cacti and Other Succulents,
121
Grivnnia apocarpa, 148
Grosbeak, Evening, 16
Grouse, Franklin, 127; Spruce, 161
Grouse, Franklin, The holotype of, by L

McT. Cowan, 127
Grus canadensis canadensis, 2
Guillemot, Pigeon, 209, 214, 239-246
Gull, Bonaparte's, 62; California, 14; Glau-
cous, 4; Glaucous-winged, 209, 230-238;

Herring, 62; Iceland, 91; Ring-billed, 62
Gyvmocanthus tricuspis, 174

Habenaria, 116; dilatata, 111; hyperborea,

HI, 144; obtusata, 111; viridis, 111
Haematopus bachmani, 213, 224; ostralegus,

226, 230
Haliaeetus leucocephahis, 59
Hancock, David A.

Breeding record for the BufHehead west
of the Coast Range in British Colum-
bia, 64

1964

Index to Volume 77

275

Handbook of North American Birds, Vol.
1. Loons through Flamingos, reviewed

by D. A. Munro, 121
Hare, arctic, 5
Hawk, Cooper's, 14; Pigeon, 14; Red-tailed,

14, 23; Rough-legged, 23; Sharp-shinned,

14; Swainson's, 14
Hedysarmn alpinimi, 113
Heron, Black-crowned Night, 59; Great

Blue, 59, 213, 259; Green, 59, 90; Little

Blue, 62, 90
Hesperiphona vespertina, 16
Hieracium kalmii, 114
Hierochloe alpina, 71; odorata, 110
Hippoglossoides platessoides, 167
Hippiiris 'mil gar is, 146
Hirmido rustica, 15, 213, 248
Flogarth, Donald D.

Pseudofossils near Old Chelsea, Quebec,
8
Holodiscus discolor, 211, 212
Holotype of the Franklin Grouse (Canachites

frcinklinii), by L McT. Cowan, 127
Honkenya peploides, 112
Hummingbird, Calliope, 14; Rufous, 14, 213,

259
Hybopsis gracilis, 128
Hydroprogne caspia, 62, 91
Hyla crucifer, 158, 160, 187-190; versicolor,

159, 188, 190
Hylocichla fuscescens, 15; guttata, 15; ustJi-

lata, 15
Hylodes ?naculatus, 191
Hypmmi cupressifor?ne, 148; jastigiatiiin, 148
Hypochaeris radicata, 65

Investigations in the Natural History of the
Soviet Far East, reviewed by L. K. Were-
sub, 124
Iridoprocne bicolor, 15, 203
Iris pseudacorus, 153; versicolor, 111
Isoetes macrospora, 150, 151; mzmcata, 150;
riparia, 150

Jaeger, Long-tailed, 3, 6
Johnstone, Walter B.

Two interior British Columbia records
for the Ancient Murrelet, 199
Judd, WiUiam W.

A weevil in the ear of child at London,
Ontario, 61
Juncus balticus. 111, 144; bighmius, 72; bu-

fonius, 111; trifidus, 72, 111
Juniperus communis, 126, 140, 143; horizon-

talis, 110, 126, 140, 143; virginiana, 150,
152
Kalmia angustijolia, 82, 113; polifolia, 113
Keith, Lloyd B.

Territoriality among wintering Snowy
Owls, 17
Kemsies, Emerson, and Worth Randle

A distributional summary and some be-
havioral notes for Smith's Longspur,
Calcarius pictus, 28
Killdeer, 14
Kingbird, Western, 91
Knot, 1, 3, 5, 6
Koeleria asiatica, 94
Krebs, Charles J.

Spring and summer phenology at Baker
Lake, Keewatin, N.W.T., during 1959-
62, 25

Lagopiis americajiiis, 162; lagopus, 161;

mutus rupestris, 2, 161
Lance, sand, 177
Lanius exciibitor, 15
Larix decidua, 98; larici'iia, 81, 140, 143
Lark, Horned, 15
Larus argentatus, 62, 232, 237, 238; californi-

cus, 14, 232, 238; delawarensis, 62; ftiscus,

232, 238; glazicesceJ2s, 213, 230, 245; glau-

coides, 91; hyperboreus, 4; Philadelphia,

62; ridibundus, 232, 238
Last Horizon, The, reviewed by F. R. Cook,

193
Lathy rus maritinms, 113
Lecanora melanophthahiia, 148; polytropa,

148
Lecidea nibiformis, 149
Ledum decumbens, 75; groenlandiciim, 65,

142, 146
Leitch, William G.

Black Duck breeding record for Alberta,
199
Lemming, collared, 6
Leontodon autumnalis, 114
Lepidurus arcticus, 2
Lepus ainericanus, 78; arcticus, 5
Lewisia rediviva, 137
Libellules du Quebec, Les, reviewed bv P. S.

Corbet, 123
Limosa haemastica, 91
Liquidainbar, 118; Styracifhta, 112
List of vascular plants from around Ogac

Lake, south coast of Frobisher Bay,

N.W.T., by Ian A. McLaren, 70
Lobelia dortmanna, 147

276

The Canadian Field-Naturalist

Vol. 78

Local distribution of two voles: evidence
for interspecific interaction, by G. C.
Clough, 80

Loiseleuria procu?nbens, 75, 113

Long, Charles A.

Occurrence of some small mammals in
southwestern Ontario, 197

Longspur, Lapland, 4, 92; Smith's, 28

Longspur, Smith's, Calcarius pictus, A dis-
tributional summary and some behavioral
notes for, by E. Kemsies and W. Randle,
28

Lonicera dioicu, 147; obloj2gifolia, 108, 114,
116, 117; villosa, 114, 117

Loon, Red-throated, 2, 90

Lopbodytes cucullatus, 90

Lota lota, 128

Lovrity, Joseph, and Norris Denman

An eastern spiny soft-shelled turtle from
Quebec Province, 63

Lowther, James K.

Harris' Sparrow in Quebec, 200
A probable breeding record of the Bobo-
link at Vermilion, Alberta, 200

Loxostege sticticalis, 184

Lmtipeniis fabricii, 177

Lumpfish, 175

Lumsden, Harry G.

The Rock Ptarmigan, Lagopus jfiutus
rupestris in Ontario and Manitoba, 161

Lu?tda cirrhata, 213, 246

Liizula ca7Hpestris, 111; confusa, 72; multi-
flora, 72; nivalis, 72; spicata, 72

Lycopodium alpinum, 110; annotinimi, 71,
110, 142; co?nplanatu7n, 110; luciduliim,
110, 117; obscmmn, 45, 117, 142; Selago,
71; sitchense, 110; tristachyimt, 110, 142

Lygodiimt pahnatum, 118

Lythru7fi salicaria, 113, 118

Macpherson, A. H.

Review of: Wildlife's Ten- Year Cycle,
55
Macrosiphum pisi, 184
Maianthe?num canadense, 45
Mallard, 90
Mallotus villosus, 172
Malus fuse a, 212
Mammal, Bird and, observations at Hazen

Camp, northern Ellesmere Island, in 1962,

by D. B. O. Savile and D. R. Oliver, 1
Mammals, small. Preliminary trials of a

camera recording device for the study

of, by C. H. Buckner, 77
Mammals, some small. Occurrence of, in

southwestern Ontario, by C. A. Long,
197

Manitoba, The food habits of the Red-wing-
ed Blackbird in, by R. D. Bird and L. B.
Smith, 179

Manitoba, Notes on the birds of Riding
Mountain National Park, by D. A. Blood,
204

Manitoba, The Rock Ptarmigan in Ontario
and, by H. G. Lumsden, 161

Manitoba, A spadefoot toad from, by F. R.
Cook and D. R. M. Hatch, 60

Mass mortality of gulls at Rondeau Park,
Lake Erie, by D. D. Dow and M. A.
Dow, 62

McAllister, D. E.

Fish collections from eastern Hudson

Bay, 167
Review of: Fish and Wildlife: A Me-
morial to W. J. K. Harkness, 195
Review of: Fishes of the Western North
Atlantic, 194

McCalla, William Copeland, — an apprecia-
tion, by A. E. Porsild, 131

McLaren, Ian A.

A list of vascular plants from around
Ogac Lake, south coast of Frobisher
Bay, N.WT, 70

Melampyrum litieare, 114, 147

Melandrium affine, 73; ape t alum, 73

Melanitta deglandi, 13; perspicellata, 13

Melanoplus bivitattus, 184

Melospiza melodia, 213, 252

Menyanthes trifoliata, 114

Merganser, Hooded, 90

Mertensia maritima, 75, 114

Micropalama himantopus, 63

Microtus, 98-106; ?nontebelli, 87; ochrogaster,
88; pennsylvanicus, 78, 268; p. acadicus,
80-88; p. pennsylvanicus, 98

Milium effusu?n, 110

Mills, Willett J.

Three new bird records for Prince Ed-
ward Island, 62

Minnesota's Rocks and Waters: A Geologi-
cal Story, reviewed by F. J. Alcock, 122

Mitella mida, 112, 146

Moldavica parviflora, 147

Molotbrus ater, 16, 181; a. ater, 125

Monarch of Mularchy Mountain, The, re-
viewed by A. W. F. Banfield, 57

Moneses uniflora, 113

Montia fontana, 112, 117

Moore, Mary I.

Some interesting plants in the Barron
Canyon in Algonquin Park, 125

1964

Index to Volume 77

277

Mouse, deer, 78, 80; house, 103; meadow
jumping, 78; white-footed, 103

Munro, David A.

Review of: Handbook of North Ameri-
can Birds, Vol. 1., 121

Murrelet, Ancient, Two interior B. C. re-
cords for, by W. B. Johnstone, 199

Mus, 88; musculus, 103

Musk-ox, 5, 6

Mustela erminea, 5; vison, 213

Myadestes toivnsendi, 203

Myoxocephalus quadricornis, 174; scorpioi-
des, 174; scorpius, 174

Myrica asplemfolia, 45; gale, 65, 145

Myriophyllum spicatum, 117

Najas flexilis, 152; gracillmia, 150. 152
Neckera pennata, 148
Nemopmithus mucronatus, 113
Neotoma cinerea druntmondi, 128
Nero, Robert W., and F. R. Cook

A range extension for the wood frog in
northeastern Saskatchewan, 268
Nest-site competition between Bufflehead,

Mountain Bluebird and Tree Swallow,

by A. J. Erskine, 202
Never Cry Wolf, reviewed by A. W. F.

Banfield, 52
New bird records from Cape Breton Island,

Nova Scotia, by A. J. Erskine, 89
New Brunswick, Notes on the amphibians

of Browns Flat area, by S. W. Gorham,

154
Newfoundland, A plant collection from

southwest, — John Bell, 1867, by I. L.

Bayly, 107
Northern range extension for Bufo cmteri-

canus with notes on B. americanus and

Rana sylvatica, by F. R. Cook, 65
Northwest Territories, A list of vascular

plants from around Ogac Lake, south

coast of Frobisher Bay, by I. A. Mc-
Laren, 70
Northwest Territories, Spring and summer

phenology at Baker Lake, Keewatin,

during 1959-62, by C. J. Krebs, 25
Notes on the amphibians of Browns Flat

area, New Brunswick, by S. W. Gorham,

154
Notes on the birds of Riding Mountain

National Park, Manitoba, by D. A. Blood,

204
Notes on Townsend's Solitaire in western

Chilcotin district, B.C., by W. A. B. Paul,

203

Notopbtbahnus viridescens, 157, 160

Notropis, 172

Noturus flavus, 128

Nova Scotia, New bird records from Cape

Breton Island, by A. J. Erskine, 89
Nupbar advena, 112, 117
Nursall, J. R., and Victor Lewin

The stonecat, Noturus flavus, newly re-
corded in Alberta, 128
Nuttallornis borealis, 15
Nyctea scandiaca, 4, 17-24
Nycticorax nycticorax, 59

Occurrence of some small mammals in
southwestern Ontario, by C. A. Long,
197

Oenothera, 116; biennis, 113

Oldsquaw, 2, 6

Ontario, Additional specimens of the small-
mouthed salamander from Pelee Island,
by F. R. Cook, 201

Ontario, Common Egrets nesting near Am-
herstburg, by Winnifred Smith, 59

Ontario, An extension in the breeding range
of Brewer's Blackbird in, bv O. E. Devitt,
42

Ontario and Manitoba, The Rock Ptarmi-
gan, Lagopus niutus rupestris in, by H. G.
Lumsden, 161

Ontario, northwestern. Additional records
etc., for the boreal chorus frog, by F. R.
Cook, 186

Ontario, Piping plover at Ottawa, by A. E.
Bourguignon, 199

Ontario, Some interesting plant records
from the Chalk River district, by T. C.
Brayshaw, 150

Ontario, southwestern, Occurrence of some
small mammals in, by C. A. Long, 197

Ontario, A weevil in the ear of child at
London, by W. W. Judd, 61

Oporornis tolmiei, 16

Orobancbe uniflora, 114

Ort bo trie bum anomalum, 148

Oryctolagus cuniculus, 213

Osprey, 205

Ottawa Field-Naturalists' Club

Report of Council, 85th Annual Meeting,

47
Financial Statement, 1963, 51

Ovibos moschatus, 6

Owl, Great Horned, 14, 59; Hawk, 205;
Long-eared, 14; Pygmy, 14; Snowy, 4,
17-24

Owls, Snowy, Territoriality among winter-
ing, by L. B. Keith, 17

278

The Canadian Field-Naturalist

Vol. 78

Oxyria digyna, 73
Oxytropis kuyukukensis, 94
Oxyura jainaicensis, 13, 90
Oystercatcher, Black, 209, 224-230

Pafidion haliaetus, 205

Panicum virgatimj, 150, 153

Papaver, 94, radicatum, 74

Parakeet, Carolina, 194

Parmelia centrifuga, 149; conspersa, 149;
lineola, 149

Parry a nudicaulis, 96

Passerculus sandvnchensis, 16, 119

Passer ella iliac a, 16

Paul, W. Adrian B.

Birds of Kleena Kleene, Chilcotin dis-
trict, B.C., 1959-1962, 13

Pedicularis flarrmtect, 75; hirsuta, 75; lappo-
nica, 75; lanata, 25, 27, 96

Peeper, spring, 158

Pellaea glabella, 140, 143

Pemphigus betae, 184

Peromyscus leucopus noveboracensis, 103;
nianiculatus, 78, 213; m. maniculatus, 198

Petasites frigidus, 147; sagittatiis, 147

Petrochelidon albifrons, 205, pyrrhonota, 15

Pewee, Western Wood, 15

Phalacrocorax aristotelis, 218-222; auritiis,
13, 213, 215; carbo, 219, 220; pelagicus,
213, 221; penicillatus, 213, 257

Phalarope, Wilson's, 14

Philo7nachus pugnax, 120

Phoebe, Eastern, 91; Say's, 14

Phragniites contmunis, 180

Phyllodoce coerulea, 75; glanduliflora, 96

Physcia ?fmscigena, 149; sciastra, 149

Phytolacca americana, 112

Pfce^ glauca, 81, 98, 140, 143; mariana, 81,
140, 141, 143; ra^^ra, 81

Pigeon, Passenger, 193

Pike, northern, 172

Pinguicula vulgaris, 75, 114

Pintail, 90

Pinus, 113; banksiana, 98, 140, 142, 143; re«-
nosa, 98; Strobus, 81, 98; sylvestris, 98

Pipilo erythrophthalmus, 92

Piping Plover in Ottawa, Ontario, by A. E.
Bourguignon, 199

Pipit, Water, 15

Plant collection from southwest Newfound-
land — John Bell, 1867, by I. L. Bayly,
107

Plant collections from Carswell Lake and
Beartooth Island, northwestern Saskatche-
wan, Canada, by G. W. Argus, 139

Plantago maritima, 114

Plectrophenax nivalis nivalis, 4

Plethodon cinereus, 157, 160

Pleuroziimi schreberi, 148

Plover, Piping, in Ottawa, Ontario, by A. E.

Bourguignon, 199
Poa alpigena, 71; alpina, 72; arctica, 5, 72;

glauca, 72, 142, 143; hartzii, 5; interior,

143; palustris, 110; pratensis, 102, 143
Poly gala paucifolia, 45
Polygonum convolvulus, 182; lapathijolium,

112; virginianum, 112; viviparum, 73, 112
Polystichum Braunii, 110
Populus balsamifera, 142, 144; tremuloides,

81, 140, 144
Porsild, A. E.

Potentilla stipularis L. and Draba sibirica
(Pall.) Thell. new to North America,
92

William Copeland McCalla — an appre-
ciation, 131
Porzana Carolina, 14
Potamogeton epihydrus, 110; filifonnis, 143;

Friesii, 110; gramineus, 143
Potentilla Crantzii, 74; fruticosa, 112, 146;

gracilis, 150, 153; Hippiana, 150, 153;

hyparctica, 74; nivea, 74, 94; norvegica,

146; palustris, 112, 146; pensylvanica, 146;

rivalis, 150, 153; stipularis, 94; tridentata,

112; Vahliana, 74
Potentilla stipularis L. and Draba sibirica

(Pall.) Thell. new to North America, by

A. E. Porsild, 92
Preliminary trials of a camera recording

device for the study of small mammals,

by C. H. Buckner, 77
Prenanthes racemosa, 114
Primula laurentiana, 113; mistassinica, 113
Prince Edward Island, A breeding record for

the Bobolink in, by S. E. Vass, 60
Prince Edward Island, Changing status of

the Cowbird in, by S. E. Vass, 125
Prince Edward Island, Three new bird re-
cords for, by W. J. Mills, 62
Principles in Mammalogy, reviewed by P. M.

Youngman, 57
Probable breeding record of the Bobolink

at Vermilion, Alberta, by J. K. Lowther,

200
Prosopium cylindraceum, 111
Primus emarginata, 212; pensylvanica, 142,

146; virginiana, 140, 146, 212
Pseudacris nigrita, 191; n. septentrionalis,

190; n. triseriata, 191; triseriata, 191; t.

maculata, 186, 192; t. triseriata, 189, 190
Pseudofossils near Old Chelsea, Quebec, by

D. D. Hogarth, 8

1964

Index to Volume 77

279

Pseudotsuga menziesii, 65, 211; taxifolia, 133
Ptarmigan, Rock, 2, 161; Willow, 161
Ptarmigan, Rock, Lagopus nmtus rupestris

in Ontario and Manitoba, by H. G.

Lumsden, 161
Pteridiwn aquilinum, 45, 65
Puffin, Tufted, 209, 246-248
Pulsatilla Ludoviciana, 137
Pimgitius pungitius, 177
Pyrola asarifolia, 113, 146; elliptica, 113;

grandiflora, 75; secunda, 113
Pyrus decora, 113; floribunda, 113

Quebec, Harris' Sparrow in, by J. K.
Lowther, 200

Quebec, Pseudofossils near Old Chelsea, by
D. D. Hogarth, 8

Quebec Province, An eastern spiny soft-
shelled turtle from, by J. Lovrity and
N. Denman, 63

Quercus garryana, 212

Raja radiata, 170

Ramalina intermedia, 149

Rana catesbeiana, 159, 160; clamitans, 159,

160, 187, 189; palustris, 158, 160; pipiens,

158, 160, 188-190; septentrionalis, 66, 159,

189; sylvatica, 65, 66, 158, 160, 187, 188
Range extension for the wood frog in

northeastern Saskatchewan, by R. W.

Nero and F. R. Cook, 268
Rangifer tarandus, 6
Ranunculus acris, 117; Allenii, 73; aquatilis,

145; Cymbalaria, 112; nivalis, 73; pennsyl-

vanicus, 112; pyg?naeus, 73; repens, 112
Ranvanyi, Andrew

Two helpful uses of "Terylene" for bio-
logists, 268
Rat, Bushy-tailed wood, in the Peace River

district, Alberta, by A. W. F. Banfield,

128
Redpoll, Hoary, 4, 6
Redstart, American, 16
Rhinichthys cataractae, 111
Rhinanthus, 116
Rhizocarpon disporum, 148, 149; geographi-

cum, 148, 149; obscuratum, 149
Rhododendron canadense, 82, 113; lapponi-

cum, IS
Rhopalosiphum niaidis, 184
Rlyus aromatica, 150, 154
Rhytidiimi rugosum, 148
Ribes glandulosum, 112, 142, 146; hirtellum,

112; lacustre, 112; triste, 112

Riparia riparia, 15

Robin, 125

Rock Ptarmigan, Lagopus nmtus rupestris in

Ontario and Manitoba, by H. G. Lums-
den, 161
Rosa, 113, 212; acicidaris, 146; nitida, 113;

virginiana, 113
Rowan Field Notes — A Review, reviewed

by W. Ray Salt, 195
Rutus Chamaemorus, 113; idaeus, 146; ma-

cropealus, 65, 212; pubescens, 113; stri-

gosus, HI
Ruff, 120

Rumex mexicanus, 145; occidentalis, 145
Rusty colour phase of the Canadian toad,

Bu^o hetniophrys, by F. R. Cook, 263

Sagina intermedia, 73; nodosa, 112; procum-
bens, 117

Salamander, blue-spotted, 156; dusky, 157;
four-toed, 160; red-backed, 157; red-
spotted, 157; small-mouthed, 201; spot-
ted, 156; two-lined, 157

Salamander, small-mouthed. Additional
specimens, from Pelee Island, Ontario,
by F. R. Cook, 201

Salix, 45, 65, 211; arctic a, 73; arctophila, 73;
athabascensis, 144; bebbiana, 112, 142, 144;
Candida, 144; cordifolia, 73; glauca, 94;
glaucophylloides, 112; herbacea, 73; myr-
tillifolia, 144; pedicellaris, 144; pellita, 112,
117; petiolaris, 108, 116; planijolia, 142,
145; reticulata, 73; scouleriana, 145; seris-
sima, H5 ■,Uva-7irsi, 73, 112

Salt, W. Ray

Review of: Rowan Field Notes — A
Review, 195

Salvelinus alpinus, 170; jontinalis, 170; na-
maycush, 170, 173

Sanderling, 3, 5

Sandpiper, Baird's, 3, 91; Least, 14; Spotted,
14; Stilt, 63; Western, 14

Sanguisorba canadensis, 113, 117

Saskatchewan, northeastern, A range exten-
sion for the wood frog in, by R. W. Nero
and F. R. Cook, 268

Saskatchewan, northwestern. Plant collec-
tions from Carswell Lake and Beartooth
Island, by G. W. Argus, 139

Savile, D. B. O., and D. R. Oliver

Bird and mammal observations at Hazen
Camp, northern Ellesmere Island, in 1962,
1

Saxifraga, 2; aizoides, 74, 112, 117; Aizoon,
74, 126, 150, 152, 153; caespitosa, 74; cer-
nua, 74; foliosa, 74; nivalis, 74, 94; opposf-

280

The Canadian Field-Naturalist

Vol. 78

tifolia, 74; rhmlaris, 74; tenuis, 74; tricus-
pidata, 74, 140, 146

Sayornis phoebe, 91; say a, 14

Scaphiopus bonibifrons, 60

Scaup, Greater, 90

Schizachne purpurascens, 143

Scirpus, 179; atrovirens, 111; caespitosus, 72,
111; cyperinus, 45; fluviatilis, 153; tei-
sonianus, 111; rufus, 111; validus, 111

Scoter, Surf, 13; White -winged, 13

Sculpin, arctic, 174; arctic staghorn, 174;
arctic staghorn, 174; fourhorn, 174; mot-
tled, 175; shorthorn, 174; slimy, 175

Scutellaria galericulata, 114, 147

Sedum Rosea, 112

Selaginella rupestris, 142; selaginoides, 140,
142

Selasphorus rufus, 14, 213, 259

Senecio, 94; streptanthifoliiis, 147

Setaria viridis, 182, 184

Setophaga ruticilla, 16

Shacklette, Hansford T.

Flower variation of Epilobium angusti-
foliwn L. growing over uranium deposits,
32

Shanny, arctic, 177

Sharing of Joy, A, reviewed by F. R. Cook,
58

Shepherdia, 114; canadensis, 146

Shoveler, 13, 90

Shrew, masked, 78; short-tailed, 80, 103

Shrike, Northern, 15

Sialia currucoides, 202

Sibbaldia procwnbens, 75

Sieurus noveboracensis, 16

Silene acaulis, 73

Siskin, Pine, 16, 91

Sitona cylindricollis, 61, 184

Skate, thorny, 170

Smilacina stellata. 111, trifolia, 111

Smith, Winnifred

Common Egrets nesting near Amherst-
burg, Ontario, 59

Snipe, Common, 3, 14

Solidago, 45, 82, 102; hispida, 147;
macrophylla, 114

Solitaire, Townsend's Notes on, in western
Chilcotin district, B.C., by W. A. B. Paul,
203

Soniateria spectabilis, 2 ,90

Some interesting plant records from the
Chalk River district, Ontario, by T. C.
Brayshaw, 150

Some interesting plants in the Barron Cany-
on in Algonquin Park, by M. I. Moore,
125

Sora, 14

Sorbus scopulina, 142, 146

Sorex cinereus, 78; palustris palustris, 197
Spadefoot toad from Manitoba, by F. R.

Cook and D. R. M. Hatch, 60
Sparganium eurycarpuin, 153
Sparrow, fox, 16; Harris', 200, 269; Lark, 92;

Lincoln's, 200; Savannah, 16; Song, 200,

209, 252-257; White-crowned, 16, 269;

White-throated, 200
Sparrow, Harris', in Quebec, by J. K. Low-

ther, 200
Spatula clypeata, 13, 90
Sphagmim, 81
Spinus pinus, 16, 91
Spiraea, 45, 82; douglasii 65
Spirant hes Romanzoffiana, 112
Sporobolus vaginiflorus, 30
Spring and summer phenology at Baker Lake,

Keewatin, N.W.T., during 1959-62, by

C. J. Krebs, 25
Squirrel, red, 78

Starling, 15, 17, 125, 181, 202, 205
Steganoptis tricolor, 14
Stelgidopteryx ruficollis, 15
Stellaria calycantha, 112; ciliatosepala, 145;

crassifolia, 112; edwardsii, 145; humifusa,

73; longipes, 73, 112, 145; subvestita, 145
Stellula calliope, 14
Stercorarius longicaudus, 3
Sterna hirundo, 62, paradisaea, 4
Stichaeus punctatus, 111
Stickleback, ninespine, 177; threespine, 177
Stinson, Robert H.

Vole populations in southwestern

Ontario, 98
Stonecat, Noturus flavtis newly recorded in

Alberta, by J. R. Nursall and V. Lewin,

128
Stumus vulgaris, 15, 17, 181, 202, 205
Sucker, longnose, 172
Surnia ulula, 205
Swallow, Bank, 15; Barn, 248; Cliff, 15, 205;

Rough- winged, 15; Tree, 15, 205; Violet-
green, 15
Symphoricarpos alba, 212; occidentalis, 180
Synaptmnys cooperi cooperi, 199
Synthliboramphiis antiquus, 199

Tachycineta thalassina, 15

Ta?mas striatus griseus, 198

Tamiasciurus hudsonicus, 78; h. hudsonicus,
198

Taraxacum lacerum, 16; lapponicum, 16

Teal, Blue-winged, 13; Cinnamon, 13, Green-
winged, 13, 80

Tern, Arctic, 4; Black, 14; Caspian, 62, 91;
Common, 62

1964

Index to Volume 77

281

Territoriality among wintering Snowy Owls,

by Lloyd B. Keith, 17
Tetrao nmtus, 162; mpestris, 162
Thalictrmn alpimim, 112, 117; cornuti, 112;

dioiczmi, 108, 112, 116; venuloswu, 150,

153
Thelypteris noveboracensis, 110, 117
Three new bird records for Prince Edward

Island, by W. J. Mills, 62
Thrush, Gray-cheeked, 200, 269; Hermit, 15;

Swainson's, 15, 200
Thuja occidentalism 98; plicata, 65
Toad, American, 157; Canadian, 263
Tofieldia, 116; glutinosa, 111, 144; piisilla, 73
Tortella tormosa, 148
Tortilla ruralis, 148
Totaniis melanoleuciis, 90
Towhee, Rufous-sided, 92
Triademmi virginicum, 113
Trifoliimi agrarium, 113; procwfibens, 118
Triglochin maritima, 110; palustris, 110
Trilliujn cernuwn, 111; recurvatinn. 111
Trionyx spinifer spinifer, 63
Trisetum spicatum, 71, 110
Troglodytes troglodytes, 15
Tsuga canadensis, 81; heterophylla, 65
Turnstone, Ruddy, 1, 3, 5, 6
Turtle, eastern spiny soft-shelled, 63
Two helpful uses of "Terylene" for biolo-
gists, by A. Ranvanyi, 268
Two interior B.C. records for the Ancient

Murrelet, by W. B. Johnstone, 199
Typha angustifolia, 45; latifolia, 143, 179
Tyr annus verticalis, 91

Uhnus ofiiericana, 59
Ujnbilicaria hyperborea, 148, 149
Uria aalge, 242; lomvia, 242
Urtica iirens, 112

Vacciniuni, 45, 82; angustifolium, 113; macro-

carpon, 82; myrtilloides, 143, 146; Oxyco-

ccos, 113; uliginosum, 33, 75, 113; Vitis-

idaea, 75, 82, 113
Vallisneria spiralis, 108, 117
Vass, Stanley E.

A breeding record for the Bobolink in

Prince Edward Island, 60

Changing status of the Cowbird in Prince

Edward Island, 125
Veery, 15

Vermivora celata, 15
Veronica alpina, 75
Viburmmt, 81; acerifolium, 108, 114, 116,

117; cassi?2oides, 81, 108, 114, 117; edtile,

114, 117; Lentago, 108, 117; opulus, 114;

pauciflorum, 114, 117

Vicia Cracca, 113

Viola pri?milijolia, 126

Vireo, Philadelphia, 15, 91; Red-eyed, 15;
Warbling, 15, 91

Vireo gilviis, 15, 91; olivaceus, 15; pbiladel-
phiciis, 15, 91

Vise aria alpina, 73

Vole, meadow, 78, 80-88; red-backed, 78,
80-88

Vole populations in southwestern Ontario,
by R. H. Stinson, 98

Voles, two. Local distribution of, evidence
for interspecific interaction bv G. C.
Clough, 80

Vos, Antoon de, and A. E. Allin

Winter mortality among Red-necked
Grebes (Coly/nbiis grisegena) in On-
tario, 67 z

Vulture, Turkey, 205

Wade, Douglas E.

Letter to the Editor, 130

Warbler, Audubon's, 16; Macgillivray's, 16;
Magnolia, 16; Orange-crowned, 15;
Townsend's 16; Wilson's, 16; Yellow, 16

Waterthrush, Northern, 16

Waxwing, Bohemian, 91

Weevil, sweet clover, 61

Weevil in the ear of child at London, On-
tario, by W. W. Judd, 61

Weresub, Luella K.

Review of: Investigations in the Natural
History of the Soviet Far East, 124

Where is that Vanished Bird?, reviewed by
W. E. Godfrey, 193

Whitefish, lake, 172; round, 172

Wildlife's Ten- Year Cycle, reviewed by A.
H. Macpherson, 55

Willet, 62

Wilsonia pusilla, 16

Winter mortality among Red-necked Grebes
{Colymbus grisegena) in Ontario, by A.
de Vos and A. E. Allin, 67

Wolf, 5, 6

Wood, Albert Andrew, 1885-1963, by H. B.
Wressell, 207

Woodsia alpiiia, 110; cathcartiana, 126; gla-
bella, 71, 143; ilvensis, 71. 110, 126

Woodpecker, Ivory-billed, 194

Wren, Short-billed Marsh, 45; Winter, 15

Wressell, H. B.

Albert Andrew Wood, 1885-1963, 207

Xanthocephalus xa?itbocephalns, 16, 180
Xantboria candelaria, 149

282 The Canadian Field-Naturalist Vol. 78

Yellowlegs, Greater, 63, 90; Lesser, 63 Zapus hiidsonius, 78; h. hudsonius, 199

Yellowtbroat, 16, 45 Zenaidtira macroiira, 14

Youngman, Phillip M. Zonotrichia leucophrys, 16; querula, 200

Review of: Principles in Mammalogy, 57 Zoster a marina, 108, 117

A Note on the Production of this Journal

The Canadian Field-Naturalist conforms to recommendations on the lay-out of period-
icals issued by the International Organization for Standardization. It is set by linotype
in Janson. The title is Kennerley. Boldface headings are Bodoni. Coverstock is 'Mayfair'
by Howard Smith and text paper is Provincial Paper 'Thriftcoat'. The journal is printed
by The Runge Press Limited, 124 Queen Street, Ottawa, Ontario.

The Publications Committee acknowledges with thanks the contribution of the Con-
servation Council of Ontario toward the publication of this volume.

AFFHJATED

Edmonton Bird Qiib

President, H. J. Montgoimery; Vice-President,
Dr. V. E. Lewin; Secretary -Treasurer, Dr. W. G.
Evans, Department of Entomology, University of
Alberta, Edmonton, Alta.; Field Secretary, Dr.
R. W. Turner; Librarian, D. A. Boag; Audubon
Representative, B. Sparks.

Mcllwraith Ornithological Onb

Natural History Society of Manitoba

President, Miss J. M. Walker; Honorary Pre-
sident, A. H. Shortt; Honorary Vice-President, E.
Gilbert; Past President, G. S. Cotter; Vice-Presi-
dents, Dr. L. B. Smith, H. V. Hosford; Treasurer,
W. D. Kyle; Assistant Treasurer, T. L Smith;
General Secretary, Mrs. H. V. Hosford, 4116 Rob-
lin Blvd., Charleswood 20, Manitoba; Executive
Secretary, Mrs. G. Keith; Mailing Secretary, Miss

L. M. LOVELL.

Nova Scotia Bird Society

President, Dr. L. B. Macpherson; Vice-President,
Mrs. Victor Cardoza; Secretary -Treasurer, Miss
Sylvia J. Fuixerton, 1051 Lucknow St., Halifax,
N.S.; Editor, Mrs. J. W. Dobson.

SOCIETIES

Provancher Society of Natnral History
of Canada

President, Ronald E. Blair; First Vice-President,
Benoit Pelletier. Second Vice-President, James P.
Coristine; Secretary -Treasurer, Georges A. L»-
CLERc, 628 Eraser St., Quebec, Que.

Province of Quebec Society for the
Protection of Birds

President, Mrs. G. H. Montgomery; Vice-Presi-
dents, Miss R. B. Blanchard, A. R. Lepingwell;
Treasurer, Miss G. E. Hibbard; Secretary, Miss R.
S. Abbott, 164 Senneville Road, Senneville, P.Q.

Toronto Field Naturalists' Qub

President, Dr. D. Hoeniger; Vice-President,
R. F. Norivian; Secretary -Treasurer, Mrs. H. Rob-
soN, 49 Craighurst Ave., Toronto 12, Ont.; As-
sistant Secretary, Miss Ruth Marshall; Junior
T^JSr.C, R. J. MacLellan, 416 St. Qements Ave.,
Toronto 12, Ont.

Vancouver Natural History Society

Honorary President, Dr. M. Y. Williams; Past
President, Dr. R. Stace-Smith; President Dr. J. E.
Armstrong; Vice-President, N. F. Pxjllen; Corres-
ponding Secretary, Mrs. D. J. Martin, 2038 Mac-
donald St., Vancouver, B.C.; Treasurer, Mrs. E. N.
Copping; Programme Secretaries, Miss R. Ross,
Mrs. H. Pinder-Moss; Editor of Bulletin, C. B. W.
Rogers; Recording Secretary, Miss K. Melroy.

ADVICE TO CONTRIBUTORS

Authors are asked to share the cost of publication by paying for each
page of an article that is in excess of the limit of twelve journal pages,
the cost of illustrations and of setting small-sized ^e and tables.

Manuscripts

The Style Manual for Biological Journals is
recommended, in general, as a guide for authors.

Manuscripts should be typewritten on one side
of nontransparent paper measuring 8i by 11 inches.
Authors are requested to use at least one given
name. All text matter, including quotations, foot-
notes, tables, literature references, and legends for
figures should be double-spaced. Only those words
meant to appear in italics should be vinderlined.
Every sheet of the manuscript should be number-
ed.

Webster's Neiv International Dictionary is the
authority for spelling. However, in a case of
diflFerence in the spelling of a common name, and
in the use of a variant name, a decision of a
learned society is preferred.

References are made by the author-date system.
They should be listed alphabetically and typed at
the end of the main body of text. All tides of
fjeriodicals in reference matter should be written
in full, not abbreviated.

Notes should bear the name of one author only
and references in notes should be incorporated
directly in the text.

Illustrations

Line drawings should be made with India ink
on white drawing paper, blue tracing linen, or
blue-lined co-ordinate paper. Co-orcfinate lines
that are to appear in the reproduction should be
ruled in black ink. Descriptive matter should be
lettered, not typewritten, and all parts of the
drawing should permit easy legibility even if a
reduction is made.

Photographs should have a glossy finish and
show sharp contrasts. For reproduction as a com-
plete plate they should be mounted viithout space
between prints.

For large drawings and moimted photographs
the ratio of height to width should conform to
that of the journal page (4| by 7i inches) but the
height should be adjusted to allow for the legend.

Reprints

Reprints, with or without covers may be bought.
The cost is given on the reprint order form which
is attached to the galley proofs.

.^P-liSJ I^A^R LIBRARY

3 2044 114 198 120

Date Due

MAY 8 1968
MAY 2 2 1968